New Proposed MBA Syllabus

University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
1
MBA SYLLABUS: SEMESTER I
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
2
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 101 Type Core
Course Title Accounting For Business Decisions
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic concepts of financial accounting, cost accounting and management
accounting
2 To know various tools from accounting and cost accounting which would facilitate the decision
making
3 To develop analytical abilities to face the business situations
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Basic Concepts: Overview of Financial Accounting, Cost Accounting and
Management Accounting, Role of each in a business organization, Relationship
between financial, cost and management accounting, Various concepts and
conventions of financial accounting, Basics of cost accounting, Role of
management accounting in the global business environment.
7+2
2 Understanding of Financial Statements: Financial statements of proprietary
and partnership organizations, Financial statements of limited companies,
schedule VIth of Companies Act, Objectives of financial statements.
6+2
3 Cost Accounting: Basic concepts of Cost Accounting, Classification and
analysis of Costs, Relevant and irrelevant costs, differential costs, sunk costs,
objectives of Cost Accounting, preparation of Cost Sheets.
6+2
4 Cost Control: Elements of costs, Material cost control, Procurement, Pricing of
issues, Inventory control techniques, fixation of various levels , Economic
Order Quantity, material losses , labour cost control , time keeping and time
booking , labour turnover , overheads , collection, classification, absorption of
overheads.
8+2
5 Decision making tools: Marginal costing, Make or buy , Optimizing product
mix , Break-even point , Cost Volume Profit Analysis, Pricing decisions,
budgeting – Cash, flexible and functional budgets.
8+2
Note:
1 Numerical Problems will be asked on the following topics:
1. Pricing of issues – FIFO, LIFO, Simple Average and Weighted Average methods
2. Fixation of maximum, minimum, re-order and average levels
3. Computation of Economic Order Quantity
4. Decision making tools – optimizing product mix, make or buy, acceptance of export order
and other decision making areas.
5. Computation of breakeven point and related areas.
6. Budgeting – cash and flexible.
2 Weightage of Theory Questions will be 40% and numerical problems will carry 60% marks in the
final question paper.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
3
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Management Accounting – Dr. Mahesh Kulkarni
2 Reference Books 1. Financial Accounting for Managers – Mr. Sanjay Dhmija, Pearson
Publications
2. Management Accounting – Mr. Anthony Atkinson, Robert Kaplan,
Pearson
3. Management Accounting – Mr. Khan and Mr. Jain, Tata Mc graw hill
4. Financial Accounting part I – Mr. S. N. Maheshwari
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Management Accounting - Mr. Ravi Kishore
4 Websites 1. Institute of Cost Accountants, Institute of Chartered Accountants
5 Journals 1. Indian Journal of Finance
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
4
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
5
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 102 Type Core
Course Title Economic Analysis for Business Decisions
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To equip the students of management with time tested tools and techniques of managerial
economics to enable them to appreciate its relevance in decision making.
2 To explore the economics of information and network industries and to equip students with an
understanding of how economics affect the business strategy of companies in these industries.
3 To develop economic way of thinking in dealing with practical business problems and challenges.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Basic Concepts of Economics: Introduction to Economics , Basic Economic
Problem, Circular Flow of Economic Activity , Nature of the firm - rationale,
objective of maximizing firm value as present value of all future profits,
maximizing, satisficing, optimizing, principal agent problem, Accounting Profit
and Economic Profit , Role of profit in Market System , Adam Smith and
Invisible Hand.
7 + 2
2 Demand and Supply: Market Equilibrium – Pricing under perfect competition,
monopolistic competition, Case study on pricing under monopolistic
competition , Oligopoly - product differentiation and price discrimination;
price- output decision in multi-plant and multi-product firms.
Demand Analysis and Forecasting: Determinants of Market Demand at Firm
and Industry level – Elasticity of Demand - Market Demand Equation – Use
of Multiple Regression for estimating demand – Case study on estimating
industry demand (formulating equation and solving with the aid of software
expected)
7 + 2
3 Cost Concepts: Cost Concept, Opportunity Cost, Marginal, Incremental and
Sunk Costs, Cost Volume Profit Analysis, Breakeven Point , Case Study on
marginal costs.
Risk Analysis and Decision Making: Concept of risk, Expected value
computation, Risk management through Insurance, diversification, Hedging ,
Decision Tree Analysis , Case Study on Decision tree Technique.
7 + 2
4 Money and Capital Markets in India: Role and Functions of Money Markets,
Composition of Money Market, Money Market Instruments , Reserve Bank of
India – Functions , Regulatory Role of RBI w.r.t. Currency, Credit and Balance
of Payment, Open Market Operations
Role and Functions of Capital Markets, Composition of Capital market , Stock
Exchanges in India , Role of SEBI , understanding of stock market quotations in
financial press expected.
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
6
5 Public Finance Infrastructure: Familiarity with important terms/agencies/
approaches/practices related to National Income (such as GDP, PPP, Growth
Rate), Foreign Trade (such as GATT, WTO) and union budget (such as Revenue
Account, Capital Account, Revenue Deficit, Fiscal Deficit, Plan and Non-plan
expenditure) is expected.
Understanding of Summarized budget for the current financial year is required
(knowledge of detailed budget provisions not required).
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Managerial Economics by Peterson, Lewis, Sudhir Jain, Pearson,
Prentice Hall
2. Indian Economy by Datt & Sundaram, 61st Edition, S Chand
3. Managerial Economics by D. Salvatore, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
4. Managerial Economics by Pearson and Lewis, Prentice Hall, New Delhi
5. Managerial Economics by G.S. Gupta, T M H, New Delhi.
6. Managerial Economics by Mote, Paul and Gupta, T M H, New Delhi.
2 Reference Books 1. Managerial Economics by Homas and Maurice, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 8th
Edition
2. Indian Economy by Mishra and Puri, 24th Edition, Himalaya
Publishing House
3. Managerial Economics by Analysis, Problems and Cases, P.L. Mehta,
Sultan Chand Sons, New Delhi.
4. Managerial Economics by Varshney and Maheshwari, Sultan Chand
and Sons, New Delhi.
5. Managerial Economics by Joel Dean, Prentice Hall, USA.
6. Managerial Economics by H L Ahuja, S Chand & Co. New Delhi.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Economic Times Daily
2. Business Standard Daily
3. Business Today
4. Business India
5. Latest Monetary Policy
6. Latest Fiscal Policy
4 Websites 2. www.rbi.org.in/home.aspx
3. www.macroscan.org
4. www.finmin.nic.in
5. www.indiabudget.nic.in
5 Journals 2. Economic and Political Weekly
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
7
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 103 Type Core
Course Title Legal Aspects of Business
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To acquaint students with general business law issues to help become more informed, sensitive
and effective business leaders.
2 To provide the students with an understanding of fundamental legal issues pertaining to the
business world to enhance their ability to manage businesses effectively.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 The Indian Contract Act 1871
1.1 Essential elements of valid contract
1.2 Performance an discharge of contract
1.3 Breach of contract - meaning and remedies
1.4 Contracts of indemnity - meaning, nature-right of indemnity holder and
indemnifier
1.5 Contract of guarantee – meaning, nature and features – types of
guarantee – provisions relating to various types of guarantee.
1.6 Surety and co-surety – rights and liabilities – discharge of surety
1.7 Agency – agent and principal, creation of agency – classification of agents
– relationship between principal and agent – agent’s authority –
revocation and renunciation – rights duties and liabilities of agents and
principal –termination of agency.
7 + 2
2 Sale of Goods Act 1930
2.1 Contract of sale of goods – meaning –essentials of contract of sale –
formalities of contract of sale
2.2 Conditions and warranties
2.3 Transfer of property or ownership
2.4 Performance of contract of sale
2.5 Rights of unpaid seller – rules as to delivery of goods
7 + 2
3 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881
3.1 Negotiable Instruments – meaning – characteristics – types – parties –
holder and holder in due course
3.2 Negotiation and types of endorsements
3.3 Dishonour of negotiable instruments - noting and protesting
3.4 Liability of parties on Negotiable Instruments
7 + 2
4 Companies Act 1956
4.1 Company – definition – meaning – features and types of companies.
4.2 Incorporation of a company – memorandum of association, articles of
association and prospectus
4.3 Share Capital- types of share capital – increase/decrease of share capital –
buy-back of shares.
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
8
5 Other Laws:
5.1 Consumer Protection Act 1986 – definitions of consumer, consumer
dispute- complaint – goods –service – unfair trade practice – consumer
dispute redressal agencies
5.2 Information Technology Act – Digital Signature – Electronic Governance
5.3 Intellectual Property Laws – Understanding of concepts of patents,
copyrights, trademarks and designs
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Elements of Mercantile Law by N.D. Kapoor, Sultan Chand, 32nd
Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Legal Aspects of Business, Akhileshwar Pathak, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th
Edition
2. Business Law, S. S. Gulshan, Excel Books, 4th Edition.
3. Business Law for Management, K. R. Bulchandani, Himalaya
Publications, revised 6th Edition.
4. Bare Acts
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Corporate Law Advisor
2. LawZ
3. Legal News & views
4 Websites 1. www.vakilno1.com
2. www.indiankanoon.org
3. www.sebi.gov.in/
4. www.companylawonline.com
5. www.claonline.in
5 Journals 1. Management & Labour studies
2. International Labour Review.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
9
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 104 Type Core
Course Title Business Research Methods
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the concept and process of business research in business environment.
2 To know the use of tools and techniques for exploratory, conclusive and causal research.
3 To understand the concept of measurement in empirical systems.
4 To use statistical techniques for analysis of research data.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1. Foundations of Research:
1.1 Research: – Definition, Why study Business Research? What is good
research? Decision Support, Business Intelligence, Research applications in
functional areas of Business, Emerging trends in Business research.
1.2 Research & the Scientific Method: Characteristics of scientific method.
1.3 Steps in Research Process
1.4 Concept of Scientific Enquiry: - Formulation of Research Problem –
Management Question – Research Question – Investigation Question
1.5 Research Proposal: – Elements of a Research Proposal, Drafting a Research
Proposal, Evaluating a research proposal (Students are expected to draft and
evaluate a real life research proposal)
5 + 1
2 2. Research Design:
2.1 Concept Features of a good research design
2.2 Qualitative research and Quantitative research approaches, Comparison -
Pros and Cons of both approaches.
2.3 Exploratory Research Design: Concept, Types: Qualitative techniques -
Projective Techniques, Depth Interview, Experience Survey, Focus Groups,
Observation.
2.4 Descriptive Research Designs: Concept, types and uses. Concept of Crosssectional
and Longitudinal Research
2.5 Experimental Design: Concept of Cause, Causal relationships, Concept of
Independent & Dependent variables, concomitant variable, extraneous
variable, Treatment, Control group. (Elementary conceptual treatment
expected)
2.6 Hypothesis: Qualities of a good Hypothesis –Framing Null Hypothesis &
Alternative Hypothesis. Concept of Hypothesis Testing - Logic & Importance
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
10
3 3. Measurement & Data:
3.1 Concept of Measurement: what is measured? Problems in measurement in
management research - Validity and Reliability. Levels of measurement -
Nominal, Ordinal, Interval, Ratio.
3.2 Attitude Scaling Techniques: Concept of Scale – Rating Scales viz. Likert
Scales, Semantic Differential Scales, Constant Sum Scales, Graphic Rating Scales
– Ranking Scales – Paired Comparison & Forced Ranking - Concept and
Application.
3.3 Types of Data - Secondary Data: Definition, Sources, Characteristics,
Searching world wide web for data, Issues to be considered for secondary data,
sufficiency, adequacy, reliability, consistency.
3.4 Types of Data - Primary Data: Definition, Advantages and disadvantages
over secondary data,
3.5 Questionnaire Method: Questionnaire Construction - Personal Interviews,
Telephonic survey Interviewing, Email/Internet survey, online survey sites,
their utility, constraints
7 + 3
4 4. Sampling:
4.1 Basic Concepts: Defining the Universe, Concepts of Statistical Population,
Sample, Characteristics of a good sample. Sampling Frame (practical approach
for determining the sample frame expected), Sampling errors, Non Sampling
errors, Methods to reduce the errors, Sample Size constraints, Non Response.
4.2 Probability Sample: Simple Random Sample, Systematic Sample, Stratified
Random Sample, Area Sampling & Cluster Sampling.
4.3 Non Probability Sample: Judgment Sampling, Convenience Sampling,
Purposive Sampling, Quota Sampling & Snowballing Sampling methods.
Determining size of the sample - Practical considerations in sampling and
sample size, (sample size determination formulae and numerical not expected)
6 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
11
5 5. Data Analysis & Report Writing:
5.1 Data Analysis : Editing, Coding, Univariate analysis - Tabular
representation of data, frequency tables, Construction of frequency
distributions and their analysis in the form of measures of central tendency –
Mean, Median and Mode; their relative merits and demerits,
5.2 Graphical Representation of Data: Appropriate Usage of Bar charts, Pie
charts, Histogram, Leaf and stem, Candle stick, Box plots. (Use of Ms Excel)
5.3 Bivariate Analysis: Cross tabulations, Use of percentages, Bivariate
Correlation Analysis - meaning & types of correlation, Karl Person’s coefficient
of correlation and spearman’s rank correlation; Scatter plots, Chi-square test
including testing hypothesis of association, association of attributes. (Formulae
and calculation are not expected. Interpretation of the given data and scenario
analysis is expected for appropriate managerial decision inferences to be
drawn.)
5.4 Linear Regression Analysis: Meaning and two lines of regression;
relationship between correlation and regression co-efficient (Formulae and
calculation are not expected. Interpretation of the given data and scenario
analysis is expected for appropriate managerial decision inferences to be
drawn.)
5.5 Test of Significance: Small sample tests: t (Mean, proportion) and F tests, Z
test, Non‐parametric tests: Binomial test of proportion, Randomness test;
Analysis of Variance: One way and two‐way Classifications (Formulae and
calculation are not expected. Interpretation of the given data and scenario
analysis is expected for appropriate managerial decision inferences to be
drawn.)
5.6 Research Reports: Structure of Research report, Report writing and
Presentation.
Note: Extensive use of MS Excel is expected in learning unit no. 5
10 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Business Research Methods by Donald Cooper & Pamela Schindler,
TMGH, 9th Edition.
2. Business Research Methods by Alan Bryman & Emma Bell, Oxford
University Press, 2nd Edition
3. Research Methodology by C.R. Kothari, New Age International
Publication, 2nd Edition
4. Research Methods for Social Work byAllen Rubin, Earl R. Babbie,
Cengage, 7th Edition
5. Research Methods in Business Studies: A Practical Guide by Pervez
Ghauri, Dr Kjell Gronhaug, FT Prentice Hall
2
Reference Books 1. The Practice of Social Research by Earl R. Babbie, Wadsworth, 13th
Edition
2. Business Research Methods by William G. Zikmund, Barry J. Babin, Jon
C. Carr, Mitch Griffin, Cengage Learning, 8th Edition
3. Approaches to social research by Royce Singleton, Bruce C. Straits,
Margaret Miller Straits, Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition
4. Handbook of Research Design and Social Measurement by Delbert
Charles Miller, Neil J. Salkind, Sage Publication, 6th Edition
5. Research Methods: The Basics by Nicholas S. R. Walliman, Nicholas
Walliman, Routledge, 1st Edition
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
12
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Business Research Methods by Naval Bajpai, Pearson, 1st Edition
4 Websites 1. http://www.socialresearchmethods.net
2. http://www.oup.com/uk/orc/bin/9780199202959
5 Journals 1. The Nature, Social Organization and Promotion of Management
Research: Towards Policy by David Tranfield and Ken Starkey, British
Journal of Management, Vol. 9, 341–353 (1998)
2. The Case for Qualitative Research by Gareth Morgan & Linda Smircich,
Academy of Management Review 1980, Vol. 5, No. 4, 491-500
3. Beyond the Qualitative Interview: Data Preparation and Transcription
by Eleanor Mclellan, Kathleen M. Macqueen & Judith L. Neidig, Field
Methods, Vol. 15, No. 1, February 2003, 63–84
4. The Coming of Age for Qualitative Research: Embracing the Diversity
of Qualitative Methods by Bansal, Pratima (Tima); Corley, Kevin.
Academy of Management Journal. Apr2011, Vol. 54 Issue 2, p233-237
5. Social Science Research Methods in Internet Time by Karpf, David.
Information, Communication & Society. Jun2012, Vol. 15 Issue 5, p639-
661
6. A Review of Research Methods in Online and Blended Business
Education: 2000-2009 by Arbaugh, J. B.; Hwang, Alvin; Pollack, Birgit
Leisen., Academy of Management Annual Meeting Proceedings. 2010, p
1-6
7. Research Methods in Economics and Business by Roberts, Harry V.
Journal of Marketing Research Aug1964, Vol. 1 Issue 3, p88-90
8. Counterfactuals and Hypothesis Testing in Political Science Author(s):
James D. Fearon, The Johns Hopkins University Press Vol. 43, No. 2
(Jan., 1991), pp. 169-195
9. Statistical Sampling Techniques and Marketing Research by Cassady Jr.,
Ralph. Journal of Marketing. Apr 1945, Vol. 9 Issue 4, p317-341
10. A Study of Selected Opinion Measurement Techniques by Kassarjian,
Harold H.; Nakanishi, Masao. Journal of Marketing Research, May67,
Vol. 4 Issue 2, p148-153
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
13
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 105 Type Core
Course Title Organizational Behaviour
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 000 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To develop an understanding of the behavior of individuals and groups inside organizations
2 To enhance skills in understanding and appreciating individuals, interpersonal, and group process
for increased effectiveness both within and outside of organizations.
3 To develop theoretical and practical insights and problem-solving capabilities for effectively
managing the organizational processes.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Fundamentals of OB
1.1 Understanding OB: Definition, scope and importance of OB, Relationship
between OB and the individual, Evolution of OB, Theoretical framework
(cognitive, behavioristic and social cognitive), Limitations of OB.
1.2 Dynamics of People and OB: Disciplines that contribute to the field of OB
(psychology, social psychology, sociology, anthropology), Relationship
with the function in an organization, Behavioral approach to management.
1.3 Models of OB: How to develop models of OB (understanding dependent
and independent variables), Decision-making model, Robin’s OB model,
Feudal, Autocratic, Supportive, Collegial and Custodian models, Human
value model and contingency model.
1.4 OB and organizational performance: Meaning and importance, Setting
goals for organizational performance, Role of people in organizational
performance.
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
14
2 Individual Process And Behavior:
2.1 Ability: Meaning and significance of matching right abilities to the right job,
Intellectual and physical abilities and the effects of disabilities
2.2 Learning: Definition of learning and significance of continuous learning in
an organization, Theories of learning, Action learning, Learning from
individuals and learning from the environment
2.3 Attitude: Importance of attitude in an organization, Right Attitude,
Components of attitude, Relationship between behavior and attitude,
Developing Emotional intelligence at the workplace, Job attitude, Barriers to
changing attitudes
2.4 Personality and values: Definition and importance of Personality for
performance, The Myers-Briggs Type Indicator and The Big Five personality
model, Significant personality traits suitable to the workplace (personality &
job – fit theory), Personality Tests and their practical applications.
2.5 Perception: Meaning and concept of perception, Factors influencing
perception, Selective perception, Attribution theory, Perceptual process, Social
perception (stereotyping and halo effect).
2.6 Motivation: Definition & Concept of Motive & Motivation, The Content
Theories of Motivation (Maslow’s Need Hierarchy & Herzberg’s Two Factor
model Theory), The Process Theories (Vroom’s expectancy Theory & Porter
Lawler model), Contemporary Theories- Equity Theory of Work Motivation
8 + 2
3 Interpersonal Processes And Behavior, Team And Leadership Development
3.1 Foundations of Group Behavior: The Meaning of Group & Group behavior
& Group Dynamics, Types of Groups, The Five -Stage Model of Group
Development
3.2 Managing Teams: Why Work Teams, Work Teams in Organization,
Developing Work Teams, Team Effectiveness & Team Building
3.3 Managing Conflict: Meaning of Conflict, Types of Conflicts (Intergroup
Conflict, Intra-Individual Conflict and Interpersonal Conflict), Johari Window,
Overcoming Conflict.
3.4 Leadership: Concept of Leadership, Styles of Leadership, Trait Approach,
Contingency Leadership Approach, Contemporary leadership, Meaning and
significance of contemporary leadership, Concept of transformational
leadership, Contemporary issues in leadership, Contemporary theories of
leadership, Success stories of today’s Global and Indian leaders.
8 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
15
4 Organization System:
4.1 Foundations of Organization Structure: Concept of Organization &
Organizational Structure, Basic elements in designing OS.
4.2 Organizational Culture: Meaning & Definition of Organizational Culture,
Creating & Sustaining Organizational Culture, Types of Culture (Strong vs.
Weak Culture, Soft vs. Hard Culture & formal vs. Informal Culture) , Creating
Positive Organizational Culture, Concept of Workplace Spirituality.
5 + 2
5 Managing Change :
5.1 Organizational Change: Meaning, definition & Nature of Organizational
Change, Types of Organizational change, Forces that acts as stimulants to
change.
5.2 Implementing Organizational Change: How to overcome the Resistance to
Change, Approaches to managing Organizational Change, Kurt Lewin’s -
Three step model, Seven Stage model of Change & Kotter’s Eight-Step plan for
Implementing Change, Leading the Change Process, Facilitating Change,
Dealing with Individual & Group Resistance, Intervention Strategies for
Facilitating Organizational Change, Methods of Implementing Organizational
Change, Developing a Learning Organization.
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Organizational Behaviour by Robins
2. Organizational Behaviour by Nelson & Quick
3. Organizational Behaviour by Fred Luthans
4. Organizational Behaviour by Stephen Robins, Timothy Judge, Neharika
Vohra
5. Organizational Behaviour by M N Mishra
6. Organizational Behaviour by K Ashwathappa
2 Reference Books 1. Understanding OB by Uday Pareek
2. Change & Knowledge Management by Janakiram, Ravindra and
Shubha Murlidhar
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Contemporary Leadership Theories: Enhancing the Understanding of
the complexity, subjectivity and dynamic of leadership by Ingo Winkler
2. Organizational Performance in a Nutshell by Daniel M. Wentland
4 Websites 1. http://papers.ssrn.com
2. http://www.nwlink.com/~donclark/leader/leadob.html
5 Journals 1. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision processes
2. Journal of Organizational Behavior
3. Journal of Human Values
4. International Studies of Management & Organization
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
16
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 106 Type Core
Course Title Basics of Marketing
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 000 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To introduce marketing as a business function and a philosophy
2 To emphasize importance of understanding external environment in marketing decision making
3 To expose students to a systematic frame work of marketing &implementations and to highlight
need for different marketing approaches for services, goods, and for household consumers,
organizational buyers.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Marketing
1.1 Definition & Functions of Marketing: Scope of Marketing, Core concepts
of marketing such as Need, Want, Demand, Customer Value, Exchange,
Customer & Consumer, Customer Satisfaction, Customer Delight, Customer
Loyalty, Marketing v/s Market
1.2 Markets: Definition of Market, Competition, Key customer markets,
Marketplaces, Market spaces, Metamarkets
1.3 Company Orientation towards Market Place: Product, Production, Sales,
Marketing, Societal, Transactional, Relational, Holistic Marketing Orientation.
Selling versus Marketing. Concept of Marketing Myopia.
1.4 Introduction to the Concept of Marketing Mix: Origin & Concept of
Marketing Mix and Definitions of 7Ps.People, Processes & Physical Evidence
1.5 New Marketing Realities: Major Societal Forces, New Consumer
Capabilities & New Company Capabilities.
10 + 2
2 Consumer Behavior:
2.1 Meaning & importance of consumer behavior, Comparison between
Organizational Buying behavior and consumer buying behavior, Buying roles,
2.2 Five steps buyer decision process
6 + 2
3 Marketing Environment:
3.1 Concept of Environment: Macro and Micro, Need for analyzing the
Marketing Environment
3.2 Macro Environment: Analyzing the Economic, Socio-cultural,
Demographic, Political – Legal - Regulatory, Technical, Environmental
environments.
3.3 Linkage of Marketing Function with all functions in the organization.
3.4 Concept of Market Potential & Market Share
6 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
17
4 Segmentation, Target Marketing & Positioning:
4.1 Marketing as Value Delivery Process: Traditional & modern approaches
4.2 Segmentation: Definition, Need for segmentation, Benefits of segmentation
to marketers, Bases for market segmentation of consumer goods & industrial
goods, Criteria for effective segmentation.
4.3 Levels of Market Segmentation: Segment Marketing, Niche Marketing,
Local Marketing, Mass Marketing.
4.4 Target Market : Concept of Target Market and criteria for selection of target
market
4.5 Positioning: Concept of Differentiation &Positioning, Introduction to the
concepts of Value Proposition & USP.
8 + 2
5 Product – The First Element of Marketing Mix:
5.1 Product :Meaning of product, Goods & Services Continuum, Classification
of consumer products – Convenience, Shopping, Specialty, Unsought,
classification of industrial products – material & parts, capital items, supplies &
services
5.2 Product Levels: The customer value hierarchy
5.3 Product Mix: Width, Depth, Consistency & Product line.
5 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Marketing Management - Philip Kotler, Kevin Lane Keller, Abraham
Koshy, Mithileshwar Jha, Pearson , 13th Edition
2. Marketing Management, Rajan Saxena, TMGH, 4th Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Principles of Marketing – Philip Kotler, Gary Armstrong, Prafulla
Agnihotri, Ehasan Haque, Pearson, 13th Edition,
2. Marketing Management, Ramaswamy & Namakumari, Macmillan, 4th
Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Marketing Whitebook (Latest Edition)
2. Brand Equity Supplement of The Economic Times
3. Brand Wagon Supplement of The Financial Express
4. Strategist Supplement of Business Standard
4 Websites 1. NCAER - http://www.ncaer.org/
2. 2011 Census of India Reports - http://www.censusindia.gov.in/
3. http://www.marketingpower.com/Pages/default.aspx (American
Marketing Association)
5 Journals 1. IIMB Management Review
2. Vikalpa
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
18
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 107 Type Elective
Course Title Management Fundamentals
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To explain the various concepts of management
2 To make the students understand the contemporary management practices
3 To highlight professional challenges that managers faces in various organization
4 To enable the students to appreciate the emerging ideas and practices in the field of management.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Principles of Management:
1.1 Basic Concepts: Definition of Management, Contribution of F.W. Taylor,
Henri Fayol, Elton Mayo, Mary Parker Follet, Rensis Likert, Chestard Bernard,
Douglas McGregor, Peter Drucker, Michael Porter and C.K. Prahlad
1.2 Approaches to Management: Scientific Approach, System Approach and
Contingency Approach.
1.3 Managerial Competencies: Communication, team work, planning and
administrative, strategic and global competencies;
6 + 1
2 2.1 Organization: Formal and Informal, Line and staff relationship,
Centralization Vs. Decentralization, Basic issues in organizing, work
specialization, chain of common delegation, span of management, Organization
Structure - bases for departmentation.
2.2 Organizational Culture: Cultural Diversity, Multi Ethnic Workforce,
Organizing Knowledge resource.
6 + 1
3 3.1 Planning: Nature & elements of planning, planning types and models,
planning in learning organizations; Types, Steps, MBO, MBE, Planning
Premises.
3.2 Decision Making: Risk and Uncertainty, Decision Trees, Decision making
process, models of decision making, increasing participation in decisionmaking,
decision-making creativity.
5 + 1
4 4.1 Controlling: Process, Standards and Bench Marking - Co-ordination-
Principles of Co-ordination-Inter-dependence.
4 + 1
5 5.1 Challenges in Management: Change Management -Timing of Change-
Reaction to change-Planning organizational Change-Technological Change-
Effective use of Communication Devices and IT.
4 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
19
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Fundamentals of Management by Robbins, S.P. and Decenzo, D.A.,
Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi.
2. Management by Koontz and Wechrich, TMGH
3. Management by Stoner, et. al., Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
2 Reference Books 1. Management by Hellregel, Thomson Learning, Bombay
2. Management by Robbins & Coulter, Prentice Hall of Hall of India, New
Delhi.
3. Management - Text & Cases by Satya Raju, PHI, New Delhi.
4. Management by Richard L. Draft, Thomson South-Western
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Frontiers of Management by Peter Drucker, Harvard Business
Review Press.
2. The Definitive Drucker by Elizabeth Haas Edersheim, TMGH.
3. Technology, Management and Society by Peter Drucker, Haravard
Business Review Press.
4. The Drucker Lectures: Essential Lessons on Management, Society and
Economy Edited by Rick Wartzman, TMGH.
4 Websites 1. http://www.druckerinstitute.com/link/about-peter-drucker/
5 Journals 1. The Five Minds of a Manager by Gosling, Jonathan; Mintzberg, Henry.
Harvard Business Review, Nov2003, Vol. 81 Issue 11
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
20
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 108 Type Elective
Course Title Business Communication Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To acquaint the students with fundamentals of communication and help them to transform their
communication abilities.
2 To help them acquire some of the necessary skills to handle day-to-day managerial responsibilities,
such as - making speeches, controlling one-to-one communication, enriching group activities and
processes, giving effective presentations, writing letters, memos, minutes, reports and advertising,
and maintaining one’s poise in private and in public.
3 To build their confidence and to enhance competitiveness by projecting a positive image of
themselves and of their future.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Introduction to Managerial Communication: Principles of effective
communication, Target group profile, Barriers of Communication, Reading
Skills, Listening, Feedback.
1.2 Principles of Nonverbal Communication: Professional dressing and body
language. Role Playing, Debates and Quiz. Types of managerial speeches -
Presentations and Extempore - speech of introduction, speech of thanks,
occasional speech, theme speech.
1.3 Group communication: Meetings, group discussions.
1.4 Other Aspects of Communication: Cross Cultural Dimensions of Business
Communication Technology and Communication, Ethical & Legal Issues in
Business Communication.
3 + 7
2 Managerial Writing: Business letters, Routine letters, Bad news and persuasion
letters, sales letters, collection letters, Maintaining a Diary, Resume/CV , job
application letters, proposals. Internal communication through - notices,
circulars, memos, agenda and minutes, reports. Case Studies. Exercises on
Corporate Writing, Executive Summary of Documents, Creative Writing, Poster
Making, Framing Advertisements, Slogans, Captions, Preparing Press Release
and Press Notes
2 + 5
3 Effective Presentations: Principles of Effective Presentations, Principles
governing the use of audiovisual media.
1 + 1
4 Interview Skills: Mastering the art of giving interviews in - selection or
placement interviews, discipline interviews, appraisal interviews, exit
interviews, web /video conferencing, tele-meeting.
2 + 3
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
21
5 Report Writing: Objectives of report, types of report, Report Planning, Types of
Reports, Developing an outline, Nature of Headings, Ordering of Points,
Logical Sequencing, Graphs, Charts, Executive Summary, List of Illustration,
Report Writing.
2 + 4
Note:
1. The emphasis of the entire subject should be on practical aspects.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Essentials of Business Communication by Rajendra Pal & J.S. Korlahalli,
Sultan Chand & Sons, 8th Edition
2. Business Communication by Meenakshi Raman & Prakash Singh,
Oxford, 2006
3. Basic Business Communication Skills for Empowering the Internet
Generation by Lesikar, R.V. & Flatley, M.E., TMGH , New Delhi.
4. The Essence of Effective Communications by Ludlow, R. & Panton, F. ,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
2 Reference Books 1. Communication by C. S. Rayadu, HPH, 8th Revised Edition, 2007
2. Business Correspondence & Report Writing by R. C. Sharma & Krishna
Mohan, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2011
3. Developing Communication Skills by Macmillan, 2nd Edition
4. Professional Presentations by Malcolm Goodale, Cambridge University
Press, South Asian Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Business Communication - Harvard Business Essentials Series, HBS
Press
2. Effective Communication by Adair, J. , Pan Mcmillan
3. Excellence in Business Communication by Thill, J. V. & Bovee, G. L ,
McGraw Hill, New York.
4. Business Communications: From Process to Product by Bowman, J.P. &
Branchaw, P.P., Dryden Press, Chicago.
4 Websites 1. www.businesscommunicationskills.com
2. www.kcitraining.com
3. www.mindtools.com
4. www.businesstrainingworks.com
5. www.businesscmmunication.org
5 Journals 1. Journal of Business Communication
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
22
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 109 Type Elective
Course Title MS Excel and Advanced Excel Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To familiarize Students with basic to intermediate skills for using Excel in the classroom vis-à-vis
Business Applications
2 To provide students hands on experience on MS Excel Utilities
3 To gain proficiency in creating solutions for Data Management and Reporting
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Understanding Excel's Files, Ribbon and Shortcut: Create a workbook , Enter
data in a worksheet , Format a worksheet , Format numbers in a worksheet ,
Create an Excel table , Filter data by using an AutoFilter , Sort data by using an
AutoFilter
1
1.2 Essential Worksheet Operations: Using Help (F1), Key Board Shortcuts 1
1.3 Working with Cells and Ranges: Formatting Cells, Name Manager 1
1.4 Visualizing Data Using Conditional Formatting: Apply conditional
formatting 1
1.5 Printing Your Work: Print a worksheet , Using Print Preview & Other
Utilities 1
Lab based Evaluation 1
2 2.1 Working with Dates and Times & Text: Working with Dates & Time,
Creating Formulas that Manipulate Text – Upper, Proper, Lower, Concatenate,
Text to column
1
2.2 Creating Formulas That Count, Sum, Subtotal: Create a formula, Use a
function in a formula 2
2.3 Creating Formulas That Look Up Values: VLookup, HLookup, Match & Index 2
Lab based Evaluation 1
3 3.1 Creating Formulas for Financial Applications: Introduction to formulas e.g.
PV, PMT, NPER, RATE, Creating Balance Sheet, Investment Calculations,
Depreciation calculations
3
3.2 Creating Charts and Graphics: Chart your data, Creating Sparkline
Graphics, Using Insert Tab Utilities 2
Lab based Evaluation 1
4 4.1 Using Custom Number Formats: Right click, Format Cells window 1
4.2 Using Data Tab and Data Validation: Getting external Data, Remove
Duplicates, Apply data validation & using utilities from Data Tab 1
4.3 Protecting Your Work: Using Review Tab Utilities 1
4.4 Performing Spreadsheet What-lf Analysis: Create a macro, Activate
and use an add-in 2
Lab based Evaluation 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
23
5.1 Analyzing Data with the Analysis Tool Pak: Anova,Correlation,
Covariance, Descriptive Statistics, Histogram, Random Number Generation,
Rank and Percentile, Regression, t-Test, Z Test
2
5.2 Using Pivot Tables for Data Analysis: Create Data Base for Pivot,
Analysing Data with Pivot Tables, Producing Report with a Pivot Table 3
Lab based Evaluation 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Excel 2010 Bible [With CDROM]by John Walkenbach, John Wiley & Sons, 2010
Edition
2 Reference
Books
1. Excel 2007 for Dummies by Greg Harvey
2. New Perspectives on Microsoft Office Excel 2007
3 Supplement
ary Reading
Material
1. www.hrdiap.gov.in/Downloads/04.MS%20Excel.pdf
2. www.stern.nyu.edu/~jsimonof/classes/1305/pdf/excelreg.pdf
3. www.goodwin.edu/computer_resources/pdfs/excel_2010_tutorial.pdf
4. www.microagecs.com/apps/training/courseware/excel.pdf
5. www.lfpl.org/jobshop/docs/Intermediate-Excel.pdf
4 Websites 1. http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/
2. http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/excel-help/excel-help-and-how-to-
FX102693827.aspx
3. http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/excel/
4. http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/excel-help/excel-functions-by-category-
HP005204211.aspx
5. http://www.baycongroup.com/el0.htm
6. http://spreadsheets.about.com/od/tipsandfaqs/f/excel_use.htm
7. http://www.computerhope.com/shortcut/excel.htm
8. http://www.techonthenet.com/excel/formulas/
9. http://www.functionx.com/excel/
10. http://people.usd.edu/~bwjames/tut/excel/
11. http://spreadsheets.about.com/od/excelfunctions/Using_Excel_Functions_in_S
preadsheets.htm
12. http://www.computergaga.com/excel/functions/
5 Journals 1. http://www.elijournals.com/products/showproduct.asp?prodID=24&catID=1
2. http://www.spyjournal.biz/views/excel
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
24
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 110 Type Elective
Course Title Selling and Negotiating Skills
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To imbibe in the students , critical sales competencies that drive buying decisions.
2 To give insights into how to boost individual and organizational productivity through effective
sales lead management.
3 To introduce basic theoretical principles and practical steps in the negotiating process.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Nature & Role of Selling :
Types of Selling : Differences in selling situations, New business versus service
selling, Newton’s classification of sales types, McMurry & Arnold’s
classification of selling types, Consumer indirect selling, Industrial selling,
Missionary, Sales Team/group selling Merchandising, Telesales, Franchise
selling, International selling.
3 + 1
2 Attributes of a Good Salesperson : Personality & physical characteristics,
Enthusiasm, Confidence, Intelligence, Self-worth, Knowledge- product ,
Competition, organization, market, customer, territory; Communication skills,
Persuasive skills. (To be supplemented by live exercises on personal selling)
4 + 1
3 Personal Selling Skills : The opening - Need & problem identification - The
presentation & demonstration - Dealing with objections – Negotiations -
Closing the sale - Follow up (To be supplemented by live exercises on personal
selling)
7 + 1
4 Negotiation Skills : Goal , Collaborative / Win –Win not compromise ,
Pyramid of success: Power, Time, and Information. Opponent : Visceral or Idea,
(To be supplemented by live exercises on personal selling)
7 + 1
5 Different Phases of Negotiation: Pre-negotiation – opening – information
sharing – problem solving – agreement. Breakdown in negotiation – barriers
that create impasse – overcoming barriers – people problem – mediation –
arbitration – ethics.
4 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Selling & Sales Management by Geoffrey Lancaster & David Jobber,
Macmillan India Ltd.
2. Negotiation: Communication for diverse settings by Michael L Spangle
and Myra Isenhart, Sage South Asia Edition.
3. The Sales Bible: The Ultimate Sales Resource by Jeffrey Gitomer, Wiley
India.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
25
2 Reference Books 1. Sales Management by Bill Donaldson, Palgrave Publications
2. You can negotiate anything by Herb Cohen
3. Managing Sales Leads by Crocker and Obermayer, American Marketing
Association
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. How to win friends and influence People – Dale Carnegie
2. The Art of Closing the Sale by Brian Tracy, Pearson Education.
4 Websites 1. www.professionalsalestips.com
2. www.eyeonsales.com
3. www.semi.org
4. www.salescareersonline.com
5 Journals 1. Journal of Personal Selling & Sales Management
2. Sales and Marketing by Nielsen Business Media
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
26
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 111 Type Elective
Course Title Business Government and Society
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide insights to the students about the Business – Government relations
2 To help students understand the Government’s role in the regulatory domain.
3 To assist students in appreciating the social aspects of business.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Roles of Business, Government, and Society: Interdependence and Conflict,
Regulation of Business, Functions of State; Economic roles of government;
Government and legal environment; Economic roles of Government in India;
Indian experience with overall and sectoral growth, Inter-sectoral linkages and
role of foreign direct investment ,The Constitutional environment ,
Macroeconomic crises: explaining the experiences around the world.
5 + 1
2 Poverty, Inequality and Economic Growth: Industrial Development, Rural-
Urban Dynamics, Population and Development, Finance for Development,
Trade and Development, State and the Market, Privatization and Regulation,
Institutions and Growth
5 + 1
3 Public Private Partnerships: The Rationale for Public Private Partnerships,
Different Kinds of Public Private Partnerships with a special emphasis on the
Build Operate and Transfer Model (BOT), Issues in Regulation that come about
with privatization, Pricing mechanisms available to a regulator to ensure
universal access and efficiency, Discussion of the privatization experience in
different sectors, water, electricity, telecommunication, and railways with a
special emphasis on India.
5 + 1
4 Multinational Corporations: Perspectives on Globalization, Globalization: The
MNC and TNC Organizations, Globalization of Brands, Globalization of the
Indian Business and Firms, Coping with Global Competition, Conflict with
Nation States.
Business in a Global Environment: Business as Blending of People Technology
and Ethical Behaviour, Achieving Business Success through Social
Responsibilities.
5 + 1
5 Changing Workplace: Influence of demography, influence of technology,
gender issues, social justice and affirmative action, Industrial Relations.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Business, Government and Society: A Managerial Perspective by John
Steiner, George Steiner, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Business, Government, and Society by Douglas E. Greer, Prentice Hall ,
3rd Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Business and Its Environment by David P., International Edition, 7th
Edition
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
27
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Milton Friedman “The Social Responsibility of Business is to Increase its
Profits”, New York Times Magazine, September 13, 1970.
2. Economic Times Daily
3. Business Standard Daily
4 Websites 1. www.epw.in
2. www.business.gov.in
5 Journals 1. Economic and Political Weekly
2. Corporate Governance
3. Academy of Management Journal
4. Harvard Business Review
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
28
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 112 Type Elective
Course Title Leadership Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To give students understanding of good Leadership Behaviours and gaining insight into their
Patterns, Beliefs and Attitude
2 To give students hands on experience in Empowering, Motivating and Inspiring Others and
Leading by Example
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Students are divided in group of 5 students each. Students identify 12 Leaders
at different levels from industry, contact them in person, prepare their profiles
by interviews and observations and present it to the class
6
2 With the help of games and activities bring out observations on Leadership
qualities and traits.
The games and activities shall focus on students;
 Developing leadership skills
 Raising awareness of group and people skills
 Developing empowering style of leadership
Compile reflections of the students on Leadership qualities such as ;
 Enthusiasm
 Integrity
 Toughness
 Fairness
 Warmth
 Humility
 Confidence
&
 Fostering Collaboration, Managing Conflict, Using Diversity, Risking
Innovation etc.
20
3 Write reviews on articles / books written by or on leaders from various fields
and debate and discuss the same in the class (Bring out the leadership traits,
styles and strengths) e.g.
 Mahatma Gandhi
 APJ Abdul Kalam
 Jack Welch
 Steve Jobs
 TATA
 Baba Amte
5
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
29
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Leadership Development Activities, John Adair, 2nd Edition Jaico Publication
2. Leadership Games, Stephen S Kogan, Response Books
2 Reference
Books
1. Mastering Leadership, 2nd Edition, Michael Williams, Viva Books
2. Positive Leadership, Mike Pegg, Management Books 2000
3. Cases in Leadership, W Glenn Rowe, Sage Publications
4. Introducing Leadership, David Pardey, Butterworth-Heinemann
5. Leading Change, John P Kotter, HBP
6. Leadership Research Findings, Practice & Skills, Andrew J DuBrin, BIZTantra
7. Leadership Project & Human Capital Management, John McManus, Butterworth-
Heinemann
8. Innovative Leader, Paul Sloane, Kogan Page
9. Leadership Coaching, Edited By Jonathan Passmore, Kogan Page
10. EQ & Leadership, P T Joseph,SJ TMG
11. Making Sense of Leadership, Esther Cameron & Mike Green, Kogan Page
12. Case Studies on Leadership, Edited By Menaka Rao & Sanghamitra Bhattacharya,
ICFAI Books
3 Supplement
ary Reading
Material
1. The New Leaders, Daniel Goleman, Sphere Publications
2. The DNA of Leadership, Judith E Glaser, Platinum Press
3. The New Art of the Leader, William A Cohen, Viva Books
4. Strategic Leadership, John Adair, Kogan Page
5. Authentic Leadership, Warren Bennis, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.
6. Leadership in the Era of Economic Uncertainty, Ram Charan, TMGH
7. 21Leaders for the 21st Century, Fons Trompenaars & Charles Hampden – Turner,
TMGH
4 Websites 1. http://www.nsba.org/sbot/toolkit/LeadQual.html
2. http://psychology.about.com/od/leadership/a/leadstyles.htm
3. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Leadership_styles
4. http://psychology.about.com/od/leadership/p/leadtheories.htm
5. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Leadership
6. http://www.inspirational-quotes.info/leadership.html
7. http://www.savingfreak.com/funny-leadership-quotes/
8. http://wiki.answers.com/Q/What_are_the_biggest_problems_facing_the_world
_in_21st_century
9. http://smallbusiness.chron.com/leadership-problems-business-2977.html
10. http://www.jimclemmer.com/management-vs.-leadership.php
11. http://www.management-issues.com/2006/5/25/opinion/the-differencebetween-
management-leadership.asp
12. http://www.businessballs.com/leadership.htm
5 Journals 1. www.ppc.sas.upenn.edu/leadershipreadingsschachar.pdf
2. www.oxfordleadership.com/journal/vol1_issue2/brown_hurley.pdf
3. www.ccl.org/leadership/pdf/research/cclLeadershipDevelopment.pdf
4. www.innovation.cc/scholarly-style/fairholm3.pdf
5. www.fhsu.edu/jole/issues/JOLE_3_3.pdf
6. www.valuesbasedleadershipjournal.com/assets/docs/Vol1Issue2.pdf
7. www.leadershipeducators.org/.../JOLE_10_1_Winter_2011.pdf
8. www.leadershipeducators.org/Resources/Documents/.../JOLE_9_1.pdf
9. www.eastwestcenter.org/download/3492/.../transformations00103.pdf
10. www.regent.edu/jsl
11. www.alliedacademies.org/public/journals/journaldetails.aspx?jid=5
12. http://jlo.sagepub.com/content/by/year
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
30
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 113 Type Elective
Course Title Personality Development & Business Etiquettes Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To develop an orientation towards business etiquettes and the proper etiquette practices for
different business scenarios.
2 To learn the etiquette requirements for meetings, entertaining, telephone, and Internet business
interaction scenarios.
3 To minimize nervousness while in social situations.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Personality: Physical Appearance; Body Language; Voice; Communication
Style; Content of Communication; Enriched Communication Through Sensory
Specific Language.
Business Style and Professional Image: Dress Codes, Guidelines for
Appropriate Business Attire - Differentiate among the dressy casual, semiformal,
formal and black tie dress code, Grooming for Success, Multi-cultural
Dressing.
5 + 1
2 Impression Management: Impression Formation, Tactics, The Selfpresentational
Motive, The Compass Qualities; First and Lasting Impressions;
Magic Pills; Toxic Traits , The Social Context: Norms and Roles , The Target’s
Values, Actions; The Environment; Success; Changing from the Outside-in ,
Current Social Image , Instrumental Complementarity , The Private Self ,
Worrying about Impressions. Creating Rapport, Powerful Persuasion
Strategies.
5 + 1
3 Assertiveness Training: Concept of Assertiveness, Components of Assertive
behavior, Rational-emotive Assertiveness Training, Handling Fear, Handling
Anger, Handling Depression, Assertive Behaviour Skills, How to Handle Putdowns,
Assertiveness on the Job, Assertiveness in Interpersonal Relations,
Assertiveness in Everyday Commercial Situations, Assertiveness and Others.
Interpersonal Relations : Introduction to Interpersonal Relations, Analysis
Relations of different ego states, Analysis of Transactions, Analysis of Strokes,
Analysis of Life position
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
31
4 Business Etiquette: The ABC’s of Etiquette, Developing a Culture of
Excellence, The Principles of Exceptional Work Behavior, The Role of Good
Manners in Business, Enduring Words
Making Introductions and Greeting People: Greeting Components, The
Protocol of Shaking Hands, Introductions, Introductory Scenarios, Addressing
Individuals
Meeting and Board Room Protocol: Guidelines for Planning a Meeting, Before
the Meeting, On the Day of the Meeting, Guidelines for Attending a Meeting -
For the Chairperson, For Attendees, For Presenters
Multi-cultural Etiquette: Examples of Cultural Insensitivity, Cultural
Differences and their Effects on Business Etiquette
5 + 1
5 Stress Management: Introduction to Stress, Causes of Stress, Impact
Management Stress, Managing Stress
Conflict Management: Introduction to Conflict, Causes of Conflict,
Management Managing Conflict
Time Management: Time as a Resource, Identify Important Time Management
Wasters, Individual Time Management Styles, Techniques for better Time
Management.
5 + 1
Note:
1. The entire course must be taught using a hands-on approach.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Business Etiquette in Brief by Ann Marie Sabath, Adams Media
Corporation, South Asian Edition
2. Basic Managerial Skills for All by E. H. McGrath, S. J., PHI
3. Personality Development and Soft Skill, Mitra, Barun, Oxford
University Press.
2 Reference Books 1. Business Etiquette by David Robinson, Kogan Page
2. Develop your Assertiveness by Sue Bishop, Kogan Page
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. How to deal with Stress by Stephen Palmer & Cary Cooper, Kogan
Page India Pvt. Ltd., South Asian Edition
2. Successful Time Management by Patrick Forsyth, Kogan Page
3. How to manage meetings by Alan Barker, Kogan Page
4 Websites 1. www.mindtools.com
2. www.e-learningcenter.com
3. www.stevepavlina.com
4. www.personalitydevelopment-leidenuniversity.in
5 Journals 1. Leadership Excellence
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
32
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 114 Type Elective
Course Title Foreign Language Lab – I
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide the student with a Foreign Language Skill to manage basic oral and written
communication.
2 To build a basic vocabulary in the selected Foreign Language.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Salutations:
1. To greet the people and say Good afternoon, Good Evening, Goodbye, ask
name and say your name, seek clarification and help, numbers from 1 to 10
2. To say where you live. Describe your house and members of your family.
Weights and Measures, length & breadth, use of decimal system, area and
volume. Cardinal numbers & Ordinal Numbers.
3. Ask and give personal information, Nationality, profession and language,
Numbers from 11 to 50. To ask time by clock and by span, days of the week,
months of the year.
2 + 4
2 Conversation Skills:
1. To ask and express interests, Preferences; likes and dislikes; to invite, to
accept the invitation or to politely decline the invitation; hobbies and how to
spend your leisure.
2. To talk about the weather; to talk about the daily personal routine and
related activities. Seasons & holidays in France/Germany/Japan. Introduction
to letter writing and email writing.
3. To talk about clothing - size, colour, material. Purchase at a super market,
modes of payment. To name and explain human body to express common
bodily ailments (fever, headache etc)
2 + 4
3 Geographical Description:
1. Country, location on the world map, borders and neighboring countries,
ports and industrial towns.
2. Information and clarification of places. Asking for directions to the public
places. Modes of Transport. Numbers 51 to 100 and 1000, 10,00,000 etc.
2 + 4
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
33
4 Business:
1. Visit to a restaurant, to express agreement/disagreement; to ask for
price/quantity
2. To ask about personal past events, to narrate personal experience, to
comprehend difference between letters like Personal/Business Letters,
telegram & e- mail; formats of Letter head and e mail.
3. To talk about/express future actions, to plan a business trip with related
requirements: hotel, tickets, car, Rent a car, places to visit, traffic signs etc.
Documents required like Passport, International Driving license, Insurance
cover etc.
4. Vocabulary relating to the Transactions at the Post office, Bank, Insurance
Company – personal, health, accident, marine… equivalent terms of transaction
– FOB, C.I.F, F.A.S, payment through Letter of credit.
2 + 4
5 Practical Assignments on Unit I to IV. 6
Note:
1. Institute may offer any one of the following foreign languages to the students: SPANISH /
FRENCH/ GERMAN/ JAPANESE / CHINESE
2. The emphasis of the course shall be on practical aspects.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Relevant Standard Text Books, Videos, Audio CDs for the language offered to
2 Reference Books the students.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites
5 Journals
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
34
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 115 Type Elective
Course Title Enterprise Analysis - Desk Research
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To acquaint students with basic aspects of an Enterprise.
2 To guide the students in analyzing an Enterprise w.r.t a set of basic parameters.
3 To help the students assimilate basic jargon and its meaning w.r.t. Enterprise Analysis.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Enterprise History & Background: Establishment, Original & Current
Promoters, Business Group or Business Family to which it belongs, Vision-
Mission-Philosophy -Values, Name of the Chairman, CEO, MD, Members of
Board of Directors, CSR Initiatives, Technical and other collaborations if any,
Recent Mergers and Acquisitions, if any.
2 + 4
2 Organization : Organization Structure, Geographical (domestic and global)
foot print – at the time of inception and spread over the years, company’s
current head quarter worldwide as well as head quarter / corporate office in
India, Manufacturing /Service locations Indian and major worldwide,
Certifications if any - ISO / EMS / FDA / CMMI , etc.
2 + 4
3 Markets: Major Customers, customer segments, Products, Product lines, Major
Brands, Market Share – nationally, region wise, product wise, Advertising
Agency, Advertising Punch Line/Slogan, Logo,
2 + 4
4 Financials: Data to be studied, tabulated, graphically depicted, analyzed and
presented for last 5 years for the Revenues, Profitability, Market Capitalization,
Segmented Revenues, Auditors.
Listing status & Scrip Codes – BSE and NSE, Global Listings on International
Stock Markets, Share Price Face Value, Current Market Value, Annual High
Low Figures, P/E Ratio, Shareholding Pattern.
2 + 4
5 Governance: Philosophy, Action taken by SEBI if any, Involvement in Scams,
Insider Trading Issues, Standard & Poor’s Corporate Governance Scores,
CRISIL Rating. Awards won if any.
6
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
35
Note:
1. Students should work in groups of 3 to 5 each under the guidance of a faculty.
2. Students shall study various aspects of any TWO corporate entities (companies) of their choice.
3. Focus shall be on analyzing the information collected and gaining insights.
4. Students shall submit a structured detailed report.
The evaluation shall be made by a panel of two examiners. One of the examiners shall be the Internal
Faculty. The other examiner may be an external faculty or a person from the relevant industry. The
evaluation shall be based on the following criteria:
a) Report – 20 Marks
b) Presentation – 15 Marks
c) Question & Answer – 15 Marks
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Students shall use secondary data sources such as –
1. Annual Reports,
2. Corporate Websites,
3. Stock Market Websites,
4. Business Newspapers, etc.
to collect maximum information – facts and figures about the enterprise and its
functioning
2 Reference Books
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites
5 Journals
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
36
MBA SYLLABUS: SEMESTER II
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
37
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 201 Type Core
Course Title Marketing Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To introduce the concept of Marketing Mix as a framework for Marketing Decision making.
2 To emphasize the need, importance and process of Marketing Planning and Control.
3 To sensitize the students to the dynamic nature of Marketing Function.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 New Product Development & Product Life Cycle:
1.1 New Product Development :Need for new product development, Booz
Allen &Hamilton Classification Scheme for New Products
1.2 New Product Development Process: Idea Generation to commercialization.
1.3 Branding: Introduction to Branding, Product Vs Brand, Meaning of a brand,
brand equity & brand elements.
1.4 Packaging & Labeling: Meaning & role of Packaging & Labeling, Primary,
Secondary & Shipment packages
1.5 Product Life Cycle: Concept & characteristics of Product Life Cycle,
Relevance of PLC, Types of PLC and Strategies across stages of the PLC.
7 + 2
2 Price:
2.1 Pricing Basics: Meaning, Importance and Factors influencing pricing
decisions
2.2 Setting the Price: Setting pricing objectives, Determining demand,
Estimating costs, Analyzing competitors’ pricing, Selecting pricing method,
Selecting final price.
2.3 Adapting the Price: Geographical pricing, Price discounts & allowances,
Promotional pricing, Differentiated pricing,
2.4 Price Change: Initiating & responding to price changes.
6 + 2
3 Place:
3.1 The Role of Marketing Channels: Channel functions & flows, channel
levels.
3.2 Channel Design Decisions: Analyzing customers’ desired service output
levels, establishing objectives &constraints, Identifying & evaluating major
channel alternatives
3.3 Channel Options: Introduction to Wholesaling, Retailing, Franchising,
Direct marketing , E- Commerce Marketing Practices
3.4 Market Logistics Decisions: Order processing, Warehousing, Inventory,
and Transportation.
6 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
38
4 Promotion:
4.1 Introduction: The role of marketing communications in marketing effort.
4.2 Communication Mix Elements: Introduction to Advertising, Sales
Promotion, Personal Selling, Public Relations, Direct Marketing. Concept of
Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC)
4.3 Developing Effective Communication: Identifying target audience,
determining communication objectives, designing the communications,
selecting communication channels
4.4 Deciding Marketing Communications Mix: Factors in setting marketing
communication mix, measuring communication results
10 + 2
5 Marketing Planning & Control:
5.1 Product Level Planning: Preparation & evaluation of a product level
marketing plan, Nature & contents of Marketing Plans- Executive Summary,
Situation Analysis, Marketing Strategy, Financials, Control.
5.2 Marketing Evaluation & Control: Concept, Process & types of control -
Annual Plan Control, Profitability Control, Efficiency Control, Strategic
Control, Marketing audit
6 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Marketing Management by Philip Kotler, Kevin Lane Keller, Abraham
Koshy, Mithileshwar Jha, Pearson , 13th Edition
2. Marketing Management by Rajan Saxena, TMGH, 4th Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Principles of Marketing by Philip Kotler, Gary Armstrong, Prafulla
Agnihotri, Ehasan Haque, Pearson, 13th Editon,
2. Marketing Management by Ramaswamy & Namakumari, Macmillan,
4th Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Marketing Whitebook (Latest Edition)
2. Brand Equity Supplement of The Economic Times
3. Brand Wagon Supplement of The Financial Express
4. Strategist Supplement of Business Standard
5. Legends in Marketing by Jagdish N. Sheth
4 Websites 1. NCAER - http://www.ncaer.org/
2. 2011 Census of India Reports - http://www.censusindia.gov.in/
3. ASCI - www.ascionline.org/
4. http://www.marketingpower.com/Pages/default.aspx (American
Marketing Association)
5 Journals 1. IIMB Management Review
2. Vikalpa
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
39
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 202 Type Elective
Course Title Financial Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand various concepts related to financial management
2 To study in detail, various tools and techniques in the area of finance
3 To develop the analytical skills which would facilitate the decision making in Business situations
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Concept of Financial Management – Scope and functions – Financial Planning
and forecasting - Risk and return – portfolio investment – CAPM
3+2
2 Capitalization – under and over capitalization – capital structure- computation
of cost of capital – trading on equity and various types of leverages-
Management of profits – dividend policy, procedural and legal formalities
involved in the payment of dividends – bonus shares
8+2
3 Capital budgeting – nature and significance – time value of money – methods
of evaluating capital expenditure proposals.
8+2
4 Financial statement analysis including ratio analysis – funds flow and cash flow
statements
8+2
5 Working capital management – types of working capital – working capital
budget – operating cycle – components of working capital – cash, receivables
and inventory
8+2
Note:
1. Numerical problems will be asked on the following topics only.
a) Ratio Analysis
b) Working capital management – working capital budget – receivables management
c) Capital budgeting – payback period, average rate of return, net present value and
profitability index, IRR.
2. The weightage of theory questions and numerical problems will be 40% and 60% respectively.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Financial Management :- Dr. N. M. Vechalekar
2 Reference Books 1. Financial Management :- Khan and Jain
2. Financial Management :- Prasanna Chandra
3. Financial Management :- I. M. Pande
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Financial Management and Policy :- James C. Van Horne
4 Websites 1. NSE,
2. BSE
5 Journals 1. Indian Journal of Finance
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
40
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
41
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 203 Type Core
Course Title
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the role of HRM in an organization
2 To learn to gain competitive advantage through people
3 To learn to study and design HRM system
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Framework of Human Resource Management:
1.1 Introduction to HRM and framework - Nature of HRM, Scope of HRM,
HRM: Functions and Objectives, HRM: Policies and practices
1.2 HRM and SHRM - Nature of SHRM, The strategic functions of HRM
understood and implemented in the company, Global competitiveness and
Strategic HR, Linkage of organizational and HR strategies
1.3 Models of SHRM - The Integrated system model, Devanna et.al’s strategic
human resource management “matching model”
2+2
2 HR Procurement:
2.1 Job Analysis and Design - Job Analysis: introduction, Importance of job
analysis, purpose of job analysis, benefits of job analysis, competency based
job analysis, Job Design: Writing job description, introduction, and factors
affecting job design. Job characteristics model (Hackman and Oldham,
1976) of effective job and job satisfaction.
2.2 Human Resource Planning - The need of man power planning , What is
Human Resource Planning, Definition, objectives, importance, benefits, the
process of Human resource planning, Preparing manpower inventory.(
supply Forecasting)
2.3 Recruitment - Strategic approach to recruitment, Labour markets and
recruitment, Geographic labour markets, Global labour markets, Industry
and occupational labour markets, Educational and technical labour
markets, Unemployment rate and labour markets, Recruiting and diversity
considerations, Employment advertising, Recruiting Diverse workers,
Recruiting Source choices: internal vs. external - Internal: Organizational
Database, Job postings, Promotions and Transfers, Current Employee
Reference and Re-recruiting of former employees and applicants, External:
College and University recruiting, school recruiting, Labour Unions,
Employment agencies and headhunters, competitive sources, media
sources, E-Recruiting methods - Internet job boards, Professional / career
websites, Employer websites
2.4 Selection - Introduction to selection process, Selection procedure,
7+2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
42
3 Training and Development - Employee Training and Development
Nature of training, Training process, Training needs assessment,
Training evaluation, Training design, Implementing Training
programs(Training methods), Implementing management development
programs
7+2
4 Employee Appraisal & Compensation - Performance- Definition, Why to
measure performance, Use of performance data, measurement process,
Performance feedback, Compensation- concept, Traditional approach, current
trends in compensation, Linking compensation with performance- Advantages
& Problems, Team based Incentives
5 Managing Employee Relations - Concept, Importance, Organizational Entry,
employee Status, Flexible Work arrangement, Employee Surveys, Handbooks,
Violations of Policy/ Discipline, Organizational Exit, Termination,
Resignation, downsizing, Lay off Retirement
8+2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Personnel/ Human Resource Management by David DeCenzo, Stephen
Robbins, Prentice Hall of India, 2008, 3rd Edition
2. Human Resource Management by J. John Bernardin, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing, 4th Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Human Resource Management, A case study approach, Muller Camen,
Croucher Leigh, Jaico Publishing House
2. HRM Ethics & Employment Ashly Pinnnington, Rob Macklin, Tom
Campbell, 2nd Edition
3. Human Resources Management by Gary Dessler
4. Managing Human Resources by R.S. Dwiwedi
5. Human Resources Management by V.P.Michael
6. Human Resources Management by Mirza & Zaiyadin
7. Human Resources Management by L.M.Prasad
8. Human Resources Management by Ashwathappa
9. Managing Human Resources by Arun Monppa
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Case studies in Human Asset Management, Vol. I by Doris John, ICFAI
Books, 1st Edition
2. HRM in Organizations by Izabela Robinson, Jaico Publishing House, 1st
Edition
3. Armstrong’s Essential Human Resource Management Practice- A guide
to people management by Michael Armstrong, Kogan page, 1st Edition
4. Applied Psychology in HRM by Cascio & Aguins, PHI, 6th Edition.
4 Websites 1. www.shrmindia.org
2. www.peoplematters.com
3. www.hrmguide.net
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
4. Journal of Human Values
5. Journal of Human Resources
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
43
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 204 Type Core
Course Title Decision Science
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand role of quantitative techniques in managerial decision making.
2 To understand process of decision problem formulation.
3 To understand applications of various quantitative techniques in managerial settings.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Introduction: Decision Sciences & Role of quantitative techniques
1.2 Linear Programming: Concept, Formulation & Graphical Solution
1.3 Assignment Models: Concept, Flood’s Technique/ Hungarian Method,
applications including restricted & multiple assignments
1.4 Transportation Models: Concept, Formulation, Problem types: Balanced,
unbalanced, Minimization, Maximization Basic initial solution using North
West Corner, Least Cost & VAM, Optimal Solution using MODI
9+2
2 2.1 Queuing Theory: Concept, Single Server ( M/M/I , Infinite, FIFO) and
Multi Server (M/M/C , Infinite, FIFO)
2.2 Markov Chains & Simulation Techniques: Markov chains: Applications
related to management functional areas, Implications of Steady state
Probabilities, Decision making based on the inferences Monte Carlo
Simulation, scope and limitations.
8+2
3 3.1 Decision Theory: Concept, Decision under risk (EMV)& uncertainty
3.2 Game Theory: Concept, 2 by 2 zero sum game with dominance, Pure &
Mixed Strategy
6+2
4 4.1 CPM & PERT: Concept, Drawing network, identifying critical path
4.2 Network Calculations: Calculating EST, LST, EFT, LFT, Slack & probability
of project completion
6+2
5 5.1 Probability: Concept, Addition, Conditional Probability theorem based
decision making, (Numerical based on functional areas of business expected).
5.2 Probability Distributions: Normal, Binomial. Interval estimation, standard
errors of estimation.
6+2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Quantitative Techniques in Management by N.D. Vohra Tata, McGraw
Hill Publications, 4th Edition
2. Quantitative Approaches to Management by Levin, Rubin, Stinson &
Gardner
3. Operations Research Theory & Applications by J K Sharma- MacMillan
Publishers India Ltd., 4th Edition
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
44
2 Reference Books 1. Introduction to Operations Research by Billey E. Gilett, TMGH
2. Operations Research by Nita Shah, Ravi Gor, Hardik Soni, PHI
3. Managerial Decisions Modeling with Spreadsheets by Bal Krishnan,
Render, Stair, Jr., Pearson Education.
2. Operations Research by R. Pannerselvam, Prentice Hall India, 2nd
Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Operations Research by Hamdy A. Taha, Pearson Publication
4 Websites 1. www.orsi.in
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Operations and Quantitative Management
2. International Journals of Operations Research and Management Science
3. Journal of Operation Management Research
4. Indian Journal of Advanced Operations Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
45
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 205 Type Core
Course Title Operations and Supply Chain Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 000 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To develop an understanding of the strategic importance of Operations & SCM and how it can
provide a competitive advantage in the marketplace
2 To understand the relationship between Operations & SCM and other business functions, such as
Marketing, Finance, Accounting, and Human Resources.
3 To develop knowledge of the issues related to designing and managing Operations & SCM and the
techniques to do so.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management: Definition,
Concept, Significance and Functions of Operations and SCM. Evolution from
manufacturing to operations management , Physical distribution to Logistics to
SCM, Physical Goods and Services Perspectives
1.2 Quality: Definitions from various Perspectives, Customers view and
Manufacturer's view, Concept of Internal Customer, Overview of TQM and
LEAN Management, Impact of Global Competition, Technological Change,
Ethical and Environmental Issues on Operations and Supply Chain functions.
5 + 2
2 Operations Processes
2.1 Process Characteristics in Operations: Volume Variety and Flow. Types of
Processes and Operations Systems - Continuous Flow system and intermittent
flow systems
2.2 Process Product Matrix: Job Production, Batch Production, Assembly line
and Continuous Flow, Process and Product Layout
2.3 Service System Design Matrix :Design of Service Systems, Service
Blueprinting
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
46
3 3.1 Production Planning & Control (PPC): Role and Functions
3.2 Demand Forecasting: Forecasting as a Planning Tool, Forecasting Time
Horizon, Sources of Data for forecasting, Accuracy of Forecast, Capacity
Planning
3.3 Production Planning: Aggregate production Planning, Alternatives for
Managing Demand and Supply, Master Production Schedule, Capacity
Planning - Overview of MRP, CRP, DRP , MRP II
3.4 Production Control: Scheduling, Loading, Scheduling of Job Shops and
Floor Shops, Gantt Charts
8 + 2
4 4.1 Inventory Planning and Control: Continuous and Intermittent demand
System, concept of inventory, need for inventory, types of inventory - seasonal,
decoupling, cyclic, pipeline, safety - Implications for Inventory Control
Methods.
4.2 Inventory Costs: Concept and behavior of ordering cost, carrying cost,
shortage cost.
4.3 EOQ: Basic EOQ Model - EOQ with discounts
4.4 Inventory control: Classification of material - ABC Analysis - VED, HML,
FSN, GOLF, SOS.
(Numericals expected on Basic EOQ, EOQ with discounts & ABC), Inventory
turns ratios, Fixed Order quantity Model - Periodic Review and Re-order Point
8 + 2
5 5.1 Supply Chain Management: Generalized Supply Chain Management
Model - Key Issues in SCM – Collaboration, Enterprise Extension,
responsiveness, Cash to Cash Conversion,
5.2 Customer Service: Supply Chain Management and customer service
linkages, Availability service reliability perfect order, customer satisfaction
Enablers of SCM - Facilities, Inventory, Transportation, Information, sourcing,
Pricing
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Operations Management Theory & Practice by B. Mahadevan , Pearson,
2nd Edition.
2. Operations Now - Supply Chain Profitability & Performance by Byron
J. Finch, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
47
2 Reference Books 1. Supply Chain Logistics Management by Donald Bowersox, David
Closs, M Bixby Cooper, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition.
2. Operations Management by William J. Stevenson, TMGH, 9th Edition.
3. Operations Management by Lee Krajewski, Larry Ritzman, Manoj
Malhotra, Pearson Education, 8th Edition.
4. Introduction to Materials Management , J.R. Tony Arnold, Stephen
Chapman, Ramakrishnan, Pearson, 5th Edition.
5. Supply Chain Management - Strategy, Planning & Operation by Sunil
Chopra, Peter Meindl, D. V. Kalra, Pearson Education.
6. Production & Operations Management by S N Chary, McGraw Hill, 7th
Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Contemporary Logistics by Paul Murphy, Donald Wood, PHI, 9th
Edition
2. The Goal by Eliyahu Goldratt
4 Websites 1. www.apics.org
2. www.supplychainmanagement.in
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Operations and Quantitative Management
2. Udyog Pragati
3. International Journals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management
4. International Journal of Logistics and Planning Supply Chain
Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
48
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 206 Type Core
Course Title Management Information Systems
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 000 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To develop conceptual understanding about latest developments in the field of Information
Technology and the impact of I.T. in managing a business
2 To learn to use Information Technology to gain competitive advantage in business
3 To learn from, with a view to emulate, entrepreneurial ventures in e-Commerce and m-Commerce
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Management Information Systems: Need, Purpose and Objectives -
Data, Information, Knowledge – Types of Information Systems - Information
as a strategic resource - Use of information for competitive advantage
1.2 Information Technology Infrastructure: Information Systems
Architecture – Mainframe, Client Server, Web Based, Distributed, Grid, Cloud
- Overview of Hardware, Software, Storage and Networking Devices –
Networks Types - Topologies of Networks
7 + 2
2 2.1 Data Base Management Systems: Concept – Relational Model
Applications – DBMS Architecture
2.2 Systems Engineering Analysis and Design: Systems Concept - Systems
Development Life Cycle - Assessing Enterprise Information requirements –
Alternative System Building Approaches - Prototyping - Rapid Development
Tools – CASE Tools – Object Oriented Systems (Only introduction to these tools &
techniques)
7 + 2
3 3.1 Decision Support Systems: Data Warehousing and Data Mining - Business
Intelligence and Analytics - Group Decision Support Systems – Executive
Information Systems - Executive Support Systems – Geographical Information
Systems - Expert Systems and Knowledge Based Expert Systems – Artificial
Intelligence
7 + 2
4 4.1 Digital firm Perspective: MIS Model for a digital firm – Organization
Structure for digital firm – e-Business Models and Applications – Mobile
computing, Call Centers, BPO
4.2 Management Issues in MIS: Information Security and Control - Quality
Assurance -Ethical and Social Dimensions - Intellectual Property Rights as
related to IT Services / IT Products
7 + 2
5 5.1 Applications of MIS in functional areas as well as in the service sector
should be covered with the help of minimum 5 case studies.
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
49
Note:
1. Emphasis should be given on management oriented problems and cases as compared to technical
orientation expected from computer science/ computer management students.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Management Information Systems by Obrien, Marakas and Ramesh Behl,
TMGH
2. Management Information Systems by Jawadekar, TMGH, 4th Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Management Information Systems by Jaiswal and Mittal, Oxford
University Press
2. Decision Support Systems and Intelligent Systems by Turban and Aronson,
Pearson Education Asia
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Management Information Systems by Laudon, Laudon, Dass, Pearson
Education Asia, 11th Edition
2. Management Information Systems by Davis and Olson, Tata McGraw Hill
4 Websites - -
5 Journals 1. MIS Quarterly, University of Minnesota
2. CSI Communications, Computer Society of India, Mumbai
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
50
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 207 Type Elective
Course Title Emotional Intelligence and Managerial Effectiveness Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To equip students with individual and group learning methods
2 To understand intelligence and develop emotional competence
3 To develop understanding and competence for personal and managerial effectiveness.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction: Emotions and the Tripartite Brain, Emotional Competencies,
Executive EQ, Emotions and Enneagram, Rational Emotive Therapy, Emotional
Transformation, Measuring Emotional Intelligence, Emotions and Childhood,
Role of Emotions, Emotions and Attitudes
5 + 1
2 Individual & Organizational Learning: Theories of Learning, Learning
Processes, Kolb’s Learning Styles, How tO create a learning organization
5 + 1
3 Emotional Intelligence: Fundamentals of Emotional Intelligence, The
Emotional Competence Framework, Benefits of Emotional Intelligence
5 + 1
4 Managerial Effectiveness: Challenges faced by Organisations & expectations
from practicing Managers
5 + 1
5 Improving Effectiveness: Understanding Organizational goals, Creativity,
Optimising resources, Execution Skills (PDCA Cycle)
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Emotional Intelligence: Why It Can Matter More Than IQ by Daniel Goleman
2. Get Better or Get Beaten: 31 Leadership Secrets from GE's Jack Welch by
Robert Slater, Jack Welch , McGraw-Hill School Education Group
2 Reference
Books
1. Working with Emotional Intelligence - Daniel Goleman
2. Jack Welch on Leadership : Executive Lessons from the Master CEO by John
A. Byrne, Jack Welch Crown Publishing Group
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
1. Leadership: The Power of Emotional Intelligence by Daniel Goleman
2. The Brain and Emotional Intelligence: New Insights by Daniel Goleman
3. The Emotionally Intelligent Workplace by Daniel Goleman, 2001
4. Primal Leadership: Realizing the Power of Emotional Intelligence by Daniel
Goleman, 2002
5. Destructive Emotions: A Scientific Dialogue with the Dalai Lama – 2003
6. Emotional Intelligence: Key Readings on the Mayer and Salovey Model by
John D. Mayer (Editor), Marc A. Brackett (Editor), Peter Salovey (Editor)
7. The Emotionally Intelligent Manager: How to Develop and Use the Four Key
Emotional Skills of Leadership by David R. Caruso and Peter Salovey
8. Bhagwad Gita As it is by Shree Prabhupada
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
51
4 Websites 1. http://www.unh.edu/emotional_intelligence/ei%20Reprints/EIpubs%2019
90-1999.htm
2. http://www.dirjournal.com/guides/emotional-intelligence/
3. http://eqi.org/
4. http://www.emotionalintelligencecourse.com/eq-blog/
5. http://www.byronstock.com/emotional-intelligence-blog/
6. http://completeintelligence.com/blog/just-what-is-emotional-intelligence/
5 Journals 1. Human Resource Development Quarterly
2. Human Resource Management Review
3. Journal of Applied Social Psychology
4. Journal of Managerial Psychology
5. Journal of Occupational Health Psychology
6. Journal of Organizational Behavior
7. American Psychologist
8. Applied Psychology
9. Current Directions in Psychological Science
10. European Journal of Work and Organizational Psychology
11. Journal of Personality and Individual Differences
12. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin
13. Research on Emotion in Organization
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
52
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 208 Type Elective
Course Title Statistical Software Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To give an overview of the capabilities of popular statistical software packages.
2 To train students in handling data files and carry out basics statistical analysis.
3 To give hands on experience about basic hypothesis testing using t tests, Chi Square tests and
ANOVA.
4 To train students in using advanced tools such as regressions, MDS, Factor Analysis etc.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 An Overview of Statistical Software: Introduction to SPSS / SAS/ Systat.
Introduction to various menus, Data file, Output file, Frequently –used dialog
boxes, Editing output, Printing results. Creating and editing a data file –
Variable and data view, Value Labels.
1.2 Managing Data: Listing cases, replacing missing values, computing new
variables, recording variables, exploring data, selecting cases, sorting cases,
merging files, splitting files, Visual Binning.
4 + 1
2 2.1 Frequencies: Frequencies, bar charts, histograms, percentiles
2.2 Descriptive Statistics: Measures of central tendency, variability, deviation
from normality, size and stability. Cross Tabulation and chi-square analyses,
The means Procedure
2.3 Graphs: Creating and editing graphs and charts
4 + 1
3 3.1 Bivariate Correlation: Bivariate Correlation, Partial Correlations and the
correlation matrix
3.2 The T-test Procedure: Independent –samples, paired samples, and one
sample tests
3.3 Non Parametric Tests: ChiSquareTest, 1 sample test, 2 independent samples
test, k independent samples, 2 related samples test, k related samples,
4 + 1
4 4.1 One Way ANOVA Procedure: One way analysis of variance, General
Linear model: Two –way analysis of variance, General Linear model: three –
way analysis of variance and the influence of covariates
5 + 1
5 5.1 Advanced Tools: Simple Linear Regression , Multiple regression analysis
Multidimensional scaling, Reliability Analysis, Factor analysis, Cluster
analysis.
8 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
53
Note:
1. The entire course has to be taught using a hands-on approach.
2. Students should be encouraged to use the 30 day trial version of relevant software package.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. SPSS for Windows – Step by Step, 17.0 Update, by George and Mallery,
Pearson, 10th Edition.
2. Research Methodology with SPSS by Rao and Tyagi, Shree Niwas
Publications, 2009.
2 Reference Books 1. Ready, Set, Go! – A student Guide to SPSS for Windows by Pavkov and
Pierce, TMGH Edition.
2. Discovering Statistics using SAS by Andy Field & Jerry Miles, Sage
Publications, 2010.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. http://www.inc8.jp/ps/T9_Luque_imec.pdf
2. http://www.jstatsoft.org/v49
4 Websites 1. www.sas.com
2. www.xlstat.com
3. www.stata.com
4. www.ibm.com/software/analytics/spss/
5 Journals 1. Journal of Statistical Software
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
54
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 209 Type Elective
Course Title MS Project Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 20
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand basics of project management and learn how to use MS Project 2007 to:
a) Create a New Project
b) Build Tasks
c) Create Resources & Assign Costs
2 To understand use of MS Project 2007 to track Project Progress
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Introduction to MS Project 2007 : Understanding Projects, Managing
Projects & Project Management Software, Taking a first look at Project –
Starting Project, Entering Information, Changing Views, What’s new in Project
2007
2
2 2.1 Creating a New Project: Gathering Information, Opening a Project file,
Establishing Basic Project Information, Looking at Project Calendars, Entering
tasks, Adding subtasks, Saving Project files, Working with Project Outline –
Adjusting tasks in an outline, Copying tasks
3 + 2
3 3.1 Building Tasks: Establishing Timing for Tasks, Assigning Task Timing,
Using Recurring Tasks, Establishing Constraints and Deadline Dates,
Manipulating Gantt Chart to View Timing, Entering Task Notes, Establishing
Dependencies Among Tasks, Viewing Dependencies
4 + 2
4 4.1 Creating Resources & Assigning Costs: Understanding Resources,
Creating Resource List, Modifying Resource Information, Using Resources and
Tasks, Handling Unusual Cost Situations
4.2 Understanding Basics of Views: What is a View?, Examining Indicators,
Admiring Views – Calendars, Detail Gantt, Gantt Chart, Leveling Gantt,
Tracking Gantt, Multiple baselines Gantt. Resource Allocation , Resource Form,
Resource Graph, Resource Name Form, Resource Sheet, Resource Usage, Roll
up Views, Task Details Form, Task Entry, Task Form, Task Name Form, Task
Sheet, Task Usage, Printing Project
5 + 3
5 5.1 Tracking Project Progress I: Understanding the Principles of Tracking,
Using Baseline, Changing the Baseline, Viewing Progress with the Tracking
Gantt Chart View – Interpretation, Task Variance Table, Task Cost Table, Task
Work Table, Understanding Tracking Strategies
5.2 Tracking Project Progress II: Recording Actuals – Organizing the Updating
Process, Understanding Calculation Options, Updating Tasks to Reflect Actual
Information, Using Actuals and Costs, Techniques and Tips for Updating,
Reviewing Progress.
6 + 3
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
55
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Microsoft Office Project 2007 Bible by Elaine Marmel, Wiley Publishing
Inc, 2007
2 Reference Books -
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. PMBOK Guide by PMI
4 Websites 1. www.pmi.org.in
2. http://www.project-blog.com/
5 Journals 1. Project Management by Koehler, Brandon. OfficePro. Mar/Apr2012,
Vol. 72 Issue 2, p36-37
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
56
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 210 Type Elective
Course Title Geopolitics & the World Economic System
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To expose students to the relationship between political power and geographic space amidst
world economic system.
2 To help students understand various facets of international political economy & national
system political economy.
3 To develop abilities to appreciate the interrelationship between the trading system, international
financial system and the participants in the changed economic system
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 International Political Economy: Distribution of Wealth and Economic
Activities - National Autonomy - Politics of International Regimes - Theory of
Hegemonic Stability - Governance of the Global Economy
5 + 1
2 National Systems of Political Economy: Differences among National
Economies - Market-Oriented Capitalism- Developmental Capitalism- Social
Market Capitalism – Comparative Analysis
5 + 1
3 The Trading System: Debate over Free Trade – Functions of WTO and GATT -
The Uruguay Round and World Trade Organization – Trade Blocs such as
SAARC, ASEAN, NAFTA - Threats to Open Trading System
5 + 1
4 International Monetary System: The International Financial System - Reform
of International Monetary Affairs - Nature of Financial Crises - Controversy
over Regulation of International Finance
5 + 1
5 The State and the Multinationals: An International Regime for FDI and MNCDo
Global Corporations Pose a Threat? - Consequences of Economic
Globalization
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Global Political Economy – Robert Gilpin, Princeton University Press
2. International Economics with MyEconLab by Paul Krugman, Maurice
Obstfeld and Marc Melitz, Pearson, Global Edition, 9th Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Managing World Economic Change: International Political Economy by
Robert A. Isaak, Pearson, 3rd Edition,
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Economic Times Daily
2. Business Standard Daily
3. The Economist – Magazine
4 Websites 1. http://www.wto.org/
2. http://www.imf.org/external/index.htm
5 Journals 1. Economic Systems Research.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
57
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 211 Type Elective
Course Title Life Skills
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To encourage students to develop and use balanced self determined Behavior.
2 To help students in enhancing self, increasing life satisfaction and Improving relationships with
others.
3 To develop new ability to practice new problem solving skills in group and use these skills in
personal life.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Definition of Life Skills , Assumptions about Life Skills, Concept of skill in Life
Skills, Concept of Skill in Life Skills, Primary goal of Life Skills programme,
Life Skills Process model, Group development and group behaviors.
5 + 1
2 Cognition, Meaning , Piaget’s theory of Cognitive Development, role of Goal
Orientation, Meaning, Big Five personality characteristics, extraversion,
Openness to experience, emotional stability, consciousness and agreeableness,
Personal knowledge management, meaning, Wright’s model, Four domains,
Analytical, information, social and learning.
5 + 1
3 Coping, Meaning, Types of coping strategies, 1) appraisal focused (adaptive
Cognitive) 2) problem focused ( adaptive behavior) 3) emotion focused
Empathy, meaning and definitions, Difference between empathy and
sympathy, Anger and distress, Meaning, overcoming.
5 + 1
4 Moral development, Meaning, Interpersonal influences on Moral development,
Moral development and social exclusion, Morality and culture, Morality and
Intergroup attitudes, moral emotions.
5 + 1
5 Study Skills, Meaning, Types of study skills, Methods based on :
1) Memorization such as rehearsal and role learning
2) Communication Skills e.g. reading, listening,
3) Cues e.g. flashcard training
4) Condensing information, summarizing and use of key
words..
5) Visual imagery
6) Exam strategies
7) Time management, organization and life style changes.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Critical thinking skills : developing effective analysis and argument by
Stella Cottrell
2. Academic writing: a handbook for international students by Stephen
Bailey
3. Effective Study Skills: Step-by-Step System to Achieve Student Success
by Semones
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
58
2 Reference Books 1. Critical thinking and analysis by Mary Deane
2. Developing and applying study skills : writing assignments,
dissertations and management reports by Donald Currie
3. Assignment and thesis writing by Jonathan Anderson
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
-
4 Websites -
5 Journals -
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
59
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 212 Type Elective
Course Title Business Systems and Procedures
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand Business as an integrated system
2 To develop process thinking for developing procedures.
3 To make students aware of various business functions & responsibilities.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Systems and Procedures – Concept and need - Characteristics of a good
procedure. Writing a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)– Procedure
Identification - Information Gathering–Interviewing – Analysis – Writing –
Implementation – Review- Fine-tuning. Process Mapping Tools – Aid Memoir –
Flowchart – Swim Lane Diagrams – Flow Charting Software – Using MS Word
and Excel for Flowcharting - Case Studies.
5 + 1
2 Understanding accounting procedures for Cash Sales - Credit Sales - Cash
Receipts – Donations – Travelling Expenses – Writing off Bad Debts – Sale of
Scrap. Principles of Internal Control – Study of Internal Control in Select
Procedures such as Recruitment, Payment of Salaries and Wages, Verification
of Inventories and Work in Progress, Verification of Fixed Assets and
Investments
5 + 1
3 Lean Office – Re-engineering information flow and paper flow – Process
Mapping for Current and Future State Map. Digital Office –Overview of Office
Automation Systems – Use of technologies such as Bar Coding, RFID, Biometry
and Mobile Computing for redesigning office procedures.
5 + 1
4 Study of the following Systems and underlying Procedures. Point of sale (POS)
system in an organized retail store, Purchase Order System in a manufacturing
organization, Attendance Recording System in a factory, Kitchen Order Ticket
(KOT) System in a Restaurant, Just in Time Inventory System in a
manufacturing organization.
5 + 1
5 Presentation of individual/group projects in Process Mapping, Improvement
and Writing SOP’s for an entire range of activities for a segment in a
manufacturing/ service organization.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
60
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1.
2 Reference Books 1. Business Process Management – A Rigorous Approach by Martyn A Ould ,
British Computer Society, First South Asia Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1.
4 Websites 1.
5 Journals 1.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
61
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 213 Type Elective
Course Title Computer Aided Personal Productivity Tools Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To give students mastery of MS Office.
2 To enhance personal productivity through advanced features of MS Word, MS Excel & MS
PowerPoint
3 To impart skills of using MS Outlook and basic social networking tools.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number of
Sessions
1 MS WORD 6 + 1
1.1 Collaboration - Protect your document with passwords, permission, and
other restrictions, Save a document to SharePoint from Office 2010, The
purpose of IRM and its limitations, Mail Merge
1
1.2 Tracking changes and comments - Turn track changes on or off, Review
tracked changes and comments 1
1.3 Formatting - Add, change, or delete WordArt, Add or remove text effects,
Adjust the spaces between letters, lines or paragraphs, Set the default font,
Language, Apply, customize, and save a document theme in Word
1
1.4 Tables of contents and other references - Create a table of contents, Edit a
citation placeholder, Create a bibliography, Foot note & End Note, Captions &
Index
1
1.5 Checking Spelling, grammar, and thesaurus 1.6 Managing Headers, footers, and page numbers, Links 1
1.7 Inserting Page breaks and section breaks, Applying Multiple headers, page
layouts 1
1.8 Tables Tools, Illustrations, Equations, Symbols
2 POWERPOINT 6 + 1
2.1 Working with text & SmartArt graphics - Add alternative text to a shape,
picture, chart, table, SmartArt graphic, or other object, Wrap text around an
object in PowerPoint 2010, Adjust the indent in a bulleted or numbered list on
the ruler, Change the look, position, or function of bulleted or numbered lists
in your presentation
1
2.2 Organizing and formatting slides, Using masters - Understanding a slide
master, Create or customize a slide master, Apply one or more slide masters to
a presentation
1
2.3 Working with animation, sounds & Movies - Turn your presentation into a
video, Embed or link to a video from your presentation, Set the 'Play' options
for a video in your presentation, Trim a video, Compress your media files, Tips
for improving audio and video playback and compatibility
1
2.4 Working with hyperlinks and action buttons 1
2.5 Reviewing and adding comments - Show markup and add Comments
2.6 Creating support materials - Notes and Notes Master, Printing Notes 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
62
2.7 Delivering your presentation - Using Presenter’s Mode, Optimising
Handouts 2.8 Embedding Presentation - Multiple presentations & Slides and files on the 1
slide
3 MSEXCEL 6 + 1
3.1 Excel Basics Review - Using Keyboard, Importing and Exporting Data (Access,
SPSS) 1
3.2 Excel For Marketing & Statistics - Creating Business Solutions 1
3.4 Excel & HRIS - Database Creation, Analysis & reporting 1
3.4 Excel for Finance - Analysing Financial Statements e.g. Balance sheet, Ratio
Analysis, Using Applications e.g. PROWESS, AceEquity, Creating Excel
Dashboard
3
4 MS Outlook 2 + 1
4.1 MS Outlook - Start using the Outlook Social Connector, Stay up-to-date in
the People Pane, Assign a colour category to an e-mail message, Customize the
appearance of task lists, Turn the Reading Pane on or off, Introduction to
Conversations, Create and add a message signature, Manage messages by
using rules, Automate common or repetitive tasks
2
5 Media for Social Connectivity 5 + 1
5.1 Using Google + & Google Docs 2
5.2 Using Twitter for networking and Business 1
5.3 Creating Blogs, Using Linkedin, and other academics and Business
websites. Networking, Surveys, Discussions, Business Information 2
Note:
1. Emphasis should be given on hands on experience.
2. All sessions should be conducted in the IT laboratory.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Excel 2010 Bible [With CDROM] by John Walkenbach John Wiley & Sons
2. Word 2010 Bible by Herb Tyson John Wiley & Sons
3. MOS 2010 Study Guide for Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Outlook
by Joan Lambert III and Joyce Cox (Apr 8, 2011)
4. Microsoft Word 2010 Step by Step by Joyce Cox and Joan Lambert III
5. PowerPoint 2010 Bible [Paperback] by Faithe Wempen
2 Reference
Books
1. Microsoft Word 2010 in Depth by Faithe Wempen
2. Microsoft Word 2010 Plain & Simple by Katherine Murray
3. Beyond Bullet Points: Using Microsoft PowerPoint to Create Presentations
That Inform, Motivate, and Inspire [Paperback] BPG
4. Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 Plain & Simple by Nancy Muir
5. Office 2010 Bible by John Walkenbach, Herb Tyson, Michael R. Groh, Faithe
Wempen, Lisa A. Bucki
6. Business Analysis with MS Excel by Conard Carlberg, Pearson Education
3 Supplement
ary Reading
Material
1. http://prezi.com/recyyolzxm3e/how-to-create-a-great-prezi/
2. http://chandoo.org/wp/excel-dashboards/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
63
4 Websites 1. http://www.lifeoptimizer.org/2010/07/05/productivity-tools/
2. http://toshibathrivetabletreview.com/how_tablet_pcs_are_actually_great_pro
ductivity_tools
3. http://www.seozap.com/top-10-organizational-content-managementproductivity-
tools
5 Journals 1. http://www.inderscience.com/browse/index.php?journalID=177
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
64
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 214 Type Elective
Course Title Foreign Language – II
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide the student with listening, reading, speaking and writing skills in chosen foreign
language.
2 To enhance the vocabulary in the selected Foreign Language.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Listening: Understand Simple Questions and Instructions.
Reading: Understand Single Words and Sentences but also Signposts, Signs
and Posters.
Speaking: Provide Short Information about the Job and the Person.
Writing: Fill in Forms and Provide Information About Name, Address,
Nationality etc.
5 + 1
2 Listening: Understand Information about the Person and the Work.
Reading: Understand Simple Letters, Appointments, Invitations and
Information in Short Texts.
Speaking: Answer Simple Questions About One's Working Field.
Writing: Write Faxes and e-mails
5 + 1
3 Listening: Understand Standard Information Related to the Working Field.
Reading: Understand Standard Letters and Texts about Working Processes and
Product Descriptions.
Speaking: Provide Information about the Job, the Departments, the Company,
the Products and Processes in a Conversation or on the Phone.
Writing: Answer Standard Inquiries, Make Quotations, Write Short Texts with
a Familiar Content, Possibly Give Some Explanation and Answer Simple
Questions.
5 + 1
4 Listening: Understand Complex Information Related to the Working Field in
Meetings, Discussions and at Presentations.
Reading: Understand Reports and Contracts with a Company-related Content.
Speaking: Describe and Explain Work Processes and Projects. Report on
Meetings and Presentations. Explain Concepts and Clarify Misunderstandings.
Writing: Write Formal Standard Letters and Texts about One's Field of
Expertise. Explain a Graphic and Reflect the Content.
5 + 1
5 Grammar: Future tense, imperfect tense, degrees of comparison, imperative
mood. Script, Letters of alphabet, accents, sounds of groups of letters,
punctuation marks, articles, nouns, sing./Pl , genders; mas. /fem. Structure of
sentences & types like affirmative, negative interrogative & negative
interrogative, Verbs: classes of verbs and conjugation patterns, Pronominal
verbs; Present tense, The idea of auxiliary verb; prepositions; pronounssubject,
interrogative, relative, possessive, emphatic ; adjectives, adverbs
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
65
Note:
Institute may offer any one of the following foreign languages to the students: SPANISH / FRENCH/
GERMAN/ JAPANESE / CHINESE
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Relevant Standard Text Books, Videos, Audio CDs for the language
offered 2 Reference Books to the students.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites
5 Journals
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
66
Semester II Specialization NA
Course Code 215 Type Elective
Course Title Industry Analysis - Desk Research Work
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To help the students understand the dynamics of a specific industry.
2 To acquaint students with various issues particular to an industry.
3 To provide a cross-functional perspective of the functioning of a business enterprise and an
industry.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Industry Analysis – the Basics:
1.1 Nature of the Industry, Players in the industry.
1.2 Nature of competition from an economist’s perspective.
1.3 Market shares of top 3 & bottom 3 players.
1.4 Possible Classification of players into Leaders, Challengers, Followers,
Nichers.
1.5 Positioning & Differentiation strategies of key players. Branding
strategies.
1.6 Pricing Policies, Cartelization if any and comments thereon.
1.7 Capacity analysis – total capacity of the industry and break up capacity
amongst key players, Planned future capacity additions.
1.8 Geographical spread of plants/facilities/ capacities (Domestics as well
as Global).
1.9 Demand Supply balance in the industry, Key factors affecting demand.
1.10 Key supply side constraints.
1.11 Professional Trade bodies of the Industry.
1.12 Business Functions carried out Online by the key players. Online
presence.
25 + 5
2 Promoters & Management Ethos:
2.1 Background of promoter groups of top 3 and bottom 3 players in the
industry.
2.2 Management ethos and philosophy.
2.3 Brief profiles of CMDs, CEOs, and key top management personnel
with their career highlights.
2.4 Detailed profile of one distinguished top management personnel each
from any two players in the Industry.
2.5 CSR policy.
2.6 Corporate Governance Initiatives.
2.7 Initiatives towards social inclusion.
2.8 Initiatives towards environment conservation.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
67
3 External Environment:
1.1 Controlling ministry and / or regulator if any for the Industry
1.2 Regulatory actions against the players for e.g. Action by SEBI,
Competition Commission of India, MTRP Commission, etc. against
irregularities , legal violations if any.
1.3 Regulatory Policies at the state, national and global level and their
impact on the industry as a whole with analysis of impact on top 3
players.
1.4 Key National and Global issues affecting the industry.
1.5 Key initiatives by the Government to promote the industry.
1.6 Environmental issues.
4 Financials:
4.1 Profitability, Revenues, Margins of top 3 & bottom 3 players over the
last 3 years and trends/changes therein.
4.2 Sick players if any and their turnaround strategies, if any.
4.3 Key factors contributing to costs.
4.4 Ratio analysis of financial data for last 3 years for top 5 and bottom 5
companies in the industry.
5 Recent Developments:
5.1 Impact of key relevant provisions of the latest Fiscal policy on the
industry and various players therein.
5.2 Analysis of Key relevant provisions of latest Exim Policy in case of
industries that are focused on Global Markets for exports or industries
that have significant import components.
5.3 Key Alliances in the past 5 years and their performance & impact on
other players in the industry.
5.4 Mergers & Acquisitions, if any.
5.5 Technological developments.
5.6 Labour unrest if any – reasons thereof and impact on the particular
player and the industry as a whole.
5.7 Emerging first generation entrepreneurs, if any, in the industry.
5.8 Corporate wars & feuds in the industry, if any.
Note:
1. Students should work in groups of 3 to 5 each under the guidance of a faculty.
2. Students shall study various aspects of any TWO industries (group of similar business entities) of
their choice.
3. Focus shall be the comparative and historical analysis across the players in the industry.
4. Students shall submit a structured detailed report.
The evaluation shall be made by a panel of two examiners. One of the examiners shall be the Internal
Faculty. The other examiner may be an external faculty or a person from the relevant industry. The
evaluation shall be based on the following criteria:
a) Report – 20 Marks
b) Presentation – 15 Marks
c) Question & Answer – 15 Marks
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books --
2 Reference Books --
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
68
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Annual reports of various companies
2. Economic Times
3. Business Standard
4. Business Line
5. Business Today
6. Business India
4 Websites 1. Websites of various companies
2. Websites of various ministries of the Government of India
3. Websites of various trade bodies
4. Websites of stock exchanges
5 Journals 1. Economic and Political Weekly
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
69
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER III
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
70
Semester III Specialization NA
Course Code 301 Type Core
Course Title Strategic Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To expose participants to various perspectives and concepts in the field of Strategic Management
2 To help participants develop skills for applying these concepts to the solution of business problems
3 To help students master the analytical tools of strategic management.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Understanding Strategy: Concept of strategy, Corporate, Business and
Functional Levels of Strategy
1.2 Introduction to Strategic Management: Meaning and Characteristics of
strategic management, strategic management Vs operational management
1.3 Four Phases in Strategic Management Process: Stakeholders in business
and their roles in strategic management
1.4 Hierarchy of Strategic Intent: Meaning & attributes of strategic intent,
Meaning of Vision, Process of envisioning, Meaning of mission, difference
between vision & mission, characteristics of good mission statements, Business
definition using Abell’s three dimensions, objectives and goals, Linking
objectives to mission & vision. Critical success factors (CSF), Key Performance
Indicators (KPI), Key Result Areas (KRA)
1.5 Analyzing Company’s External Environment: Environmental appraisal
Scenario planning – Preparing an Environmental Threat and Opportunity
Profile (ETOP)
1.6 Analyzing Industry Environment: Industry Analysis - Porter’s Five
Forces Model of competition, Entry & Exit Barriers, Strategic Group analysis
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
71
2 2.1 Analyzing Company’s Internal Environment: Resource based view of a
firm, meaning, types & sources of competitive advantage, analyzing
Company’s Resources and Competitive Position, VRIO Framework,
competitive advantage, competitive parity & competitive disadvantage, Core
Competence, characteristics of core competencies, Distinctive competitiveness,
Benchmarking as a method of comparative analysis
2.2 Value Chain Analysis Using Porter’s Model: primary & secondary
activities
2.3 Organizational Capability Profile: Strategic Advantage Profile,
Concepts of stretch, leverage & fit, ways of resource leveraging –concentrating,
accumulating, complementing, conserving, recovering
2.4 Portfolio Analysis: Business Portfolio Analysis - BCG Matrix – GE 9 Cell
Model
7+ 2
3 3.1 Generic Competitive Strategies: Meaning of generic competitive strategies,
Low cost, Differentiation, Focus – when to use which strategy
3.2 Grand Strategies: Stability, Growth (Diversification Strategies, Vertical
Integration Strategies, Mergers, Acquisition & Takeover Strategies, Strategic
Alliances & Collaborative Partnerships), Retrenchment – Turnaround,
Divestment, Liquidation, Outsourcing Strategies
7 + 2
4 4.1 Strategy Implementation: Components of a strategic plan, barriers to
implementation of strategy, Mintzberg’s 5 Ps – Deliberate & Emergent
Strategies , Mc Kinsey’s 7s Framework
4.2 Organization Structures for Strategy Implementation: entrepreneurial,
functional, divisional, SBU, Matrix, Network structures, Cellular/ Modular
organization, matching structure to strategy, organizational design for stable
Vs turbulent environment,
4.3 Changing Structures & Processes: Reengineering & strategy
implementation – Principles of Reengineering, Six Sigma – Process consisting of
defining, measuring, analyzing, improving & establishing steps, Lean Six
Sigma (Concepts only)
4.4 Corporate Culture: Building Learning organizations, promoting
participation through technique of Management by Objectives (MBO), Total
Quality Management (TQM)
4.5 Strategy Evaluation: Operations Control and Strategic Control - Symptoms
of malfunctioning of strategy –Use of Balanced Scorecard for strategy
evaluation
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
72
5 5.1 Blue Ocean Strategy: Difference between blue & red ocean strategies,
principles of blue ocean strategy, Strategy Canvass & Value Curves, Four
Action framework
5.2 Business Models: Meaning & components of business models, new
business models for Internet Economy – E-Commerce Business Models and
Strategies – Internet Strategies for Traditional Business –Virtual Value Chain
5.3 Sustainability & Strategic Management: Threats to sustainability,
Integrating Social & environmental sustainability issues in strategic
management, meaning of triple bottom line, people-planet-profits.
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Strategic Management and Business Policy by Azhar Kazmi, Tata
McGraw-Hill, Third Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Strategic Management by Ireland, Hoskisson & Hitt, Indian Edition,
Cengage Learning, 2008 Edition
2. Crafting and Executing Strategy- The Quest for Competitive Advantage
by Thompson, Strickland, Gamble & Jain, Tata McGraw-Hill, 16th
Edition
3. Concepts in Strategic Management & Business Policy by Thomas L.
Wheelen & J. David Hunger, Pearson, 12th ed.,
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Essentials, Harvard Business Press, 2011 Edition
2. Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industries and
Competitors by Michael E. Porter, First Free Press Edition, 1980
3. Competing for the Future by Gary Hamel & C.K. Prahlad, TMGH.
4. Blue Ocean Strategy by Kim & Mauborgne
4 Websites 1. http://www.thepalladiumgroup.com
2. http://www.mckinsey.com
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
73
5 Journals 1. Managing Core Competence of the Organization by Srivastava, Shirish
C., Vikalpa: The Journal for Decision Makers, Oct-Dec2005, Vol. 30
Issue 4
2. Core Competence, Distinctive Competence, and Competitive
Advantage: What Is the Difference? by Mooney, Ann. Journal of
Education for Business, Nov/Dec2007, Vol. 83 Issue 2
3. The Five Competitive Forces That Shape Strategy by Porter, Michael E.,
Harvard Business Review, Jan2008, Vol. 86 Issue 1
4. Strategy & Society: The Link Between Competitive Advantage and
Corporate Social Responsibility by Porter, Michael E.; Kramer, Mark R.,
Harvard Business Review, Dec2006, Vol. 84 Issue 12
5. From Competitive Advantage to Corporate Strategy by Porter, Michael
E., McKinsey Quarterly, Spring88, Issue 2
6. Strategy and the Internet by Porter, Michael E., Harvard Business
Review, Mar2001, Vol. 79 Issue 3
7. What Is Strategy? by Porter, Michael E., Harvard Business Review,
Nov/Dec96, Vol. 74 Issue 6
8. The Strategy Concept I: Five Ps For Strategy by Mintzberg, Henry.,
California Management Review, Fall1987, Vol. 30 Issue 1
9. The Strategy Concept II: Another Look at Why Organizations Need
Strategies by Mintzberg, Henry. , California Management Review,
Fall1987, Vol. 30 Issue 1
10. The Pitfalls of Strategic Planning by Mintzberg, Henry., California
Management Review, Fall1993, Vol. 36 Issue 1
11. Crafting strategy by Mintzberg, Henry; Hunsicker, J. Quincy. ,
McKinsey Quarterly, Summer88, Issue 3
12. The GE-McKinsey Nine-box Framework, McKinsey Quarterly, 2008,
Issue 4
13. Reliance Telecom: Related or Unrelated Diversification? A Case Study
by Sen, Subir., South Asian Journal of Management, Apr-Jun2011, Vol.
18 Issue 2
14. Competing Today While Preparing for Tomorrow by Abell, Derek F.,
Sloan Management Review, Spring99, Vol. 40 Issue 3
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
74
Semester III Specialization NA
Course Code 302 Type Core
Course Title Enterprise Performance Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To acquaint the students with a perspective of different facets of management of an enterprise
2 To provide inputs with reference to the Investment Decisions along with the techniques for those
decisions
3 To inculcate the evaluation parameters of enterprise in terms of expenses, control systems and
pricing
4 To develop the knowledge of the concept of auditing and its applicability as performance
management tool
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Performance Management: Concept, Need, Linkages with Strategic
Planning, Management Control and Operational Control
1.2 Performance Evaluation Parameters: Financial – Responsibility Accounting
–Concept of Responsibility Centers, Revenue Centre, Expense Centre -
Engineered and Discretionary costs – Committed costs, Profit Centre,
Investment Centres. ROI, ROA, MVA, EVA – DuPont analysis. (Numericals
Not expected – Interpretation only) Limitations of Financial Measures
1.3 Performance Evaluation Parameters: Non-Financial Performance measures
– Balanced Scorecard, Malcolm Baldrige Framework.
1.4 Measuring SBU Level Performance: Concept, Need, Linkages with
Enterprise Performance Management – Goal Congruence. Transfer Pricing –
Objective, Concept, Methods – Cost based, Market price based & Negotiated,
Applicability of Transfer Pricing.
7 + 2
2 2.1 Capital Expenditure Control: Concept, Need, Process of Capital Budgeting,
Types of capital expenditure decisions – pre-sanction, operational and postsanction
control of capital expenditure.
2.2 Tools & Techniques of Capital Expenditure Control: Performance Index,
Technical Performance Measurement, Post completion audit
7 + 2
3 3.1 Performance Evaluation Parameters for Banks: Customer Base, NPAs,
Deposits, RoI, Financial Inclusion, Spread, Credit Appraisal, Investments.
3.2 Performance Evaluation Parameters for Retail: ABC analysis, Sell Through
Analysis, Multiple Attribute Method, Gross Margin Return on Investment
(GMROI), GMROI as Gross Margin/Average Inventory at Cost
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
75
4 4.1 Performance Evaluation Parameters for Projects: Project Control Process:
Setting base line plan, Measuring progress and performance, comparing plan
against action, Taking action, Schedule variance (time overruns), Project Cost
Variance (cost overruns)
4.2 Performance Evaluation Parameters for Non-Profit: Features of Non-profit
organizations, fund accounting, governance, product pricing, strategic
planning & budget preparations, social audit.
7 + 2
5 5.1 Audit Function as a Performance Measurement Tool: Financial Audit,
Internal Audit, Cost Audit, Management Audit – Principles and Objectives
(Audit Reports / Formats are expected to be discussed in the class from a
performance measurement perspective).
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Management Control System by Robert Anthony & Vijay Govindrajan,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 12th Edition
2. Management Control in Non Profit Organizations by Robert Anthony
& David Young, McGraw Hill International Publication, 7th Edition
3. Retailing Management by Swapna Pradhan, TMGH, 3rd Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Project Management by K.Nagarajan, New Age International
Publications, 2nd Edition
2. Principles and Practices of Auditing by Ravindar Kumar & Virendar
Sharma, PHI.
3. Principles and Practices of Banking by Indian Institute of Banking &
Finance, MacMillan India Ltd.
4. Financial Management by Prasanna Chandra, TMGH, 7th edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Management Control Systems by R.C. Sekhar, TMGH
4 Websites - -
5 Journals 1. IUP journal of Business strategy- by ICWFI
2. Enterprise and Society- International journal of business history by
Oxford University.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
76
Semester III Specialization NA
Course Code 303 Type Core
Course Title Startup and New Venture Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To instill a spirit of entrepreneurship can be inculcated among the student participants.
2 To provide an overview of the competences are needed to become an entrepreneur
3 To give insights into the Management of Small Family Business
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number of
Sessions
1 1.1 Concept and Definitions: Entrepreneur & Entrepreneurship,
Entrepreneurship and Economic Development; A Typology of
Entrepreneurs;
1.2 Entrepreneurial Competencies: The Entrepreneur’s Role, Task and
Personality -
Entrepreneurial Skills: creativity, problem solving, decision making,
communication, leadership quality; McClelland’s N-Ach theory, self –
analysis, personal efficacy, culture & values, risk-taking behaviour,
technology backup.
1.3 Factor Affecting Entrepreneurial Growth: Economic, Non-Economic
Factors; EDP Programmes; Entrepreneurial Training;
1.4 Traits/Qualities of an Entrepreneurs: Entrepreneur; Manager Vs.
Entrepreneur, The Early Career Dilemmas of an Entrepreneur, Defining
Survival and Success , Entrepreneurship as a Style of Management , The
Entrepreneurial Venture and the Entrepreneurial Organization.
Entrepreneurial Process
1.5 Steps of entrepreneurial process : Deciding – Developing – Moving –
Managing – Recognizing
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
77
2 2.1 Opportunity / Identification and Product Selection: Entrepreneurial
Opportunity Search and Identification;
2.2 Product Selection: Criteria to Select a Product
2.3 Conducting Feasibility Studies: Project Finalization; Sources of
Information.
2.4 Entry strategies: New product, Franchising, Partial Momentum,
Sponsorship and Acquisition
2.5 Intellectual Property: Creation and Protection
7 + 2
3 3.1 Small Enterprises and Enterprise Launching Formalities:
Definition of Small Scale; Rationale; Objective; Scope; Role of SME in
Economic Development of India; SME; Registration; NOC from Pollution
Board; Machinery and Equipment Selection
3.2 Project Report Preparation: Specimen of Project Report; Project
Planning and Scheduling using Networking Techniques of PERT / CPM;
Methods of Project Appraisal - economic viability and market feasibility,
requirements of financial institutions, projected financial statement
preparation.
7 + 2
4 4.1 Role of Support Institutions and Management of Small Business:
Director of Industries; DIC; SIDO; SIDBI; Small Industries Development
Corporation (SIDC); SISI; NSIC; NISBUED; State Financial Corporation SFC;
Information : assistance from different organizations in setting up a new
venture, technology parks, industrial corporations, directorate of industries
/ cottage and small scale industries, SISI, Khadi & Village Industries
Corporation / Board.
DGS & DNSIC, export & import, how to apply for assistance – procedure,
forms, procedures for obtaining contract from Railways, Defence, P & T etc.,
SIDBI.
4.2 Laws : Liabilities under the Factories Act, Shops & Establishment Act,
Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, Environment Protection Act,
Sale of Goods Act, maintenance & submission of statutory records & returns,
understanding labour - management relationship
7 + 2
5 Case Studies : Diagnostic case studies of successful / unsuccessful
entrepreneurs, key variables explaining success /failures, industrial sickness,
industrial reconstruction, technology obsolescence, technology, transfer.
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
78
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. The Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development & Management by
Desai, Vasant , Himalaya Publishing House, Delhi
2. Managing Small Business by Longenecker, Moore, Petty and Palich,
Cengage Learning, India Edition.
3. Cases in Entrepreneurship by Morse and Mitchell, Sage South Asia
Edition.
4. Entrepreneurship – Indian Cases on Change Agents by K
Ramchandran, TMGH.
5. Entrepreneurship – The engine of growth, edited by Mark Rice and
Timothy Habbershon, Published by Praeger Perspectives.
6. Entrepreneurship: Theory, Process and Practice by Kuratko, D.F. &
Hodgetts, R.M. Thomson Press.
7. Entrepreneurship Development: Small Business Enterprises by
Charantimath, P. , Pearson.
8. A Guide to Entrepreneurship by David, Otes , Jaico Books Publishing
House, Delhi.
9. Indian Entrepreneurial Culture by A Gupta , New Age International.
2 Reference Books 1. Entrepreneurship: New Venture Creation by David H. Holt
2. Entrepreneurship Development New Venture Creation by Satish
Taneja, S.L.Gupta
3. Project management by K. Nagarajan.
4. Entrepreneurship: Strategies and Resources by Marc J. Dollinger
5. The Culture of Entrepreneurship by Brigitte Berger.
6. Entrepreneurship by Robert D. Hisrich, Michael P. Peters, Dean A.
Shepherd
7. Entrepreneurship As Strategy by G. Dale Meyer, Kurt A. Heppard
8. New Vistas of Entrepreneurship: Challenges & Opportunities by A.
Sahay, M.S.Chhikara
9. Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management by Siropolis
10. Lead like an Entrepreneur by Neal Thornberry
11. Make The Move: Demystifying Entrepreneurship by Ishan Gupta, Rajat
Khare
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Creation of Wealth - A Tata Story by R M Lala , IBM Publishing
2. B K Birla : A Rare Legacy, Image Inc.
3. Family Business in India by Sudipta Dutta
4. Innovation and Entrepreneurship by Peter F. Drucker
5. You Too Can Become an Entrepreneur by Nalinaksha Mutsuddi
6. Intrapreneurship by Gifford Pinchot III
7. The Entrepreneurial Connection by Gurmeet Naroola
8. Thought Leaders by Steven Brandt.
9. Corporate Entrepreneurship by Vijay Sathe
10. Corporate Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneurial Development Inside
Organizations by Michael H.Morris, Donald F.Kuratko
4 Websites 1. www.nenonline.org/
2. www.tie.org/
5 Journals 1. Journal Of Entrepreneurship Development
2. International Journal of Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation
3. Entrepreneurship
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
79
Semester III Specialization NA
Course Code 304 Type Core
Course Title SUMMER INTERNSHIP PROJECT
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) NA
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions NA
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions NA
Course Objectives:
1 To offer the opportunity for the young students to acquire on job the skills, knowledge, attitudes,
and perceptions along with the experience needed to constitute a professional identity.
2 To provide means to immerse students in actual supervised professional experiences
3 To give an insight into the working of the real organizations.
4 To gain deeper understanding in specific functional areas.
5 To appreciate the linkages among different functions and departments
6 To develop perspective about business organizations in their totality
7 To help the students in exploring career opportunities in their areas of interest
Summer Internship Project: At the end of Second Semester each student shall undertake a Summer
Internship Project (SIP) for 8 weeks or 50 working days. The SIP may or may not have a Functional
Focus, i.e. the student may take up a SIP in the intended area of specialization or in any functional area of
management. The student shall submit a written structured report based on work done during this
period.
Such projects may be research project – based on primary / secondary data or may be an operational
assignment involving working by the student on a given task/assignment/project/ etc.
The report should be well documented and supported by –
1. organizational profile,
2. outline of the problem/task undertaken,
3. relevant activity charts,
4. tables, graphs, diagrams,
5. references.
It should reflect the nature and quantum of work undertaken by the student. The report must reflect 400
man-hours of work and justify the same. The learning outcomes and utility to the organization must be
specifically highlighted. This shall sensitize the students to the demands of the work place.
The completion of the SIP shall be certified by the Faculty Guide & approved by the Director of the
Institute. The external organization (Corporate / NGO/ SME/ etc.) shall also certify the SIP work.
The student shall submit TWO hard copies & one soft copy (CD) of the project report before 30th
September in Sem III. The report may be printed on both sides of the paper.
The Institute shall conduct an Internal viva-voce for evaluation of the SIP for 50 marks. The Panel shall
comprise of the Internal Faculty Guide & One faculty nominated by the Director. There shall be an
external viva-voce for the SIP for 50 marks.
The examiner’s panel for the same shall include one external faculty member nominated by the
University and one internal faculty member nominated by the Director.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
80
The Internal & the External viva-voce shall evaluate the project based on:
1. Actual work undertaken by the student
2. Student’s understanding of the organization and business environment
3. Outcome of the project
4. Utility of the project to the organization
5. Basic analytical capabilities
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
81
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER III
MARKETING MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
82
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 305MKT Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Contemporary Marketing Research
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To give the students an understanding of marketing research from both user's (management) and
doer's (the researchers) perspective.
2 To design and produce, evaluate a research proposal & understand the quality of research studies.
3 To learn the basic skills to conduct professional marketing research.
4 To understand the applications of business research tools in Marketing decision making.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Marketing Research & Applications of Research Designs
1.1 Meaning & role of Marketing Research, Role of Information in Marketing
Decisions, Marketing Research – Sequence of Steps, Meaning & Types of
Research Designs – Exploratory, Descriptive & Causal, concept of validity
& reliability of a research study
1.2 Problem Formulation, The decision maker & the environment, alternative
courses of action, objectives of decision maker, consequences of alternative
courses of action, Translating decision problem to research problem,
Preparing & Evaluating Marketing Research proposal.
1.3 Formulating hypotheses using exploratory research techniques like
literature survey, experience survey & analysis of cases. Meaning of
Qualitative research & applications of Depth Interviews & Focus Groups in
marketing
1.4 Applications of longitudinal studies in consumer panels, retail shop audit,
media audience tracking studies like TRP, brand tracking studies
6+2
2 Data Collection – Questionnaires & Scaling
2.1 Designing questionnaires & observation forms for different marketing
research situations – study of consumer behavior, advertising copy
research, media research like readership surveys, opinion polls, retail
surveys to understand market potential, channel behavior, mystery
shopping etc
2.2 Scale Construction, Specifying domain, generating scale items, Basic
Scaling Issues like number of scale points, odd number Vs even number of
options, balanced Vs unbalanced scale, forced Vs unforced scale, verbal &
pictorial description of response categories
2.3 Scale Purification Process, Deleting scale items using correlations with total
score, Reliability Testing using Chronbach Alpha, Validity Testing – Face
Validity, Content Validity, Construct Validity, Convergent Validity &
Discriminant Validity
2.4 Applications of Likert, Semantic Differential & Staple Scales for positioning
research, brand research, attitudinal studies, customer satisfaction research
8+2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
83
3 Experimental Designs & Sampling
3.1 Experimentation in Marketing Research, Basic/ classical designs: before –
after, before – after with control group, after only with control group, four
group – six study design. (Applications expected with interpretation of
data)
3.2 Statistical Designs, Randomized Block Design, Latin Square Design,
Factorial Design, Applications related to Test Marketing , study of
effectiveness of advertising & sales promotional campaigns
3.3 Case studies on sampling decisions like defining universe, sampling unit,
sampling element, choice of sampling frame, determining sample size for
probability & non-probability sampling methods & choice of final sample
by using appropriate sampling methods in a step by step manner
6+2
4 Data Analysis – I
4.1 Testing hypothesis for one mean, two means, two proportions. (Numerical
expected with practical examples)
4.2 Chi Square Test, Observed & Expected Frequencies, ANOVA – One & Two
way (numerical expected with practical examples)
4.3 Conjoint Analysis, Conceptual basis, procedure, type of data required, key
decision, how to interpret output, applications to study trade off patterns of
consumers as related to different levels of marketing mix elements
(Question on interpretation of output is expected)
4.4 Factor Analysis, Conceptual basis, type of data required, procedure, PCA,
Interpreting factor matrix (factor loadings, communalities, Eigen value),
determining number of factors using latent root criteria & scree test,
interpreting & naming factors, applications in consumer behavior studies
(Question on interpretation of output is expected)
5 Data Analysis – II
5.1 Cluster Analysis, Conceptual basis, type of data required, procedure,
clustering methods – single linkage rule, how to interpret output,
applications related to psychographic & lifestyle market segmentation
(Question on interpretation of output is expected)
5.2 Multi- dimensional Scaling & Perceptual Mapping, Conceptual basis, type
of data required, key decision- attribute based versus non-attribute based
approaches, procedure, how to interpret output, applications related to
target market selection & positioning (Question on interpretation of output
is expected)
5.3 Discriminant Analysis (Two Group Case), Conceptual basis, type of data
required, determining the coefficients, interpreting discriminant function &
classifying subjects using discriminant function, applications in marketing
(Question on interpretation of output is expected)
8+2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Marketing Research - An Applied Orientation by Malhotra and Dash,
Pearson Education.
2. Marketing Research by Churchill, Jr, G.A. and D. Iacobucci (2005), South
Western: Thomson, 9th Edition.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
84
2 Reference Books 1. Marketing Research by Boyd, H.P., R. Westfall and S. F. Stasch. (2004),
Delhi: A.I.T.B.S., 7th Edition.
2. Marketing Research by Burns, G.A. and D. Bush (2006), South Western:
Thomson, 9th Edition.
3. Marketing Research by Green, P.E., Tull, D.S. and G. Albaum (2007), New
Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 5th Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Marketing Research by Luck, D.J. and R.S. Rubin (2005), New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India, 7th Edition.
2. Marketing Research by Tull, D.S. and D.I. Hawkins (2004), New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India, 6th Edition.
4 Websites 1. http://www.nielsen.com/in/en.html
2. http://www.ipsos.com/
3. https://www.globalopinionpanels.com/home
4. www.jdpower.com/
5. http://www.ncaer.org/
6. http://www.marketresearch.com/
5 Journals 1. A Paradigm for developing Better Measures of Marketing Constructs, by
Churchill, G. A., Jr. , Journal of Marketing Research, 26 (February) 1979,
pp.64-73.
2. A Comparison of Multidimensional Scaling Methods for Perceptual
Mapping by Bijmolt, Tammo H. A.; Wedel, Michel. Journal of Marketing
Research (JMR). May99, Vol. 36 Issue 2, p277-285.
3. A survey of the challenges and pitfalls of cluster analysis application in
market segmentation by Tuma, Michael N.; Decker, Reinhold; Scholz,
Soren W., International Journal of Market Research. 2011, Vol. 53 Issue 3,
p391-414.
4. Improving the Predictive Power of Conjoint Analysis: The Use of Factor
Analysis and Cluster Analysis by Hagerty, Michael R., Journal of
Marketing Research (JMR). May85, Vol. 22 Issue 2, p168-184.
5. An Examination of the Factors Influencing Consumers' Attitudes Towards
Social Media Marketing by Akar, Erkan; Topcu, Birol., Journal of Internet
Commerce. Jan-Mar2011, Vol. 10 Issue 1, p35-67.
6. Setting Sales Quotas with Conjoint Analysis by Darmon, René Y., Journal
of Marketing Research , Feb1979, Vol. 16 Issue 1, p133-140.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
85
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 306MKT Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Consumer Behaviour
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To highlight the importance of understanding consumer behavior in Marketing.
2 To study the environmental and individual influences on consumers
3 To understand consumer behavior in Indian context.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Environmental Influences on Consumer Behaviour
1.1 Basics: Meaning of Customers & Consumers, Consumer Roles,
Consumerism & De-marketing
1.2 Culture & Sub- Culture: Meaning, Characteristics & Relevance to
Marketing Decisions
1.3 Social Class: Meaning, Measurement, Effect on Lifestyles
1.4 Social Groups: Meaning & Group Properties & Reference Groups
1.5 Family: Family Life Cycle & Purchasing Decisions
1.6 Marketing Mix : Influence of marketing mix variables
10 + 2
2 Individual Determinants of Consumer Behavior
2.1 Personality & Self Concept: Meaning of Personality, Influence on Purchase
Decisions
2.2 Motivation & Involvement: Types of Buying Motives, Motive Hierarchy,
Dimensions of Involvement
2.3 Learning & Memory: Meaning & Principal Elements of Learning,
Characteristics of Memory Systems, Recall
2.4 Attitudes: Meaning & Characteristics, Strategies for Changing Attitudes,
Intensions& Behaviors
9 + 2
3 Consumer Decision Making Process
3.1 Problem Recognition: Types of consumer decisions, types of Problem
Recognition, Utilizing problem recognition information
3.2 Search & Evaluation: Types of information, Sources of Information Search,
Search, Experience and Credence Aspects -Marketing Implications
3.3 Situational Influences on Purchase Decisions
3.4 Purchasing Process: Why do people shop? Store & Non-store Purchasing
Processes, Purchasing Patterns.
3.5 Post-purchase Evaluation & Behavior: Consumer Satisfaction,
Dissatisfaction, Customer Delight, Consumer Complaint Behavior, Post-
Purchase Dissonance.
8 + 2
4 Consumer Behavior Models
4.1 Howard Sheth Model
4.2 Engel – Blackwell – Miniard Model
4 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
86
5 Indian Consumer
5.1 Demographic & Socio-economic Profile
5.2 Measurement of social classes in India using Socio-Economic Classes (SEC)
in Urban & Rural Markets
5.3 Living Standards Measures (LSM).
5.4 Characteristics of BoP Consumers.
4 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Consumer Behaviour by David L. Loudon & Albert J. Della Bitta, Tata
McGraw Hill, 4th Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Consumer Behavior by Leon Schiffman, Leslie Kanuk, S.Ramesh
Kumar, Pearson, 10th Edition
2. Consumer Behaviour by Engel, Blackwell & Miniard
3. Consumer Behavior - An Indian perspective by Dr. S.L Gupta, Sumitra
Pal, Sultan Chand and Sons
4. Consumer Behavior - In Indian Perspective by Suja R. Nair, Himalaya
Publishing House.
5. Why we Buy: The Science of Shopping by Paco Underhill, Simon and
Schuster Paperbacks.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. We are like that only by Rama Bijapurkar, Penguin
2. The Marketing White Book, Business World
3. Economic Times, Business Standard, Mint, Business world.( Brand
equity & Brand wagon)
4 Websites 1. http://www.censusindia.gov.in/default.aspx
2. http://www.ncaer.org/
3. http:// www.consumerpsychologist.com
5 Journals 1. The Disciplinary Status of Consumer Behavior: A Sociology of Science
Perspective on Key Controversies by Macinnis, Deborah J.; Folkes,
Valerie S., Journal of Consumer Research. Apr2010, Vol. 36 Issue 6,
p899-914.
2. Consumer Learning and Its Impact on Store Format Selection- Detail
Only by van Waterschoot, Walter; Kumar Sinha, Piyush; Van Kenhove,
Patrick; De Wulf, Kristof., Journal of Retailing & Consumer Services.
May2008, Vol. 15 Issue 3, p194-210.
3. Interpersonal Influence on ConsumerBehavior: An Attribution Theory
Approach by Calder, Bobby J.; Burnkrant, Robert E. Journal of
Consumer Research. Jun77, Vol. 4 Issue 1, p29-38. 10p.
4. Satisfaction Attributions and Consumer Complaint Behavior by
Krishnan, S.; Valle, Valerie A., Advances in Consumer Research. 1979,
Vol. 6 Issue 1, p 445-449.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
87
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 307MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Integrated Marketing Communications
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide an overview of the range of tools available for Marketing Communications
2 To provide an understanding of the basic principles of planning and execution in Marketing
Communications
3 To acquaint the students with concepts and techniques in the application for developing and
designing an effective advertising and sales promotion program.
4 To sensitize students to the various facets of advertising, public relation and promotion
management.
5 To develop a managerial perspective and an informed decision-marking ability for effective and
efficient tackling of promotional situations.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction of IMC: IMC; IMC components – the foundation, advertising
tools, promotional tools, integrated tools, refining the IMC program; The Value
of IMC plans – information technology, changes in channel power, increase in
competition, brand parity, integration of information, decline in the
effectiveness of mass-media advertising; The role of IMC
5 + 1
2 Advertising: Overview of advertising management; Advertising and IMC
process; Choosing an advertising agency; Advertising planning and research;
Advertising goals – building brand images, providing information, persuasion,
supporting marketing efforts, encouraging action; Advertising budget; Media
Selection; The Creative Brief – objective, target audience, message theme,
support, constraints; Advertising design; Advertising media selection.
5 + 1
3 Sales Promotion: The scope and role of sales promotion; Consumer oriented
sales promotion; Trade oriented sales promotion; Coordinating sales promotion
and advertising; Sales promotion abuse; Personal selling
5 + 1
4 Public Relations, Publicity and Corporate Adverting: Public Relations
Publicity and Corporate adverting; Public Relations functions; Creating
positive image building activities; Preventing or reducing image damage;
sponsorship and event marketing; Role of internet in PR.
5 + 1
5 Evaluation Monitoring and Control: Measuring the effectiveness of
promotional program; Conducting research to measure advertising
effectiveness; Testing process; Establishing the program for measuring the
advertising effects; Measuring the effectiveness of other program elements
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
88
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing Communication by
Clow, Kenneth & Black, Donald, Pearson Education, New Delhi.
2. Advertising and Promotion by Belch, George and Belch, Michael, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2 Reference Books 1. Advertising Management by Jethwaney, Jaishree and Jain, Shruti,
Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Advertising Principles and Practice by Wells, William, Burnett, John ad
Moriarty, Sandra, Pearson Education, New Delhi.
4 Websites 1. http://www.ascionline.org/
2. http://www.aaaindia.org/
3. http://www.jpssm.org/
5 Journals 1. The Evolution of IMC: IMC in a Customer-driven Marketplace, by
Schultz, Don E., Patti, Charles H. Journal of Marketing
Communications. Apr2009, Vol. 15 Issue 2/3, p75-84.
2. Comparing the Application of Integrated Marketing Communication
(IMC) In Magazine Ads across Product Type and Time, by Grove,
Stephen J., Carlson, Les, Dorsch, Michael J. Journal of Advertising.
Spring2007, Vol. 36 Issue 1, p37-54.
3. The Brand Capability Value of Integrated Marketing Communication
(IMC), by Ratnatunga, Janek, Ewing, Michael T. Journal of Advertising.
Winter2005, Vol. 34 Issue 4, p25-40
4. Performance Auditing of Integrated Marketing Communication (IMC)
Actions and Outcomes, by Reid, Mike. Journal of Advertising.
Winter2005, Vol. 34 Issue 4, p41-54
5. Integrated Marketing Communication (IMC) and Brand Identity As
Critical Components Of Brand Equity Strategy, by Madhavaram,
Sreedhar, Badrinarayanan, Vishag, McDonald, Robert E. Journal of
Advertising. Winter2005, Vol. 34 Issue 4, p69-80
6. IMC: Has anything really changed? A new perspective on an old
definition, by Luck, Edwina, Moffatt, Jennifer. Journal of Marketing
Communications. Dec2009, Vol. 15 Issue 5, p311-325.
7. Perceptions of IMC after a Decade of Development: Who's at the Wheel,
and How Can We Measure Success? By Swain, William N., Journal of
Advertising Research. Mar2004, Vol. 44 Issue 1, p46-65.
8. The Self-Activation Effect of Advertisements: Ads Can Affect Whether
and How Consumers Think about the Self by Trampe, Debra, Stapel,
Diederik A., Siero, Frans W. Journal of Consumer Research. Apr2011,
Vol. 37 Issue 6, p1030-1045
9. How Advertising Affects Sales: Meta-Analysis of Econometric Results
by Assmus, Gert, Farley, John U., Lehmann, Donald R. Journal of
Marketing Research (JMR). Feb1984, Vol. 21 Issue 1, p65-74.
10. The March to Reliable Metrics by Smit, Edith G., Neijens, Peter C.
Journal of Advertising Research. Mar2011 Supplement, Vol. 51, p124-
135.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
89
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 308MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Product Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To make the students appreciate the various facets of the job of a product manager.
2 To highlight the strategic role of product management in organizational and functional context.
3 To emphasize the financial and other metrics of effective product management.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Product Management:
1.1 Product management as a basis of marketing organization structure.
1.2 Role of product manager, skills required for product management.
1.3 Product management in consumer product industry Vs industrial product
industry.
1.4 Overview of product level marketing plans
3 + 1
2 Defining Competitive Set & Category Attractiveness Analysis
2.1 Levels of Market Competition & Its Product Strategy Implications: product
form level, product category level, generic level, budget competition
2.2 Methods of Determining Competitors: managerial judgment & customer
based measures, competitor selection, sources of competitor information –
primary & secondary sources
2.3 Assessing competitors’ current objectives & strategies, differential
advantage analysis, Predicting competitors’ future strategies.
2.4 Category attractiveness analysis through aggregate market factors &
category factors
6 + 1
3 Understanding Consumer Needs & Converting into Products
3.1 Capturing consumer voice , converting it into ideas, concepts & products,
Using QFD & Kano diagram for new product development, Selecting
product – price performance levels,
3.2 New Product Failure
5 + 1
4 Developing Product Strategy:
4.1 Elements of a product strategy, setting objectives, selection of strategic
alternatives – increasing sales, market share, profitability
4.2 Packaging & Labeling design
4.3 Positioning: Choice of customer targets, competitor targets & core strategy
– cost/price, non-price strategies
4.4 Product strategy over the life cycle – strategies for introduction, growth,
maturity & decline stages
6 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
90
5 Financial Analysis & Performance Appraisal for Product Management
5.1 Sales Analysis: Overview, Value of sales analysis, roadblocks.
5.2 Profitability Analysis: Conventional product profit accounting,
Contribution oriented systems, Using the contribution margin rate.
5.3 Strategic Framework for Control: Price-quantity decomposition, penetration
– Market size decomposition
5.4 Capital Budgeting for Product Strategy: Overview and Basics
5.5 Marketing Metrics: Customer Based Metrics, Product-Market Based Metrics,
Marketing Mix Metrics, Web Metrics.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Product Management by Lehmann & Winer, TMGH, 4th Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Product Management by Dr. C. Anandan, TMGH
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Selling Blue Elephants by Moskowitz and Gofman, Wharton School
Publishing, Pearson Power.
2. Twenty-one Immutable Laws of Marketing by Ries & Trout
4 Websites 1. http://www.entrepreuner.com/
2. http://www. ibef.org/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
91
5 Journals 1. A Combined QFD and Integer Programming Framework to Determine
Attribute Levels for Conjoint Study by Chaudhuri, Atanu;
Bhattacharyya, Malay., International Journal of Production Research.
Dec2009, Vol. 47 Issue 23, p6633-6649.
2. The Application of Quality Function Deployment (QFD) in Product
Development - The Case Study of Taiwan Hypermarket Building by
Shih-Shue Sher., Journal of American Academy of Business,
Cambridge. Mar2006, Vol. 8 Issue 2, p292-295.
3. QFD Analysis: From Customer Needs to Design Specs by Gould,
Lawrence S., Automotive Design & Production. Jun2006, Vol. 118 Issue
6, p56-57.
4. Virtual Product Experience and Customer Participation—A Chance for
Customer-centred, Really New Products by Füller, Johann; Matzler,
Kurt., Technovation. Jun/Jul2007, Vol. 27 Issue 6/7, p378-387.
5. Developing New-to-the-Firm Products: The Role of Micro-political
Strategies by Sethi, Rajesh; Iqbal, Zafar; Sethi, Anju., Journal of
Marketing. Mar2012, Vol. 76 Issue 2, p99-115. 17p. 1
6. The Impact of Product Market Strategy-Organizational Culture Fit on
Business Performance by Yarbrough, Larry; Morgan, Neil; Vorhies,
Douglas., Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science. Aug2011, Vol.
39 Issue 4, p555-573
7. Transforming the Nature and Scope of New Product Development by
Pitta, Dennis; Pitta, Elizabeth., Journal of Product & Brand
Management. 2012, Vol. 21 Issue 1, p35-46. 12p
8. Why Most Product Launches Fail? by Schneider, Joan; Hall, Julie.
Harvard Business Review. Apr2011, Vol. 89 Issue 4, p21-23.
9. Do You Need a New Product-Development Strategy? by MacCormack,
Alan; Crandall, William; Henderson, Paul; Toft, Peter., Research
Technology Management. Jan/Feb2012, Vol. 55 Issue 1, p34-43.
10. The Impact of the Corporate Mind-set on New Product Launch Strategy
and Market Performance by Talke, Katrin; Hultink, Erik Jan., Journal of
Product Innovation Management. Mar2010, Vol. 27 Issue 2, p220-237.
11. Evolution of Firms' Product Strategy Over the Lifecycle of Technology-
Based Industries: A Case Study of the Global Mobile Phone Industry,
1980-2009 by Giachetti, Claudio; Marchi, Gianluca., Business History.
Dec 2010, Vol. 52 Issue 7, p1123-1150.
12. Competitive Strategies For NewProduct Marketing Over The Life Cycle
by Kotler, Philip., Management Science. Dec1965, Vol. 12 Issue 4, pB-
104-B-119.
13. Assessing Marketing Performance: Don't Settle for a Silver Metric by
Ambler, Tim; Roberts, John H. Journal of Marketing Management.
Sep2008, Vol. 24 Issue 7/8, p733-750.
14. Marketing and Firm Value: Metrics, Methods, Findings, and Future
Directions by Srinivasan, Shuba; Hanssens, Dominique M. Journal of
Marketing Research (JMR). Jun2009, Vol. 46 Issue 3, p293-312. 20p.
15. Taking on the Metrics Challenge by Patterson, Laura. Journal of
Targeting, Measurement & Analysis for Marketing. Sep2007, Vol. 15
Issue 4, p270-276. 7p. 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
92
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 309MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Strategic Brand Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To introduce different approaches to measuring brand equity.
2 To provide conceptual framework for managing brands strategically.
3 To emphasize the role of brands, the concept of brand equity and the advantages of creating strong
brands.
4 To provide insights into how to create profitable brand strategies by building, measuring and
managing brand equity.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Introduction to Brand Management: What is a brand? Why do brands
matter? Branding challenges and opportunities , Brand equity concept ,
Strategic brand management process , Identifying and establishing brand
positioning, Planning and implementing brand marketing programs,
Measuring and interpreting brand performance, Growing and sustain brand
equity
1.2 Brand Equity Models: Brand Asset Valuation, Aaker Model, BRANDZ ,
Brand Resonance
6 + 1
2 2.1 Identifying and Establishing Brand Positioning and Values: Customer
based Brand equity , Brand knowledge, Sources of brand equity - Brand
Awareness, Brand Image, The Four steps of brand building, Creating customer
value, Identifying andestablishing brand positioning, Positioning guidelines
5 + 1
3 3.1 Planning and Implementing Brand Marketing Programs: Choosing brand
elements to build brand equity, Options and tactics for Brand, New
perspectives on marketing, Integrating marketing communication to build
brand equity, Conceptualizing the leveraging process, Co- branding, Celebrity
Endorsements
5 + 1
4 4.1 Measuring and Interpreting Brand Performance: The brand value chain,
Designing brand tracking studies, Capturing customer mind set through
quantitative research techniques
4 + 1
5 5.1 Growing and Sustaining Brand Equity: Brand architecture, Brand
hierarchy, Designing brand strategy, New products, Brand extensionsadvantage
and disadvantage, Reinforcing brands, Revitalizing brands, Brand
failures.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Strategic Brand Management by Kevin Lane Keller, Pearson, 3rd Edition
2. Strategic Brand Management by J N Kapferer, Kogan Page, 4th Edition.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
93
2 Reference Books 1. Building Brand Equity by Aaker
2. Branding Concepts & Process by Debashish Pati
3. Brand Positioning Strategies for Competitive Advantage by Subrato Sen
Gupta
4. Managing Indian Brands by S. Ramesh Kumar
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Economic Times – Weekly Brand Equity Supplement
2. The Financial Express - Weekly Brand Wagon Supplement
3. The Business Standard – Weekly Strategist Supplement
4 Websites 1. http://www.ibef.org/
2. http://www.brandequity.com/
5 Journals 1. How Important Are Brands? A Cross-Category, Cross-Country Study
by Fischer, Marc; Völckner, Franziska; Sattler, Henrik., Journal of
Marketing Research (JMR), Oct2010, Vol. 47 Issue 5.
2. Increasing shareholder value through building Customer and Brand
Equity by Bick, Geoffrey N. C., Journal of Marketing Management,
Feb2009, Vol. 25 Issue 1/2
3. Conceptualizing, Measuring, Managing Customer-Based Brand Equity
by Keller, Kevin Lane., Journal of Marketing, Jan1993, Vol. 57 Issue 1.
4. Assessing long-term brand potential by Keller, Kevin Lane; Lehmann,
Donald R., Journal of Brand Management, Sep2009, Vol. 17 Issue 1.
5. Measurement of Brand Equity of Brand India by Patel, Pratik C. Journal
of Marketing & Communication, Jan2010, Vol. 5 Issue 3.
6. Exploring Customer Brand Engagement: Definition and Themes, by
Hollebeek, Linda. Journal of Strategic Marketing. Nov 2011, Vol. 19
Issue 7, p555-573.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
94
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 310MKT Type Specialization –Elective
Course Title Personal Selling Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions(60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To outline the areas in which sales executives make decisions
2 To emphasize the role of sales executives as planners of sales operations and a key figure in
implementing marketing strategies.
3 To give hands on inputs on the selling process.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Introduction to Personal Selling & Salesmanship: Defining Personal
selling and salesmanship, Selling as a profession, Objectives and importance of
personal selling, Essentials of Personal Selling, Traditional & Modern Selling
Approach, Ethics in Selling, Role of Selling in Marketing, Types of selling,
Qualities of Winning Sales Professionals-Physical, Mental, Social and Character
Traits.
1.2 Introduction to Theories of Selling: AIDA, Right set of circumstances
theory of selling , Buying Formula theory of selling, Behavioral Equation theory
5 + 1
2 Personal Selling Process-I: Prospecting- objectives, sources and methods, Lead
Generation, Getting appointment, Sales Responsibilities and Preparation; Pre
approach-step toward sales planning-elements of sales call planning; Customer
need discovery & Analysis; Approach- sales presentation/ demonstrationselection
of appropriate presentation method, essentials of presentation, sales
presentation mix- persuasive communication, visual presentation and
dramatization, Use of questions- Direct questions, non-directive questions,
rephrasing, redirect questions;
5 + 1
3 Personal Selling Process–II: Handling objection- hidden, stalling, no need,
money objection, etc., objection handling techniques, Closing the sale- reading
buying signals, closing techniques- the alternative choice, assumptive, the
compliment, the summary, the continuous, the minor point, the tea account, the
standing room and the probability; Follow up after sales- Discuss service
requirements, handling complaints, Key Account Management.
5 + 1
4 Personal Selling Skills: Negotiation, Communication, Listening Skills,
Presentation and Demonstration, , Body Language- Space, Moments, Eye
Contacts & Postures, Follow up Calls, Writing Effective Sales Letters and emails,
Positive Mental Attitude, Goal Setting, Effective Dressing, Managing
Yourself and Time, Cold Call Mechanism.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
95
5 Personal Selling: Applications and Situations: Selling of services- financial, IT
and telecommunication, advertising, education (Coaching and institutions);
Selling of industrial products- raw material, capital goods, supplies; Selling of
consumer goods- convenience, shopping and specialty goods; International
selling; Selling in rural markets; Selling high and low involvement products;
Selling to new and existing customers/ Market; Selling to end users,
intermediaries, government departments and agencies; Selling individual and
groups.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Fundamentals of Selling by Charles M. Futrell, Tata Mc. Graw Hills 10th
Edition
2. A B C’ s of Selling by Charles M. Futrell, AITBS, New Delhi,
3. World Class Selling by Roy Chitwood, JAICO Publishing House
2 Reference Books 1. Successful Selling Solutions by Julian Clay, Viva Books
2. Value Added Selling by Tom Reilly, TMGH 2004 Edition.
3. Achieving Sales Excellence by Howard Stevens, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd.
4. Power Sales Presentation by Stephan Schiffman, Adams Media
Corporations.
5. Sales Essentials by Stephan Schiffman, Avon Massachusset
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Smarter Selling by Keith Dugdale & Lambert, Prentice Hall.
2. Successful Sales- Get Brilliant Results Fast by Pauline Rowson, Viava
Books.
3. Successful Selling Skills by Richard Denny, The Sunday Times.
4. The Art and Science of Negotiation by Raiffa H, Cambridge:
Belknap/Harvard Press, 1982.
5. Getting to Yes by Fisher R and Ury W, Harmondsworth Middlesex, GB
Penguin Books, 1983.
4 Websites 1. www.professionalsalestips.com
2. www.eyeonsales.com
3. www.semi.org
4. www.salescareersonline.com
5 Journals 1. Journal of Personal Selling & Sales Management
2. Journal of Consumer Marketing
3. Sales and Marketing - Nielsen Business Media
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
96
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 311MKT Type Core –Elective
Course Title Qualitative Marketing Research
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To introduce the qualitative research applications in Marketing
2 To familiarize commonly used strategies in qualitative research
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Qualitative Research
1.1 Meaning & role of Qualitative Research, Situations in which QR is needed,
concept of validity & reliability in qualitative research, limitations
1.2 Difference between qualitative & quantitative research, career
opportunities in Qualitative Research, Skills required
1.3 Depth Interviews: Concept, Use, Techniques to elicit data
1.4 Focus Groups: Role & qualities of a Moderator, Setting, Number of groups,
Number of participants & composition, Duration of focus groups
6+1
2 Projective Techniques
2.1 Principle of projection, applications
2.2 Association, construction, expression based techniques
2.3 How to design & interpret
2.4 Zaltman’s Metaphor Elicitation Techniques
3+1
3 Observation Methods in Qualitative Research
3.1 Types of Observations
3.2 Designing Observation forms
6+1
4 Ethnography & Grounded Theory: Concept Overview, Methodological details,
Types, Applications, Limitations.
6+1
5 Physiological Measures: Developments in neuro-sciences, applications in
marketing research & marketing
4+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. An Introduction to Qualitative Research by Uwe Flick, 4th Edition,
SAGE
2. Research Methods in the Social Sciences by Bridget Somekh & Cathy
Lewin, 5th Edition, SAGE India
2 Reference Books 1. Qualitative Research Methods in Public Relations and Marketing
Communications by Christine Baymon & Immy Holloway, 1st Edition,
Routledge
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Qualitative Journeys –Minichiello & Kottler, SAGE
4 Websites 1. http://www.qualitative-research.net/
2. http://slu.edu/organizations/qrc/QRjournals.html/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
97
5 Journals 1. Methodology or "Methodolatry"? An evaluation of focus groups and
depth interviews, by David Stokes; Richard Bergin., Qualitative Market
Research: An International Journal. Feb2006, Vol. 9 Issue 1, p26-37.
2. A Critical Comparison of Offline Focus groups, Online Focus groups
and e-Delphi, by Brüggen, Elisabeth; Willems, Pieter., International
Journal of Market Research. 2009, Vol. 51 Issue 3, p363-381
3. Quantification of Transcripts from Depth Interviews, Open-ended
Responses and Focus Groups by Schmidt, Marcus., International
Journal of Market Research. 2010, Vol. 52 Issue 4, p483-508.
4. Interpreting Consumer Perceptions of Advertising: An Application of
the Zaltman Metaphor Elicitation Technique, by Coulter, Robin A.;
Zaltman, Gerald; Coulter, Keith S., Journal of Advertising. Winter2001,
Vol. 30 Issue 4, p1-21.
5. Using the Zaltman Metaphor Elicitation Technique to Understand
Brand Images, by Coulter, Robin Higie; Zaltman, Gerald., Advances in
Consumer Research. 1994, Vol. 21 Issue 1, p501-507.
6. Hanging Around with People. Ethnography in Marketing Research and
Intelligence Gathering, by Boddy, Clive R., Marketing Review.
Summer2011, Vol. 11 Issue 2, p151-163
7. Doing Sensory Ethnography in Consumer Research, by Valtonen, Anu;
Markuksela, Vesa; Moisander, Johanna., International Journal of
Consumer Studies. Jul2010, Vol. 34 Issue 4, p375-380.
8. The Influence of Information about Labour Abuses on Consumer
Choice of Clothes: A Grounded Theory Approach, by Valor, Carmen.,
Journal of Marketing Management. Sep2007, Vol. 23 Issue 7/8, p675-
695.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
98
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 312MKT Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Customer Relationship Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 5
Course Objectives:
1 To introduce the core concepts of CRM paradigm
2 To emphasize CRM as a business strategy
3 To highlight the role of appropriate business process and technology management capabilities in
managing customer relationships.
4 To help the students understand the organizational context of CRM.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Fundamentals of CRM:
1.1 Understanding Relationships: What is a relationship? Relationship Quality,
Why companies want relationships with customers? Why companies do not
want relationships with customers? Why customers want relationships with
suppliers? Why customers do not want relationships with suppliers?
Customer satisfaction – loyalty – business performance linkage, Satisfactionprofit
chain, Relationship management theories.
1.2 Introduction to CRM: Introduction , Strategic CRM, Operational CRM,
Analytical CRM, Collaborative CRM, Misunderstandings about CRM, Defining
CRM, CRM constituencies, Commercial and not-for-profit context of CRM,
Models of CRM.
5 + 1
2 Managing the Customer Life Cycle:
2.1 Customer Acquisition: What is a new customer? Understanding Customer
Value, Sources of Customer Value, Customization, Value from products –
services – processes – people – physical evidence – customer communication –
channels, Customer Value estimates, Prospecting, KPI of a customer acquisition
programme, Making the right offer, Operational CRM tools, Support from
CRM Analytics.
2.2 Customer Retention & Development: What is customer retention?
Managing Customer Retention or Value Retention? Economics of Customer
Retention, Which Customers to retain? Strategies of Customer Retention,
Positive Customer Retention Strategies, KPI for a Customer Retention
programme, Strategies for Customer Development, Strategies for terminating
Customer Relationships.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
99
3 CRM Mechanics:
3.1 CRM Enablers: Customer related database, Developing a Customer related
database, Database technology and hardware platform options, Maintaining
the database, Desirable Database Attributes, Data Integration, Data
Warehousing, Data Marts , Data Access and Interrogation, Data Mining,
Privacy Issues.
3.2 Customer Portfolio Management: What is a portfolio? Who is the
Customer? Basic disciplines for CPM, Market Segmentation, Sales Forecasting,
Activity Based Costing, Lifetime Value Estimation, CPM in the B2B context,
Strategically Significant Customers, Seven Core Customer Management
Strategies.
3.3 Customer Relationship Management and Customer Experience
Management: What is meant by Customer Experience? Experiential Marketing
Strategies and Tactics, Customer Experience and the role of CRM.
5 + 1
4 Managing Networks for CRM: What is a Network? Business Networks,
Network Position, Concept of Focal firm, Business Networks and CRM, SCOPE
of CRM, Supplier Networks, Distribution Networks, Management of Networks,
Supplier Relationships, Product Development, Supplier Accreditation
Programmes, Process Alignment, E Procurement, Partners in Value Creation,
Alliance between non-competing firms, Alliance between competing firms,
Benchmarking Partners, Customer Advocacy groups, Sponsors, Partners in
Value Delivery.
5 + 1
5 Organizational Issues and CRM: Organizational roles and CRM, Strategic
goals of CRM, Conventional customer management structures, Network and
Virtual organizations, Person-to-person contacts, Key Account Management,
Team Selling, Employees and Internal Marketing, Empowerment, Employee
Relationship Management.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Customer Relationship Management – Concepts and Technologies by
Francis Buttle, 2nd Edition, Butterworth Heinemann, Elsevier
2. Relationship Management – Text and Cases, S. Shajahan, TMGH.
2 Reference Books 1. Handbook of Relationship Marketing by Jagdish Sheth and Atul
Parvatiyar, Response Books, Sage Publications.
2. Customer Relationship Management – Perspectives from the
Marketplace by Simon Knox, Stan Maklan, Adrian Payne, joe Peppard
and Lynette Ryals, Elsevier.
3. Total Relationship Management by Evert Gummesson, Elsevier.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Relationship Marketing edited by Adam Lindgreen, ICFAI books.
2. Customer Relationship Management in Indian Banking Industry by R K
Uppal, New Century Publications, 2008, 1st Edition.
4 Websites 1. http://www.crm.com/
2. http://www.crmondemand.oracle.com/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
100
5 Journals 1. Customer Relationship Management: Emerging Practice, Process, and
Discipline by Parvatiyar, Atul; Sheth, Jagdish N., Journal of Economic &
Social Research. 2001, Vol. 3 Issue 2, p1.
2. A Strategic Framework for Customer Relationship Management by
Payne, Adrian; Frow, Pennie. Journal of Marketing. Oct2005, Vol. 69
Issue 4, p167-176.
3. Customer Relationship Management: from Strategy to Implementation
by Payne, Adrian; Frow, Pennie. Journal of Marketing Management.
Feb2006, Vol. 22 Issue 1/2, p135-168.
4. Making Customer Relationship Management Work: The Measurement
and Profitable Management of Customer Relationships by Ryals,
Lynette. Journal of Marketing. Oct2005, Vol. 69 Issue 4, p252-261.
5. The Role of Customer Gratitude in Relationship Marketing by
Palmatier, Robert W; Jarvis, Cheryl Burke; Bechkoff, Jennifer R; Kardes,
Frank R. Journal of Marketing. Sep2009, Vol. 73 Issue 5, p1-18.
Important Elements in Customer Relationship Management by Mandic,
Miroslav. International Journal of Management Cases. Sep2011, Vol. 13
Issue 3, p347-351.
6. Types of Customer Relationship Ending Processes by Michalski, Silke.
Journal of Marketing Management. Nov2004, Vol. 20 Issue 9/10, p977-
999.
7. Building Service Relationships: It's All About Promises by Bitner, Mary
Jo. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science. Fall95, Vol. 23 Issue 4,
p246-251
8. Referral Programs and Customer Value by Schmitt, Philipp; Skiera,
Bernd; Van den Bulte, Christophe. Journal of Marketing. Jan2011, Vol.
75 Issue 1, p46-59.
9. Customer Lifetime Value Measurement by Borle, Sharad; Singh,
Siddharth S.; Jain, Dipak C. Management Science. Jan2008, Vol. 54 Issue
1, p100-112.
10. Undervalued or Overvalued Customers: Capturing Total Customer
Engagement Value. By Kumar, V.; Aksoy, Lerzan; Donkers, Bas;
Venkatesan, Rajkumar; Wiesel, Thorsten; Tillmanns, Sebastian. Journal
of Service Research. Aug2010, Vol. 13 Issue 3, p297-310.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
101
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 313MKT Type Elective
Course Title Marketing and the Law
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 5
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the pervasive impact of the Law and our legal system on marketing activities.
2 To highlight how decisions of marketing executives raise issues which should be carefully
evaluated as to their legal consequences before they are implemented?
3 The underline that a failure to appreciate these legal implications can lead to seriously damaging, if
not disastrous, results for a firm
4 To address National Laws and court decisions that relate to the four main areas of marketing
study, the so-called “four P’s” of marketing: product, price, place and promotion.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Legal Issues Relating to Product Quality and Material Movement:
Conditions and warranties, Implied Conditions, Rule of Caveat Emptor [Buyer
Beware], Transfer of Title, Nemo Dat Quod Non Habet, Sea Transit: FOB, CIF,
Ex. Ship, Rights of Unpaid Seller, Lien, Stoppage in Transit, Right to Resale,
Remedies.
1.2 Laws Relating to Services Marketing: Concept of Service, Deficiency in
Service, Real Estates, Hospital, Carrier, Courier, Bank, Transport Service
5 + 1
2 Legal Aspects of Unfair Trade Practices and Some Aspects of Advertisement:
False and Misleading Representation, Bait Advertising and Bargain Price,
Offering Gifts and Prizes and Conducting Promotional Contests, Withholding
Information about Final Results of scheme, Hoarding and Destruction of
Goods, Spurious Goods
5 + 1
3 3.1 Legal Aspects of Restrictive Trade Practices: Salient features of MRTP Act,
Tie-in Sales or Full Line Forcing, Price Fixing, Predatory Pricing, Exclusive
Dealing, Territorial Restriction, Refuse to Deal
3.2 Restraint of Trade: Knock–Out Agreement, Trade Combination, Solus or
Exclusive Dealing Agreements, Restraints upon Employees
5 + 1
4 4.1 Laws Relating to Common Carrier: Definition of Common Carrier,
Distinction between Common Carrier and Pvt. Carrier, Liabilities of Common
Carrier
4.2 Legal Aspects of Delivering Goods for Carriage and Warehousing: Rights
of Warehouse, Duties and Liabilities of Warehouse
5 + 1
5 Competition Law: Introduction, Meaning, Anti-competitive Agreement, Anticompetitive
Agreement: Competition Commission of India (CCI) Competition
within India & Effects Doctrine, Anti-competitive Agreement: Horizontal, Anticompetitive
Agreement: Fixing Prices - Cartels, Anti-competitive Agreement:
Vertical Agreements, Anti-competitive Agreement: Limiting and Controlling
Production & Investment.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
102
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Elements of Mercantile Law, N.D. Kapoor, 32nd Edition , Sultan Chand
2 Reference Books 1. Sale of Goods Act, by Avtar Singh
2. Consumer Protection, by Dr. V.K. Agarwal
3. Competition Law, by D.P. Mittal
4. Legal aspects of Marketing Strategy, by Louis W. Stern / Thomas L.
Eovaldi
5. Law of Contract, by Avtar Singh
6. Law of Carriage, by Avtar Singh
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
Bare Acts of
1. Sale of Goods Act 1930 (Unit one)
2. Consumer Protection Act, 1986 (Unit two)
3. The Monopolies & Restrictive Trade Practices Act (Unit three)
4. Sale of Good Act1930 &The Carriers Act, 1865( Unit four)
5. The Competition Act,2002 (Unit five)
6. All India Reports (AIR)
4 Websites 1. http://www.ebc-india.com
2. www.lawmin.nic.in
3. www.mca.gov.in/Ministry/mrtpc.html
4. www.eximguru.com
5. http://www.wto.org
6. http://www.indianembassy.org/policy/WTO
7. http://www.indlii.org
8. http://www.caiindia.org/
9. www.cci.gov.in
5 Journals 1. Journal of Consumer Affairs
2. Journal of Consumer Marketing
3. Indian Law Journal
4. Legal news & views( Magazine with latest articles)
5. LawZ (Magazine )
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
103
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 314MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Finance for Marketing Professionals
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 5
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the marketing – finance interdependence
2 To learn about the cost implications in marketing decisions
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Marketing Finance Interface: Marketing Finance Interdependence – Cost
Revenue Investment Framework in Marketing
5 + 1
2 Marketing Planning : Marketing Organization for Planning - Corporate
Planning and Marketing – Budgetary Control in Marketing – Product Planning
and Development
5 + 1
3 Marketing Decisions: Cost Analysis in Marketing Decisions – Marginal
Costing and Break-even Analysis – Investment and Capital Budgeting
Decisions related to Marketing
5 + 1
4 Performance Evaluation in Marketing: Measures for Marketing Performance –
Evaluation of Salesmen Performance – Evaluation of Advertisement
Expenditure and Advertisement Effectiveness – Evaluation of Distribution –
Evaluation of Marketing Research – Marketing Audit
5 + 1
5 Marketing Control : MIS and Control Systems in Marketing - Control on
Working Capital – Receivables Management – Profit Control – Product Line
Accounting and Variance Analysis – Product Life Cycle Profitability –
Customer Life Cycle Profitability – Evaluation of Pricing Strategy
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Marketing Management – A Finance Emphasis by B K Chatterjee, Jaico
Books
2. Marketing Finance, Turning Strategies into Shareholder Value by Keith
Ward, Elsevier Butterworth Heinemann
2 Reference Books 1. Financial Management by Prasanna Chandra, TMGH, 7th Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Market Opportunity Analysis: Text and Cases by Stevens, Sherwood,
Dunn and Loudon, Jaico Books.
4 Websites 1. http://www.marketingdecisions.net/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
104
5 Journals 1. Marketing Performance Measurement Systems: Does
Comprehensiveness Really Improve Performance? by Homburg,
Christian; Artz, Martin; Wieseke, Jan., Journal of Marketing. May2012,
Vol. 76 Issue 3, p56-77.
2. Marketing Performance Measurement Ability and Firm Performance by
O'Sullivan, Don; Abela, Andrew V., Journal of Marketing. Apr2007,
Vol. 71 Issue 2, p79-93.
3. The Management Challenge of Marketing Costs by Culliton, James W.,
Harvard Business Review. Jan1948, Vol. 26 Issue 1, p74-88
4. Improved Efficiency and Reduced Cost in Marketing by Parker, Donald
D., Journal of Marketing. Apr1962, Vol. 26 Issue 2, p15-21.
5. The marketing accounting interface -- lessons and limitations by Sidhu,
Baljit K.; Roberts, John H., Journal of Marketing Management. Sep2008,
Vol. 24 Issue 7/8, p669-686.
6. The Marketing Budgeting Process: Marketing Management
Implications by Piercy, Nigel F., Journal of Marketing. Oct87, Vol. 51
Issue 4, p45-59.
7. New Approaches to Analyzing Marketing Profitability by Mossman,
Frank H.; Fischer, Paul M.; Crissy, W. J. E., Journal of Marketing.
Apr1974, Vol. 38 Issue 2, p43-48.
8. Price-Cost Planning by Fogg, C. Davis; Kohnken, Kent H., Journal of
Marketing. Apr1978, Vol. 42 Issue 2, p97-106.
9. Determining marketing costs and returns in alternative marketing
channels by Hardesty, Shermain D.; Leff, Penny., Renewable
Agriculture & Food Systems, Mar2010, Vol. 25 Issue 1, p24-34.
10. Marketing Audits and Auditing: Diagnosis through Intervention by
Brownlie, Douglas., Journal of Marketing Management. Jan-Apr1996,
Vol. 12 Issue 1-3, p99-112.
11. The Marketing Audit and Organizational Performance: An Empirical
Profiling by Taghian, Mehdi; Shaw, Robin N., Journal of Marketing
Theory & Practice. Fall2008, Vol. 16 Issue 4, p341-349.
12. Improving Marketing Accountability through Better Management of
the Market Research Process by Shaw, Robert; White, Carolyn., Journal
of Marketing Management. Nov99, Vol. 15 Issue 8, p857-880.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
105
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 315MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Marketing of Financial Services – I
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 5
Course Objectives:
1 Familiarizing the students with the various financial services and products in the liberalized Indian
economy.
2 To provide an in-depth perspective of the equity and bond markets.
3 Equipping the students with the practices and processes in the Mutual Fund and Insurance
Industry.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Financial Market Fundamentals:
1.1 Equity Markets: Capital Markets, Role in the Economy, Brief History of
BSE and NSE. Trade lifecycle of a financial instrument, Market
Participants in the Equity markets with perspectives on 'Buy' side and
'Sell' side, Key terminologies related to the Equity markets.
1.2 Bond Markets: Introduction to bond markets, how bond markets operate?
Key terminologies related to the bond markets. Regulatory aspects of the
Bond Markets, Key players in the Bond Markets (such as FIIs, Hedge Funds
etc.)
1.3 Debt Instruments: Debt instruments and their classification based on type
of issuer, and basis characteristics. Money Market Instruments (such as
Certificate of Deposit, Re-purchase ''Agreements etc.),
5 + 1
2 Mutual Funds:
2.1 Mutual Funds and their importance, Various entities of a Mutual Fund and
their respective roles - Basic understanding of NAV and calculation of a
Fund - NAV, Types of Loads and Commissions charged on Mutual Funds
and their significance
2.2 Types of Mutual Funds in India, classified on the basis of Structure,
Investment Objective, and Investment Plan, Relative risks associated with
various Mutual Funds in India
2.3 Basic understanding of ETFs and their key features. Differences between a
Mutual Fund and an ETF
2.4 Basic understanding of a 'Hedge Fund' and its key features, Process of
Fund Selection and various related measurement parameters, Various
expenses incurred by a Fund
2.5 Guidelines for Investment Advisors while selling Mutual Funds to the
clients.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
106
3 Insurance:
3.1 Basics of Insurance: Basic understanding of insurance products, types of
insurance policies – Role of IRDA, Insurance industry in India.
3.2 General Insurance: Types of liabilities covered, extent of insurance value,
and conditions
3.3 Life Insurance: Basic concept of Life Insurance, its beneficiaries and its
types, Concept of Term Insurance and its various types, Traditional Life
Insurance and its difference from Term Insurance, Whole Life Policy and
Endowment Policy and the differences between them. ULIP and its
comparison with conventional plans and Mutual Funds.
3.4 Marketing Channels in Insurance Markets: Various channel members in
the Industry such as Insurance Agents, Distributors, etc.
3.5 Basic Understanding: Property and casualty/liability insurance,
Commercial Insurance, Health Insurance.
5 + 1
4 Other Financial Services:
4.1 Leasing / Hire Purchase: Definition, meaning, types, process, advantages,
limitations, financial implications
4.2 Housing Finance: Major institutions involved, types, rate of interest,
advantages, scenario in India
4.3 Credit Cards: Meaning, types, growth, advantages and disadvantages,
growth in India.
4.4 Credit Rating Services: Origin, definition, advantages, credit rating
agencies - global and Indian, symbols, CRISIL, ICRA, equity ratings,
CIBIL, scope in India.
4.5 Other Services: Factoring, forfeiting, bill discounting, consumer finance
and venture capital
5 + 1
5 Marketing of Financial Services:
5.1 Importance of Financial Planning: identification of investment needs for
retail investors, studying investment behavior - Houeshold Vs
Institutional Investors
5.2 Alternate Investment Products: Introduction to Alternate Investments and
their various products and services, Portfolio Management Services and
their features, Tax regulations from an Investment Advisor point of view
5.3 Career opportunities in Marketing of Financial Services
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Financial Services & Markets by Dr Punithavathy Pandian, Vikas
Publication, 2012 Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Financial Services by Nalini Prava Tripathy, Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited, 2008 Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Financial Services by M Y Khan, Tata McGraw-Hill, 5th Edition
4 Websites 1. http://www.irda.gov.in
2. http://www.financeindia.org
3. http://www.sebi.gov.in
5 Journals 1. Indian Journal of Finance
2. Indian Journal of Marketing
3. Prabandhan – Indian Journal of Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
107
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 316MKT Type Elective
Course Title Tourism Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To familiarize the students with the basics of tourism marketing.
2 To teach the students about formulating marketing plans for tourism and other related hospitality
organizations.
3 To acquaint the students with alternative promotional approaches to tourism marketing.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Introduction to Tourism: What is Tourism? Definitions and Concepts,
tourist destination, Future of Tourism. General Tourism Trends. Types of
Tourists, Visitor, Traveler, and Excursionist–Definition and differentiation.
Tourism, recreation and leisure, their inter–relationships.
1.2 Introduction to Tourism Industry: Nature, Characteristics and Components
of Tourism Industry. Why it is different from other types of consumer product?
Elements and characteristics of tourism product. Tourism product production
system, Tourism Product Life Cycle, typology of tourism products.
6 + 1
2 Tourism Marketing: Service characteristics of tourism. Unique features of
tourist demand and tourism product, Tourism marketing mix. Marketing of
Tourism.
3 + 1
3 Types and Forms of Tourism: Inter–regional and intra–regional tourism,
inbound and outbound tourism, domestic, international tourism. Forms of
Tourism: religious, historical, social, adventure, health, business, conferences,
conventions, incentives, sports and adventure, Medical Tourism, Senior
tourism, special interest tourism like culture or nature oriented, ethnic or ‘roots’
tourism and VFR.
5 + 1
4 Analysis and Selection of Market: Measuring and forecasting tourism
demand; Managing capacity and demand. Market segmentation and
positioning (STP), Customer satisfaction and related strategies in internal and'
external marketing; Interactive and relationship marketing.
4 + 1
5 Planning Marketing Programs: Product and product strategies; Product line,
Product mix Branding and packaging. Pricing considerations. Promotional
strategies. Distribution channels and strategies. Online Channels, Web Portals
Services: Marketing of Airlines, Hotel, Resort, Travel Agencies and other
tourism related services-Challenges and strategies.
7 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Successful Tourism Management by Seth, P. N., Sterling Publishers Pvt.
Ltd. 2006
2. Tourism Marketing, by Sinha P.C., Anand Publication, 1998
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
108
2 Reference Books 1. Marketing Management & Hospitality and Tourism Marketing by
Kotler, Philip, Pearson Education.
2. Hospitality Marketing by Vearne, Morrisson Alison
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Tourism Policies of Central Government & Different State Government
2. Promotional Policies of Airlines, Hospitality Industries.
4 Websites 1. http://tourism.gov.in
2. www.incredibleindia.org
5 Journals 1. Sustainable Tourism Marketing at a World Heritage Site, by Gilmore,
Audrey; Carson, David; Ascenção, Mário., Journal of Strategic
Marketing. May2007, Vol. 15 Issue 2/3, p253-264.
2. Place-product or Place Narrative(s)? Perspectives in the Marketing of
Tourism Destinations, by Lichrou, Maria; O'Malley, Lisa; Patterson,
Maurice., Journal of Strategic Marketing. Feb2008, Vol. 16 Issue 1, p27-
39.
3. Proposing a Sustainable Marketing Framework for Heritage Tourism,
by Chhabra, Deepak., Journal of Sustainable Tourism. 2009, Vol. 17
Issue 3, p303-320.
4. Critical Success Factors in Destination Marketing, by Baker, Michael J.;
Cameron, Emma., Tourism & Hospitality Research. Feb2008, Vol. 8
Issue 2, p79-97.
5. The Marketing of Tourism, by Meidan, Arthur., Service Industries
Journal. Nov84, Vol. 4 Issue 3, p166-186.
6. Marketing Culture and Customer Retention in the Tourism Industr, by
Appiah-Adu, Kwaku; Fyall, Alan; Singh, Satyendra., Service Industries
Journal. Apr2000, Vol. 20 Issue 2, p95-113
7. Managing Destination Brands: Establishing a Theoretical Foundation,
by Hankinson, Graham., Journal of Marketing Management. Feb2009,
Vol. 25 Issue 1/2, p97-115.
8. Destination Branding: Tracking Brand India, by Khanna, Monica.,
Synergy (0973-8819). Jan2011, Vol. 9 Issue 1, p40-49.
9. Marketing UK Towns and Cities as Shopping Destinations, by
Warnaby, Gary; Bennison, David; Davies, Barry J.; Hughes, Howard.,
Journal of Marketing Management. Dec2002, Vol. 18 Issue 9/10.
10. Destination Marketing: Future issues — Strategic challenges, by Fyall,
Alan; Leask, Anna., Tourism & Hospitality Research. Nov2006, Vol. 7
Issue 1, p50-63.
11. Case Study: Uttarakhand as a Spiritual Tourist Destination: An
Emerging Research, by Himadri, Phukan., Advances in Management.
May2012, Vol. 5 Issue 5, p42-48.
12. From Destination Brand to Location Brand, by Kerr, Greg., Journal of
Brand Management. Apr/Jun2006, Vol. 13 Issue 4/5, p276-283.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
109
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 317MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Agri Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 5
Course Objectives:
1 The Agricultural sector, offers immense opportunities for the employment. This sector requires
managerial talent for both input and produce side. The course will prepare the students to be
employable in agricultural marketing
2 Understand the functions performed by agricultural marketing system
3 Develop strategies to manage the marketing of agriculture organizations.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Introduction to Agricultural Marketing: Definition of Market and
agricultural marketing, Understanding Agricultural Markets, Nature & scope,
Objectives of Agriculture Marketing, Organizations and functions of
agricultural marketing in India. Difference between consumer, industrial and
agricultural markets.
5 + 1
2 2.1 Market Information: Role, importance and concepts of market intelligence,
critical review of market intelligence and news service, role of IT and
telecommunication, on line market information service, electronic auctions,
commodity information system, e-chaupal model, dissemination of market
intelligence through various media, market information schemes, cyber
trading/e-commerce, market Information Service (AGMARKNET), Directorate
of Marketing and Inspection (DMI).
5 + 1
3 3.1 Marketing of Agricultural Inputs: Meaning of Agricultural Inputs,
Agriculture inputs with special reference to fertilizers, seeds, pesticides and
other agricultural inputs (Farm Machinery, irrigation system equipment)
5 + 1
4 4.1 Agri-produce Marketing: Food grains, Vegetables, Oil seeds, Fruits,
Flowers and ornamental plants, milk and milk products, other animal
products , Grade determination techniques; AGMARK, BIS Grades and
standards prevailing in other countries.
4.2 Quality Standards of Agricultural Commodities: Domestic and Export
Markets; ISO 14000; ISO 9000; Quality Assurance in the Domestic / Export
Markets for Agricultural Products.
4.3 Institutional Setup: Role of APMC, APEDA, WTO Agri produce marketing
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
110
5 5.1 Pricing of Agricultural Commodities Pricing Decisions: Agricultural price
terminology, administered prices including support prices, Factors influencing
pricing decisions. Determination of agricultural prices and marketing margins,
Role of agricultural price commission Various pricing strategies.
5.2 Pricing Mechanisms: Role of Institutions in determination of prices of
agricultural commodities, Commodity exchanges, Concept of Value and Value
Addition; Pricing in Competitive Environment.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Marketing of agricultural products by Richard Louis Kohls, Joseph N.
Uhl, Person Publication, 9thEdition.
2. Agriculture Marketing in India by S.S.Acharya & N.L. Agarwal ,
Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd New Delhi, 4th Edition
2 Reference Books 1. New Perspective in Rural & Agricultural Marketing by Ramkishen Y.,
Jaico Publishing House , 2nd Edition
2. Introduction to Agribusiness Marketing by George Seperich, Michael
Woolverton, James Beierlein, Pearson Education.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Rural Agriculture & Marketing by S.B. Verma, S.K. Jiloka & Mandal ,
Deep & Deep Publication Pvt. Ltd.
2. Agricultural Communications Changes & Challenges by Kristina
Boone, Terry Meisenbach and Mark Tucker, Surjeet Publication
4 Websites 1. http://agmarknet.nic.in/
2. www.hpsamb.nic.in/
3. www.rsamb.rajasthan.gov.in/
4. www.agritech.tnau.ac.in
5. www.delagrimarket.nic.in/
6. www.ams.usda.gov/
5 Journals 1. Journal of International Food & Agribusiness Marketing
2. Indian Journal of Agricultural Marketing
3. Agricultural Marketing
4. American Journal of Agricultural Economics
5. Agricultural Economics &Marketing Journal
6. Agricultural Economics Research Review
7. Journal of Farm Economics
8. Journal of Marketing
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
111
Semester III Specialization Marketing
Course Code 318MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Business to Business Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 5
Course Objectives:
1 To familiarize students with the terms, concepts, and nature of Business-to-Business Marketing.
2 To expose the students to the industrial marketing functions of firms.
3 The course introduces to the participants the specifics of marketing mix for Business-to-Business
Marketing.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Overview of Business-to-Business Marketing
1.1 Introduction to Business-to-Business Marketing: Business,
Organizational & Government Markets, Organizational Buying Behavior,
Concept of the Business-to-Business (B2B) Marketing, Comparison of
Business-to-Business &Business-to-Consumer Marketing.
1.2 Buying Situations, Buy grid Framework, Role of Buying Centre ,
1.3 Models of B2B Marketing – Webster & Wind Model, Sheth Model, Impact
of Macro/Micro Environmental factors on decision making
5 + 1
2 Segmentation, Targeting & Positioning for B2B Markets:
2.1 Market Segmentation Bases: Macro Variables - Industry Characteristics,
Company Size, Customer Location, End User Markets, product
Applications. Micro Variables: Customer Interaction needs, Organizational
Capabilities, Purchasing Policies, Purchasing Criteria, and Personal
Characteristics.
2.2 Target Markets: Concentrated Marketing, Differentiated Marketing,
Undifferentiated Marketing. Criteria for choosing a target market.
2.3 Positioning
5+ 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
112
3 Product Pricing Strategy for B2B Markets:
3.1 Industrial Products: Definition of an Industrial Product, Industrial Product
Lifecycle & Strategies across the PLC, Product strategies for New Products
and Existing Products, Importance of After Sales Service. Innovation,
Competitiveness & Technology. Marketing of – Projects, Industrial
Services, High technology products.
3.2 Pricing: Factors influencing Pricing Decisions, Pricing Strategies –
Competitive bidding, Pricing New Products, Pricing Policies, Commercial
Terms and Conditions, Contracts, Hiring & Leasing, Negotiation,
Bargaining, Persuasion & Conviction. Methods used to Influence Industrial
Customers, Special Dealing between Buyer and Sellers, Reciprocity, Ethical
Issues. International Market based Pricing
8 + 1
4 Personal Selling & Promotions for B2B Markets:
4.1 Personal Selling: Role & Characteristics of Personal Selling, Development
& Management of Sales Force, Key Account Management - ABC Analysis
of Industrial Customers.
4.2 Promotions: Developing Industrial Communication Programme, Trade
Shows, Exhibitions, Catalogues, Samples, Public Relations, Advertising,
4 + 1
5 Industrial Distribution Channels: Distinctive Nature of Industrial Distribution
Channels, Types of Industrial Middlemen, Channel Flow Design, Formulating
Distribution Strategies and Cost Benefit Analysis.
3 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Industrial Marketing by Havaldar
2 Reference Books 1. Industrial Marketing by Hill, Alexander & Cross, Irwin
2. Industrial Marketing by Mukerjee, Excel Book
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Marketing White Book (Latest edition)
4 Websites 1. http://www.commerce.nic.in/
5 Journals 1. Industrial Organization and Customer Relationship Management: The
Impact on Customer Service Orientation in B-to-B Markets by Lancioni,
Richard; Smith, Michael; Stein, Alex., Journal of Management & Public
Policy. Jul-Dec2009, Vol. 1 Issue 1, p57-88.
2. My years with B2B Marketing in India: Reflections and Learnings from
A Journey of 40 Years by Sarin, Sharad., Journal of Business &
Industrial Marketing. 2012, Vol. 27 Issue 3, p160-168
3. Approaching Global Industrial Marketing from a Managerial Cognition
Perspective: A Theoretical Framework by Madhavaram, Sreedhar;
Badrinarayanan, Vishag; Granot, Elad., Journal of Business & Industrial
Marketing. 2011, Vol. 26 Issue 7, p532-541
4. The Marketing Mix Revisited: Towards the 21st Century Marketing by
Constantinides, E., Journal of Marketing Management. Apr2006, Vol. 22
Issue 3/4, p407-438
5. Marketing-Industrial Design Integration in New Product Development:
The Case of China by Zhang, Dan; Hu, Peng; Kotabe, Masaaki., Journal
of Product Innovation Management. May2011, Vol. 28 Issue 3, p360-373
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
113
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER III
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
114
Semester I Specialization NA
Course Code 305 Type : Finance Specialization – Core
Course Title Corporate Finance
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To acquaint students with advanced treatment of various concepts and tools and techniques used
in Financial Management
2 To highlight the importance of various decision making areas of financial management
Syllabus:
Unit
Numbe
r
Contents Numbe
r of
Session
s
1 Financial Management – An Overview
Shareholder Wealth Maximization or Profit Maximization?
Investment, Financing and Dividend Decisions
Organization of Finance Function
Concepts of Valuation
Time Value of Money, Discounting, Compounding.
Valuation of Bonds, Shares and Options
Risk and Return Trade-Off : Markowitz and CAPM Models
5+2
2 Capital Expenditure Decisions
Payback, Accounting Rate of Return, NPV, IRR; their use for CAPEX decisions
Risk Analysis in Capital Budgeting
Cost of Capital - Cost of Debt, Preference Shares, Equity; Weighted Average Cost of
Capital
8+2
3 Long Term Financing
Sources of Long Term Finance
Capital Structure and Dividend Policies
Capital Structure and Firm Value; Traditional, Modigliani Miller and Other Theories
Capital Structure Decision in Practice; (to be studied through case studies)
Dividend Policy and Firm Value; Dividend Decisions, alternative forms of returning cash
to shareholders (such as Bonus Shares, Share Splits etc)
8+2
4 Working Capital Management
Measurement and Financing of Gross and Net working capital (to be studied through case
studies)
8+2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
115
5 Corporate Restructuring and Value Creation
Corporate Valuation – Adjusted Book Value Approach and DCF Approach
Economic Value Added and Market Value Added
Mergers, acquisitions and Restructuring
6+2
Note:
1
The depth of each of the topics covered should be to the extent of creating conceptual
clarity. In depth treatment of the topics is expected. The students are expected to solve
numerical problems on the following topics.
Topic numbers: 2, 3, 4, Economic Value Added, Market Value Added
Case Study approach is recommended.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Advanced Financial Management - Dr. N.M.Vechalekar
2 Reference
Books
1. Financial Management- I. M. Pandey
2. Financial Management, Theory and Practice - Prasanna Chandra,
3. Financial Management: Khan and Jain
4. Corporation Finance: S.C.Kuchhal
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
1. Corporate Finance, Theory and Practice, Aswath Damodaran,
4 Websites 1. NSE, BSE
5 Journals 1. Indian Journal of Finance
2. ICFAI Journals on Finance
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
116
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 306 Type Specialization Core
Course Title Merchant Banking & Financial Service
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the scope, evolution and role of merchant banking in the context of Indian financial
system
2 To get acquainted with the procedure of public issue management
3 To know in detail the services offered by the merchant Bankers
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 MEANING SCOPE, PARTICIPANTS AND INSTRUMENTS
Definition of Merchant Banking and its scope 1
Procedure for registration of Merchant Banking, Operational guide lines by
SEBI for merchant bankers, code of conduct for Merchant Bankers 1
Indian Financial System and its participants 1
BSE, NSE and Over The counter Exchange of India - History, Role, functions,
trading operations and settlement of transactions, regulations of stock
exchanges
2
Capital Market Instruments - Preference share, equity shares, Non voting
shares, Convertible Cumulative Debentures(CCD), preference shares, Fixed
Deposits, Warrants, Debentures and Bonds, Global Depository receipts,
American Depository receipts, Global Debt Instruments
2
7+2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
117
2 PUBLIC ISSUE MANAGEMENT
Public issue management - Functions, Mechanism, role of issue manager,
activities involved in public issue 1
various methods of Marketing of new issues - Pure prospectus method, Offer
for sale method, Private placement method, Initial public offer method,
Rights issue method, Bonus issue method, Book building process, stock
option method, bought out method - meaning, feature, advantages,
limitations, practical example
2
Prospectus - prospectus for public offer - its importance, difference between
regular prospectus and abridged prospectus, letter of offer, disclosures in
prospectus, abridged prospectus and letter of offer, types of prospectus - Red
Herring prospectus, information memorandum, shelf prospectus
2
Underwriting- Definition, types - Firm, Sub underwriting, joint underwriting,
syndicate underwriting, advantages, variants of underwriting - Offer for sale,
bought out deals, private placements
1
Post issue activities - meaning, activities involved like allotment, price
fixation, dispatch of certificates etc. Pricing models - Net Asset value, Profit
Earning Capacity Value, Average Market Price
1
7+2
3 SERVICES OFFERED BY MERCHANT BANKERS
Mergers and Acquisition Services - merger, acquisition, takeover, hostile
merger, step wise procedure for amalgamation, strategies adopted to avoid
hostile merger - Divestiture, Crown jewels, Poison pill, greenmail, white
knight, golden Parachutes, street sweep, bear hug, brand power, poison put,
pac man defense, white squire. Types of mergers - horizontal, vertical,
diagonal, forward, reverse, forward triangular, reverse triangular,
conglomerate, congeneric, negotiated, arranged, unopposed, defended,
competitive, tender offer. Valuation methods - net assets, discounted cash
flow method, methods of financing - ordinary share, debt and preference
shares, deferred payment, tender offer
3
Portfolio Management Services - meaning, scope, registration of portfolio
manager, duties, responsibilities, rights, contents of agreement between client
and portfolio manager, reports to be furnished, code of conduct ( regulation
13 of SEBI Regulation on Portfolio Managers)
2
Credit Syndication services - meaning, institutions offering syndicate loans,
types, procedure, project appraisal, documentation and security, sanction of a
loan
2
7+2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
118
4 FINANCIAL SERVICES - PART I
Meaning scope and evolution of financial services. Introduction of various
financial services - Leasing, Hire purchase, Factoring, forfaiting, bill
discounting, consumer finance, housing finance, insurance, credit cards,
credit ratings, mutual funds and venture capital
2
Leasing - definition, meaning, types, process, advantages, limitations,
financial implications 2
Hire purchase - meaning, scope, difference between hire purchase and
leasing, calculation of interest, methods of interest calculation 1
Factoring, forfaiting, bills discounting - meaning, definitions, scope,
advantages and limitations 1
Insurance - Meaning, overview, types - life and general - advantages, scope of
growth in India, 1
7+2
5 FINANCIAL SERVICES - PART II
Consumer Finance - Meaning, types, documents and security, players in the
market - banks, NBFC, Cooperative banks, role of consumer finance in growth
of economy
2
Housing Finance - Major institutions involved, types, rate of interest,
advantages, scenario in India 1
Credit Cards - Meaning, types, growth, advantages and disadvantages,
growth in India 1
Credit Ratings - origin, definition, advantages, credit rating agencies - global
and Indian, symbols, CRISIL, ICRA, equity ratings, scope in India 1
Mutual funds - Definition, products, SEBI requirements for Asset
Management Company (AMC), Association of Mutual Funds Industry
(AMFI), evaluating mutual fund, growth in India
1
Venture capital - definition, types, stages, exit mechanism, advantages,
limitations, growth in India 1
7+2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Financial Service - Mr. M. Y. Khan, Mc Graw Hill Publications, 2010, fifth edition
Merchant Banking and Financial Services - Mr. S. Guruswamy, Tata Mc. Grawhill 2 Reference
Books
1. Financial Management- I. M. Pandey
2. Financial Management, Theory and Practice - Prasanna Chandra,
3. Financial Management: Khan and Jain
4. Corporation Finance: S.C.Kuchhal 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
5. Corporate Finance, Theory and Practice, Aswath Damodaran,
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
119
4 Websites SBI
ICICI
Karvy consultants 5 Journals Indian Journal of Financial services management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
120
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 307 Type Elective
Course Title Corporate Financial Analysis and Reporting
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 0 5
Course Objectives:
1 To acquaint the students with the framework of financial reporting and emerging trends.
2 To make the students familiar with the analytical tools used for financial analysis.
3 To understand the accounting aspects
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 FINANCIAL REPORTING
Financial Reporting – meaning and importance – utility – essentials
3+1
2 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AS PER SCHEDULE VI
Various forms of Corporate Financial Reporting – Financial Statements as per
Schedule VI of Companies Act – Cash Flow Statements- director’s report –
management outlook and analysis- notes to accounts. 6
6+1
3 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
Regulatory framework of Financial Reporting – Overview of Accounting
Standards – Indian and International – GAAP – Introduction to IFRS
4+1
4 CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Corporate Governance and Financial Reporting – SEBI norms regarding
interim reporting
4+1
5 ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Analysis and interpretation of corporate financial statements – Ratio Analysis –
Funds Flow Statements – Economic Value Added
8+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Financial Statement Analysis - willy Publication
2 Reference
Books
Financial Management: Prasanna Chandra
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
Financial Management: Khan and Jain
Corporation Finance: S.C.Kuchhal
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
121
4 Websites Annual report of any public ltd. Company from various industries like automobile,
FMCG,
retails etc. 5 Journals Indian Journal of Finance and Accounting
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
122
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 308 Type Elective
Course Title Technology in Finance
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the structure of excel and its utility for finance operations
2 To know how to use the formula which are relevant for financial operations
3 To develop small models for decision making in finance using excel commands and formula
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 INTRODUCTION TO BASIC FUNCTIONS OF EXCEL
Basic Structure of Excel, Rows, columns, sheets, files, folders 1
Concept of Data base management system - Column as a field, Row as Record 1
Creation of database which will include all data types like number, currency, date,
time, percentage, fraction, font options, alignment options, insert, delete 3
5+1
2 BASIC OPERATIONS IN EXCEL
Sum, average, min, max, sumif, countif using the data available 2
Sort, Filter, Total, subtotal, pivot table 1
Conditional formatting, format as a table. Cell styles 1
Insert Table, graphs, picture, shapes, header and footer, symbols 1
5+1
3 BASIC FORMULA - TEXT, DATE AND TIME
BAHTTEXT, CONCATENATE, LEFT, RIGHT, TRIM, LOWER, PROPER,
UPPER, REPT, VALUE 1
EXACT, FIND, SEARCH, SUBSTITUTE, 1
DATE, DAY, DAYS360, HOUR, MINUTE, MONTH, NETWORKDAYS,
NOW, WEEKDAY, WEEKNUM 1
3+1
4 ADVANCED FORMULA - FINANCIAL AND LOGICAL
ACCRINT, DB, DURATION, EFFECT, FV, INTERATE, IPMT 1
PRICE, PV, RATE, YIELD, NPV, PMT, IRR 1
AND, IF, OR, TRUE, FALSE, NOT, SUM, SUMIF, SUMIFS, ROUND 2
VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, COULMN, ROW, TRANSPOSE 1
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
123
5 CONCEPT OF FINANCIAL MODELLING AND DEVLOPMENT OF MODELS
FINANCIAL MODELLING MEANING, DEFINITION, STEPS INVOLVED
IN DEVELOPMENT OF A MODEL 1
MODEL FOR CASH BUDGETING 1
MODEL FOR CALCULATIG MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BANK
FINANCE AS PER TONDON COMMITTEE NORMS 1
MODEL FOR PRICING OF GOODS ON THE BASIS OF ORDER PLACED
(MARGINAL COST BASED) 2
MODEL FOR CALCULATION OF PERSONAL TAXATION 2
7+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Excel 2007 for Dummies – Greg Harvey
New Perspective on Microsoft Excel 2007, comprehensive – June Jamrich Parson 2 Reference
Books
1. Financial Management- I. M. Pandey
2. Financial Management, Theory and Practice - Prasanna Chandra,
3. Financial Management: Khan and Jain
4. Corporation Finance: S.C.Kuchhal 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
5. Corporate Finance, Theory and Practice, Aswath Damodaran,
4 Websites CD avialable with Khan and Jain
5 Journals NA
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
124
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 309 Type Electives
Course Title International Financial Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 0 5
Course Objectives:
1 To make the students aware about the operations in foreign exchange market
2 To sensetise the student with complexities of managing finance of multinational firm
3 To understand the regulatory framework within which the operations can take place
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 Meaning, definition, scope
Overview of International Finance - International Monetary System – International
Financial Institutions – Development Banks – Balance of Payment
4
4+1
2 Foreign exchange market and instruments
Foreign Exchange Markets – Exchange Rate Determination and
International Parity Conditions – Derivatives - Foreign Currency Futures
and Options – Management of Foreign Currency Exposure – Translation
Exposure, Transaction Exposure, Economic Exposure
6
6+1
3 Financial Management of Multinational Firm
Financial Management of a Multinational Firm – Financing Multinational
Operation - Cost of Capital and Capital Structure – Capital Budgeting –
Working Capital Management – Country Risk Analysis – International
Taxation – International Accounting Standards – International Alliances
and Acquisitions
8
8+1
4 Regulatory Framework
Regulatory Framework of international finance- Indian Perspective -
FEMA, foreign trade policy, role of RBI, rupee convertibility, EOU/STPI,
SEZ, EPZ - International perspective - Federal bank, European Central
Bank, ICC guidelines.
5
5+1
5 Sources of International Finance
Sources of international finance - Trade settlement methods - Export
Finance- Buyers’ credit and supplier’s credit - International receivables
and cash management - ECB, FCCB, ADR, GDR, FDI - Syndication.
2
2+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
125
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. International Financial Management, MadhuVij, Excel Books
1. Multinational Financial Management, R M Srivastava, Excel
2. International Finance : V. K. Sharon
2 Reference
Books
International Finance, P.G. Apte, Tata McGraw Hill
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
International Finance : Shapior
4 Websites International Monetary Fund
5 Journals Indian Journal of International Business and Finances
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
126
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 310 Type Elective
Course Title
Corporate Restructuring
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To make the students understand the various forms of corporate restructuring.
2 To acquaint the students with the relevant legal, financial and procedural aspects of corporate
restructuring
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 MEANING, IMPORTANCE
Corporate Restructuring – meaning – rationale – importance – corporate strategy
and restructuring 4
4+1
2 FORMS OF CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING
Various forms of corporate restructuring – merger, acquisition – takeover
– hive offs – spin offs 5
5+1
3 LEGAL FRAMEWORK
Legal Aspects of corporate restructuring – relevant provisions of
Companies Act – Income Tax Act – SEBI guidelines regarding substantial
acquisition 4
4+1
4 PROCEDURE UNDER COMPANIES ACT
Procedural aspects under Companies Act 1956 (details required) 4
4+1
5 VALUATION
Financial Aspects – valuation under mergers and acquisitions – financing a
merger- computation of purchase consideration – swap ratio 8
8+1
Note:
Note : Case study approach is recommended
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Takeovers, Restructuring and Corporate Governance – J. Fred Weston, Mark L.
Mitchell, Pearson
2 Reference
Books
Corporate Valuation and value creation : Prasanna Chandra
Corporate Valuation - Aswath Damodaran
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
127
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
4 Websites SEBI
5 Journals Journal of strategic management and business
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
128
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 311 Type Elective
Course Title Understanding of Financial Statements of Bank
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the contents of an annual report of a bank
2 To understand how is it different than a manufacturing organization
3 To analyse the financial statements of Bank
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF BANKS
Over view of Annual report of any nationalized or Private sector Bank -
Chairman’s message, MDs message, Directors report, Management discussion and
analysis, Auditors report, Balance sheet, Operating statement, Cash flow statement,
Schedules 2
Detailed contents of Balance sheet - Difference between manufacturing and banking
statements, sequence of assets - Liquid to illiquid assets 2
Detailed contents of Operating statement - focus on interest received and spent,
Spread 1
5+1
2 KEY CONCEPTS FOR UNDERSTANDING BANKING FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Prime Lending rate, Base rate system, Asset Liability management, Capital adequacy
ratio, Cash Reserve Ratio, Statutory Liquidity Ratio, Repo, Reverse Repo, Basis Point,
calculation of interest on deposits and loans 2
Risk Management at banks, Credit risk, operational risk, market risk, Basel II norms
for risk management 2
Classification of Loans - standard assets, Sub standard assets, Non performing
assets, Loss assets, provisioning of loans and its impact on profitability 1
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
129
3 KEY RATIOS TO UNDERSTAND THE PERFORMANCE OF A BANK
Understanding Return on average equity, return on average assets, net
profit ratio, earning per share, fees to income ratio, cost to income ratio,
spread, advances to deposits ratio, debt equity ratio, NPA percentage w.r.t.
total assets
understanding the calculation of capital adequacy ratio from the annual
report
Calculation of Return on average equity, return on average assets, net
profit ratio, earning per share, fees to income ratio, cost to income ratio,
spread, advances to deposits ratio, debt equity ratio, NPA percentage w.r.t.
total assets from the latest annual reports of the banks
5+1
4 SPECIAL ANALYSIS FOR BANKS
Spread Analysis
Composition and analysis of Assets
Composition and analysis of Liabilities
Interest yielding assets, non interest yielding assets, interest bearing
liabilities, non interest bearing liabilities,
NPA analysis
5+1
5 OVERALL PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS OF A BANK
Study of at least 1 annual report of a nationalized bank / private sector
bank in detail covering - directors report, management discussion and
analysis, financial statement analysis, ratios, cash flow statement, business
outlook and growth, various segments of banking business
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Managing Banks - Mr. S.V. Joshi
2 Reference
Books
Annual Report of Bank
W. Koch Scott, Timothy. “ Bank Management”
Vishwanathan R. “ Industrial Finance “ Macmillan, New Delhi
Prasad K, Nirmala and Chandradas. “ Banking and Financial System” 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
Conetemporary Auditing - Mr.Tondon
4 Websites RBI
5 Journals CAIIB Journal
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
130
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 312 Type : Finance Electives
Course Title Enterprise Resource Planning
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 0 5
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the evolution and function of ERP
2 To Understand in detail the various modules of ERP
3 To be aware of the challenges faced in pre and post implementation stages of ERP
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 UNIT – I INTRODUCTION
Overview of enterprise systems – Evolution - Risks and benefits - Fundamental
technology - Issues to be consider in planning design and implementation of cross
functional integrated ERP systems - Case studies. 3
3+1
2 UNIT – II ERP SOLUTIONS AND FUNCTIONAL MODULES
Overview of ERP software solutions- Small medium and large enterprise
vendor solutions, BPR, Business Engineering and best Business practices -
Business process Management. Overview of ERP modules -sales and
Marketing, Accounting and Finance, Materials and Production
management etc. -Case studies. 8
8+1
3 UNIT – III ERP IMPLEMENTATION
Planning Evaluation and selection of ERP systems-Implementation life
cycle - ERP implementation, Methodology and Frame work- Training –
Data Migration. People Organization in implementation-Consultants,
Vendors and Employees-Case studies. 4
4+1
4 UNIT – IV POST IMPLEMENTATION
Maintenance of ERP- Organizational and Industrial impact; Success and
Failure factors of and ERP Implementation -case studies. 5
5+1
5 UNIT – V EMERGING TRENDS ON ERP
Extended ERP systems and ERP bolt –on -CRM, SCM, Business analytics
etc- Future trends in ERP systems-web enabled, Wireless technologies so
on-Case studies. 5
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Alexis Leon, ERP demystified, second Edition Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
131
2 Reference
Books
1. Jagan Nathan Vaman, ERP in Practice, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008
2. Alexis Leon, Enterprise Resource Planning, second edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.
3. Mahadeo Jaiswal and Ganesh Vanapalli, ERP Macmillan India, 2006.
4. Vinod Kumar Grag and N.K. Venkitakrishnan, ERP- Concepts and Practice, Prentice
Hall of India, 2006.
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
5. Summer, ERP, Pearson Education, 2008.
4 Websites Oracle. SAP, BAAN.
5 Journals NA
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
132
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 313 Type Elective
Course Title
Name of the subject : Credit Analysis and Appraisals
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To familiarize students with the various aspects of credit management
2 To introduce the various processes involved in the credit monitoring practices
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 Principles of Credit Management
Principles of Lending – Evaluation of Borrower – Sanction limit-Principles of good
lending 3
3+1
2 Objectives of Credit Management
Credit Allocation – Credit Evaluation – Financial statement analysis- Cash
flow analysis – Projections- Management of the firm and other factors-
Feasibility study- Fundamental credit issues -Borrower study and bankers
opinion -Credit Discipline- Credit Monitoring. 7
7+1
3 Credit Policy in Banks
Need for Credit Policy – Components of Credit Policy – Credit Policy -
Credit Culture- Credit institutions - Types of Credit – Bank Credit for
Various Sectors 6
6+1
4 Documentation
Importance of Documentation – Security of Documentation – Renewal of
Documents – Security Offered for Documents. 5
5+1
5 Credit Monitoring
Financial Supervision – Financial Follow-up – Financial Follow-up
Reports- - Physical Follow – up.-Identifying Problem Loans – Loan
Classification – NPA management 4
4+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Shekar and Shekar “ Banking Theory and Practice “
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
133
2 Reference
Books
Vishwanathan R. “ Industrial Finance “ Macmillan, New Delhi
Prasad K, Nirmala and Chandradas. “ Banking and Financial System” 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
W. Koch Scott, Timothy. “ Bank Management”
4 Websites RBI
CRISIL
CARE
5 Journals Risk Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
134
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 314 Type Elective
Course Title Income Tax Part I – Personal Taxation
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic concepts of income tax
2 To be able to calculate income from Salary, House Property
3 To be able to calculate Gross Total income and tax liability in a limited scope with two sources of
income i.e. salary and house property
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 MEANING SCOPE, DEFINITIONS
Income Tax Act 1961, Definitions - Assessee, Assessement Year, Previous year,
person, income, gross total income, Total income and tax liability, Company,
Difference between direct tax and indirect tax
3
Difference between exemption and deduction, capital and revenue, rebate and deduction 1
Residential status concept, Residential status of a company, implications of
residential status for a company 1
4+1
2 INCOME FROM SALARY
Definition and meaning of salary 1
Allowances- fully exempt, fully taxable, partially taxable 2
Perquisites - meaning, valuation 2
Calculation of income from salary 3
8+1
3 INCOME FROM HOUSE PROPERTY
Chargeability, Section 22, exemption 1
Computation of let out property 2
Computation of self occupied property 2
5+1
4 SET OFF, CARRY FORWARD, DEDUCTIONS
Set off and carry forward 1
Deductions applicable to Individual 2
3+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
135
5 CALCULATION OF GROSS TOTAL INCOME, TAX AND TAX LIABILITY
Calculation of Gross Total Income considering salary, house property and
other income 2
Cases on calculation of net taxable income, application of tax rates and
calculation tax liability 2
5+1
Note:
The problems will be asked only on income from salary , house property and
GTI consisting of these two sources only Assessment year will be assessment year applicable for running financial year. For example if
exams are in November 2014, then A.Y.2015-16 would be applicable.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Students guide to Income Tax - Dr. Vinod and Kapil Singhania
2 Reference
Books
Direct Taxes - Law and Practice - Dr. Vinod and Kapil Singhania
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
Income Tax Ready Reckner
4 Websites Income Tax Department
5 Journals The Chartered Accountant
Taxmann Journal
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
136
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 315 Type Elective
Course Title
Strategic Cost Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To acquaint students with various techniques used for Strategic Cost Management
2 To develop understanding regarding the adoption of various techniques of Strategic Cost
Management for obtaining sustainable competitive advantage
3 To make the student familiar with the integration of various techniques in decision making.
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 MEANING AND SCOPE
Strategic Cost Management – meaning and importance – difference between cost
reduction and cost management – objectives of strategic cost management. 3
3+1
2 TECHNIQUES OF SCM
Various techniques of strategic cost management – life cycle costing –
kaizen costing – target costing 6
6+1
3 ACTIVITY BASED COSTING
Activity Based Costing – Activity Based Management – utility and
importance – role of activity based costing and activity based management
in decision making 6
6+1
4 VALUE BASED ORGANISATION
Value based management - Value chain costing – meaning and application
– throughput costing and theory of constraints – Balanced Scorecard and
its application in cost management 5
5+1
5 LEAN MANAGEMENT
Lean cost management – utility and application 5
5+1
Note:
1 Case study approach is recommended.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Cost Management- Ravi Kishor
2 Reference
Books
Cost and Management Accounting: Colin Drurry
Cost Accounting – A Managerial Emphasis: Horngreen, Datar and Foster
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
137
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
Cost Management – A strategic Emphasis - Blocher, Chen, Cokins, Lin
4 Websites Institute of Cost Accountants of India
5 Journals The Management Accountant - Journal of ICAI (formerly ICWA)
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
138
Semester III Specialization Finance
Course Code 316 Type Elective
Course Title
Fundamentals of General Insurance
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the concept of General Insurance
2 To understand various types of general insurance
3 To get acquainted with the regulatory and legal framework of insurance
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 BASIC CONCEPTS
Risk Management and Control-Concept of Risk – Risk v/s Uncertainty- Risk Management
Objectives, Process and Control- Derivatives - Enterprise Risk Management - COSO
Framework of ERM - Role of Chief Risk Officer
2
Fundamentals of Insurance - Related concepts - Mathematical basis of Insurance -
Insurance Contracts and Provisions 3
5+1
2 FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE
Fire Insurance – Contracts – Proposals - Coverage 3
Marine Insurance – History - Nature of Contracts - Cargo Underwriting -
Hull Underwriting -Marine Losses 3
6+1
3 AUTOMOBILE, HEALTH, ETC.
Automobile Insurance – Overview – Need - Types of Policies 3
Health Insurance – Basics - Policies - Micro Health Insurance in India 2
Other Types of Insurance - Rural Insurance - Social Insurance - Project and
Engineering Insurance - Liability Insurance - Aviation Insurance- product
liability insurance – Natural calamities and terrorism insurance
3
8+1
4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
Insurance Legislation and Regulation - Insurance Act 1938, Life Insurance
Corporation Act 1956, General Insurance Business (Nationalization) Act
1972,
3
3+1
5 ROLE AND IMPORTANCE OF IRDA
Role of Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority(IRDA) - IRDA
Act 1999 - Schedules of IRDA Act - Motor Vehicle Act 1988 - Marine
Insurance Act 1963
3
3+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
139
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1.Insurance and Risk Management, 2nd Edition, P.K.Gupta, Himalaya Publishing
House
2.Insurance,principles and Practice, S.N.Mishra, S.B.Mishra, S Chand
3.Principles of Insurance Management, Neelam Gulati, Excel Books 2 Reference
Books
1.Principles of Risk Management and Insurance,9th Edition, George Rejda, Pearson
Education
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
4 Websites National Insurance of India
5 Journals Journal of Insurance Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
140
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER III
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
141
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 305IT Type Specialization - Core
Course Title I.T. Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To get a thorough update of Information Technology used in Business Organizations.
2 To develop understanding of managerial aspects so as to use Information technology effectively
and efficiently.
3 To develop capability to integrate different but related aspects of Information Technology
4 To develop a view of IT Management, especially, for a large organization
5 To appreciate IT Management as an independent and important field of work, different from IT for
Management
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Hardware Management – Historical Review - Types of Computers – Computer
Peripherals - Input Technologies and Devices– Output Technologies and
Devices - Storage Technologies and Devices - Future Scenario – Managerial
considerations in acquisition, maintenance, controlling, replacement of
Hardware
7+2
2 Application Software Management - Overview of General Purpose
Application Software such as Software Suites, Messaging, Groupware,
Conferencing Commercial and Corporate Tools and Overview of Application
Specific Software such as Programming languages, ERP, e-Commerce, CRM,
Scientific and Engineering Programs.
System Software Management –Overview of Operating Systems, Network
Management Programs, Database Management Programs, Servers, System
Utilities, Performance and Security Monitors, System Development Programs.
Managerial considerations in selection, maintenance, controlling, replacement
of Software
7+2
3 Networking Management – Networking Trends – Internet Basics – Intranet
and Extranet – Overview of Networking Alternatives, Networking types,
Networking media, Networking processors, Networking software, Networking
architecture and Networking protocols
7+2
4 Data Management –Database Concepts and Development - Types of
Databases – Application Development thru DBMS - Database Administration
Data Resource Management –Data warehouse and Data Mining - Data
Recovery Practices and Technologies
7+2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
142
5 (a) Security Management –Need, Case Studies – Types of Computer Crime –
Cyber Law - Tools of security Management - Security Defenses – System
Controls and Audit
(b) People Management -- I.T. Organization of a large corporation – Selection
and Recruitment – Training – Retention – Performance Measurement
7+2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Management Information System Laudon, Laudon and Dass 11th
Edition Pearson
2. Management Information Systems Obrien, Marakas, Behl 9h Edition
Tata McGraw Hill
3. Management Information Systems W S Jawadekar, 4th Edition Tata
McGraw Hill
2 Reference Books 1. IT system Management by Rich Schiesser
2. Enterprise Computing by Alan R. Simpson
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Influence of IT Management Practice on IT Use in Large
Organizations Journal MIS Quarterly Author: Boynton Andrew, Zmud
Robert & Jacobs Gerry
4 Websites 1. www.csus.edu
2. whatis.techtarget.com
5 Journals 1. MIS Quarterly, University of Minnesota
2. CSI Communications, Computer Society of India
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
143
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 306IT Type Specialization - Core
Course Title e-Business
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To appreciate e-Business as a significant business segment of the future
2 To get on overview of technological aspects of e-business
3 To understand strategic aspects of e-business
4 To develop capacity to initiate/lead an e-business venture/ business segment
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction, Background and Current Status, Case studies 6+2
2 e-Business Architecture - Enabling Technologies- Information distribution and
messaging Technologies- Information Publishing Technology
7+2
3 e-Business Infrastructure - e-Business Design, Capacity Planning, Performance
Modeling- Mobile commerce- framework and models
7+2
4 e-Business Models - e-Marketing, e-CRM, Internet advertising - e-Business
Security/Payment Services - e-SCM, e-Procurement - Portals- Search Engines –
Online Community building
8+2
5 e-Business Strategy into Action, Challenges, Legal Issues - Business Plan
Presentation and Demonstration “Launching e-Business: From Idea to
Realization”.
7+2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. E-business by Rayudu, Himalaya Publication
2 Reference Books 1. Knowledge Management by Jawadekar, McGrawHill
2. e-Commerce A Manager’s Guide to e-Business by Parag Diwan & Sunil
Sharma
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. E-Government, E-Business, and National Economic Performance
Journal: Communications of AIS , Shirish Shrivastava
4 Websites 1. e-business.com
2. www.ecommercetimes.com
5 Journals 1. Journal of Electronic Commerce Research
2. International Journal of Electronic Commerce
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
144
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 307IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Software Engineering
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To develop theoretically sound understanding of Software Engineering Methods
2 To develop understanding of object oriented software Engineering
3 To develop ability to represent diagrammatically and in descriptive form, software engineering
schemas
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Nature of Software, Software Engineering, Software Process, Unique Nature of
WebApps, Basic System Development Life Cycle
6+1
2 Different approaches and models for System– Generic Process Model,
Waterfall, Spiral, Prototyping, RAD, JAD
6+1
3 Requirements Anticipation, Requirements Investigation, Requirements
Specifications
6+1
4 Use-case Driven Object oriented Analysis - Use case Diagram, Activity
Diagram, Sequence diagram, Collaboration Diagram and Class Diagram
8+2
5 User Interface design 4
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Software Engineering Pressman, TMH,7th Edition
2 Reference Books 1. System Analysis and Design Jalote, Narosa Publication, 3rd Edition
2. Software Engineering W S Jawadekar, TMH.
3. System Analysis & Design Elias Awad, Galgotia Publication
4. Object Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications by Grady
Booch., Benjamin / Cummings , 1994., Pearson,3rd Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Management Information System for Enterprise Applications,
Adamantions Koumpis
4 Websites 1. www.unesco-ihe.org
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Software Engineering & Knowledge
Management
2. TSE - IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering
3. SPE - Software - Practice and Experience
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
145
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 308IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Mobile Computing with Android
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand technical aspects of M-computing
2 To appreciate impact of M-computing on Information Technology scenario
3 To understand M-computing applications; initiate new applications
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction: Generations of mobile computing, Spectrum allocation, Standard
Bodies, Players in the Wireless Space, three tier architecture of mobile
computing, Mobile Computing through Internet, Basic cellular system, concept
of frequency reuse channels, hand-off mechanism, cell splitting
5+1
2 GSM &GPRS : GSM features and Architecture , Network Aspects in GSM,
GSM Frequency Allocation, Mobility management, hand-off mechanisms, cell
splitting, Security issues used in GSM, GPRS features and architecture,
network operations, data services in GPRS, applications and limitations, SMS
and MMS services architecture and operation details
5+1
3 Emerging Telecommunication Technologies : Introduction, bluetooth, EDGE,
UMTS, Wireless Broadband (WiMAX), Mobile IP, Java Card, WLAN, Ad-hoc
Networks, Sensor Networks, Spread Spectrum technology, CDMA, Third
generation networks and applications, WAP: Model, architecture & protocol
stack.
5+1
4 Security Issues in Mobile Computing: Introduction, Information security,
Security techniques and Algorithms, security Protocols, Public Key
Infrastructure, Trust, Security Models, Security Frameworks for Mobile
Environment.
4+1
5 M-Commerce : Introduction to m-commerce :Emerging applications, different
players in m-commerce, m-commerce life cycle Mobile financial services,
mobile entertainment services, and proactive service Management
Management of mobile commerce services: Content development and
distribution to hand-held devices, content caching, pricing of mobile commerce
services The emerging issues in mobile commerce: The role of emerging
wireless LANs and 3G/4G wireless networks, personalized content
management, implementation challenges in m-commerce, futuristic mcommerce
services.
6+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
146
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Mobile Computing (Technology, Applications and Service Creation) ,
Asoke. K Talukder and Roopa R. Yavagal. Tata McGraw Hill
2 Reference Books 1. Mobile Communication : Jachan Schiller, Adison-Wesley. Wireless and
Mobile Network Architecture : Yi-Bing Lin, Wiley
2. Mobile Commerce: Technology, Theory and Applications by Brian
Mennecke and Troy J. Strader, Idea Group Publishing
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. techbits.co.in
2. www.zslinc.com
5 Journals 1. Wireless communication & mobile computing
2. IEEE Transactions on Mobile Computing
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
147
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 309IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title RDBMS With Oracle
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand theoretical concepts in Relational Data Base Management
2 To develop working level proficiency for writing SQL commands
3 To develop capability to design applications for a real life DBMS problem
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Overview of DBMS : Architecture, Data models, constraints 3
2 Relational model concept : Relational model constraints ,relational Algebra,
Relational database language, Data definition in SQL, Views and Queries in
SQL, Specifying constraints and Indexes in SQL, Specifying constraints
management systems,
6+1
3 SQL Functions:
Date - Sys_date , next_day, Add_months, last_day, months_between.
Numeric - round, trunc, abs, ceil, cos, exp, floor.
Character - initcap, lower, upper, ltrim, rtrim, translate, length, lpad.
rpad, replace. Conversion - to_char, to_date, to_number.
Miscellaneous - Uid, User, nvl, vsize, decode, rownum.
Group function - avg, max, min, sum, count, with Group by and Having
Clause.
Nested functions.
6+1
4 Joins:
Simple join Equi join Non equi join Self join Outer join
Set operators (Union, union all, intersect, minus)
Sub queries and Correlated query
DML statements (Insert, Update, Delete with where clause)
TCL (Commit, Rollback, Savepoint)
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
148
5 Tables
Create, Alter, Drop, Truncate, Rename
Constraints ( Primary key, Foreign Key, Unique Key, Check,
Default, Not Null, On delete, Cascade) Column level and Table level
constraints
Oracle Objects
Views, Sequences, Synonyms, Index (Define, Alter and Drop)
6+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Data Base System Concept by Korth, TMH, 5th Edition
2. Oracle by Ivan Bayros
2 Reference Books 1. Introduction To Database Systems By C.J.Date, Pearson.
2. Data Management Systems by Alexis Leon, Mathew Leon
3. Principles of Database Management by James Martin, PHI.
4. SQL - The complete Reference by Groff James & Weinberg Paul.,
TMH,2nd Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Oracle 7 by Ivan Bayross, BPB Pub.
4 Websites 1. www.thinkoracle.in
5 Journals
1. Development of a Relational Database Management System
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
149
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 310IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Software Quality Assurance
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand concepts and methodology related to Software Quality Assurance
2 To Know software Quality standards specifies by regulatory authorities
3 To develop capability to design Quality Testing processes in software development environment
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Software quality - Definition
Software errors, software faults and software failures
Software quality assurance – definition and objectives
Software quality assurance vs. software quality control
The objectives of SQA activities
5+1
2 Pre-project SQA Components
Contract Review
Development and Quality Plan
5+1
3 SQA components in Project life cycle activities assessment.
Verification and Validation
Various types of Reviews
Inspections
Walkthrough
Software testing
Impact of CASE Tools
5+1
4 Software Quality Factors
Mccall’s Quality Model
Product, Process quality metrics
5+1
5 Standardization
ISO 9001 and ISO 9000-3
SEI-CMM
IEEE 1012 standard
ISO/IEC 12207 standard.
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Handbook of Software Quality Assurance
2. Software Quality Assurance: Principles and Practices by Nina Godbole
2 Reference Books 1. Software Quality Assurance from theory to implementation – Danial
Galin
2. Software Project management - Edwin Bennatan
3. Project Management Body of Knowledge – PMI
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Software Engineering Roger S. Pressman, TMH, 7th Edition.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
150
4 Websites 1. www.softwarecertifications.org
2. www.softwareqatest.com
5 Journals 1. Software Quality Journal
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
151
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 311IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title e-Learning Methodologies
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand e-learning as an emerging educational technology
2 To learn use of tools/ technologies used for e-learning based pedagogy
3 To develop capability to initiate e-learning project(s)
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction: e-learning- definition. Why e-learning? Elements of e- learning, elearning
content - dimensions, Risks in e-learning, ROI , e- learning cycles,
Implementation.
5+1
2 Types of e-learning and technologies required: Learner- led e-learning
Facilitated e-learning, Instructor- led e-learning, Embedded e-learning
Tele-mentoring and e-coaching, Categories of software tools
5+1
3 Hardware and Networks for e-learning: Selection of e-learning Hardware,
network for e-learning, types of networks, private network, private networks,
internet, TCP/IP , wireless internet connection.
5+1
4 Tools for accessing e-learning: Web browsers, media players and viewers
Tools for offering e-learning: Web servers, LMS- Learning Management
Systems , Learning Content Management Systems, Collaboration tools,
Virtual- School systems, media servers
Tools for creating e-learning content: Course authoring tools, web site
authoring tools, how they work?, an overview of popular web site authoring
tools, alternatives to web authoring tools, blogging tools, testing and
assessment tools
Other Tools: Media Editors, Content Converters
5+1
5 Standards For e-learning: Standards for packaging, communication, Metadata,
Quality standards , other standards and regulation
Trends in e-Learning: Always Online, All information online, All Media
digital, Emergence of HDTV video standard, Force or haptic feedback,
Telepresence, immersive simulations, embedded system.
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. E- learning strategies – How to get implementation and delivery right
first time by Don Morrison, John Wiley and sons Ltd.
2. Methodologies, Tools and New Developments for E-Learning
2 Reference Books 1. Delivering E- learning : A complete strategy for design, application
and assessment – by Kenneth Fee , Kogan Page London and
Philadelphia, 2009
2. E- Learning Tools and Technologies a consumer’s guide for trainers,
teachers, educators and instructional designers – William Horton,
Katherine Horton, Wiley.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
152
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. www.e-learningconsulting.com
2. www.elearningnc.gov
5 Journals 1. Journal of e-Learning and Knowledge Society
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
153
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 312IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Software Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand facets of software marketing as a field of study
2 To develop in depth of understanding of Software Marketing Practices
3 To assist in developing capability to market the software
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Global and Indian Software Industry Environment: Historical Growth of the
Industry, Market Size, Nature of Products, Projects and Services, Major Players,
Industry Associations and their role in market development, Overview of India’s
Software Export Industry
5+1
2 Services Marketing Mix: 7 Ps of Services Marketing – Service Life Cycle
Strategic Aspects of Software Marketing - Identification of potential markets,
Industry/ Business analysis and creating/ sustaining competitive advantage -
Segmenting, Targeting and Positioning.
5+1
3 Promotion: Role of Promotion in Software Marketing; Personnel Selling,
Advertising and Sales Promotion; Trade Shows, Role of Relationship Marketing
in promoting software
5+1
4 Distribution: Place – Distribution Strategies for Software Products / Services;
Challenges in distribution of Software Products and Services; Role of Internet in
distribution of Software Products and Services.
Pricing: Factors involved in pricing software Products, Price estimating for
Software Projects
5+1
5 Customer Satisfaction & Service Quality: Monitoring and Measuring customer
satisfaction. Applying technology to service settings, e-services. Role of People,
Process and Physical Evidence in Software Products and Services
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Services Marketing - Zeithaml, Bitner, Gremler & Pandit, TMGH, 4th
Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Services Marketing – Rampal & Gupta
2. Software That Sells : A Practical Guide to Developing and Marketing
your Software Project, Edward Hasted
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Services Marketing - Christopher Lovelock
4 Websites 1. www.softwaremarketingresource.com
2. www.softwareceo.com
5 Journals 1. Journal of Services Marketing
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
154
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 313IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Business Intelligence and Analytics
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand principles of BI and Analytics at conceptual level
2 To understand application areas for implementing BI and Analytics
3 To develop skills to design BI and Analytics projects
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Business Intelligence: definition , concept and need for Business Intelligence,
Case studies
BI Basics : Data, information and knowledge, Role of Mathematical models
5+1
2 Business Analytics at the strategic level: Strategy and BA , Link between
strategy and Business Analytics, BA supporting strategy at functional level,
dialogue between strategy and BA functions, information as strategic resource
Business Analytics at Analytical level : Statistical data mining, descriptive
Statistical methods, lists, reports, automated reports, hypothesis driven
methods, data mining with target variables, cluster analysis, Discriminate
analysis, logistic regression, principal component analysis.
5+1
3 Business Analytics at Data Warehouse Level
Designing physical database
Deploying and supporting DW/BI system
5+1
4 Business Intelligence Architectures: Cycle of Business Intelligence Analysis,
Development of Business Intelligence System, spread sheets, concept of
dashboard, OLAP, SOA, decision engineering.
BI Tools: Concept of dashboard.
5+1
5 BI Applications in different domains- CRM, HR, Production 5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Decision Support and Business Intelligence Systems, Turban, Sharda,
Delen, Pearson
2 Reference Books 1. Business Intelligence Success Factors Tools for aligning your business
in the global economy by Olivia Parr Rud, John Wiley and sons , 2009
2. The Profit impact of Business Intelligence by Steve Williams and
Nancy Williams , Morgan Kauffman Publishers/ Elsevier, 2007
3. Business Intelligence: Practices, Technologies, and Management- Rajiv
Sabherwal, Irma Becerra-Fernandez
4. Business Analytics for Managers : Taking Business Intelligence beyond
reporting by GERT H.N. Laursen, Jesper Thorlund, Wiley and SAS
Business Series, 2010
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
155
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Great Mind Challenge for Business, Vol. 1 and 2, IBM (I) Pvt Ltd,
Bangalore
4 Websites 1. www.sas.com
2. www.smartdatacollection.com
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Business Intelligence Research ,
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
156
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 314IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Cyber Laws
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand legal provisions of Information Technology Act, 2000
2 To know Case Law and practical ramifications of the Act
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Object and Scope: Genesis, Object, Scope of the Act
Encryption - Symmetric Cryptography- Asymmetric Cryptography- RSA
Algorithm - Public Key Encryption
5+1
2 Digital Signature: Technology behind Digital Signature - Creating a Digital
Signature - Verifying a Digital Signature - Digital Signature and PKI - Digital
Signature and the Law.
E-Governance and IT Act 2000: Legal recognition of electronic records- Legal
recognition of digital signature - Use of electronic records and digital
signatures in Government and its agencies.
5+1
3 Certifying Authorities: Need for Certifying Authority and Powers -
Appointment, function of Controller - Who can be a Certifying Authority? -
Digital Signature Certifications - Generation, Suspension and Revocation of
Digital Signature Certificate.
Cyber Regulations Appellate Tribunal: Establishment & Composition of
Appellate Tribunal - Powers of Adjudicating officer to Award Compensation -
Powers of adjudicating officer to Impose Penalty.
5+1
4 Domain Name Disputes and Trademark Law : Concept of Domain Names -
New Concepts in Trademark – Jurisprudence - Cybersquatting, Reverse
Hijacking, Meta tags, Framing, Spamming - Jurisdiction in Trademark Dispute.
5+1
5 Cyber Crimes: Tampering with Computer Source Documents - Hacking with
Computer System - Publishing of Information which is obscene, in Electronic
Form - Offences related to Breach of Confidentiality& Privacy – Offences
related to Digital Signature Certificate.
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
157
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Cyber Law in India by Farooq Ahmad – Pioneer Books
2 Reference Books 1. Information Technology Law and Practice by Vakul Sharma – Universal
Law Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
2. The Indian Cyber Law by Suresh T Vishwanathan –Bharat Law house
New Delhi.
3. Guide to Cyber Laws by Rodney D. Ryder –Wadhwa and Company
Nagpur.
4. The Information Technology Act,2000 – Bare Act –Professional Book
Publishers – New Delhi
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Hand book of Cyber & E-commerce Laws by P.M. Bakshi & R.K.Suri –
Bharat Law house New Delhi.
4 Websites 1. www.cyberlawindia.net
2. www.asianlaws.org
5 Journals 1. Cyber Times
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
158
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 315IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Infotech for Retailing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand IT in Retail as an important field of practice
2 To know concepts and technologies related to IT in retail
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction: Role of IT in Retail Trade, Advantages of IT in Retail Trade like
Cost productivity benefits and Marketing benefits, Competitive advantages of
Information technology, limitations of using IT, Essential Requirements of an
Information System for retail.
5+1
2 Applications of IT in Retail Management: Inventory control, POS - Point of sale,
Sales Analysis, Planning and Forecasting, CPFR- Collaborative Planning,
Forecasting and Replenishment.
Capturing and transmitting data at POS , advantages, elements of
data capture –
i) coding system
ii) code symbology
iii) Means of data capture
Database marketing, Data Mining, Data Mart
5+1
3 Technology for retail Management: POS - Point of Scale Technologies available
Barcode scanning, electronic shelf tags, self-checkouts, RFID tags, fingerprint
authentication.
Evolution of Retail Management Systems: Introduction to self-service,
supermarkets, atomistic retail to regional networks/ chain stores, POS to point
of purchase, push action to push strategy, Point of Differentiation, Point of
Customer.
5+1
4 Web based retailing/ E- Retailing/ E Commerce (B2C): Kinds of retailers
engaged in electronic commerce: virtual retailers, two channel retailers,
Multichannel retailers Role of Internet, Benefits of Internet, Monitoring the
progress of an internet e- retail business, limitations of the web.
Emergence of eBay, Amazon and others, comparison of web based retailing and
other forms of retailing.
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
159
5 Future trends : Smart cards, E-cash, Multimedia kiosks, Customer specific offers,
Electronic body scanners, Electronic shelf front
Retail management Systems in the market: ERP systems like SAP and
PeopleSoft, Specialized retail software providers like JDA, Retek, Essentus,
SANDMAR RM 6000 and others, Open source software.
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Information Technology for retailing by Khurana Pub McGraw Hill
2 Reference Books 1. Retail Business Management by R. Perumalsamy, Anmol Publications,
2010
2. Retail Management by Arif Sheikh and Kaneez Fatima , Himalaya
Publishing House , 2008.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Advanced Technologies Management for Retailing - Framework and
Cases by Eleonora Pantano and Harry Timmermans, Business Science
Reference , 2011
4 Websites 1. www.retailsystems.com
5 Journals 1. Journal of Retailing and Consumer Services
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
160
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 316IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Technical Writing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand Technical Writing at conceptual level
2 To learn tools and techniques as well as approaches to technical writing
3 To develop expertise with a view to taking up technical writing as a career
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 What is technical writing? – Case studies
Role of technical writer- creating
user guides, reference, readme, release notes, documentation procedure
technical presentations, training slides, online help (preparation and
integration.)marketing brochures, web pages, concept note, specs, project
proposals company newsletter, CVs, effective emailing guidelines
5+1
2 Quality Characteristics for technical writing
Ease of use: Task orientation, Accuracy, Completeness
Easy to understand: Clarity, correctness, strike
Easy to find: Organization, Retrievability, Visual effectiveness
5+1
3 Audience analysis: tailoring documents for a specific audience. Creating a thesis
statement, developing an outline, pre-writing, refinement. Overcoming writer's
block/writer's anxiety. Adding emphasis in writing. Annotated bibliographies.
Avoiding plagiarism. Conciseness, clarity. Establishing arguments. Paragraphs
and paragraphing. Quoting, paraphrasing, and summarizing. Sentence variety.
Using appropriate language. Proofreading your writing; parallels in proofreading
and debugging.
5+1
4 Writing white paper/ technical report, research paper, report abstracts, manuals
and documentation. Effective workplace writing: accentuating the positives,
prioritizing your concerns for effective business writing; memo writing, email
etiquette, revision in business writing, tone in business writing, model letters for
various purposes.
5+1
5 (a)Document types to be covered Business Writing – RFI ( Request for
information) and RFP (Request For proposal) structure, Writing RFI ,RFP
Contents of an Installation manual , Writing an Installation manual
Contents of a s/w user manual , Writing a s/w user manual
What is a white paper? Contents of a white paper , writing white papers
CBT( Computer based training) , Structure of CBT, Preparing CBT
Preparing a tutorial
(b)Tools of technical writing MS Word, Ms Excel, Ms- Powerpoint, TechSmith
SnagIT, Adobe PDF, Adobe Robohelp
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
161
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Technical Writing, Process and Product, Sharon Gerson, Steven Gerson,
Pearson
2 Reference Books 1. Engineers Guide to technical writing by Kenneth G. Budinski, ASM
International , 2001
2. Science and Technical Writing A Manual of style edited by Philip
Reubens, Routledge
3. The Best Software Writing I selected and introduced by Joel Spolsky,
Apress, 2005
4. Technical Communication' by Mike Markel
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Developing Quality Technical Information A Handbook of Writers and
Editors, IBM Press, 2004
4 Websites 1. The Online Writing Labs (OWL) family of websites
http://owl.english.purdue.edu/;
specially, http://owl.english.purdue.edu/workshops/hypertext/
2. http://www.twin-india.org/ - Twinbook 1.chm and Twinbook2.chm
3. http://techwhirl.com
4. www.tc.eserver.org-The most comprehensive virtual library for technical
communicators on the Web.
5. http://mysite.verizon.net/resnx4g7/
6. http://www.greatuserdocs.com
7. http://www.io.com/~hcexres/textbook/ - Basic online textbook on
technical writing.
8. http://en.wikiversity.org/wiki/Technical_writing -Provides a basic
online course in technical writing.
9. http://www.indexers.org.uk -Indexing user manuals
10. http://www.g2meyer.com/gallery/ -Collection of screen captures of
various online help systems.
11. http://www.itauthor.com
5 Journals 1. Journal of Technical Writing and Communication
Editor: Charles H. Sides
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
162
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER III
OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
163
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 305OPE Type Specialization –Core
Course Title Planning & Control of Operations
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To give an overview of Planning & Control of Operations
2 To explain the role of forecasting in the operations planning process.
3 To explain the need for aggregate planning and the steps in aggregate planning.
4 To explain how is capacity planning done in organizations and what is its relationship with MRP.
5 To highlight the importance of scheduling in operations management.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Planning & Control of Operations: Need, Functions - Routing, Scheduling,
shop loading and dispatch, follow up. Relations with other departments,
Routing-Process layout indicating flow Chart of material from machine to
machine. Dispatch in production control-documentation.
7 + 2
2 Demand Forecasting: Forecasting as a planning tool, Why do we forecast,
Forecasting time horizon, Design of forecasting systems, Developing the logic
of forecasting, Sources of data, Models for forecasting, Extrapolative methods
using time series, Causal methods of forecasting, Accuracy of forecasts, Using
the forecasting system.
7 + 2
3 Aggregate Production Planning: Planning Hierarchies in operations,
Aggregate Production planning, Need for Aggregate Production planning,
Alternatives for managing demand, Alternatives for managing supply, Basic
strategies for aggregate production planning, Aggregate production planning
methods, Master Production Scheduling.
7 + 2
4 Resources Planning: Dependent Demand Attributes, Planning a framework –
the basic building blocks: Multiple levels in products, Product Structure, The
Bill of Materials, Time phasing of the requirements, Determining the Lot Size,
Incorporating Lead time information, Establishing the planning premises. MRP
Logic, Using the MRP system, Capacity Requirements planning, Manufacturing
Resources Planning (MRP II), Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Resource
Planning in services.
7 + 2
5 Scheduling of Operations: Need for Scheduling, Scheduling – Alternative
terms, Loading of machines, Scheduling Context, Scheduling of Flow Shops,
Scheduling of Job Shops, Input-Output Control, Operational Control Issues in
Mass production systems.
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Operations Management: Theory and Practice by B Mahadevan,
Pearson, 2nd Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Operations Management by Terry Hill, Palgrave, 2nd Edition
2. The fundamentals of Production Planning and Control by Stephen
Chapman, Pearson, 1st Ed.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
164
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Operations Now by Byron Fitch, TMGH, 3rd Edition.
4 Websites 1. www.apics.org
5 Journals 1. Demand Forecasting and Smoothing Capacity Planning for products
with high random demand volatility by Huang, M.-G.; Chang, P.-L.;
Chou, Y.-C., International Journal of Production Research, Jun2008,
Vol. 46 Issue 12
2. Adaptive Exponential Smoothing versus Conventional Approaches for
lumpy Demand Forecasting: case of production planning for a
manufacturing line by Quintana, R.; Leung, M. T., International Journal
of Production Research, Nov2007, Vol. 45 Issue 21, p4937-4957, 21p
3. Forecasting Inventory: Using Demand to Determine Supply by Wilson,
Eric., Journal of Business Forecasting, Fall2008, Vol. 27 Issue 3
4. Forecasting Demand for Single-period products: A case study in the
Apparel Industry by Mostard, Julien; Teunter, Ruud; de Koster, René.,
European Journal of Operational Research, May2011, Vol. 211 Issue 1
5. Modelling of Multi-period Multi-product Production Planning
considering Production Routes by Mahdavi, Iraj; Taghizadeh, Kaveh;
Bagherpour, Morteza; Solimanpur, Maghsud., International Journal of
Production Research, Mar2012, Vol. 50 Issue 6
6. Forecasting Aggregate Demand: An Analytical Evaluation of Top-down
versus Bottom-up Forecasting in a Production Planning framework by
Widiarta, Handik; Viswanathan, S.; Piplani, Rajesh. International
Journal of Production Economics, Mar2009, Vol. 118 Issue 1
7. Making MRP Work by Diehl, Gregory W.; Armstrong, Aaron J..
Industrial Engineer: IE, Nov2011, Vol. 43 Issue 11
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
165
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 306OPE Type Specialization –Core
Course Title Inventory Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To give an overview of various aspects of inventory.
2 To explain the impact of types of inventory costs on inventory management decisions.
3 To explain the principles of JIT
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Elements of Inventory Management: Inventory concepts, Pressures for Low
Inventory, Pressures for High Inventory, Role of inventory in Operations,
Types of inventory – seasonal, decoupling, cyclic, pipeline, Safety stock.
Inventory costs – carrying costs, ordering costs, shortage costs.
7 + 2
2 Inventory Control systems: Continuous Review (Q) systems, Periodic Review
(P) systems, ABC Classification system, Issues in the P and Q systems of
inventory control.
7 + 2
3 Economic Order Quantity Models: The Basic EOQ Model, Production
Quantity Model, Computer Solution of EOQ model with MS Excel, Quantity
Discounts, Computer Solution of Quantity Discounts model with MS Excel,
Reorder Point, Safety Stocks, Service Level, Reorder point with variable
demand, Computer Solution of Reorder point with MS Excel, Order quantity
for periodic inventory system, Order quantity with variable demand,
Computer Solution of fixed period model with MS Excel
7 + 2
4 Just-In-Time: Principles of just-in-time, Core logic of JIT, Main features for
stocks, Achieving just-in-time operations, Other effects of JIT, Benefits and
disadvantages of JIT, Comparison with other methods of inventory
management. KANBAN as a control tool. Vendor managed inventory.
7 + 2
5 Make Or Buy Decisions: Factors influencing Make Or Buy Decisions-cost,
quality, capacity core v/s noncore, management strategy. Evaluation of
performance of Materials function: cost, delivery, quality, inventory turnover
ratio methodology of evaluation, Use of ratios and analysis like FSN: Fast slow,
Nonmoving, HML-High Medium, Low, XYZ. Materials Management In JIT
Environment:
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Operations Management: Theory and Practice by B Mahadevan,
Pearson, 2nd Edition.
2. Operations Management-Process and Value Chains by Krajewski,
Ritzman, Malhotra, Pearson, 8th Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Operations Management: Quality and Competitiveness in a Global
Environment by Russell and Taylor, Wiley India.
2. Introduction to Materials Management by J.R.Tony and Arnold.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
166
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Inventory Control and Management by Donald Waters, Wiley Student
Edition, 2nd Ed.
2. Just-in-Time Manufacturing by Korgaonker, Macmillan
3. Essentials of Inventory Management by Max Muller, JAICO Publishing,
1st Edition.
4 Websites 1. www.inventorymanagementreview.org
2. www.effectiveinventory.com
5 Journals 1. Material Management Review- Institute of Material Management
2. Production & Inventory Management - APICS
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
167
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 307OPE Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Productivity Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand and appreciate significance of productivity management
2 To study various productivity management methods
3 To learn applicability of popular productivity management tools
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction: Importance and significance of productivity, Productivity
concepts – Macro and Micro factors of productivity, productivity from product
and service perspective, different inputs and productivity measures, Various
ratios related to finance, material and service.
3+1
2 Value Analysis and Value Engineering: Concept of Cost, Price and Value,
Role in Productivity, Procedure – Application and productivity benefit model.
3+1
3 Work Study: Importance of work study – Method Study and Work
Measurement – Pioneers of Performance Measurement
Method Study: Need for Method Study – Procedure of Method Study –Process
Flow charts, Man machine diagrams ,Principles of Motion Economy
6+1
4 Work Measurement: Techniques of Work Measurement including Estimating,
Stopwatch Time Study, Predetermined Time Standards, Synthetic Estimates of
Work, Times, Activity Sampling. Computation of Standard Time – Elements –
Types of Elements – Performance Rating – Allowances – Need for Allowances –
Types of Allowances
8+1
5 Advanced Methods of Productivity and service level enhancements:
Overview of JIT, Lean, 5S, TPM, BPR, Six Sigma, World Class manufacturing,
Use of Technology in productivity and service enhancements: ITeS, CAD,
CAM, CIM, CMMI.
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Productivity Measurement for Business Excellence by Prem Vrat, G.D.
Sardana, B.S. Sahay, Narosa Publishing House.
2. Operations Management for Competitive Advantage by Richard B
Chase, Jacobs, Aquilano, Agarwal, TMGH, 11th Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Introduction to Work Study Edited by Geirge Kanawaty, Universal
Publishing, 4th Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Production and Operations Management by S.N.Chary, TMGH, 4th
Edition
4 Websites 1. www.npcindia.org
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
168
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Operations & Production Management
2. International Journal of Business Performance Management
3. Journal of Applied Economics
4. International Journal of Management
5. Journal of Management Information Systems
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
169
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 308OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Maintenance Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand importance and role of Maintenance Management
2 To acquaint with various alternatives of Maintenance Management
3 To understand use of decision tools for Maintenance Management
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Need and Importance of Maintenance Management: Maintenance versus
Aggregate production planning, Maintenance versus Scheduling, Maintenance
versus Quality Control, Equipment Life Cycle, Measures of Maintenance
Performance – Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and Mean Time to Repair
(MTTR) , Availability.
5 + 1
2 Requirements for Effective Maintenance Management: Catalogues of
Equipment, Maintenance Policy, Maintenance Manual, Troubleshooting
Mechanisms, Fault – tree Analysis, Maintenance Information Systems.
5 + 1
3 Maintenance Alternatives: Routine Inspection, Preventive Maintenance,
Predictive Maintenance, Breakdown Maintenance, Planned Shutdowns / Major
Overhaul, Equipment Replacement.
5 + 1
4 Decision tools for Maintenance Management: Optimum Preventive
maintenance policy, group replacement policy, equipment replacement
decision, Spare parts management: Types of spares, Vital Essential and
Desirable, Inventory planning for spares.
5 + 1
5 Total Productive Maintenance: TPM Overall equipment effectiveness , TPM
Methodology , TPM implementation, Technology in maintenance
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Operations Management : Theory and Practice by Mahadevan, 2nd
Edition, TMGH
2. Operations Management by Norman Gaither & Greg Frazier, Cengage
Learning, India Ed.
2 Reference Books 1. Production & Operations Management by Alan Muhlemann, John
Oakland, Keith Lockyer, Macmillan India Ltd.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Operations Management by Norman Gaither
4 Websites 1. www.lifetime-reliability.com
2. www.authorstream.com
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
170
5 Journals 1. Empirical Analysis of Maintenance Performance Measurement in
Belgian Industries by Muchiri, Peter N.; Pintelon, Liliane; Martin,
Harry; De Meyer, Anne-Marie., International Journal of Production
Research. Oct2010, Vol. 48 Issue 20, p5905-5924
2. Development of Maintenance Function Performance Measurement
Framework and Indicators by Muchiri, Peter; Pintelon, Liliane; Gelders,
Ludo; Martin, Harry., International Journal of Production Economics.
May2011, Vol. 131 Issue 1, p295-302
3. Measuring Maintenance Performance: A Holistic Approach by Tsang,
Albert H. C.; Jardine, Andrew K. S.; Kolodny, Harvey. International
Journal of Operations & Production Management., 1999, Vol. 19 Issue 7,
p691-715
4. Effect of Maintenance Policies on the Just-In-Time Production System
by Abdulnour, G.; Dudek, R.A.; Smith, M.L., International Journal of
Production Research. Feb1995, Vol. 33 Issue 2, p565.
5. Effective Component Importance Analysis for the Maintenance of
Systems With Common-Cause Failures by Liudong Xing; Amari,
Suprasad V., International Journal of Reliability, Quality & Safety
Engineering. Oct2007, Vol. 14 Issue 5, p459-478.
6. Failure Reduction in Manufacturing Systems through the Risk
Management Approach and the Development of a Reactive
Maintenance Model by Karuppuswamy, P.; Sundararaj, G.; Devadasan,
S. R.; Elangovan, D.; Savadamuthu, L., International Journal of Risk
Assessment & Management. 2006, Vol. 6 Issue 4/5/6, p545-564.
7. Plant-Level Maintenance Decision Support System for Throughput
Improvement by Li, Lin; Ambani, Saumil; Ni, Jun., International
Journal of Production Research. Dec2009, Vol. 47 Issue 24, p7047-7061.
8. Measuring Efficiency of Total Productive Maintenance (TPM): A Three-
Stage Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA) Approach by Jeon,
Jeonghwan; Kim, Chulhyun; Lee, Hakyeon., Total Quality Management
& Business Excellence. Aug2011, Vol. 22 Issue 8, p911-924.
9. Relationship between Total Productive Maintenance and Performance
by Brah, S. A.; Chong, W.K., International Journal of Production
Research. 6/15/2004, Vol. 42 Issue 12, p2383-2401.
10. Justification of Total Productive Maintenance Initiatives In Indian
Manufacturing Industry for Achieving Core Competitiveness by I.P.S.
Ahuja; J.S. Khamba. Journal of Manufacturing Technology
Management. Jun2008, Vol. 19 Issue 5, p645-669.
11. Operations and Maintenance Practices and Their Impact on Power
Plant Performance by Shyong Wai Foon; Terziovski, Milé., Academy of
Management Annual Meeting Proceedings. 2008, p1-6.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
171
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 309OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Facilities Planning
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To emphasize the importance of facilities planning in view of the size of investment.
2 To make the student understand the linkages of facilities planning with other activities
3 To underline the importance of facilities location
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Facilities Planning: Facilities planning defined, Significance of
Facilities Planning, Objectives of Facilities Planning, Long Range Capacity
Planning, Facilities Planning process, Strategic Facilities Planning, Developing
Facilities Planning Strategies, Examples of Inadequate Planning. Impact of
Environmental Issues on Facilities Planning.
Product, Process and Schedule Design: Introduction, Product Design, Process
Design, Schedule Design, Facilities Design.
5 + 1
2 Logistics and Facilities Location: Logistics, Decisions related to Logistics,
Issues in Facilities location – Market related factors, Cost-related factors,
Regulatory and Policy Issues, Location Planning Methods – Location Factor
rating, Centre-of-gravity method, Load-distance method, Transportation
Model. Locating Service Facilities, Relocation aspects,
5 + 1
3 Layout Planning: Concept of Layout, Basic Layout Types, Layout Procedures,
Algorithmic approach, Department Shapes and Aisles, Multi-floor facility
layout, Commercial Facility Layout, Impact of change, Developing alternative
layouts. Introduction to ALDEP and CORELAP.
Facilities design for various Facilities Functions: Warehouse operations –
Functions of Warehouse, Receiving and Shipping Operations, Dock Locations,
Storage Operations, Order Picking Operations.
6 + 1
4 Service Facilities Layout: Nature of Services, Operational Classification of
services, Structuring the service encounter, Service blueprinting and fail-safing,
Role of floor manager in service sectors such as – Hospital, Hotel, Airlines and
airports.
4 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
172
5 Flow Space and Activity Relationships: Departmental Planning, Activity
Relationships, Flow Patterns, Flow Planning, Measuring Flow, Space
Requirements.
Personnel Requirements: Employee-Facility Interface, Restrooms, Food
Services, Health Services, Barrier-Free Compliance, Office Facility Planning.
Material Handling: Scope and Definition of Material Handling, Material
Handling Principles, Designing Material Handling Systems, Unit Load design,
Material Handling Equipment, Estimating Material Handling costs, Safety
Considerations.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Facilities Planning by Tompkins, White, Bozer and Tanchoco, Wiley India
3rd Edition.
2. Operations Management – Theory and Practice by B Mahadevan, Pearson,
2nd Edition.
2 Reference
Books
1. Operations and Supply Management by Chase, Shankar, Jacobs and
Aquilano, TMGH, 12th Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading
Material
1. Operations Management by Terry Hill, Palgrave, 2nd Edition.
2. Operations Management – Quality and Competitiveness in a Global
Environment by Russell and Taylor, Wiley India, 5th Edition
4 Websites 1. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zkKFf7iLph4
2. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zkKFf7iLph4&feature=results_main&
playnext=1&list=PL7768A320362EA93D
5 Journals 1. Ergo-Centric Facilities, Dohrmann, Mark. Industrial Engineer: IE, Jun2009,
Vol. 41 Issue 6
2. Organization of facilities management in relation to core business, Jensen,
Per Anker. Journal of Facilities Management, 2011, Vol. 9 Issue 2
3. 5 facility planning mistakes (and how to avoid them), Weitzner, Wendy M.,
May2006, Vol. 60 Issue 5
4. Facilities planning for greener hospitals by Scheeres, D. Junell. Industrial
Engineer: IE, Mar2012, Vol. 44 Issue 3
5. A Conceptual model for barrier free facilities planning, Soares, Marcelo M.;
Jacobs, Karen; Bittencourt, R.S.; de M.Guimarães, L.B. Work, 2012, Vol. 41
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
173
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 310OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title MRP I & MRP II
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand role and importance of Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II)
2 To know the inputs, processing and outputs of MRP II
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Master Production Scheduling (MPS): Introduction to MPS, Need, objectives
& functions of MPS, Role of MPS in management- as a “Link between strategic
and tactical planning”, Logical flow of materials in different manufacturing
scenarios (VAT Analysis), Planning horizons and Time periods (Buckets) of
MPS, Order management in MPS, Safety and hedges, Projected Available
Balance (PAB) and Available To Promise (ATP), Time Fences & effect of
changing MPS decisions on time fences, Final Assembly Schedule (FAS).
5 + 1
2 Material Requirements Planning (MRP-I): Introduction to MRP-I, Roles &
functions of MRP-I, Independent & Dependent Demand, Bill of Materials
(BOM), Types of BOM, Numerical Problems on BOM, Lot-sizing, MRP-I as
Input & Output Process, MRP-I Spreadsheet problem, Pegging reports &
where-used files.
5 + 1
3 Capacity Management: Introduction to ‘Capacity’ and ‘Capacity management’,
Capacity Expansion Strategies, Capacity Planning levels vis-à-vis
Manufacturing planning levels, Capacity measurement, Rough Cut Capacity
Planning (RCCP), Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP), Shop Calendar,
Scheduling strategies- Backward & Forward scheduling, Infinite & Finite
loading, Production smoothing policies.
5 + 1
4 Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP-II)- (Module-I): Introduction to
MRP-II, Roles & functions of MRP-II, MRP-II framework, Information flow in
MRP-II, Relation of MRP-II with Demand management and Capacity
management, Manufacturing calendar.
5 + 1
5 Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP-II)- (Module-II): Transition from
MRP-I to MRP-II, Closed loop MRP, Comparison between MRP-I and MRP-II,
Plant & supplier scheduling, Problems associated with MRP-II, Benefits and
prospects of MRP-II, Compatibility between MRP-II & Just-in-Time (JIT).
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II) with introduction to ERP,
SCM and CRM by Khalid Sheikh, TMGH, 1st Edition
2. Operations Management – Theory & Practice by B. Mahadevan ,
Pearson Pub., 2nd Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Plossl, George, Orlicky’s Material Requirement Planning, McGraw-Hill,
Inc, 2nd Edition, 1994
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
174
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Operations management by William J, Stevenson, Tata McGraw Hill
Companies – 9th Edition
4 Websites 1. www.apics.org/
5 Journals 1. Materials and Capacity Requirements Planning: (APICS) CPIM
Certification Review Course, Student Guide by John, Ralph E St.,
APICS, Revision 3, 1993
2. Managing in an Age of Modularity by Baldwin, Carliss Y and Kim B
Clark, Harvard Business Review, Vol. 75, No. 5, September-October
1997
3. Assemble to Order Manufacturing: Implications for Materials
Management by Wemmerlov, U, Journal of Operations Management,
Vol. 4,(4), 1984
4. Shop floor Control edited by Wassweiler, William R in James H Greene
(Editor), Production and Inventory Control Handbook, 3rd Edition,
McGraw-Hill, 1997
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
175
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 311OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Technology Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To highlight the role of technology and innovation as drivers of value and competitive advantage.
2 To provide conceptual foundations in managing innovation and technology.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of
Sessions
1 Introduction & Importance of Technology Management: Technology -
Definition and Characteristics, Technology trends, Market Based and Resource
Based view, Impact of technology on business, Forms of technological change,
Concept and significance of management of technology, Technological
environment-meaning, importance : recent developments in Technological
environment - Globalization, Time Compression, Technology integration, Induced
& Autonomous changes in the Technological environment, Competitive
advantages through new technologies.
5 + 1
2 Innovation Management: Concept of Innovation; invention and creativity: role
and relationship with innovation, Drivers and process of innovation– firm &
technology level, Classification of innovation management of innovation.
Technology Evolution – S curve of technology evolution, Technology progression,
Technology change agents, Evolutionary characteristics of technological change,
uncertainty and technological insularity.
5 + 1
3 Technology Sources and Research & Development Management: Sources of
technology, Process of new product development; Reasons of failures of hitech
products: Strategy to avoid product failure in market. Process of bringing hitech
product from development to market: Managing R& D Organization –issues and
recent trends. Linkage between technology, development and competition,
Significance of managing Intellectual Property Rights in context of technology
management, strategic issues in managing IPR.
5 + 1
4 Technological Forecasting: Meaning of Technology forecasting, uses of
Technology forecasting, Technology forecasting techniques : Exploratory and
Normative: technique; Process and application of techniques like Delphi, Growth
Curves, S- curve, Pearl Curve, Gompertz curve : Relevance Tree, Morphological
Analysis, Mission Flow Diagram
Technology strategy: concept, key principles, framework for formulating
technology strategy, Linkage of technology strategy with business strategy, Issues
in technology strategy,
5 + 1
5 Technology and Organizational Issues: Technological change and Industrial
Relations, Technology Assessment and Environmental Impact Analysis Integration
of People and Technology, Organizational and Psychological Factors,
Organizational Structure.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
176
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Strategic Technology Management by Betz. F. , McGraw-Hill
2. Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage by V K
Narayanan, Pearson Education Asia
3. Management of Technology by Tarek Khalli , McGraw-Hill
4. Strategic Management of Technological Innovation by Schilling , McGraw-
Hill, 2nd Edition
2 Reference
Books
1. Strategic Management of Technology & Innovation by Burgelman, R.A.,
M.A. Madique and S.C. Wheelwright , Irwin
2. Handbook Of Technology Management by Gaynor, McGraw Hill
3. Managing New Technology Development by Souder, W.C. and C.M.
Crawford, McGraw-Hill
3 Supplementary
Reading
Material
1. Managing Technological Innovation by Twiss, B., Pitman
2. Bringing New Technology to Market by Kathleen R Allen, Prentice Hall
India
4. Management of New Technologies for Global Competitiveness by Christian
N Madu, Jaico Publishing House
4 Websites 1. http://www.tifac.org.in/
2. http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/policies/innovation/index_en.htm
5 Journals 1. The use of Manufacturing Technologies - An External Influence Perspective
by Das, Ajay; Nair, Anand., International Journal of Production Research,
Sep 2010, Vol. 48 Issue 17
2. Research on Technical Strategy for New Product Development based on
TRIZ Evolution Theory by Fu-ying Zhang; Yan-shen Xu., International
Journal of Product Development, 2007, Vol. 4 Issue ½
3. A Framework for the Assessment of an Organization’s Innovation
Excellence by Dervitsiotis, Kostas N., Total Quality Management &
Business Excellence, Sep 2010, Vol. 21 Issue 9
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
177
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 312OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Six Sigma
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide a comprehensive understanding of six sigma
2 To introduce the six sigma methodology and philosophy
3 To learn how to manage change and sustain benefits
4 To learn how to listen and map customer requirements
5 To start executing and delivering project
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Enterprise-wide Deployment
1.1 Six Sigma and Lean : Brief history of performance initiatives- Quality
Control, TQM, Cost of Quality, Customer quality Management, SPC,
Reengineering, Six Sigma, Theory of Constraint, Lean manufacturing.
1.2 Business Process Management : Introduction to Six Sigma-As a metric, As
a methodology, As a management System. Six sigma Evolution and approach
Lean as a Business Management Strategy, Key elements of lean. Types of lean
initiatives, Implementing lean initiatives
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
178
2 DMAIC model for implementing Six Sigma.
2.1 Define: Project Selection, Developing the team, DMAIC & DMADV,
Deliverables, Tollgate Questions
2.2 Measure: Determining X variables, Cause and Effect Diagram & Matrix,
Overview of MSA, Data Collection Plan – Forms, Baselining the y data, DPMO,
Capability Indices, COPQ, Yield, Tollgate Questions
2.3 Analyze: Tools for identifying Root Causes: Histogram, Boxplot, Scatter
Plot, Matrix Plot, DotPlot, Run Chart, Multi-Vari Chart, 5 Why’s
2.4 Improve: Generating Solutions, Random Simulation, Six Thinking Hats,
Mind Mapping, Challenge Assumptions, Decision Making Tools for Selecting
Solutions – Pairwise Ranking, Solution Matrix, Force Field Analysis, Costs and
Benefits, Pilot Plan, Potential Problem Analysis – Mistake Proofing, Risk
Assessment Matrix and Control Assessment Matrix, FMEA, Contingency Plan,
Verification Plan, Tollgate Questions
2.5 Control: Solution Planning, Process Control Plan, Review Meetings,
Updated flowcharts & procedures, Control Charts, Out Of Control Action Plan,
Project Conclusion Activities
7 + 1
3 Six Sigma Impact measurement
Financial and Performance measurement: Lack of Clear Goals and Metrics
linked to Measurable Business Goals, Mismatches between Traditional
Accounting and Improvement Campaigns. Metrics That Impact – Revenue
Growth, Cost Savings, Productivity Improvement, Reduced Cost of Poor
Quality, Cash Flow Improvement, Faster product / service cycle times, Freed
up engineering and /or sales / service time, Freed up other indirect time, Cost
avoidance savings. Seven Elements of Six Sigma Scorecard
5 + 1
4 Six Sigma in non-manufacturing environments: MSA in the DMAIC Cycle.
MSA Psychology. Why Non-Manufacturing Processes are Different, MSA
Repeatability & Reproducibility (R&R) Studies. Gauge R & R. Comparison of
MSA Acceptance Criteria
5 + 1
5 Projects in Six Sigma-Use of DMAIC Cycle 3 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. The Six Sigma Black Belt Handbook by MacCarty, Daniels, Bremer and
Gupta, TMGH, 2010 Edition
2. Juran Institute’s Six Sigma Breakthrough and Beyond by De Feo and
Barnard, TMGH.
3. What is Six Sigma? by Peter Pande, TMGH
4. Six Sigma Management by Blashka, TMGH
5. All about Six Sigma by Warren Brussee, TMGH.
2 Reference Books 1. TPS-Lean Six Sigma by Hubert Ramprasad, Sara Books Pvt.Ltd.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Certified Six Sigma Black Belt Hand Book, Donald Benbow,
Pearson Publication
2. Achieving Business Excellence by Pravin Rajpal, Om Books
International, India.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
179
4 Websites 1. http://asq.org
5 Journals 1. What , Why and How: The importance of statistical thinking for Six
Sigma , Krishnamoorth, K. S., Industrial Engineer: IE, Oct 2011, Vol. 43,
Issue 10
2. In pursuit of implementation patterns: the context of Lean and Six
Sigma, Shah, R.; Chandrasekaran, A.; Linderman, K.. International
Journal of Production Research, Dec2008, Vol. 46 Issue 23
3. Critical analysis of Six Sigma implementation , Moosa, Kamran; Sajid,
Ali. Total Quality Management & Business Excellence, Jul2010, Vol. 21
Issue 7
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
180
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 313OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Designing Operations Systems
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To give an overview of the various process options in Manufacturing and Services.
2 To give insights into factors that influence process choice.
3 To impart fundamental concepts in Job Design and Work Measurement.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Process Analysis: Process Analysis, Process Flowcharting, Types of Processes,
Measuring Process Performance, Examples of Process Analysis, Process
Throughput Time Reduction
5 + 1
2 Job Design & Work Measurement: Job Design Decisions, Behavioural
Considerations in Job Design – Degree of Labour Specialization, Job
Enrichment, Sociotechnical Systems, Work Measurement and Standards – Time
Study, Work Sampling, Comparison
5 + 1
3 Designing Manufacturing Processes: Factors involved in making products,
Types of Manufacturing processes – Project, Jobbing, Batch, Line& Continuous
Processing. Product Categories & Manufacturing Processes- Relationship &
Choices. Implications reflected in manufacturing process alternatives. Hybrid
Processes – Batch Layout, Cellular Layout
5 + 1
4 Designing Service Processes I: Characteristics of Service Operations, Factors
involved in delivering services – Nature of technology / people mix, Nature of
service, Complexity of service, Volumes. Overall Design of Service Delivery
System. Service Blueprinting and fail-safing. Service Delivery System – detailed
design – Phase I: back office or front office, Phase II: The delivery system (Non
repeat services, Repeat services, single step or multi step processes).
5 + 1
5 Designing Service Processes II: Three contrasting Service Designs –
Production line approach, Self-service approach, Personal attention approach.
Managing customer introduced variability, Applying behavioral Science to
Service Encounters.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Operations & Supply Management by Chase, Shankar, Jacobs, TMGH,
12th Edition.
2. Operations Management – Terry Hill, Palgrave Macmillan, 2nd Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Operations Management by Krajewski, Ritzman, Malhotra, Pearson, 8th
Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Achieving Business Excellence by Pravin Rajpal, Om Books
International, India.
4 Websites 1. http://www.servicedesigntools.org/tools/35
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
181
5 Journals 1. How important is the batch splitting activity in scheduling of virtual
manufacturing cells (VMCs)? by Kesen, Saadettin Erhan; Gungor,
Zulal., International Journal of Production Research, Mar2011, Vol. 49
Issue 6
2. The method in work design. Some recommendations based on
experience obtained in job design by de Jong, J. R. International Journal
of Production Research, Jan1978, Vol. 16 Issue 1
3. Service delivery system design: characteristics and contingencies by
Ponsignon, F.; Smart, P. A.; Maull, R. S. International Journal of
Operations & Production Management, 2011, Vol. 31 Issue 3
4. Structuring front office and back office work in service delivery systems
by Zomerdijk, Leonieke G.; Vries, Jan de. International Journal of
Operations & Production Management, 2007, Vol. 27 Issue 1
5. Impact of sequence of operations and layout of cells in cellular
manufacturing by Logendran, Rasaratnam., International Journal of
Production Research, Feb1991, Vol. 29 Issue 2
6. Customer-Introduced Variability in Service Operations by Frei, Frances
X. Harvard Business School Cases, Mar 01, 2006
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
182
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 314OPE Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Toyota Production System
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To explain the management principles and business philosophy behind Toyota's worldwide
reputation for quality and reliability.
2 To demonstrate how managers in every industry can improve business processes by:
 Eliminating wasted time and resources
 Building quality into workplace systems
 Finding low-cost but reliable alternatives to expensive new technology
 Turning every employee into a quality control inspector
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Operational Excellence as a Strategic Weapon: 4 P model of the Toyota Way.
Toyota Production System (TPS) and Lean Production. Development of TPS &
One Piece Flow. Waste Elimination. Traditional Process Improvement v/s Lean
Improvement. TPS House
5 + 1
2 14 Toyota Way Principles:
1.Base Your Management Decisions on Long Term Philosophy
2. Create Continuous Process Flow
3. Use ‘Pull” Systems to avoid Overproduction
4. Level out the Workload (Heijunka)
5 + 1
3 14 Toyota Way Principles:
5. Build a Culture of Stopping the Process to Build in Quality Right the First
Time
6. Standardized Tasks for Continuous Improvement and Employee
Empowerment
7. Use Visual Control so No Problems are hidden
8. Use only Reliable, Thoroughly Tested Technology
5 + 1
4 14 Toyota Way Principles:
9. Grow Leaders who thoroughly understand the Work
10. Develop Exceptional People and Teams
11. Respect Your Extended Network of Partners and Suppliers
5 + 1
5 14 Toyota Way Principles:
12. Go and See for yourself to thoroughly understand the Situation (Genchi
Genbutsu)
13. Consensus based slow decision making but rapid implementation
14. Become a learning organization through relentless reflection (Hansei) and
Continuous Improvement (Kaizen)
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
183
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. The Toyota Way by Jeffrey Liker,TMH, 2004 Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. The Machine that Changed the World by Womack, Jones& Roos, Simon
and Schuster UK
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Toyota Way Fieldbook by Jeffrey Liker, David Meier, TMH, 2008
Reprint
4 Websites 1. http://www.toyotawayacademy.com/index.php
5 Journals 1. Empowering Kanban through TPS-principles - An empirical analysis of
the Toyota Production System by Thun, Jorn-Henrik; Druke, Martin;
Grubner, Andre. International Journal of Production Research, Dec2010,
Vol. 48 Issue 23
2. The Toyota Production System and Art: Making highly customized and
creative products the Toyota way by Lander, E.; Liker, J. K.,
International Journal of Production Research, Aug2007, Vol. 45 Issue 16
3. The Toyota Way in Services: The Case of Lean Product Development by
Liker, Jeffrey K.; Morgan, James M.. Academy of Management
Perspectives, May2006, Vol. 20 Issue 2
4. Exploiting the DNA of the Toyota Production System by Towill, D. R.,
International Journal of Production Research, Aug2007, Vol. 45 Issue 16
5. Handshakes around the world [Toyota production system by Towill,
Denis R., Manufacturing Engineer, Feb/Mar2006, Vol. 85 Issue 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
184
Semester III Specialization Operations
Course Code 315OPE Type Elective
Course Title Project Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 5
Course Objectives:
1 To provide the students with a holistic, integrative view of Project Management.
2 To highlight the role of projects in modern day business organizations.
3 To sensitize the students to complexities of project management.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Overview of Project Management
Basics of Project Management: Concept of Project, Attributes of a Project,
Importance of Project Management, Project Management Process, Project
Lifecycle, Project Stakeholders, Project Management Structures, Choosing
Appropriate Project Management Structure, Implications of Organizational
Culture, Main Causes of Project Failure.
Project Definition: Defining Scope, Establishing Priorities, Creating the Work
Breakdown Structure (WBS), integrating the WBS with the organization,
Coding the WBS for information system, Project Roll Up, Process Breakdown
Structure, Responsibility Matrices.
5 + 1
2 Project Planning
Estimating Project Times and Costs: Factors Influencing Quality of Estimates,
Estimation Guidelines for Time, Costs and resources, Macro versus Micro
Estimating, Methods for Estimating Project Times and Costs, Level of detail,
Developing Budgets, Types of Costs, Refining estimates and contingency
funds.
Developing a Project Plan: Developing the Project Network, From Work
Package to Network, Constructing a Project Network, Activity-on-Node
Fundamentals, Network Computation process, Using the Forward and
Backward pass information, Level of Detail for activities, Extended Network
techniques.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
185
3 Project Scheduling & Risk Management
Scheduling Resources and Reducing Project Duration: Types of Project
Constraints, Classification of Scheduling Problem, Resource Allocation
Methods, Splitting, Multitasking, Benefits of scheduling resources, Assigning
Project work, Multi Project resource Schedules, Rationale for reducing project
duration, Options for accelerating Project Completion, Concept and
construction of a Project Cost – Duration Graph, Practical considerations.
Managing Risk: Risk Management process – Risk Identification, Risk
Assessment, Risk Response Development, Contigency Planning, Risk Response
Control, Change Control Management.
5 + 1
4 Project Organization:
The Project Manager: Role and Responsibilities of the project Manager,
Planning, Organizing, Controlling, Skills of the Project Manager – Leadership
Abilities, Coaching & mentoring Abilities, Communication Skills, Interpersonal
Skills, Ability to Handle Stress, Problem Solving Skills, Time Management
Skills, Delegation, Management of Change.
Managing Project Teams: The five stage team development model, Situational
factors affecting team development, Team effectiveness, Conflict in projects,
Sources of Conflict, Handling Conflict. Managing Virtual Project teams, Project
team pitfalls.
5 + 1
5 Project Evaluation
Progress and Performance Management and Evaluation: Structure of a Project
Monitoring Information System, Project Control Process, Monitoring Time
Performance, Need for an Integrated Information System, Developing a status
report and index to monitor progress, Forecasting final project cost, Other
control issues.
Project Audit and Closure: Project Audit, Project Audit Process, Project
Closure, Team, Team member and Project Manager Evaluations.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Project Management – The Managerial Process, Clifford Gray and Erik
Larson, TMGH, 3rd Edition.
2. Effective Project Management, Clements and Gido, Thomson – India
Edition, 1st Indian Reprint.
2 Reference Books 1. The Practice of Project Management – A guide to business focused
approach, Frigenti and Comninos, Kogan Page, 1st South Asian Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Project Management by Mantel, Meredith, Shafer, Sutton and Gopalan,
Wiley India, 1st Edition.
4 Websites 1. http://www.pmi.org.in/
2. http://www.infogoal.com/pmc/pmchome.htm
5 Journals 1. Journal of Project Management-Global Research Publication
2. International Journal of Project Management-Elsevier Science
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
186
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 316OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Theory of Constraints
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To imbibe in the students the TOC thinking process.
2 To provide insights into managing a business when there are constraints and resolving those by
logical thinking.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Thinking Process: Introduction to Theory of Constraints (TOC), Tools of TOC,
Where is TOC applicable? What is a constraint, TOC’s thinking process and
Human Being, Terminology used in the thinking process, Steps to implement in
the thinking process, Current Reality Tree, Conflict Resolution Diagram, Future
Reality Tree, Prerequisite Tree, Transition Tree, Three Cloud Method.
5 + 1
2 2.1 Finance and Measures: Economic Decisions, TOC and Product Costing,
Economic Decisions using TOC Costing.
2.2 Project Management: Phases of Project Management, Common problems in
Project Environment, Critical Chain project Management – A TOC approach.
5 + 1
3 Drum-Buffer-Rope Solution: Introduction, The Drum – The MPS of the
Capacity Constraint Resource, Implementing Drum-Buffer-Rope,
Implementing Drum-Buffer-Rope on the shop floor, MPS using Drum-Buffer-
Rope Scheduling method.
5 + 1
4 Theory of Constraints in Supply Chain Management: Introduction, TOC in
distribution Solution, Drum-Buffer-Rope in distribution
5 + 1
5 Cases:Cases in application of TOC thinking process, TOC in Manufacturing, 5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Theory of Constraints by S K Mukhopadhyay, Jaico Books.
2. The Goal by E M Goldratt and Cox J, Great Barrington, North River
2 Reference Books 1. What is the thing called Theory of Constraints? by E M Goldratt, Great
Barrington, North River
2. It’s Not Luck by E M Goldratt, Great Barrington, North River
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Essays on Theory of Constraints by E M Goldratt, Great Barrington,
North River
2. Critical Chain by E M Goldratt, Great Barrington, North River
4 Websites 1. http://www.goldratt.com/
2. http://www.scienceofbusiness.com/home/what-is-theory-ofconstraints-
toc/
3. http://www.tocico.org/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
187
5 Journals 1. A Tutorial on Project Management from a Theory of Constraints
Perspective by Blackstone, John H.; Cox, James F.; Schleier, John G.,
International Journal of Production Research, Dec2009, Vol. 47 Issue 24
2. Theory of Constraints at Uni Co: Analyzing The Goal as a fictional case
study by Tibben-Lembke, Ronald S., International Journal of
Production Research, Apr2009, Vol. 47 Issue 7
3. Implementing Theory of Constraints in a traditional Japanese
Manufacturing Environment: The case of Hitachi Tool Engineering by
Umble, M.; Murakami, S., International Journal of Production Research,
5/15/2006, Vol. 44 Issue 10
4. Determination of buffer sizes for drum-buffer-rope (DBR)-controlled
production systems by Ye, T.; Han, W., International Journal of
Production Research, May2008, Vol. 46 Issue 10
5. Modified drum–buffer–rope scheduling mechanism for a non-identical
parallel machine flow shop with processing-time variation by Sirikrai,
V.; Yenradee, P., International Journal of Production Research,
9/1/2006, Vol. 44 Issue 17
6. Comparisons between drum–buffer–rope and Material Requirements
Planning: a case study by Steele, Daniel C.; Philipoom, Patrick R.;
Malhotra, Manoj K.; Fry, Timothy D., International Journal of
Production Research, 8/1/2005, Vol. 43 Issue 15
7. Order review/release and lot splitting in drum-buffer-rope by Russell,
G. R.; Fry, T. D., International Journal of Production Research, Mar
1997, Vol. 35 Issue 3
8. Scheduling using drum-buffer-rope in a remanufacturing environment
by Guide, V.D.R., International Journal of Production Research, Apr96,
Vol. 34 Issue 4
9. Using Drum-Buffer-Rope Scheduling Rather Than Just-In-Time
Production by Huff, Patricia. Management Accounting Quarterly,
Winter2001, Vol. 2 Issue 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
188
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER III
HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
189
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 305HR Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Labour Laws
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To make the students understand rationale behind labour laws
2 To equip students with important provisions of various labour laws
3 To give students insight into the implementation of labour laws.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Labour Laws: Why Labour Laws? Evolution of Labour Laws,
Indian Perspective, Labour Laws and changing scenario, need for change in
labour laws, Implementation of labour laws, Problems and challenges, ILO and
its role.
3 + 1
2 The Payment of Wages Act 1936: Sections # 1 to 26, 12A,13A,14A,15A,17A,
17B,22A,25A, The Minimum Wages Act 1948, Sections # 1,2,11 to 18,20,
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965: Sections # 2,4 to17,19,20,21,22,26,28,29,30,32
8 + 2
3 The Factories Act 1948:Sections #1,3,5,6,7,10,15to20,23,31,40,40A,40B,41,42,44,
45,46,47,48,49. All provisions under Chapter VI, VII,VIII
11 + 3
4 The Employee Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 195 :
Sections# 2,5,6,7,8,11,12,14,15,16,17,18,20
The Payment of Gratuity Act 1972: Sections# 2,4,6,7,8,10,11,12,14,15,16,17,18,20
8 + 2
5 The Employee State Insurance Act 1948: Sections # 2 and All provisions in
Chapter IV,V,VIII
The Workmen’s Compensation Act 1923: Sections# 2 to 14, 16,22
5 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Labour Law by S.P.Jain
2. Labour Law by Malik
2 Reference Books 1. Introduction to Labour & Industrial Laws, Avatar Singh, LexisNexis
2. Labour &Industrial Laws by S.N.Mishra, Central law publication
3. Elements of Mercantile Law by N.D.Kapoor, Sultan Chand
4. Bare Acts
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. APS Labor Digest
4 Websites 1. www.india-laws.com
2. www.lawinfo.com
3. www.lawsinindia.com
5 Journals 1. Management & Labour Studies
2. International Labour Review
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
190
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 306HR Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Performance Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To orient the students with the concepts related to performance appraisal.
2 To facilitate learning related to performance management for employees
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Performance Management System: Definition, concerns and
scope - Historical developments in Performance Management - Performance
appraisal Vs performance management - performance management Vs Human
resource management - processes for managing performance - Essence and
Implications of Performance Management-critical appraisal
3 + 1
2 Performance Management Process: Performance planning Setting objectives -
Organisational and individual performance plans - Components of Manager’s
performance and development plan - setting mutual expectations and
performance criteria.
Performance Managing, Objectives of performance managing, Process of
performance Managing, Importance of performance managing. Performance
Appraisal, Objectives of performance Appraisal, Process of performance
appraisal, Types of Performance appraisal, Achieving effective Performance
appraisal. Monitoring and Mentoring, Introduction - Supervision - Objectives
and Principles of Monitoring - monitoring process - periodic reviews - problem
solving - engendering trust - role efficacy.
8 + 2
3 Implementing Performance Management: Strategies for effective
implementation of performance management-Top Management agreement
commitment and leadership, Building Performance oriented Work culture.
Factors affecting effective use of performance management-Corporate culture,
alignment, Review and update
11 + 3
4 Reward for Performance: Reward System, Components of Reward System,
Objective of Reward System, Linkage of performance management to reward
and compensation System Performance Management Pitfalls and Remedies,
Recognizing the problems and Pitfalls, Limitations, Shortcoming or efficiencies
of performance appraisal, Guideline for performance appraisal and good
practices
5 Ethics in Performance Management: Ethical Performance Management
Defined, Objectives and Significance of Ethics in performance Management,
Ethical issues and dilemmas in Performance Management, Ethical Strategies in
Performance management, Performance Management in Multinational
Corporations
5 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
191
Learning Resources:
1 Text Book 1. Performance Management: The New Realities by Michael Armstrong &
Angela Baron, Jaico Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002
2. Appraising and Developing Managerial Performance by TV Rao
Learning Systems Pvt Limited, Excel Books, 2003
2 Reference Books 1. Corporate Performance Management by David Wade and Ronad
Recardo, Butter Heinemann, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Performance Management by A.S. Kolhi & T. Deb,
3. Performance Management Systems by A.M. Sharma
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Compensation Management in a Knowledge Based World by
Henderson , Pearson Education, 9th Edition
4 Websites 1. http://shrmindia.org
2. http://humanresources.about.com/od/performancemanagement
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Business Performance Management
2. International Journal of Human Resource Management
3. Human Resource Management Journal
4. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
192
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 307HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Employee Health & Safety
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To learn the basic concepts of safety management
2 To study the various provisions of employee health and safety.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Health and Safety Organization and Administration : Safety Organization,
Safety Planning, Safety policies, Safety officer, Fire hazards, Fire inspection,
Safety inspection, Plant inspection list, Record keeping
8 + 1
2 Occupational and Work Related Health and Safety: Occupational health ,
Occupational Safety , Occupational Disease, Fire Basic Chemistry/Mechanism
, Reasons, Prevention and Types of Fire, Extinction of Fire, Loss Prevention,
Association- Objective Formation, Scope and Significance
5 + 1
3 Accident compensation statutes:
Section I: The Dangerous Machines Act 1983 (Entire Act), The fatal accident
Act 1855 (Entire Act), Workmen Compensation Act 1928(Health and Safety
Related Sections), The Mine Act 1952(Section 19 to 22)
Section II: The Employers liability Act 1938(Entire Act), Public Liability
Insurance Act 1991(Entire Act), The Employees State Insurance Act 1948(Health
and Safety Related Sections), Factories Act 1948 (Section 11 to Section 40),
Maharashtra Factories Rule 1963(Health and Safety Related Sections),
Maharashtra Safety Officers Rule 1982(Health and Safety Related Sections)
6 + 2
4 Environmental Pollution and Protection: Air pollution, Water pollution, Soil
pollution, Noise pollution, The Air Prevention and Control Act 1981, The Water
Prevention and Control Act 1974 , The Environment Protection Act 1986:
Definitions, General powers of the central Government: Power of Central
Government to take measures to protect and improve environment,
appointment of officers and their powers and functions, rules to regulate
environmental pollution.
5 Field Visit: It is expected that students should visit an organization. The
students are expected to prepare reports of accidents.
3
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Industrial health and Safety Management by A.M. Sarma
2 Reference Books 1. T Safety Management: John V. Grimaldi, Rollin H. Simonds
2. Industrial Safety Management by L.M. Deshmukh
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. BARE Acts
2. APS Labour Digest
4 Websites 1. www.lawsinindia.com
2. www.lawforyou.com
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
193
5 Journals 1. Management & Labour Studies
2. International Labour Review
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
194
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 308HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Employee Welfare
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To equip students with welfare concepts & practices
2 To study statutory & non statutory welfare facilities
3 To acquaint students with role of various agencies
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Labour Welfare : Introduction & Origin, Welfare from Indian prospective,
Objectives, principals, approaches, classification of welfare
4 + 1
2 Labour Welfare Officer: Need, role, functions, duties, Qualification,
disqualification, Duties under Maharashtra Welfare officers Rules 1966.
5 + 1
3 Statutory & Non Statutory welfare facilities : Study of all statutory & Non
statutory welfare facilities
5 + 1
4 Role of various agencies in Labour Welfare Employer: Employer,
Government, Trade Unions, NGO
5 Field Study/ Desk Research: Student along with faculty are expected to study
employee welfare facilities practiced by the organizations in the area & prepare
a report
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Aspects of Labour Welfare & Social Security by A.M. Sharma
2 Reference Books 1. Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism by S.D. Punekar
2. Labour Problems & Social Welfare by R.C. Tyagi
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. APS Labour Digest
4 Websites 1. www.articlesbase.com
2. http://industrialrelations.naukrihub.com/employee-welfare.html
5 Journals 1. Management & Labour Studies
2. International Journal of Human Resource Management
3. Human Resource Management Journal
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
195
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 309HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title HR Audit
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide a balanced and comprehensive exposition of the concept of HRD Audit
2 To learn the tools and techniques required for its implementation
3 To provide a balanced and comprehensive exposition of the concept of HRD Audit
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction : Origins of HR Audit, HRD Audit Basic Concepts and
Components, Elements of Good HRD
5 + 1
2 HRD and HR Audit : HRD Strategies, HRD Structure, HRD Systems , HRD
Competencies
5 + 1
3 HRD Audit Methodology : HRD Audit Methodology –Interview-
Individual, Group, HRD Audit Methodology-Observation-Physical facilities,
Meetings, Discussions, and Transaction , Celebration and Events, HRD Score
Card: Designing and Using HRD Audit for Business Improvement
7 + 2
4 Effectiveness of HRD Audit as an Intervention : Objective, Variables Used,
Instruments Used, Tools of Data Collection, Major Findings and Conclusion
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. HRD Audit – Evaluating the Human Resource Functions for Business
Improvement by T.V. Rao, Response Books
2 Reference Books 1. Human Resource Management by Gary Dessler, Pearson Publications
3 Supplementary
Reading
Material
---
4 Websites 1. http://www.expressindia.com/fe/daily/19980719/20055424.html
2. http://strengthbasedstrategies.com/PAPERS/24%20TVRaoFormatted.pdf
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
196
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 310HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Human Resource Information System
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To learn fundamental principles of HRIS
2 Developing specific HRIS skills competencies needed by professionals
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction To Human Resource Management And Human Resource
Information Systems: Evolution of Human Resource Management and Human
Resource Information Systems: The Role of Information Technology, Database
Concepts and Applications in Human Resource Information Systems, Systems
Considerations in the Design of an HRIS: Planning for Implementation
5 + 1
2 Determining Human Resource Information Systems Needs: Human Resource
Information Systems Needs Analysis, System Design and Acquisition, HR
Metrics and Workforce Analytics, Cost Justifying Human Resource Information
Systems Investment
5 + 1
3 Resource Information Systems Implementation And Acceptance: Human
Resource Information Systems Project Management, Change Management:
Implementation, Integration and Maintenance of the Human Resource
Information Systems
3 + 1
4 Human Resource Information Systems Applications: Human Resource
Administration and Human Resource Information Systems, Talent
Management 1: Job Analysis and Human Resource Planning, Recruitment and
Selection in an Internet Context, Training and Development: Issues and Human
Resource Information Systems Applications, Performance Management,
Compensation, Benefits, Payroll and the Human Resource Information
Systems, International Human Resource Management
5 Special Topics In Human Resource Information Systems: Information
Security and Privacy in Human Resource Information Systems, The Future of
Human Resource Information Systems: Emerging Trends in Human Resource
Management and Information Technology
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Human Resource Information Systems- Basics, Application, Future and
Direction by Dr. Michael Kavanagh and Dr, Mohan Thite
2 Reference Books 1. Human Resource Information System by P.K.Gupta and Sushil Chaabra
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Human Resource Management by Gary Dessler, Pearson Publication
4 Websites 1. http://smallbusiness.chron.com/advantages-disadvantages-humanresource-
information-system-2107.html
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
197
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
198
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 311HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Outsourcing of Human Resource
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To learn the basic concepts of outsourcing
2 To enable the students to understand each stage of out sourcing process
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction: What is Outsourcing? Factors Driving the Need to Outsource,
Types of Outsourcing, Skills Needed to Manage Outsourcing Efforts, The
Outsourcing Lifecycle, Stages of Outsourcing
7 + 1
2 Outsourcing Strategies: Four Elements of Strategic Assessment , Business
Value Assessment, Risk Assessment
2 + 1
3 Defining Needs and Vendor Assessment : In-depth Look at Operational
Assessment, Defining Needs, Conclusion in Checklist, Types of Vendors, The
Process of Vendor Assessment, Common Errors while Choosing Vendors
5 + 1
4 Negotiation and Contract Management : Negotiation management, Contract
Management, Project Initiation and Transition, Key Considerations
5 Managing Relationships and Repeating the Processes: Work Administration,
Communication Management, Knowledge Management, Personnel
Management and Financial Management, The Argument for Continuing the
Exit Strategy, Outsourcing Management Maturity Model (OMMM),
Relationship Management Office
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. The outsourcing Handbook: How to implement a Successful
Outsourcing Process by Mark J. Power, Kevin c. Desouza, carlo Bonifazi
2 Reference Books 1. Human Resource Outsourcing- An Introduction byV.R. P. Kashyap, E.
Mrudula, ICAFAI University Press
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Human Resources Outsourcing: Solutions, Suppliers, Key Processes
and the Current Market : a Case-study-based Market Review by Ian
Hunter, Jane Saunders, Gower Publishing, Ltd., 2007
4 Websites 1. http://www.induction.to/outsourcing/
2. http://www.strategic-human-resource.com
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
199
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 312HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Public Relations & Corporate Communications
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To make students understand importance of effective communication in HR
2 To equip students with PR initiatives by the HR professional
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Public Relations & Corporate Communication : Introduction to corporate
communication, Public relations writing-writing to inform, writing to
persuade, Design & lay out, Online public relations
4 + 1
2 Media Relations: Building maintaining relationship with credibility with
media, Developing methodologies for successful practice of media relations
5 + 1
3 Public Relations: Concept, theory, history & practice of public relations,
Importance of PR for HR professionals, PR campaign & strategies for PR,
Evaluating PR activities
5 + 1
4 Communication Management : Presentation skills, Developing strategic
communication plan, Synthesizing internal & external initiatives, Event
Management
5 Field Study/ Desk Research: Student along with faculty are expected to study
PR activities and communication strategies designed & practiced by the
organizations in the area & prepare a report.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Public Relations by Phillip Henslowe, Chartered Institute of PR, 2nd
Edition,
2 Reference Books 1. Public Affairs in Practice by Stuart Thomson & Stevee John, Chartered
Institute of PR, 1st edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Develop your PR Skills by Neil Richardson& Lucy Laville, The Sunday
Times,
2. Creativity in PR by Andy Green, Chartered Institute of PR, 3rd edition,
3. Running a PR Department by Mike Beard, Chartered Institute of PR, 2nd
Edition
4 Websites 1. http://www.public-relations-india.blogspot.in/
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
200
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 313HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Quality Management System
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To create an awareness of fundamental principles, significance and implementation of quality
management
2 To use new concepts of TQM in the process of continuous improvement and learning
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction: History of Total quality management, Principles of TQM,
Features of TQM, Tool and techniques of TQM, TQM implementation, Barriers
to TQM implementation
5 + 1
2 Components of TQM: Customer supplies relationship, Management leaders
and leadership in TQM system, Values vision mission and goals in TQM,
Cultural change for TQM, Continuous improvement and learning in TQM,
Creativity and innovation, Communication.
7 + 1
3 Quality Certification: Evolution of ISO 9000 standard, Principles and
objectives of ISO 9000 standard, Procedure for registration and certification of
ISO 9000 Standards, ISO 9000 standard versus QS 9000
5 + 1
4 5S for Quality Ambience: Definition of 5S, Implementation of 5S 3 + 1
5 Tools for Continuous Improvements: PDCA process, Just in Time, Poka Yoke ,
Kaizen, Six Sigma.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Total Quality Management Principles and Practices by S.K Mandal
2 Reference Books 1. Total Quality Management by N. Srinivasa Gupta, B. Valarmathi
2. Total Quality Management by l. Suganthu, Anand Samuel
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Quality control & Total Quality Management by P.L. Jain, TMGH
2. A Executive Handbook- World Class Quality by Suresh Lulla, TMGH
4 Websites 1. http://www.iso.org/iso/qmp
2. http://www.stqc.gov.in/content/quality-management-system-qms
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
201
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 314HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Competency Mapping
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 Make the students understand concept and importance of competency mapping
2 Give insight into the process and models of competency mapping
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of
Sessions
1 Understanding Competency Mapping : Introduction---history and origin
of competency mapping-----Reasons for popularity of competency
mapping---- Definitions and components of competency---Skill, knowledge
and motive—traits of self-concept
7 + 1
2 Competency Mapping - procedures and steps: Determining objectives and
scope---clarifying implementation goals and standards----create an action
plan----define performance effectiveness-----tools for data collection---data
analysis---validating competency model----mapping future jobs and single
incumbent jobs-----using competency profiles In HR decision
7 + 1
3 Competency Categories: Thresh hold, differentiating, generic vs key,
functional or technical, leadership , managerial
4 + 1
4 Leading and managing competency mapping : Acceptance of competency
mapping----causes for resistance---recommended action to address
resistance---- Delphi technic,360 degree feedback, HR generic competency
mapping-----supervisory generic competency mapping
5 Competency assessment and uses : Strategies to address the gaps-----
competency recruitment and selection-----competency based appraisal-----
competency based succession and career planning----competency based
compensation and benefits------competency based training and
development
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. The Handbook of Competency Mapping: Understanding, Designing and
Implementing Competency Models in Organizations by Seema Sanghi
Sage Publications Pvt. Ltd;
2. Competency Mapping by R K Sahu, Publisher : Excel
3. ASTD Competency Study: Mapping the Future by Paul R. Bernthal,
Publisher: ASTD Press (June 6, 2004)
2 Reference Books 1. Competency Mapping For Superior Results by Mukherjee, Sraban TMGH,
2011 -12 Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading
Material
1. Understanding Organisational Behavior by Uday Parek, Oxford
University Press
4 Websites 1. http://www.bodhih.com/humanresources/competencymapping.html
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
202
2. http://www.articlesbase.com/self-publishing-articles/competencymapping-
in-the-latest-scenario-1102107.html
3. http://competency-matrix.blogspot.in/
4. http://mmgindia.com/?tag=competency-mapping
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
203
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 315HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Lab in Recruitment & Selection
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To give hands on experience to students on Recruitment advertisements, profiling techniques
2 To acquaint students with different interviewing methods
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Comparative study of 10 recruitment advertisements ( 5 from Newspaper & 5
from job portals) & analysis of the same in the light of : Job Specification/
description, Mode of selection, Other details - Documentation for Recruitment
10
2 Profiling Techniques : Personality, Aptitude, Competency 10
3 Interviewing: Study of Interview modes, List of questions for interviewers,
Personal, Telephonic
10
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Human Resource and Personnel Management by K Aswathappa,
Publisher, TMGH
2 Reference Books 1. Effective Recruitment and Selection Practices by Alan Nankervis,
Robert Compton, Bill Morrissey, 5th Edition.
2. Recruitment and Selection (Developing Practice), Chartered Institute of
Personnel and Development
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Successful Interviewing and Recruitment by Rob Yeung, Kogan ,Page
Publishers, 2008
4 Websites 1. www.articlebase.com
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
204
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 316HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Lab in Job Design & Analysis
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To give hands of experience to the students of designing jobs at various levels
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Faculty is expected to divide students in group of 5 students each & brief them
about the process of Job design & Analysis
5
2 Each group assigned to design jobs at following levels from manufacturing/
service sector: Lower Level- 2 jobs , Middle Level- 2 jobs, Top level- 2 jobs
15
3 Presentation by the student & submission of assignment to the concern faculty 10
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Job Analysis: Methods, Research, and Applications for Human
Resource Management in the New Millennium by Michael T. Brannick
2 Reference Books 1. Human Resource Management by Gary Dessler
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Human Resource Management by K. Ashwathappa, TMGH
4 Websites 1. http://www.job-analysis.net/018.htm
2. http://toolkit.ahpnet.com/Building-a-Recruitment-and-Retention-
Plan/Step-3-Analyze-the-Selected-Job-Position
3. http://www.icmrindia.org/courseware/Intro%20to%20Hrm/hrm-
DS5.htm
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
205
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 317HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Lab in Training
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To make students understand training need analysis
2 To help students design Training Programmes
3 To make students understand & design training methods
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Students are divided in group of 5 students each. Faculty along with students
identify 6 cadres at different levels & prepare Training Need Analysis
10
2 After this design training programme with reference to TNA 10
3 Design Training methods for the Training programme designed. 10
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. The ASTD Training and Development Handbook: A Guide to Human
Resource Development by Robert Craig, McGraw-Hill.
2 Reference Books 1. Creative Training Techniques Handbook by Robert W. Pike, CSP
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Training & Development by Dr. B. Janakiraman, Dreamtech Press,
Indian Text Edition, 2007.
4 Websites 1. www.astd.org
2. www.istdtrg.org
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
4. Advances in Developing Human Resources
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
206
Semester III Specialization HRM
Course Code 318HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Lab in Labor Laws
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To give students insight into the implementation of labour laws
2 To acquaint students with calculation of due/ compensations/ contributions etc.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Calculations of: Bonus, Gratuity, Compensations under W.C. Act, Provident
Fund, ESI contributions, Accident Report Writing
10
2 Inviting industry experts to understand calculations of the above in their
respective organizations.
10
3 Students to be given assignments either realistic or hypothetical to calculate
above
10
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Labour Law by S.P. Jain
2. Labour Law by Malik
2 Reference Books 1. Introduction to Labour & Industrial Laws byAvatar Singh
2. Labour & Industrial Laws by S.N.Mishra, Central law Publication
3. Labour Laws by S.D. Geet, Nirali Prakashan
4. Elements of Mercantile Law by N.D.Kapoor, Sultan Chand
5. Bare Acts
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. APS Labor Digest
4 Websites 1. www.india-laws.com
2. www.lawinfo.com
3. www.lawsinindia.com
4. www.lawforyou.com
5. http://www.vakilno1com
5 Journals 1. --
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
207
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER III
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
208
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER III
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
209
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 305SCM Type Specialization – Core
Course Title Essentials of Supply Chain Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To make students understand how supply chain impacts all areas of the firm
2 To introduce the basic concepts of supply chain management
3 To provide insights into supply chain’s linkages with customer value
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 21st Century Supply Chains: Concept & definitions of Supply Chain (SC),
Physical distribution, Logistics & Supply Chains, Generalized SC Model,
Concept of SCM, Role of SC as a value driver: Integrative Management,
Responsiveness, Financial Sophistication
6 + 1
2 Supply Chain Structure: Shift from enterprise to network, Structure of a SC,
Push based SC, Pull based SC, Tradeoff between Push & Pull, Identifying
appropriate Push & Pull Strategy for SC, Commodity & cost centric SC, Agile
SC
7 + 2
3 Total SCM: Changing business landscape – driving forces: Shift from
Operations to Services, Impact of globalization & technological revolution, Shift
from linear SC to collaborative networks, power shifts in the SC- demands for
flexibility of partnerships, core competencies, growth in outsourcing, Increased
complexity of processes
7 + 2
4 SCM Building Blocks: Overview of customer focus & demand, resources &
capacity management, procurement & supplier focus, inventory management,
operations management, distribution management in SCM
7 + 2
5 Customer Value: Empowered consumer, Customer focused Marketing & SC
service outputs, customer service – availability, operational performance,
reliability. Customer satisfaction – customer expectations, enhancing customer
satisfactions, limitations of customer satisfaction. Customer success – achieving
customer success, value added services, customer value requirement mapping,
CRM
8 + 3
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Supply Chain & Logistics Management by Bowersox, Closs & Cooper,
TMGH, 2ndEdition.
2. Designing & Managing the SC – Concepts, Strategies & Case studies by
Levi, Kaminsky et. al., TMGH, 3rdEdition.
3. Supply Chain Management: Strategy Planning & Operations by Sunil
Chopra, Peter Meindl, Pearson, 1stEdition.
4. Supply Chain Management Process, System & Practice by
N.Chadrasekaran, Oxford, 1stEdition
5. Total Supply Chain Management by Basu & Wright, Elsevier, 1st
Edition.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
210
2 Reference Books 1. Logistics Management & Strategy by Harrison and van Hoek, Prentice
Hall, 2005.
2. Supply Chain Management by Mentzer, Response Books, 2007
3. Logistics Management : The Supply Chain Imperative by Vindo Sople,
Pearson Education, 2007
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Competitive Advantage, Michael Porter, Free Press, 1985
2. Latest Economic Survey of India – Chapter on Infrastructure and
Communications.
3. New Directions in Supply Chain Management: Technology & Strategy
Implementation by Tonya Boone and Ram Ganeshan, Jaico Publishing,
2007
4 Websites 1. http://csmp.org/
2. www.supplychain.org
5 Journals 1. Logistics And Supply Chain Practices In India by Srivastava, Samir K.,
Vision , Jul-Sep2006, Vol. 10 Issue 3
2. What Is the Right Supply Chain for Your Product? by Fisher, Marshall
L., Harvard Business Review, Mar/Apr97, Vol. 75 Issue 2
3. Supply Chain Management: More Than a New Name for Logistics, by
Cooper, Martha C.; Lambert, Douglas M.; Pagh, Janus D., International
Journal of Logistics Management, 1997, Vol. 8 Issue 1
4. Customer Service, Customer Satisfaction, and Corporate Performance
In The Service Sector, by Dresner, Martin; Kefeng Xu., Journal of
Business Logistics, 1995, Vol. 16 Issue 1
5. Supply Chain Management: Relationships, Chains and Networks, by
Harland, C. M., British Journal of Management, Mar96 , Special Issue,
Vol. 7
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
211
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 306SCM Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Logistics Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To make students understand the role and importance of logistics in modern day economy.
2 To discuss the relationship between logistics and other functional areas.
3 To analyse logistics systems from different perspectives to meet desired corporate objectives.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Context of Logistics: Introduction, definitions, logistics in the economy a
macro perspective, aim of logistics, activities of logistics, value added role of
logistics
5 + 1
2 Logistics in the firm: Micro dimensions of logistics, interface with operations,
manufacturing, marketing, supply chain, Problems with fragmented logistics,
Integrating logistics within an organization, integrating logistics along the SC,
7 + 2
3 Approaches to analyzing logistics systems: Materials Management v/s
physical distribution, Cost centres, nodes v/s links, logistics channel, cost
perspective & level of optimality, short run or static analysis, long run or
dynamic analysis
8 + 2
4 Logistics Relationships: Types of relationships, Competitive relationship,
product relationship, spatial relationship, intensity of involvement, logistics
outsourcing activities – concept & types of 3PL, 4PL, need for collaborative
relationships
7 + 2
5 Service Response Logistics: Overview of service Operations – service
productivity, global service issues, service strategy development, service
delivery systems, service location & layout, primary concerns of service
response logistics – service capacity, waiting times, distribution channels,
service quality
8 + 3
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. The Management of Business Logistics by Coyle, Bardi, Langley,
Cengage Learning India Ed, 7th Edition.
2. Logistics – An introduction to SCM by Donald Waters, Palgrave
Macmillan, 1stEditon
3. Principles of SCM – A Balanced Approach by Wisner, Leong, Tan ,
Cengage Learning India Ed., 1st Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Logistics and Supply Chain Management: Cases and Concepts by
Raghuraman and Rangaraj, Macmillan Business Books
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Business Logistics: Management of Physical Supply and Distribution,
Heskett, Ivie and Glaskowsky, Ronald Press, New York.
4 Websites 1. http://www.logisticsmgmt.com/
2. www.asianclm.com/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
212
5 Journals 1. Principles Of Logistics Management by Payne, Stanley L.; Kramer,
Walter H., Journal of Marketing, Apr1967, Vol. 31 Issue 2,
2. The Principles of Logistics Revisited by Voorhees, Roy Dale; Sharp,
Merrill Kim., Transportation Journal (American Society of
Transportation & Logistics Inc), Fall78, Vol. 18 Issue 1,
3. A Survey of Third-party Logistics (3PL) Service Providers in India by
Mitra, Subrata., IIMB Management Review , Jun2006, Vol. 18 Issue 2
4. The Emerging Role of the Third-Party Logistics Provider (3PL) as an
Orchestrator by Zacharia, Zach G.; Sanders, Nada R.; Nix, Nancy W.,
Journal of Business Logistics, 2011, Vol. 32 Issue 1
5. Selection process in logistics outsourcing - a view from third party
logistics provider by Yee Ming Chen; Meng-Jong Goan; Pei-Ni Huang.,
Production Planning & Control, Apr 2011, Vol. 22 Issue 3
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
213
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 307SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Managing Material Flow in Supply Chains
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 24
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 06
Course Objectives:
1 To understand flow of materials in a Supply Chain
2 To appreciate the role of Transportation and Warehouse Management
3 To understand the essentials of Packaging and Materials Handling from Logistics point of view
4 To understand Government statutory requirements related to Logistics Management
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Flows in SC: Forward & Reverse SC, Product, Services, Information, Funds,
Demand, Forecast flows in Upstream & Downstream direction
4 + 1
2 Transportation Infrastructure & Operations: Transport functionality,
Principles, Mode Selection criteria, Transportation Service Levels,
Transportation Economics and Pricing – economic drivers, costing, carrier
pricing strategy. Transport Administration – operational management,
consolidation, negotiation, control, Documentation – L/R, B/L, AWB, IGM
5 + 2
3 Warehouse Management: Warehousing – economic benefits, service benefits.
Warehousing Operations – handling, storage. Warehouse Ownership
Arrangements, Warehouse Decisions – site selection, design, product mix
analysis, expansion, material handling, layout, Warehouse Management
System
5 + 1
4 Packaging & Materials Handling: Packaging Perspectives, Packaging for
Materials Handling Efficiency – package design, unitization, communication.
Material Handling – basic considerations, mechanized systems,
semi-automated, automated Systems, information directed Systems, special
handling considerations
5 + 1
5 Role of Government in Logistics: Overview of CST, LST, Implications of
proposed GST, Excise Duties, Octroi, Entry Tax, CENVAT, Motor Vehicles Act,
Customs Act
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Supply Chain & Logistics Management by Bowersox, Closs & Cooper,
TMGH, 2nd Edition.
2. Logistics and Supply Chain Management- Cases and Concepts by G.
Raghuram, N Rangaraj, Macmillan India, 1st Edition.
3. Fundamentals of SCM Twelve drivers of competitive advantage by
John Mentzer, Sage Publication, 1st Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Business Logistics/Supply Chain Management by Ronald Ballou,
Pearson Education, 5th Edition.
2. A Logistics Approach to Supply Chain Management by Coyle, Langley,
Gibson, Novack, Bardi, Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2009.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
214
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Advanced Supply Chain Management by Poirier C C, Berrett, Koehler
Publishers, 1999.
4 Websites 1. http://www.inboundlogistics.com/cms/
2. http://www.ciilogistics.com/
3. http://www.tcil.com/tcil/
4. http://cscmp.org/
5 Journals 1. Commodity Futures Markets, Warehouse Receipts and the Dynamics of
Warehousing Infrastructure: The Indian Scenario by Pillai, Manoj., IUP
Journal of Infrastructure, Dec2010, Vol. 8 Issue 4
2. What Can You Do About Logistics in India?, Frentzel, David, World
Trade: WT100, Mar2011, Vol. 24 Issue 3
3. Technological Innovations in the Indian Logistics Industry: The Case of
Freight Handling, Srinivas, Kolluru; Krishna, Kolluru., IUP Journal of
Infrastructure, Sep2009, Vol. 7 Issue 3/4,
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
215
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 308SCM Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Inventory Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the Process of Aggregate Planning and its link with Inventory Management
2 To understand concept of Supply Chain Inventory and study a few basic variants of EOQ models
3 To recognize role and importance of Supply Chain Inventory Management in delivering perfect
customer order
4 To acquaint with safety and environmental aspects of Inventory Management
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Aggregate Planning & Inventory Management: Introduction, Operations
Planning, Aggregate Production Plan – Chase Production Strategy, Level
Production Strategy, Mixed Production Strategy. MPS, Dependent &
Independent Demand. Bill Of Materials, Overview of MRP & MRP II
4 + 1
2 Managing SC Inventory & Delivering Perfect Customer Orders-I:
Understanding SC Inventory – types of inventory, inventory related costs,
Inventory Investment – Asset or Liability? The Right reasons for Investing in
Inventory – (support production, operational & customer service requirements,
hedge against marketplace uncertainty, opportunity buying). The Wrong
reasons for Investing in Inventory – (poor quality & material yield, unreliable
supplier delivery, extended order-cycle times, inaccurate demand forecasts,
specifying custom items for standard applications, extended material pipelines,
inefficient manufacturing processes). Special Applications of EOQ Approaches
– adjusting simple EOQ model for modal choice decision, adjusting simple
EOQ model for volume transportation rates, adjusting simple EOQ for private
carriage
6 + 1
3 Managing SC Inventory & Delivering Perfect Customer Orders-II: Managing
Inventory Investment – Three V model of inventory management, achieve
perfect record integrity, improve product forecasting, Standardize and Simplify
product design, leverage companywide purchase volume, use suppliers for onsite
inventory management, develop SC planning systems and support
structure, Reduce Supplier-buyer cycle times, Delivering the Perfect Customer
Order – MRP, DRP, SC inventory planning, automated inventory tracking
system, Inventory at Multiple Locations – The Square Root law, inventory for
outbound systems, Demand Pull Approach to manage Inventory
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
216
4 Safety & Environmental Aspects of Inventory Management: Environmental
Aspects of Storage – identification of land contamination , water and air
contamination & monitoring for fugitive emission, spillages, leakages, dumps,
& disposables. Explosive Storage - Petroleum act - storage of explosive –
precautions during loading, unloading, storage, transportation & usage, Gas
Cylinder rules, Fire and other Hazards & precautions for mitigation,
Cross contamination & Hygiene precaution in case of chemicals & pharmacy
food storage material, Hazardous Waste Storage and Management – Storage
and disposal methods and legal compliance
5 + 1
5 Key Operational Aspects in SC:Creating the Lean SC – JIT Purchasing, JIT
Transportation and JIT Production. Kan-Ban, VMI
4 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Purchasing & Supply Chain Management by Monczka, Trent,
Handfield, Thomson South Western, 3rd Edition
2. Supply Chain Management Process, System & Practice by
N.Chadrasekaran, Oxford, 1stEdition
2 Reference Books 1. Purchasing & Supply Chain Management by Dobler, Burt, TMGH, 6th
Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Management of Business Logistics by Coyle, Bardi, Langley,
Cengage Learning, 5th Indian Reprint
4 Websites 1. www.apics.org/
5 Journals 1. Sharpening Inventory Management by Armstrong, David J. , Harvard
Business Review, Nov/Dec85, Vol. 63 Issue 6
2. Empowering Kanban through TPS - Principles - An Empirical Analysis
of the Toyota Production System, Thun, Jorn-Henrik; Druke, Martin;
Grubner, Andre, International Journal of Production Research, Dec2010, Vol.
48 Issue 23
3. Kanban, MRP, and Shaping The Manufacturing Environment by
Krajewski, Lee J.; King, Barry E.; Ritzman, Larry P; Wong, Danny S.,
Management Science, Jan1987, Vol. 33 Issue 1
4. Prerequisites to Vendor-managed Inventory by Niranjan, Tarikere T.;
Wagner, Stephan M.; Nguyen, Stephanie M., International Journal of
Production Research, Feb2012, Vol. 50 Issue 4
6. A Logistics Network Design Model With Vendor Managed Inventory
by Shu, Jia; Li, Zhengyi; Shen, Houcai; Wu, Ting; Zhong, Weijun.,
International Journal of Production Economics, Feb2012, Vol. 135 Issue 2
7. Adaptive Fuzzy Vendor Managed Inventory Control For Mitigating
The Bullwhip Effect In Supply Chains by Kristianto, Yohanes; Helo, Petri;
Jiao, Jianxin (Roger); Sandhu, Maqsood., European Journal of Operational
Research, Jan2012, Vol. 216 Issue 2
8. Study of Vendor-Managed Inventory practices in Indian industries by
Atul B. Borade; Satish V. Bansod., Journal of Manufacturing
Technology Management, Oct2010, Vol. 21 Issue 8
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
217
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 309SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Purchasing & Supplier Relationship Management - I
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To emphasize the managerial perspective of core tasks and challenges in effectively managing the
purchasing function within the context of integrated supply chain.
2 To make the students aware of the different demands placed on the purchasing and supply chain
managers by business stakeholders.
3 To help the students understand the impact of purchasing on competitive success and profitability
of modern day organizations.
4 To provide an in-depth understanding of the fundamentals surrounding the operational aspects of
purchasing.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Purchasing Process, Policy & Procedures: Purchasing Objectives,
Responsibilities of Purchasing, Types of Purchases, Improving Purchase
Process, Purchasing Procedures, Policy Overview – What makes an effective
Policy? Advantages & Disadvantages of Policies, Policies defining - Role &
conduct of Purchasing, Buyer-Supplier Relationship, Operational Issues,
Ethical considerations in Purchasing
5 + 1
2 Organizing the Purchasing Function: Purchase Function Position Within the
Organization Structure, Factors affecting Purchasing’s Position, Reporting of
Purchasing function, Organizing of Purchasing, Separating Operational &
Strategic Purchasing, Advantages & disadvantages of centralized,
decentralized Purchasing, Hybrid Purchasing Structure
5 + 1
3 Strategic Sourcing – Supplier Evaluation & Selection: Linking Purchasing and
Corporate Strategy, Translating Corporate Objectives into Purchasing Goals,
Translating Purchasing Objectives into Purchasing Goals, Purchasing Strategy
Development Process, Types of Purchasing Strategies, Supply Base
Optimization, Critical Role of In-sourcing / Outsourcing, The In-sourcing /
Outsourcing Decision Process, Make or Buy, Supplier Evaluation and Selection
Process, Need for Supplier Selection, Identifying key sourcing requirements,
Evaluation and Selection, Key Supplier Evaluation Criteria
5 + 1
4 Supplier Quality Management: Overview of Supplier Quality Management –
What is Supplier Quality? Why be Concerned with Supply Quality? Factors
Affecting Purchasing’s Role in Managing Supplier Quality, Supplier Quality
Management using Total Quality Perspective, Defining Quality in Terms of
Customers and their Requirements, Pursuing Quality at the Source,
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
218
5 Negotiation & Contracts Management: Objectives of negotiation, when to
negotiate, The negotiation Process, Preparation, Establishing the Objectives,
Dynamics of Negotiation, Phases in face-to-face negotiation, Negotiation
Techniques – traditional, collaborative, price analysis, cost analysis. Types of
Contracts – Fixed Price, Cost based / Indexation, Long term, Short term.
Consideration when selecting contract types, How to write a Contract. Essential
elements of Contract, Purchase Order (P.O), Difference between P.O & Contract
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Purchasing & Supply Chain Management by Monczka, Trent,
Handfield, Thomson South Western, 3rd Edition.
2. Purchasing & Supply Chain Management by Lysons and Farrington,
Pearson Education, 2010.
2 Reference Books 1. Purchasing & Supply Chain Management by Dobler, Burt, TMGH, 6th
Edition.
2. New Directions in Supply Chain Management: Technology & Strategy
Implementation by Tonya Boone and Ram Ganeshan, Jaico Publishing,
2007
3. Extending the Supply Chain by Boyer, Forhlich and Hult, PHI, 3rd
Indian Reprint, 2009
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Organizational Buying Behaviour by Webster and Wind, Prentice Hall,
1972
2. Category Management in Purchasing: A Strategic Approach to
maximize business profitability by Jonathan O Brien Kogan Page.
4 Websites 1. www.cips.org
2. www.eipm.org
5 Journals 1. Purchasing Competence: A Stakeholder-Based Framework for Chief
Purchasing Officers by Kern, Daniel; Moser, Roger; Sundaresan,
Naveen; Hartmann, Evi., Journal of Business Logistics, 2011, Vol. 32
Issue 2
2. Understanding how Formal and Informal Communication Affect
Purchasing, Manufacturing and Logistics Integration byAndrea, Furlan;
Arnaldo, Camuffo; Romano, Pietro., Advances in Management, Jul2011,
Vol. 4 Issue 7
3. An Empirical Study of the Relationships among Purchasing Skills and
Strategic Purchasing, Financial Performance, and Supplier
Responsiveness by Carr, Amelia S.; Smeltzer, Larry R., Journal of
Supply Chain Management, Summer2000, Vol. 36 Issue 3
4. World-Class Purchasing Skills: An Empirical Investigation by
Giunipero, Larry C.; Pearcy, Dawn H., Journal of Supply Chain
Management, Fall2000, Vol. 36 Issue 4
5. The Seven Cs of Effective Supplier Evaluation by Carter R, Purchasing
and Supply Chain Management, April, 1995.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
219
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 310SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Six Sigma
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide a comprehensive understanding of six sigma
2 To introduce the six sigma methodology and philosophy
3 To learn how to manage change and sustain benefits
4 To learn how to listen and map customer requirements
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Enterprise-wide Deployment:
1.1 Six Sigma and Lean: Brief history of performance initiatives- Quality
Control, TQM, Cost of Quality, Customer quality Management, SPC,
Reengineering, Six Sigma, Theory of Constraint, Lean manufacturing.
1.2 Business Process Management: Introduction to Six Sigma-As a metric, As a
methodology, As a management System. Six sigma Evolution and approach
Lean as a Business Management Strategy, Key elements of lean. Types of lean
initiatives, Implementing lean initiatives
5 + 1
2 DMAIC model for implementing Six Sigma:
2.1 Define: Project Selection, Developing the team, DMAIC & DMADV,
Deliverables, Tollgate Questions
2.2 Measure: Determining X variables, Cause and Effect Diagram & Matrix,
Overview of MSA, Data Collection Plan – Forms, Baselining the y data, DPMO,
Capability Indices, COPQ, Yield, Tollgate Questions
2.3 Analyze: Tools for identifying Root Causes: Histogram, Boxplot, Scatter
Plot, Matrix Plot, DotPlot, Run Chart, Multi-Vari Chart, 5 Why’s
2.4 Improve: Generating Solutions, Random Stimulation, Six Thinking Hats,
Mind Mapping, Challenge Assumptions, Decision Making Tools for Selecting
Solutions – Pairwise Ranking, Solution Matrix, Force Field Analysis, Costs and
Benefits, Pilot Plan, Potential Problem Analysis – Mistake Proofing, Risk
Assessment Matrix and Control Assessment Matrix, FMEA, Contingency Plan,
Verification Plan, Tollgate Questions
2.5 Control: Solution Planning, Process Control Plan, Review Meetings,
Updated flowcharts & procedures, Control Charts, Out Of Control Action Plan,
Project Conclusion Activities
7 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
220
3 Six Sigma Impact measurement: Financial and Performance measurement:
Lack of Clear Goals and Metrics linked to Measurable Business Goals,
Mismatches between Traditional Accounting and Improvement Campaigns.
Metrics That Impact – Revenue Growth, Cost Savings, Productivity
Improvement, Reduced Cost of Poor Quality, Cash Flow Improvement, Faster
product / service cycle times, Freed up engineering and /or sales / service
time, Freed up other indirect time, Cost avoidance savings. Seven Elements of
Six Sigma Scorecard
5 + 1
4 Six Sigma in non-manufacturing environments: MSA in the DMAIC Cycle.
MSA Psychology. Why Non-Manufacturing Processes are Different, MSA
Repeatability & Reproducibility (R&R) Studies. Gauge R & R. Comparison of
MSA Acceptance Criteria
5 + 1
5 Projects in Six Sigma-Use of DMAIC Cycle 3 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 6. The Six Sigma Black Belt Handbook by MacCarty, Daniels, Bremer and
Gupta, TMGH, 2010 Edition
7. Juran Institute’s Six Sigma Breakthrough and Beyond by De Feo and
Barnard, TMGH.
8. What is Six Sigma? by Peter Pande, TMGH
9. Six Sigma Management by Blashka, TMGH
10. All about Six Sigma by Warren Brussee, TMGH.
2 Reference Books 3. TPS-Lean Six Sigma by Hubert Ramprasad, Sara Books Pvt.Ltd.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
2. The Certified Six Sigma Black Belt Hand Book, Donald Benbow,
Pearson Publication
3. Achieving Business Excellence by Pravin Rajpal, Om Books
International, India.
4 Websites 1. http://asq.org
5 Journals 1. What , Why and How: The importance of statistical thinking for Six
Sigma by Krishnamoorth, K. S., Industrial Engineer: IE, Oct 2011, Vol.
43, Issue 10
2. In pursuit of implementation patterns: the context of Lean and Six
Sigma by Shah, R.; Chandrasekaran, A.; Linderman, K., International
Journal of Production Research, Dec2008, Vol. 46 Issue 23
3. Critical analysis of Six Sigma Implementation by Moosa, Kamran; Sajid,
Ali. Total Quality Management & Business Excellence, Jul2010, Vol. 21
Issue 7
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
221
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 311SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Supply Chain Planning
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand essentials of Demand Management
2 To get acquainted to Supply Chain Aggregate Planning
3 To understand how to manage predictable variability in Supply Chain
4 To recognize the role of Network Planning and understand basic Network Planning Design Models
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Forecasting: Concept and definition of Forecasting & Demand, Role of
Forecasting in SC, Traditional Forecasting Methods – Judgment Methods,
Market Research Methods, Time Series Methods, Causal Methods. Selection of
Appropriate Forecasting technique, Risks in Forecasting – forecasting error
5 + 1
2 Demand Management: Collaborative Planning, Forecasting & Replenishment
(CPFR). Order fulfillment & Order Management. Customer Service Level &
Expected cost of stock outs (Numericals Expected)
5 + 1
3 Aggregate Planning in SC: Concept of Aggregate Planning & its role in SC.
Aggregate Planning Strategies, Aggregate Planning for Services, Aggregate
Planning using MS-Excel, Role of IT in Aggregate Planning, Aggregate
Planning in Practice
5 +1
4 Managing Predictable Variability in SC: Decision Environment of SC –
external factors responsible for decisions, Concept of Variability, Responding to
predictable variability, Managing Supply, Managing Demand, Impact of
seasonality
5 + 1
5 Network Decisions: Choices of Network Configurations – direct shipping,
distribution through intermediary, customer pick up, Challenges in Network
Configuration. Models – Strategic Facility Location Model with Single Capacity
Choice, Strategic Facility Location Model with Two Capacity Choices, Demand
Allocation Across different Facilities with Fixed Capacities, Gravity Location
Model, Uncertainty and Application of Probability
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 3. Supply Chain Management – Strategy, Planning and Execution by Sunil
Chopra, Peter Meindl, D V Kalra, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition
4. Supply Chain Management Process, System & Practice by
N.Chadrasekaran, Oxford, 1st Edition
2 Reference Books 1. The Management of Business Logistics: A Supply Chain Perspective by
Coyle, Bardi and Langley, Cengage Learning – India 7th Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Managing the Supply Chain: A Strategic Perspective by Gattorna and
Walters, Palgrave.
2. A Logistics Approach to Supply Chain Management by Coyle, Langley,
Gibson, Novack, Bardi, Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2009.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
222
4 Websites 1. http://www.ibf.org/
5 Journals 1. Mapping the Future of Supply Chain Management: a Delphi study by
Melny K, Steven A.; Lummus, Rhonda R.; Vokurka, Robert J.; Burns,
Laird J.; Sandor, Joe., International Journal of Production Research,
Aug2009, Vol. 47 Issue 16
2. Aligning Demand Management with Business Strategy by Jim R and
Langabeer II, Supply Chain Management Review, May/June 2000.
3. ABC of Collaborative Planning Forecasting and Replenishment by
Ireland, Ron., Journal of Business Forecasting, Summer2005, Vol. 24
Issue 2
4. Collaborative Planning, Forecasting & Replenishment (CPFR):
Realizing the Promise of Efficient by Sherman, Richard J., Journal of
Marketing Theory & Practice, Fall 98, Vol. 6 Issue 4
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
223
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 312SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Supply Chain Coordination
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand role and importance of business functional coordination across the Supply Chain
2 To know the impact of ineffective Supply Chain coordination and its business implications
3 To understand how managerial levers and partnerships aid in achieving Supply Chain
coordination
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Coordinate the Traditional Business Functions Across the Company and
Across the SC: Functional Coordination, Supply Chain Relationships, Failing to
coordinate Sales Function with SC Capacity, Failing to coordinate Industrial
Service SC, Coordinate Retail Functions for Market Expansion, Coordinating
Traditional Retail Functions for SC Economics, Coordinating R&D, Order
Processing and Inventory Management
5 + 1
2 SC Coordination & Bull Whip Effect: Challenges in SC Coordination, Concept
of Bull Whip Effect – impact on manufacturing cost, inventory cost,
replenishment lead time, transportation cost, labour cost for logistics, product
availability & relationships across the SC, Obstacles to Coordination in SC –
incentive obstacles, Information Processing Obstacles, Operational Obstacles,
Pricing Obstacles, Behavioural Obstacles, Role of IT in SC Coordination
5 + 1
3 Managerial Levers to achieve SC Coordination: Aligning of Goals &
Incentives, Improving Information Accuracy, Improving Operational
Performance, Designing Pricing Strategies to stabilize orders, Building
Partnerships & Trust.
5 + 1
4 Building Strategic Partnerships within a SC: Deterrence Based View, Process
Based View, Accessing Value of Relationship, Identifying Operational Roles &
Decision Rights for each party, Creating Effective Contracts, Designing
Effective Conflict Resolution Mechanisms.
5 + 1
5 Collaborative Planning, Forecasting & Replenishment: Retail Event
Collaboration, DC Replenishment Collaboration, Store Replenishment
Collaboration, Collaborative Assortment Planning, Organizational &
Technology Requirements for successful CPFR, Risks & Hurdles for CPFR
Implementation
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Fundamentals of Supply Chain Management by John Mentzer,
Response Books, 1st Edition
2. Supply Chain Management – Strategy, Planning and Execution by Sunil
Chopra, Peter Meindl, D V Kalra, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition
5. Supply Chain Management Process, System & Practice by N.
Chadrasekaran, Oxford, 1st Edition
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
224
2 Reference Books 1. The Management of Business Logistics: A Supply Chain Perspective by
Coyle, Bardi and Langley, Cengage Learning – India 7th Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. A Logistics Approach to Supply Chain Management by Coyle, Langley,
Gibson, Novack, Bardi, Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2009.
2. Industrial Dynamics by Jay Wright , Forrester, 1961
4 Websites 1. www.apics.org
5 Journals 1. The Bullwhip Effect in Supply Chains by Lee, Hau L; Padmanabhan, V.
and Whang, Seungjin, Sloan Management Review , 1997Volume
38 Issue 3
2. Taming the bullwhip by Lee, H.L., Journal of Supply Chain
Management 2010, Volume 46 , Issue 1
3. Capacity Choice and Allocation: Strategic Behavior and Supply Chain
Performance by Cachon, Gérard P.; Lariviere, Martin A., Management
Science, Aug1999, Vol. 45 Issue 8
4. Quantifying the Bullwhip Effect in a Simple Supply Chain: The Impact
of Forecasting, Lead Times and Information by Chen, Y. F., Z. Drezner,
J. K. Ryan and D. Simchi-Levi , Management Science, 2000, Volume 46.
5. Information Sharing and Coordination Mechanisms for Managing
Uncertainty in Supply Chains: A Simulation Study by Datta, Partha
Priya; Christopher, Martin G., International Journal of Production
Research, Feb2011, Vol. 49 Issue 3
6. Coordinating for Flexibility in e-Business Supply Chains by Gosain,
Sanjay; Malhotra, Arvind; El Sawy, Omar A., Journal of Management
Information Systems, Winter2004/2005, Vol. 21 Issue 3
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
225
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 313SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Decision Modeling for Supply Chains
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To know how to model typical Supply Chain Domain Problems
2 To understand use of MS- Excel in solving typical Supply Chain Domain Problems
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Overview of MS – Excel Advance Capabilities and Functions 3 + 1
2 Linear Programming Models: Make Buy Decision Problem, Transportation
Applications – Vehicle loading Problem, Sensitivity Analysis for Profit
Maximization, Cost Minimization
6 + 1
3 Transportation Models: LP Formulation for transportation problem,
Transportation involving transshipment, Maximal flow model, Shortest Path
Model
5 + 1
4 Integer Programming Model, Goal Programming Model & Nonlinear
Programming Model: New factory Decision Problem (IP), Product Mix
Problem (Goal), Profit Maximization Problem (NLP)
6 + 1
5 Decision Making Models (based on Decision Trees): Using TreePlan to solve
decision tree problems with Excel
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 3. Managerial Decision Modeling with Spreadsheets by Balakishnan, Render,
Stair, Pearson, 2nd Edition
2 Reference
Books
3. Excel Models for Business and Operations Management by Barlow, Wiley-
India, 2nd Edition.
3 Supplementa
ry Reading
Material
1. Modeling the Supply Chain by Jeremy Shapiro, Cengage Learning, 2nd Edition
2. Supply Chain Modeling & Solutions by B.S. Sahay & A.K. Gupta, Macmillan
India Ltd., 1st Edition
4 Websites 1. http://logistics.about.com/od/supplychainmodels/Modelling_the_Supply_
Chain.htm
5 Journals 1. Overcoming Spreadsheet Risk in Supply Chain Modeling by Galbreth,
Michael R.; LeBlanc, Larry J., Journal of Business Logistics. 2010, Vol. 31 Issue
2, p21-33
2. Design and Use of Microsoft Excel Solver by Fylstra, Daniel; Lasdon, Leon;
Watson, John; Warren, Allen. Interfaces. (Sep-Oct) 1998, Vol. 28, 5, p29-55.
3. Network Modeling Tools: Enhancing Supply Chain Decision Making by
Jiminez, S., T.Brown and J.Jordan, Strategic Supply Chain Alignment, 1998,
ed. J. Gattorna. Andershot, Eng.: Gower
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
226
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 314SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Theory of Constraints
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To imbibe in the students the TOC thinking process.
2 To provide insights into managing a business when there are constraints and resolving those by
logical thinking.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Thinking Process: Introduction to Theory of Constraints (TOC), Tools of TOC,
Where is TOC applicable? What is a constraint, TOC’s thinking process and
Human Being, Terminology used in the thinking process, Steps to implement in
the thinking process, Current Reality Tree, Conflict Resolution Diagram, Future
Reality Tree, Prerequisite Tree, Transition Tree, Three Cloud Method.
5 + 1
2 2.1 Finance and Measures: Economic Decisions, TOC and Product Costing,
Economic Decisions using TOC Costing.
2.2 Project Management: Phases of Project Management, Common problems in
Project Environment, Critical Chain project Management – A TOC approach.
5 + 1
3 Drum-Buffer-Rope Solution: Introduction, The Drum – The MPS of the
Capacity Constraint Resource, Implementing Drum-Buffer-Rope,
Implementing Drum-Buffer-Rope on the shop floor, MPS using Drum-Buffer-
Rope Scheduling method.
5 + 1
4 Theory of Constraints in Supply Chain Management: Introduction, TOC in
distribution Solution, Drum-Buffer-Rope in distribution
5 + 1
5 Cases: Cases in application of TOC thinking process, TOC in Manufacturing, 5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Theory of Constraints by S K Mukhopadhyay, Jaico Books.
2. The Goal by E M Goldratt and Cox J, Great Barrington, North River
2 Reference Books 1. What is the thing called Theory of Constraints? by E M Goldratt, Great
Barrington, North River
2. The Goal by E M Goldratt and Cox J, Great Barrington, North River
3. It’s Not Luck by E M Goldratt, Great Barrington, North River
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
3. Essays on Theory of Constraints by E M Goldratt, Great Barrington,
North River
4. Critical Chain by E M Goldratt, Great Barrington, North River
4 Websites 1. http://www.goldratt.com/
2. http://www.scienceofbusiness.com/home/what-is-theory-ofconstraints-
toc/
3. http://www.tocico.org/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
227
5 Journals 1. A Tutorial on Project Management from a Theory of Constraints
Perspective by Blackstone, John H.; Cox, James F.; Schleier, John G.,
International Journal of Production Research, Dec2009, Vol. 47 Issue 24.
2. Theory of Constraints at UniCo: Analysing The Goal as a fictional case
study by Tibben-Lembke, Ronald S., International Journal of Production
Research, Apr2009, Vol. 47 Issue 7.
3. Implementing Theory of Constraints in a traditional Japanese
Manufacturing Environment: The case of Hitachi Tool Engineering by
Umble, M.; Umble, E.; Murakami, S., International Journal of Production
Research, 5/15/2006, Vol. 44 Issue 10.
4. Determination of buffer sizes for drum-buffer-rope (DBR)-controlled
production systems by Ye, T.; Han, W., International Journal of Production
Research, May2008, Vol. 46 Issue 10.
5. Modified drum–buffer–rope scheduling mechanism for a non-identical
parallel machine flow shop with processing-time variation by Sirikrai,
V.; Yenradee, P., International Journal of Production Research, 2006, Vol. 44
Issue 17.
6. Comparisons between drum–buffer–rope and Material Requirements
Planning: a case study by Steele, Daniel C.; Philipoom, Patrick R.;
Malhotra, Manoj K.; Fry, Timothy D., International Journal of Production
Research, 2005, Vol. 43 Issue 15.
7. Order review/release and lot splitting in drum-buffer-rope by Russell,
G. R.; Fry, T. D., International Journal of Production Research, Mar1997, Vol.
35 Issue 3.
8. Scheduling using drum-buffer-rope in a remanufacturing environment
by Guide, V.D.R., International Journal of Production Research, Apr96, Vol.
34, Issue 4.
9. Using Drum-Buffer-Rope Scheduling Rather Than Just-In-Time
Production by Huff, Patricia. Management Accounting Quarterly,
Winter2001, Vol. 2 Issue 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
228
Semester III Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 315SCM Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Supply Chain Practices in Different Industries - I
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions * 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
* Field/Self Study under Faculty guidance.
Course Objectives:
1 To give a practical understanding of the practice of supply chain management in various sectors.
2 To give a practical understanding of the peculiarities of supply chain management practices in
various sectors.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Supply Chains for Agro Based Products - Food, Milk Products, Poultry, Edible
Oil, Flowers, Seeds & Fertilizers, Public Distribution System
NA
2 Supply Chains for Industrial Products - Auto Components, Steel Products,
Lubricants, Industrial Paints, Transformers, Gensets
NA
3 Supply Chains for Consumer Products – Bicycles, Tractors, Cola Cans, Cars,
Mobile Phones, Furniture, Sports Goods, Pharmaceutical Products, Fabrics &
Garments, Books, Mineral Water, Newspapers & Magazines, Toys, Wrist
Watches, Home Décor, Decorative Paints, Wine, White goods
NA
4 Supply Chains for Commodities - Coal, Cotton, Cement, Sugar, Rice, Metals,
Oil & Gas
NA
5 Supply Chains for Services - Mobile Telephony, Financial Services, Electricity ,
Internet Services, Food Chains, Hospitality, Medical services, Airlines, Retail
NA
Students should work in groups of two each on any two Companies from the Sectors listed above. The
Sectors should be from different groups. Students shall study various aspects of the SCM principles and
practices as followed in these sectors. They should identify
a) the peculiarities of the sector,
b) map the supply chain in detail (identify the parties involved and their role in the supply chain),
c) compare the top two players in each of these sectors and identify best practices,
d) Prepare a summary evaluation of each sector studied.
Students shall submit a structured detailed report based on the above parameters.
The evaluation shall be made by a panel of two examiners. One of the examiners shall be the Internal
Faculty. The other examiner may be an external faculty or a person from the relevant industry. The
evaluation shall be based on the following criteria:
d) Report – 20 Marks
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
229
e) Presentation – 15 Marks
f) Question & Answer – 15 Marks
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Indian Supply Chain Architecture by B S Sahay and Ramneesh Mohan,
Macmillan, 2007.
2. Excellence in Manufacturing : New Approaches by Sabyasachi
Chatterjee, ICFAI Books.
2 Reference Books 1. Financial Supply Chain by Sanjay Dalmia, TMGH, 2008.
2. Logistics and Retail Management: Insights into Current Practice and
Trends from leading Experts by Fernie and Sparks, Kogan Page, 2nd
Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Supply Chain Management in the 21st Century Editor by B S Sahay,
Macmillan, 2006 reprint.
4 Websites 1. www.kpmg.com
2. http://www.futuresupplychains.com/aboutus.html
3. http://www.deloitte.com/us/supplychainindia
5 Journals 1. The Effects Of Digital Trading Platforms On Commodity Prices In
Agricultural Supply Chains by Banker, Rajiv; Mitra, Sabyasachi;
Sambamurthy, V., MIS Quarterly, Sep2011, Vol. 35 Issue 3
2. Supply Chain: Barriers and Benefits Indian SMEs by Zahedirad,
Rouhollah; Shivaraj, B., SCMS Journal of Indian Management, Oct2011,
Vol. 8 Issue 4
3. Flexible Strategic Framework for Managing Forces of Continuity and
Change: Study of Supply Chain Management of Lighting Industry in
India by Gupta, V. K., Global Journal of Flexible Systems Management,
Jul-Sep2010, Vol. 11 Issue 3
4. The Impact of Supplier-Selection, Supply Effort Management, Logistics
Capabilities and Supply Chain by Sezhiyan, D. M.; Nambirajan, T.,
Journal of Contemporary Management Research, Mar2011, Vol. 5 Issue
1
5. Supply Chain: A Differentiator in Marketing Fresh Produce byVeena,
A.; Babu, K. Nagendra; Venkatesha, H. R., IUP Journal of Supply Chain
Management, Mar2011, Vol. 8 Issue 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
230
MBA SYLLABUS: SEMESTER IV
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
231
Semester IV Specialization NA
Course Code 401 Type Core
Course Title Managing for Sustainability
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 Apply general ethical principles to particular cases or practices in business.
2 Think independently and rationally about contemporary moral problems.
3 Recognize the complexity of problems in practical ethics.
4 Demonstrate how general concepts of governance apply in a given situation or given
circumstances.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Corporate social responsibility: Concept, The nature of corporate
responsibility and corporate citizenship, Relevance in the present day
business environment.
1.2 Corporate social responsibility and stakeholders: Internal and external
stakeholders, Responsibility to various stakeholder groups, Interest and
influence of various stakeholder groups, Formulating and implementing a
policy for corporate social responsibility
1.3 Bottom of the pyramid opportunities: Issues and opportunities for
business in socially and environmentally sensitive world, Social and
environmental problems and how they shape markets.
7 + 2
2 2.1 Sustainable Development: concept, definition of sustainable
development, need, importance, education, Philosophical development,
Gandhian Thought on Sustainable Development, Sustainable Development
and social framework, equitable distribution, difference between
sustainable development and green development, criticism.
2.2 Stakeholder Impact: Stakeholders and the power they wield, Reducing
socio-environmental costs and risks: managing the downside, Driving
revenues and creating intangible value: managing the upside
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
232
3 3.1 Business case for sustainable development: Three dimensions of
sustainable development
1) Environmental: Atmosphere, fresh water and oceans, land use, management
of human consumption, energy, food, waste management, Understanding
ecological "footprint": Eco-tracking, carbon marketing, carbon credits,
economics of sustainability, Designing for the environment and "greening'
the supply chain, regulation, case studies.
2) Economic: environment degradation and economic growth, nature as an
economic externality, economic opportunity.
3) Social: Peace, security, social justice, sustainability and poverty, human
relationship to nature, human settlements
3.2 Study of business models for sustainable development: Indian & Global
perspectives.
3.3 Sustainability reporting: Triple bottom line reports - The content of
sustainability reports (also CSR reports, ESG reports, social and environmental
reports)
3.4 Social accountability standard - ISO 26000: Social responsibility guidance
standard, Global Compact Principles, Environmental Impact Assessment,
Life Cycle Analysis, Social Impact Assessment
7 + 2
4 4.1 Corporate Governance : Meaning – OECD principles, Difference between
governance and management, Purpose of good governance, Potential
consequences of poor corporate governance, Business failure and the
contribution of poor governance
4.2 Relevant Theories: Agency theory, transaction cost theory, stakeholder
theory. Friedman ‘s theory of CSR.
4.3 Stakeholder value approach: Stakeholder value approach, Enlightened
stakeholder approach, stakeholder approach to Governance, risk and financial
stability. The balancing of conflicting objectives
4.4 Key issues in corporate governance: Role and composition of the board,
remuneration of directors and senior executives, accounting and audit, internal
controls, checks and governance, relations with shareholders and other
stakeholders. Clause 49 of Listing agreement & Corporate Governance Code,
CEO, CFO Certification. Role of regulators – SEBI, IRDA, RBI, ED, etc.
4.5 Applying best practice in governance: Voluntary and regulatory
approaches, rules or principles, concept of ‘comply or explain’. Governance
problems for global companies and groups. Governance issues in the public
sector. Governance issues in the voluntary sector (NGOs and charitable
organizations)
4.6 Governance aspects: Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002: Section 302: CEO/CFO
certifications, Section 404(a): internal control report, Governance and role of
auditors and audit committee.
4.7 Case Studies on Corporate Governance: Satyam , Infosys, Tata, Wipro.
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
233
5 Corporate Ethics:
5.1 The Ethical Value System: Universalism, Utilitarianism, Distributive
Justice, Social Contracts, Individual Freedom of Choice, Professional Code,
5.2 Values: Importance, Sources of Value Systems, Values across Cultures
5.3 Indian Values and Ethics: Respect for Elders, Hierarchy and Status, Need
for Security, Non – Violence, Cooperation, Simple Living high Thinking,
Rights and Duties, Ethics in Work life, Holistic relationship between Man
and Nature, Attitudes and Beliefs.
5.4 Business Ethics: Nature, Characteristics and Needs, Ethical Practices in
Management, Ethical Values in different Cultures, Culture and Individual
Ethics, Relationship between Law and Ethics, Impact of Laws on Business
Ethics.
5.5 Ethics and Corporate Excellence: Code of Ethics in Business Houses,
Strategies of Organizational Culture Building, Total Quality, Customer
Care, Care of the Employees as per Statutes, Objective and Optimistic
Approach.
5.6 Indian and Global case studies
7 + 2
Note:
1. Introductory treatment of all topics is expected to sensitize the students.
2. Compliance / Regulatory aspects should not be overemphasized.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Corporate Governance by Christine A Mallin, Oxford University Press.
2. Corporate Governance in India – An Evaluation by S C Das, PHI – Eastern
Economy Edition.
3. Corporate Governance Codes, Systems and Practices by S C Das, PHI –
Eastern Economy Edition.
4. Triple Bottom Line Reporting and Corporate Sustainability by S Singh, PHI –
Eastern Economy Edition.
5. Ethics, Business & Society Edited by Ananda Das Gupta, Response Books
6. Business Ethics by Crane and Matten, Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition.
7. Business Ethics – An Indian Perspective, by Ronald Francis and Mukti Mishra,
TMGH.
8. Corporate Governance Values and Ethics by Dr Neeru Vasishth & Dr Namita
Rajput, Taxmann
9. Corporate Governance – Principles, Mechanisms & Practice, Swami Dr
Partasarathy, Biztantra Publications.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
234
2 Reference
Books
1. The Satyam Saga – Business Standard Publication
2. Ethics for the Real World by Howard and Korver, Harvard Business Press.
3. Ethics in Practice by Kenneth Andrews, Harvard Business School Press.
4. Mastering Business in Asia by Peter Wallace and John Zinkin, Wiley India.
5. The Sustainable Enterprise – Profiting from best practice by Simmons and
Simmons, Kogan Page, 2nd Ediiton.
6. Corporate Governance – Principles, Policies & Practices, by Bob Tricker,
Oxford University Press.
7. Corporate Governance – Principles, Policies & Practices, by A C Fernando,
Oxford University Press.
8. Corporate Governance by K Prasad, PHI – Eastern Economy Edition.
9. Corporate Governance – Global Concepts & Practices, Dr S Singh, Excel
Books.
3 Supplementa
ry Reading
Material
1. An Introduction to Business Ethics by Joseph DesJardins, TMGH, 2nd Edition.
2. Business Ethics – Text and Cases by C S V Murthy, Himalaya Publications,
2nd Revised Edition.
3. Case Studies on Ethics and Corporate Governance Vol I and II , ICFAI Books
4 Websites 1. www.icgn.org/
2. http://www.oecd.org/document/49/0,3343,en_2649_34813_31530865_1_1_1
_1,00.html
5 Journals 1. Business & Society
2. Corporate Governance: An International Review
3. Corporate Governance: The International Journal of Effective Board
Performance
4. Journal of Business Ethics
5. Ethics & Accountability in a Context of Governance & New Public
Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
235
Semester IV Specialization NA
Course Code 402 Type Core
Course Title Dissertation
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) NA
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions NA
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions NA
Course Objectives:
1 To offer the opportunity for the young students to acquire on job the skills, knowledge, attitudes,
and perceptions along with the experience needed to constitute a professional identity.
2 To provide means to immerse students in actual supervised professional experiences
3 To give an insight into the working of the real organizations.
4 To gain deeper understanding in specific functional areas.
5 To appreciate the linkages among different functions and departments
6 To develop perspective about business organizations in their totality
7 To help the students in exploring career opportunities in their areas of interest
Dissertation: Towards the end of the Programme (Sem IV – Feb/March) the student shall work for 60
hours under the supervision of the Faculty and carry out a dissertation and submit a structured report in
TWO hard copies & one soft copy (CD). The report may be printed on both sides of the paper.
The completion of the dissertation / project shall be certified by the Faculty Guide & approved by the
Director of the Institute.
The Institute shall conduct a viva-voce for evaluation of the dissertation, for 100 marks.
The Panel shall comprise of 2 internal Faculty members (One who has guided the student and the other
one as Jury) nominated by the Director. The Institute may invite an additional external examiner from the
industry.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
236
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER IV
MARKETING MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
237
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 403MKT Type Specialization – Core
Course Title Services Marketing
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To emphasize the significance of services marketing in the global economy.
2 To make the students understand the deeper aspects of successful services marketing.
3 To provide insights to the challenges and opportunities in services marketing.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Services marketing :
1.1 Definition, Significance, Characteristics of Services: Intangibility,
Inconsistency, Inseparability and Inventory. Classification of Services.
1.2 Consumer Behavior in Services: Search, experience and credence
attributes, Pre & post experience evaluation, factors influencing customer
expectation of service, Moment of truth
1.3 Extended Marketing Mix for Services: Need for additional three
marketing mix elements in Services
1.4 Financial & economic impact of service
7 + 2
2 Traditional Marketing Mix Elements in Services:
2.1 Service Product: Customer perception, Customer satisfaction, Tolerance
zone, Service quality - ServQual, GAP model and Critical incident model,
Concept of loyalty & creation of a loyalty programme, Service recovery,
Impact of service failures versus product failures, Nature of complaining
behavior—Complaint Resolution, Service Recovery Process.
2.2 Service Pricing: Costs of service delivery, Customer Profitability
Measurement, Revenue management Techniques, Price Discrimination and
Segmented Pricing.
2.3 Service Place: Delivering services through intermediaries & electronic
channels.
2.4 Service Promotion: Integrated service marketing communication, Visual
merchandising, Referrals, Challenge of Service communication
7 + 2
3 Service Process:
3.1 Service design & standards – Process service blue print
3.2 Demand & capacity management ,
3.3 Quality function deployment (QFD), Standardization ( hard / soft
measures),
3.4 Service delivery, self-service technologies
7 + 2
4 People & Physical Evidence:
4.1 Employees’ Role in Service Delivery, Service Culture: Internal
Marketing, Service-Profit Chain, Emotional labor
4.2 Customers’ role in service delivery, Customer as a co-producer
4.3 Physical Evidence: Experience Servicescape elements (to include
architectural design), Virtual Servicescape
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
238
5 Applications of Service Marketing: Marketing in Tourism, Hospitality,
Airlines, Telecom, IT & ITES, Sports & Entertainment, Logistics, Healthcare
sectors (Examples/Case studies on these applications are expected)
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Services Marketing by Zeithaml, Bitner, Gremler& Pandit, TMGH, 4th
Edition
2. Services Marketing by Christopher Lovelock
3. Services Marketing by Rampal & Gupta
4. Services Marketing by Helen Woodruff
2 Reference Books 1. Services Marketing: Concepts and Practices by Ramneek Kapoor,
Justin Paul & Biplab Halder, McGraw Hill
2. Services Marketing by Rajendra Nargundkar, McGraw-Hill, 3rd
Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. C H Lovelock, Journal of Marketing Vol. 4 Summer 1983, pages 9-20
4 Websites 1. www.itsma.com/
5 Journals 1. The service encounter: diagnosing favorable & unfavorable incidents by
Bitner M. J., Booms B. H. & Tetreaualt M. S., Journal of marketing, Jan
1990, Vol. 54, pp. 71-84.
2. Marketing intangible products & product intangibles by Levitt T.,
Harvard Business Review, 1981, Vol. 59, pp. 95-102
3. The services marketing: an approach by Blois K. J., European journal of
marketing, Vol. 8, Issue 2, 1974, pp. 137-145
4. Services marketing is different by Berry L.L., Business, May-June,
1980,pp. 24-30.
5. Putting the Service Profit Chain to Work by Heskett, James L., Jones,
Thomas O., Loveman, Gary W., Sasser, W. Earl, and Schelsinger,
Leonard A. Harvard Business Review, (March-April 1994) pp. 164-174
6. The customer as co-producer by Solveig Wikström, European Journal
of Marketing, 1996, Vol. 30, Issue 4
7. Customer contributions & roles in service delivery by Bitner, Faranda,
Hubbert & Zeithmal, International Journal of Services and Industrial
Marketing, Vol. 8,Issue 3, pp. 193-205
8. Delivering Quality Service; Balancing Customer Perceptions and
Expectations by Zeithaml, Parasuraman & Berry. Free Press, 1990.
9. Service quality models: A review by Sheth, Deshmukh & Vrat IJQRM,
2005, Vol. 22,Issue 9, pp. 913-49
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
239
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 404MKT Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Sales & Distribution Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To provide foundations in components of sales and distribution management.
2 To introduce various facets of the job of a sales manager.
3 To focus on decision making aspects and implementation of decisions in sales and distribution
management.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Sales and Distribution Management:
1.1 Sales Management: Objectives, Nature & Scope, Sales Environment, Sales
Planning, Strategic role of sales management
1.2 Marketing Channels: Functions and Significance, Structure - Vertical and
Horizontal, Symbiotic, Role of marketing channels in the dynamic market
place, Designing the Market Channel system, Channels for Consumer goods,
Industrial goods, Inter Dependency of Sales & Distribution
1.3 Managing Marketing Channels: Channel Policies, Choice of the channel,
Organizational Pattern in the Channel, Assessing Channel Performance, Causes
for Channel Conflict & Techniques to overcome conflict, Channel Information
System
8 + 2
2 Organizing the Sales Force:
2.1 Objectives & Structure of Sales Organization,
2.2 Organizing the Sales Force, Recruitment, selection and training the sales
force,
2.3 Field Sales Planning , Compensation and Evaluation of Sales Force
4 + 2
3 Sales Planning & Control:
3.1 Sales Planning: Sales Forecasting & Budgeting, Sales Quotas and Targets
3.2 Sales Control: Reporting Formats for Primary and Secondary Sales,
Monthly Sales Plan, Territory Sales and Coverage Plan, Daily Sales Call Report,
Expired Goods and Breakage Return Report, Fortnightly Sales Review Report,
Order Booking Report, Monthly and Quarterly Sales Report.
3.3 Sales Audit: Sales Force Productivity Indicators (Value and Volume) –
Territory Productivity, Per Person per Month Productivity, Sales to Marketing
Expenses Ratio.
3.4 Specialized Techniques in Selling: Tele / Mobile Marketing, Online
Marketing, E Commerce
8 + 2
4 Marketing Channels
4.1 Significance and role of channels, C&F Agents, Types of the Wholesalers
4.2 Franchising: Significance and importance of Franchisee in Channel Decision
–Advantages of Franchisee –Process of appointment of Franchisee- Franchiser
Franchisee relationship. RoI calculation at Dealer Level.
6 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
240
5 Retailing:
5.1 Nature and Importance of Retailing , Types of Retailers, Organized
&unorganized Retailing Formats, Retail Merchandising, Retail Decision
Location and Size ,
5.2 Retailer Promotion: Advertising, Sales Promotion and POP Promotion,
Shelf Management, Communicating with the retailer customer, Economic cost
of retailing, New Trends in Retailing, Role and Significance of Multi-level
Marketing
9 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Sales and Distribution Management by Havaldar & Cavale, TMGH
2. Sales Management by Still, Cundiff & Govani, Pearson Education
2 Reference Books 1. Retailing Management by Michael Levy & Barton Weitz, TMGH, 5th
Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Retail Management by Gibson Vedamani , Jaico Books
2. Retailing Management by Swapna Pradhan , TMGH
4 Websites 1. http://www.franchiseindia.com/
2. http://www.franchising.com/
5 Journals 1. How Potential Conflict Drives Channel Structure: Concurrent (Direct
and Indirect) Channels by Sa Vinhas, Alberto; Anderson, Erin., Journal
of Marketing Research, Nov2005, Vol. 42 Issue 4
2. Channel Structure and Strategic Choice in Distribution Channels by
Wren, Brent M., Journal of Management Research, Aug2007, Vol. 7
Issue 2,
3. Effects Of Sales Force Automation Use On Sales Force Activities And
Customer Relationship Management Processes by Moutot, Jean-
Michel; Bascoul, Ganaël., Journal of Personal Selling &Sales
Management, Spring2008, Vol. 28 Issue 2
4. Using your sales force to jump-start growth by Hancock, Maryanne;
Hatami, Homayoun; Rayan, Sunil. McKinsey Quarterly, 2011, Issue 2
5. Franchising: An Overview by Windeshausen H. Nicholas; Joyce, Mary
L., American Journal of Small Business, Jan77, Vol. 1 Issue 3
6. Sales Employees Compensation: An Optimal Balance Between Fixed
and Variable Pay by Madhani, Pankaj M., Compensation & Benefits
Review., Jul/Aug2009, Vol. 41 Issue 4, p44-51.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
241
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 405MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Retail Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide insights into all functional areas of retailing.
2 To give an account of essential principles of retailing.
3 To give a perspective of the Indian retailing scenario.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Overview of Retailing: Definition, Scope, Role of Retailer in the Channel of
Distribution, Benefits of Retailing , Functions of Retailers , Evolution of
Retailing – Global Retail Scenario – Indian Retail Scenario – Drivers of retail
change in India - Emerging Trends and Opportunities in India, Retailing
Industry – Size of Retail in India and its components.
1.2 Retailing Environment: Economic Environment – Legal Environment –
Technological Environment – Competitive Environment – Indian Experience in
Retailing – Foreign Direct Investment in Retail in the Indian context.
1.3 Classification of Retailers: Classification by Ownership – Independent
Stores – Chain stores – Franchise Stores – leased Departments – Cooperatives ,
Classification by Strategy – General Merchandise Retailers – Discount Stores –
Specialty Stores – Off Price Retailers , Classification by Product Line –
Department stores – Supermarkets – Hypermarkets – Convenience Stores -
Services retailing.
1.4 Non Traditional Retail Classifications: Non store retailer – Direct
Marketing – Catalog Marketing– Telemarketing – TV Home shopping –
Automatic vending – E – Tailing – Malls and other formats
5 + 1
2 2.1 Retail Market Strategy: Definition, target market & retail format,
Differentiating, Growth strategies, Strategic Retail planning process.
2.2 Strategic Profit Model : Gross Margin Return On Inventory Management
(GMROI)
2.3 Retail Location & Site Selection: Types of retail locations, Steps involved in
choosing a retail location, Methods of evaluating a trading area,
2.4 Store Layout, Design &Visual Merchandising: Store planning, Store
Design and the retailing mix, Space mix, effective space management, Store
layout – circulation plan, Floor Space management. Markups and Markdowns,
Shrinkage in merchandise management.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
242
3 3.1 Retail Administration : Store management, Human resource management,
Information System & SCM
3.2 Planning Merchandise Assortment: Category management, Buying
organization, Assortment planning process, Analyzing merchandise
performance.
3.3 Planning Merchandise Assortments: Organizing the buying process by
categories- Category Management – The Buying Organization – Setting
Financial Objectives for the Merchandise Plan – Gross Margin Return On
Inventory Management (GMROI), Measuring Inventory Turnover – Sales
Forecasting – Assortment Planning Process – Variety – Assortment – Product
Availability – Tradeoffs between Variety, Assortment and Product Availability
– Assortment Plan, Product Mix Trends.
5 + 1
4 4.1 Merchandise Pricing: Setting the Retail Price- Pricing Objectives – Pricing
strategies – Pricing Methods – Pricing Adjustments – Price Discrimination
4.2 Retail Communication Mix: Role of Communication in Retailing – Methods
of communication – Planning the Retail Communication Programs –
Implementing and Evaluating the Retail Communication Programs
5 + 1
5 5.1 Mall Management: Major players nationally & internationally, Role of
promoter, developer& retailer: selecting tenant stores, Managing experience,
target footfalls & their conversion to sales. Identifying customers,
differentiating the mall, real estate pricing, Measuring duration & sequence of
visit, Number & nature of outlets visited &spend of share of wallet across the
tenants.
5.2 Challenges to Indian Retail Sector : Political & legal, economic, real estate
pricing, customer coming of age to shop in organized sector
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Retailing Management by Michael Levy & Barton Weitz, TMGH, 5th
Edition
2. Retailing Management by Swapna Pradhan , TMGH
2 Reference Books 1. Retail Management by Gibson Vedamani , Jaico Books
2. Retailing by Patrick Dunne, Robert Lusch, David Griffith, Thomson
Learning, Indian reprint.
3. Retail Marketing Management by David Gilbert, Pearson Publication.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. It happened in India by Kishore Biyani, Rupa& Co
2. Business Today, November1999, Mall Management, pg 7-22
4 Websites 1. http://www.cci.in/pdf/surveys_reports/indias_retail_sector.pdf
2. http://www.indiaretailing.com/
3. http://www.imagesretail.com/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
243
5 Journals 1. Organized Retailing in India: Upstream Channel Structure and
Management by Dabas, Chitra Srivastava; Sternquist, Brenda; Mahi,
Humaira., Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, 2012, Vol. 27
Issue 3
2. India: Shopping with the Family by Sheth, Kartik N.; Vittal, Ireena.,
McKinsey Quarterly, 2007, Issue 4
3. The Future of Shopping by Rigby, Darrell., Harvard Business Review,
Dec 2011, Vol. 89 Issue 12
4. The Wheel of Retailing by Hollander, Stanley C., Journal of Marketing,
Jul 1960, Vol. 25 Issue 1
5. The Mall as Bazaar: How Kiosks Influence Consumer Shopping
Behavior by Runyan, Rodney; Kim, Jung-Hwan; Baker, Julie., Journal of
Marketing Management. Feb 2012, Vol. 28 Issue 1/2, p 85-102.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
244
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 406MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Rural Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand rural aspects of marketing
2 To learn nuances of rural markets to design effective strategies
3 To enhance deeper understanding of rural consumer behavior
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Rural Marketing
1.1 Defining rural markets & rural marketing, evolution of rural marketing
1.2 Rural Marketing Environment – PEST analysis
1.3 Rural Economic Structure, Rural Occupation Pattern, Incomes &
Consumption, Rural market Size
1.4 Rural Infrastructure
4+1
2 Rural Consumer Behavior& Marketing Research
2.1 Characteristics of Rural Consumers, Role of Opinion Leaders, Diffusion of
Innovation in Rural Markets
2.2 Sources & Type of Secondary Data on Rural markets
2.3 Collecting Primary Data in Rural setting
4+1
3 Segmentation, Targeting & Positioning
3.1 Bases of Segmenting Rural Markets
3.2 Target Marketing, Coverage of Markets
3.3 Positioning in Rural Markets
4+1
4 Product & Pricing Strategy in Rural Markets
4.1 Rural Product Categories
4.2 Packaging for Rural Markets
4.3 Branding in Rural Markets, Problem of Fake Brands
4.4 Pricing Strategy – special considerations in rural markets
4.5 Credit in rural markets – need, sources & innovative credit delivery systems
6+1
5 Rural Distribution & Communication
5.1 Challenges of distribution in Rural markets, Rural Retail System – last mile
problem, public distribution system, cooperatives
5.2 Emerging Models in Rural Markets: E-Chaupal, Project Shakti
5.3 Challenges for Rural Communication: Massage & Media for Rural
Communication
7+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. The Rural Marketing Book by Pradeep Kashyap & Siddhartha Raut
2 Reference Books 1. Rural Marketing – Concepts & Practices by Balram Dogra, Karminder
Ghuman
2. Rural Marketing by R.V. Badi, N.V. Badi
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
245
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. A New Approach to Rural Marketing by Kaushik Sircar
4 Websites 1. http://www.echaupal.com/
2. http://www.rmai.in/
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Rural Management by SAGE
2. E-Journals of RMAI
3. Indian Journal of Marketing
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
246
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 407MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Service Operations Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To acquaint the students with the service operations strategy aspects.
2 To provide students with the concepts and tools necessary to effectively manage field service
operations.
3 To familiarize the students with the concepts of CRM and role of IT in managing service
operations.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Service Operations Concept: Nature of Services, Difference between
Manufacturing and Service Operations, Service Operations Characteristics,
Purpose and objectives of service operation, Functions and processes in service
operation, Different Pure Service Organizations and their peculiarities.
4 + 1
2 Service Operation Strategy: Service objectives and goal formulation, Service
organization: In house Vs. Outsourcing, Centralized Vs. Decentralized,
Creating Customer Connection, Effect of technology on service operationsstrategic
and tactical problems of managing operations functions in service
environment, economies of customer loyalty, alignment between target market
segments, manpower implications. Enhancing customer satisfaction, Service
Operations as Profit Centre.
5 + 1
3 Designing & Managing Service Operations: Technology and its Impact on
Services, Design and Development of Service Delivery Systems, Factors
determining design of service systems-Impact of customer contact on design of
service system , Work Measurement, Locating Facilities, Designing their
Layout. Service capacity, Capacity Planning process design in service systems -
basic structure of waiting line model-Principles of queuing theory for capacity
analysis issues-Short term capacity planning problems- service quality
measurements. Service operation processes for Event management, Financial
management, IT service consultancy management.
6 + 1
4 Field Service Management, Service Manpower Planning & Scheduling:
Field Service Organization, Field Service Inventory Management, Field
Technical Support Service, Integrating Field Service with Information
Technology, Field Service Effectiveness Evaluation, Field Service and its impact
on Customer satisfaction, Field Service and Customer Relations Management,
Uncertainty in Manpower Requirements, Cyclical and Seasonal nature of
demand, Service Level Considerations and Cost Considerations in Manning.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
247
5 5.1 Customer Relationship Management: Customer requirement assessment,
Customer satisfaction parameters and indices, Manpower recruitment and
training, Customer feedback collection and analysis, Customer service
evaluation.
5.2 IT Enabled Customer Service: Call Centre Operations and Management,
Web‐enabled Services, ERP enabled Field and Technical Support Services, Tele
marketing and servicing.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Successful Service Operations Management by Metters, King-Metters,
Pulliman and Walton, Thomson India Edition, 2nd Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Service Operations Management - Improving Service delivery by
Robert Johnston Graham Clark, Prentice Hall.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Service Strategy by Fitzsimmons, J.A. and Fitzsimmons, M.J. Chapter 3
in Service Management, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 2006, 37 –
58.
2. Journal of Services Marketing
3. Journal of Service Management
4. Journal of Financial Services Marketing
5. Journal of Service Research
6. Services Marketing Quarterly
4 Websites 1. www. msom.journal.informs.org/
5 Journals 1. Service Operations Management: Return to Roots by Robert Johnston,
International Journal of Operation and Production Management Vol.19
No.2, l999 pp.l15-124.
2. Compassionate High Quality Health care at Low Cost: The Arvind
Model by Shah, J. and Murty, L.S., IIMB Management Review, 16 (3),
2005, 31 – 43.
3. Will You Survive the Service Revolution? by Karmarkar, U., Harvard
Business Review, 82 (6), 2004, 101 – 107.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
248
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 408MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title International Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To make the students understand the concept and techniques of international marketing.
2 To train the students to develop plans and marketing strategies for entering into international
markets and managing overseas operations.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 International Marketing: Meaning, Nature and Importance; International
Marketing Orientation: E.P.R.G. – Approach: An overview of the International
Marketing Management Process; International Marketing Environment. Global
markets, International market groups- EU, ASEAN, SAFTA, NAFTA, Emerging
economies. International marketing research and information system; foreign
market entry modes; global marketing operations and strategies; International
Market Segmentation and Positioning; Screening and Selection of Markets;
International Market Entry Strategies: Exporting, licensing, Contract
Manufacturing, Joint Venture M & A, Setting-up of Wholly Owned Subsidiaries
Aboard, Strategic Alliances.
9 + 1
2 International Product Strategies: Product Designing: Product Standardization
Vs. Adaptation; Managing Product Line, International Trade Product Life
Cycle, New Product Development; counterfeiting and IPR issues.
4 + 1
3 Pricing for International Markets: Factors Affecting International Price
Determination; Price Quotations and Terms of Sale, pricing strategies;
international dumping; financing marketing transactions.
4 + 1
4 Managing International Distribution: The structure of international
distribution systems; International Distribution Channels, their Roles and
Functions; Selection and Management of Overseas Agents; channel selection
decisions; aspects of international supply chain management; international
direct marketing; leveraging international distribution for competitive
advantage.
4 + 1
5 Managing International Promotion Mix: Planning for Trade Fairs and
Exhibitions; Advertising and other Modes of Communication, International
promotion mix; push and pull strategies; aspects of international sales
management; challenges of international advertising; global media strategy.
4 + 1
Learning Resources:
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
249
1 Text Books 1. International Marketing by Cateora, Graham & Salwan, Mc Graw Hill,
13th Edition, 2008.
2. International Marketing by Rakesh Mohan Joshi, Oxford University
Press, 2005.
3. International Marketing by Czinkota & Ronkainen, Cengage Learning,
8th Edition (India), 2008.
4. International Marketing Management by Subhash Jain, CBS Publishers
& Distributors, 3rd Edition, 1997.
5. International Marketing by Rajgopal, Vikas Publication, New Delhi
2 Reference Books 1. International Marketing by Terpstra, Vern and Sarathy, Ravi, The
Dryden Press, Chicago , 2000.
2. Global Marketing Management by Keegan, Warren J. , Pearson
Education , New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2002.
3. Global Marketing Management by Kotabe Masaaki and Helsen
Kristiaan, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Ltd., 2nd Edition, 2001.
4. International Marketing: Analysis and Strategy by Onkvisit, Sak and
Shaw, John J. Edition, Prentice Hall., 2004.
5. International Marketing: An Indian Perspectives by Varshney, R. L. and
Bhattacharya, B. , Sultan Chand, New Delhi, 2001.
6. International Marketing Strategy by Doole Isobel and Robin Lawe, ,
Thomson Learning
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. EXIM Policies
2. World Bank Reports
4 Websites 1. Websites of the Ministry of Commerce
2. Websites of the Ministry of Finance
5 Journals 1. Journal of International Marketing
2. AMA’s Journal of International Marketing
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
250
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 409MKT Type Specialization –Elective
Course Title Export Documentation and Procedures
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To familiarize students with policy, procedures and documentation relating to foreign trade
operations.
2 To provide a review of the main documents involved in export order processing.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Significance of Procedures and Documentation in International Trade:
procedures and documentation as trade barriers; WTO provisions; Aligned
Documentation System (ADS); official machinery for trade procedures and
documentation; ITC(HS) classification System ;Role of ICC; INCOTERMS;
nature of export/trading houses.
5 + 1
2 Export Order Processing: export contract; export price quotations; shipping
and custom clearance of export and import cargo; central excise clearance; main
export and import documents; Role of forwarding agents; cargo insurance and
claim procedure.
5 + 1
3 Methods of Payment in International Trade: documentary collection of export
bills; UCPDC guidelines; realization of export proceeds – provisions of RBI’s
Exchange Control Manual; pre-shipment and post-shipment finance; role of
EXIM bank and ECGC in India.
5 + 1
4 Major Export Promotion Schemes in India: EPCGS, duty exemption scheme;
DEPB scheme; SIL; facility for deemed exports; Export promoting institution’s –
role of export promotion councils, commodity boards and ITPO.
5 + 1
5 Regulations for International Trade: Major laws governing India’s export
import trade- Foreign Trade (Development & Regulation) Act, Pre-shipment
Inspection & Quality Control Act, 1963 & Customs Act, 1962; Foreign Exchange
Management Act, 2000
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Export Import Procedures & Documentation by Dr. Kushpat S. Jain,
HPH, 5th Revised Edition, Aug. 2007
2. Export Marketing by B. S. Rathor & J. S. Rathor, HPH, 3rd Revised &
Enlarged Edition, 2006
3. Export Management by T. A. S. Balagopal, HPH, 18th Revised Edition,
2006
4. Export Management by D.C. Kapoor, Vikas Publishing House, 2009
5. Export- Policy, Procedures and Documentation by M. I. Mahajan, Show
white, 24th Edition, 2010
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
251
2 Reference Books 1. Export Procedures and Documentation by M.D. Jitendra, Rajat
Publications, Delhi.
2. Export Markets and Foreign Trade Management by Pervin Wadia,
Kanishka Publications, New Delhi.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Nabhi’s Exporters Manual and Documentation.
2. Nabhi’s New Import-Export Policy Procedures.
3. Export/Import Procedures and Documentation by Thomas E. Johnson,
Donna L. Bade, AMACOM
4 Websites 1. www.eximbankindia.com
5 Journals 1. A Study of Export and Import Problems Faced by the Mumbai Based
Importers and Exporters by Shinde, Govind P, Advances in
Management; Apr2012, Vol. 5 Issue 4, p44-51.
2. A Study on Export Performance of Indian Spices by Muthusamy, A.
Global Management Review. 2010, Vol. 5 Issue 1, p25-38.
3. External Sector: Outlook. India Country Monitor. Feb2012, p17-18
4. Economic Forecast, Country Report. India. Jul2011, Issue 7, p7-11
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
252
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 410MKT Type Specialization –Elective
Course Title Marketing Strategy
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To introduce a systematic understanding of marketing strategy and decision making in dynamic
marketing environment.
2 To understand and apply the STP of marketing (segmentation, targeting, positioning).
3 To understand and appreciate the concept of marketing strategy formulation and implementation.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Marketing Strategy: Marketing’s role in formulating &
implementing strategies, market oriented management, Overview of the
process of formulation & implementation of marketing strategy, integrating
marketing strategy with the firm’s other strategies & resources, market
opportunity analysis, formulating strategies for specific situations,
implementation & control.
3 + 1
2 Understanding Market Opportunities
2.1 Meaning of markets & industry, assessing market & industry attractiveness
using Mullins’ framework – Market Domain, Industry Domain, Team Domain
2.2 Forecasting Based on Current Demand: Market build up method, chain
ratios, market factor index method
2.3 Forecasting Based on Past Demand: Time series analysis, Trend analysis,
Leading indicators
2.4 Forecasting through Experimentation: Concept testing, Test marketing
2.5 Forecasting through Intentions & Expert Opinion: Buyers intensions, sales
force opinion, trade opinion, expert opinion, Delphi method, Bootstrapping,
Cross impact analysis
6 + 1
3 Targeting Attractive Market Segments & Positioning
3.1 Choosing Attractive Market Segments – A five step process
3.2 Different Targeting Strategies: Mass market, niche market, growth market
3.3 Differentiation Based on Product, Image, Channel, Personnel & Services
3.4 Positioning Process: identifying relevant competitors, identifying
determinant attributes, collecting information on perceptions of products &
brands, determine a product’s current position, determine customers’ most
preferred position, examine the fit between current position & market
preferences, writing positioning statement
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
253
4 Marketing Strategies for New Market Entries & Growth Markets
4.1 Market Entry Strategies for Pioneers & Followers: Sources of competitive
advantage for pioneers & followers
4.2 Components of strategic marketing programmes for Mass market
penetration & niche market penetration
4.3 Growth Market Strategies for Market Leaders: Different types of
marketing objectives for leaders, market share maintenance strategies
4.4 Growth Market Strategies for Followers: Different types of marketing
objectives for followers, market share growth strategies
6 + 1
5 Marketing Strategies for Mature & Declining Markets
5.1 Challenges in mature & declining markets, transition from growth to
maturity
5.2 Marketing Strategies for Mature Markets: Maintaining current market
share, extending volume growth
5.3 Marketing Strategies for Declining Markets: Marketing objectives &
programmes for Harvesting, Maintenance, Survivor & Niche Strategy
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Marketing Strategy by Walker, Mullins, Boyd & Larreche
2. Marketing Strategy and Competitive Positioning by Graham Hooley, Brigitte
Nicoulaud, Nigel F. Piercy, Pearson Education, , 5thEdition.
3. Strategic Marketing Management-Richard Wilson & Colin Gilligan
2 Reference
Books
1. Strategic Management & Marketing by Narendra Singh, Himalaya Publication
2. Strategic Marketing Text & Cases- S. Shajahan, Viva Books
3. Strategic Marketing Management -Text & Cases, by UC Mathur, Macmillan
3 Supplementa
ry Reading
Material
1. Strategic Marketing by A. Nag, Macmillan Publication
2. Strategic Marketing by Musadiq Sahaf, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
3. Strategic Marketing for Non-Profit Organization-Alan Anderson & Philip
Kotler
4. http://www.iitk.ac.in/infocell/announce/convention/papers/Changing%20
Playfield-06-Saurabh%20Kumar%20Saxena.pdf
4 Websites 1. http://www.mhhe.com/walker
2. http://marketing-strategy-examples.com/
5 Journals 1. Journal of Strategic Marketing of AMA
2. Marketing & strategy-The Wall Street
3. Journal of Business Strategy- Emerald
4. Journal of Marketing
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
254
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 411MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Marketing Decision Models
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To study scientific and data based developments that assist marketing professionals in arriving at
cost effective marketing strategies
2 To analyze the important developments in marketing theory to understand and control markets
effectively
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Modeling in Marketing
1.1 Analytical decision making , Science & Marketing, marketing decision
support systems, intelligent marketing systems, Data Warehousing & Data
Mining applications , Benefits of modeling in marketing,
1.2 Model building process, trends in building & using models, information
value chain
1.3 Taxonomy of Market Response Models based on number of marketing
instruments, market response modeled, functional forms, competitive effects,
nature of data used, level of aggregation, estimation methods, uncertainty.
4 + 1
2 Mathematics & Statistics for Marketing Models
2.1 Relationship between Marketing Variable: Graphs & functions
2.2 Linear Algebra and Systems of Equations in Marketing
2.3 Differential Equations: applications for market dynamics
2.4 Calculus for optimization
2.5 Basic Probability Concepts
2.6 Statistical Distributions for Modeling: Bernoulli, Binomial, Chi-Squared,
Exponential, F-Distribution, Normal, Poisson, Student’s t distribution
6+ 1
3 3. Applications in Environment Analysis
3.1 Demand decomposition framework for environment analysis & models
3.2 Identifying Competitors through Brand Switching Matrix,
3.3 Models for Forecasting Competitors’ Actions, Game Theory
3.4 Stochastic Models of Consumer Behavior: Purchase Incidence Models,
Brand Choice Models
5 + 1
4 Applications in Forecasting & Resource Allocation
4.1Demand Forecasting Models: Extrapolations & curve fitting, Regression
techniques, Analogy Methods
4.2 Models for Forecasting Sales for Consumer Durable , Diffusion of
Innovation – Bass Model & its revisions, Repeat Purchase Models
4.3 Models for Resources Allocation among Sbus & Products: STRATPORT,
& AHP
4.4 Models for resources allocation across geographical territories
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
255
5 Models for Marketing Mix Variables
5.1 Modeling for Product Positioning & Design -Preference Choice Model –
Expectancy value, preference regression, PERCEPTOR, LINMAP
&DEFENDOR models of product design
5.2 Pricing Models
5.3 Models for Promotional Budget Decisions
5.4 Models for Media Scheduling
5.5 Sales Promotion Models: Rao Lilien Model
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Marketing Models by Lilien, Kotler & Moorthy, Prentice-Hall of India
2 Reference Books 1. Analysis for Strategic Marketing by Rao & Steckel
2. Marketing decision models by Randall L. Schultz, Andris A. Zoltners,
North Holland
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Handbook of Marketing Decision Models by Berend Wierenga,
Springer
4 Websites 1. http://www.12manage.com/i_m.html
5 Journals 1. Modeling and Forecasting Sales Data by Time Series Analysis by
Kapoor, S. G.; Madhok, P.; Wu, S. M., Journal of Marketing Research
(JMR). Feb1981, Vol. 18 Issue 1, p94-100.
2. Judgment Based Marketing Decision Models: Problems and Possible
Solutions by Chakravarti, Dipankar; Mitchell, Andrew; Staelin,
Richard., Journal of Marketing. Fall1981, Vol. 45 Issue 4, p13-23
3. Econometric Models for Marketing Decisions by Wittink, Dick R.,
Journal of Marketing Research, Feb2005, Vol. 42 Issue 1, p1-3
4. Bridging the Academic-Practitioner Divide in Marketing Decision
Models by Lilien, Gary L., Journal of Marketing. Jul2011, Vol. 75 Issue 4,
p196-210.
5. Using Buyer Behavior Models to Improve Marketing Decisions by
Aaker, David A., Journal of Marketing. Jul1970, Vol. 34 Issue 3, p52-57
6. Endogeneity in Marketing Decision Models by Shugan, Steven M.,
Marketing Science. Winter2004, Vol. 23 Issue 1, p1-3.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
256
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 412MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Marketing of High Technology Products
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide students with the concepts and tools necessary to effectively market a high technology
product.
2 To help the students learn the marketing mix aspect of marketing high technology products.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to High Technology: Common Characteristics of High
Technology, Continuum of Innovations - Radical/Breakthrough Innovations -
Incremental Innovations - Implications of Different Types of Innovations -
Contingency Model for High-Tech Marketing - Does Marketing Need to Be
Different for High-Technology Products and Innovations? - Framework for
Making High-Technology Marketing Decisions.
5 + 1
2 Product Development and Management Issues in High-Tech Markets:
Market Orientation, R&D–Marketing Interaction, High-Tech Marketing
Research Tools - Concept Testing - Conjoint Analysis - Customer Visit
Programs - Empathic Design - Lead Users - Quality Function Deployment -
Prototype Testing - Beta Version Testing, Technology Development - The
“What to Sell” Decision, Product Architecture: Modularity, Platforms and
Derivatives, New Product Development Teams - Developing Services as Part of
the High-Technology Product Strategy, Implications for High-Tech Marketing -
Protection of Intellectual Property - Understanding Gray Markets - Black
Markets, Piracy, and Restricted Exports - Managing Intellectual Property.
Categories of Adopters - Crossing the Chasm. The Choice of Customer,
Customer Strategies to Avoid Obsolescence, Customer Migration Decisions,
Marketers’ Migration Options.
8 + 1
3 Pricing Considerations in High-Tech Markets: The High-Tech Pricing
Environment, Customer Oriented Pricing- Steps and Implications. Pricing of
After-Sales Service - The Technology Paradox- Solutions to the Technology
(Pricing) Paradox - From Free to Fee. The Effect of the Internet on Pricing
Decisions - Additional Pricing Considerations - Outright Sale of Know-How
versus Licensing Agreements - Licensing Restrictions - Pay-Per-Use versus
Subscription Pricing - Price Bundling – Leasing.
4 + 1
4 Distribution Channels in High-Tech Markets: Channel Considerations in
High-Tech Markets - Blurring of Distinctions Between Members in the Supply
Chain - Need for Indirect Channels to Provide Value for Manufacturers -
Evolution of High-Tech Channels.
4 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
257
5 Advertising and Promotion in High-Tech Markets: Tools to Build and
Maintain Customer Relationships: The Importance of Branding in High-Tech
Markets, Developing a Strong Brand - Ingredient Branding - Branding for Small
Business. New-Product Pre-announcements - Advantages and Objectives of
Pre-announcements -Disadvantages of Pre-announcements - Tactical
Considerations in the Pre-announcement Decision.
4 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Marketing of High-Technology Products and Innovations by Jakki
Mohr, Sanjit Sengupta, Stanley Slater, 2nd Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Marketing High Technology by William H. Davidow
2. Product Marketing for Technology Companies by Mark Butje
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Crossing the chasm: Marketing and Selling High Tech Products to
Mainstream Customers by Geoffrey Moore
2. Product Strategy for High Technology Companies by Michael E.
McGrath.
3. Next Generation Product Development : How to Increase Productivity,
Cut Costs, and Reduce Cycle Times by Michael E. McGrath
4. The Innovator’s Dilemma by Clayton M. Christensen
4 Websites 1. http://marketinghightech.net/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
258
5 Journals 1. Drucker's Insights on Market Orientation and Innovation: Implications
for Emerging Areas in High-technology Marketing by Mohr, Jakki J.;
Sarin, Shikhar. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science.
Spring2009, Vol. 37 Issue 1, p85-96.
2. High Technology Marketing: Conceptualization and Case Study by
Yadav, Naveen; Swami, Sanjeev; Pal, Prosanto. Vikalpa: The Journal for
Decision Makers. Apr-Jun2006, Vol. 31 Issue 2, p57-74.
3. The Marketing of Innovations in High-technology Companies: A
Network Approach by Borg, Erik A. European Journal of Marketing.
2009, Vol. 43 Issue 3/4, p364-370.
4. Sales Forecasting in High-Technology Markets: A Utility-Based
Approach by Decker, Reinhold; Gnibba-Yukawa, Kumiko. Journal of
Product Innovation Management, Jan2010, Vol. 27 Issue 1
2. Sales Forecasting of Products with Very Short Life Cycles by Pizzano,
Rudolph. Journal of Business Forecasting, Summer2011, Vol. 30 Issue 2
3. Forecasting Organizational Adoption of High-technology Product
Innovations separated by impact: Are traditional macro-level diffusion
models appropriate? By McDade, Sean; Oliva, Terence A.; Thomas,
Ellen. Industrial Marketing Management, Feb2010, Vol. 39 Issue 2,
p298-307.
4. What High-Tech Managers Need to Know About Brands by Ward,
Scott; Light, Larry; Goldstine, Jonathan. Harvard Business Review.
Jul/Aug1999, Vol. 77 Issue 4, p85-95.
5. Innovation and the Management of Marketing in High Technology
Small Firms by Oakley, Ray. Journal of Marketing Management. Oct91,
Vol. 7 Issue 4, p343-356.
6. Introduction to the Special Issue: Marketing Of High-Technology
Products and Innovations by Mohr, Jakki J.; Shooshtari, Nader H.
Journal of Marketing Theory & Practice. Summer2003, Vol. 11 Issue 3,
p1-12.
7. Success in High-Technology Markets: Is Marketing Capability Critical?
byDutta, Shantanu; Narasimhan, Om; Rajiv, Surendra. Marketing
Science. 1999, Vol. 18 Issue 4, p547-568.
8. Sustaining Competitive Advantage in a High-Technology Environment:
A Strategic Marketing Perspective by Rao, P. M. Advances in
Competitiveness Research. 2005, Vol. 13 Issue 1, p33-47
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
259
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 413MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title E Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To contextualize marketing concepts in electronic marketing context.
2 To give insights into various aspects of E Marketing from the perspective of creating Customer
Value.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 E Marketing: Concept & scope, E Marketing and E Business
interrelationship, Marketing implications of Internet technologies and
convergence, Convergence and M commerce.
1.2 E Marketing 7 Step Plan: Situation Analysis, E – Marketing Strategic
Planning, Objectives, E- Marketing Strategies, Implementation Plan, Budget,
Evaluation Plan
5 + 1
2 2.1 E -Marketing Environment: Global markets, Emerging Economies,
Technological readiness, Ethical &Legal issues: Privacy and Security Concerns,
Electronic Payment System - Different types of payment modes, e-cash, echeck,
e-money - E-Security Firewalls
2.2 The Virtual Value Chain: Marketplace vs. Market space - Visibility,
Mirroring capability, The network economy - "Moore's Law" and "Gilder's
Law" , E-Marketplaces and Economic Impacts
5 + 1
3 3.1 Consumer Behavior: Social & cultural context, Individual characteristics
and Resources, Motivations for shopping on the net, attributes of online
shopping.
3.2 Segmenting and Targeting Online Customers: Business – Government and
Customer Markets, Important geographic segments for E-Marketing,
Demographic segments, Psychographic segments, Behavior segments,
Targeting online customers.
3.3 Differentiation and Positioning Strategies: Product – Service – Personnel –
Channel and Image differentiation. Differentiation Strategies – site
atmospherics, making the intangible tangible, building trust, efficient and
timely order processing, pricing, CRM, Enhancing the customer experience.
5 + 1
4 4.1 Product Mix of E-Marketing: Product, Creating Customer Value online,
Product benefits, Enhanced product development, Taxonomy of Internet
products.
4.2 Price: Buyers & sellers perspectives, Pricing strategies, Distribution System,
Distribution channel metrics.
4.3 Integrated Communication: Internet advertising, Website, blogs,
community building, on line events, coupons, sampling, contests, games, e
mail, permission marketing, viral marketing, messaging, spam, IMC metrics.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
260
5 5.1 Customer Relationship Management: Valued customer experience, CRM
Technology & metrics.
5.2 The Economics of e-Loyalty: The importance of focusing on the "right"
customers Relationship Capital – eCRM - Internet strategies facilitating CRM
including personalization, collaborative filtering, data mining, data
warehousing and real-time profiling.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. E- Marketing by Judy Strauss, Adel Ansary, Raymond Frost, Prentice Hall
2. Digital Marketing for Dummies by Carter-Brooks-Catalano-Smith
2 Reference Books 1. Guide to E-Marketing by Prasad Gadkari
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. e-Service-New Directions in Theory & Practice by Roland T. Rust and P.K.
Kannan
4 Websites 1. http://www.emarketingstrategiesbook.com/
5 Journals 1. The Impact of e-service Quality, Customer Satisfaction and Loyalty on e-
Marketing: Moderating effect of perceived value by Hsin Hsin Chang;
Yao-Hua Wang; Wen-Ying Yang. Total Quality Management & Business
Excellence, Apr2009, Vol. 20 Issue 4
2. Modeling Web Site Design across Cultures: Relationships to Trust,
Satisfaction, and E-Loyalty by CYR, Dianne. Journal of Management
Information Systems, Spring2008, Vol. 24 Issue 4
3. Innovativeness and Involvement as Determinants of Website Loyalty: II.
Determinants of consumer loyalty in B2C e-commerce by Wang, Hui-
Chih; Pallister, John G.; Foxall, Gordon R. Technovation, Dec2006, Vol. 26
Issue 12
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
261
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 414MKT Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Marketing to Emerging Markets & Bottom of the Pyramid
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand difference between emerging & developed markets
2 To understand opportunities & challenges in Emerging Markets in general & Bottom Of the
Pyramid (BOP) segment in particular
2 To provide a framework for marketing to BOP markets
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number of
Sessions
1 Overview of Emerging Markets:
1.1 Countries constituting emerging markets. Countries constituting BRICS
& Next 11, Growing economic power of emerging markets,
1.2 Demographic & economic scenario of emerging market countries.
Emerging market size for different business sectors
5 + 1
2 Emerging Markets - Perspectives & Practices:
2.1 Characteristics of Emerging Markets: Emerging markets versus
developed markets - market heterogeneity, sociopolitical governance,
chronic shortage of resources, unbranded competition, and inadequate
infrastructure.
2.2 Comparative Advantage of Emerging Markets: Policy based advantage,
raw material based advantage, NGO based advantage, Marketing
Implications in terms of strategy, policy & practice of marketing, Marketing
Mix Implications.
7 + 1
3 Bottom of the Pyramid Markets:
3.1 Difference between Emerging Markets & BOP Markets, Definition, size &
composition of BOP markets all over the world,
3.2 Characteristics of BOP markets, need for segmenting BOP markets
5 + 1
4 Marketing Strategies for BOP Markets:
4.1 Four elements of BOP strategy - creating buying power, shaping
aspirations, improving access, and tailoring local solutions.
4.2 C K Prahalad’s 12 principles, BOP Protocol
5 + 1
5 Criticism of Marketing to BOP & Alternate Perspectives 3 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. The Fortune at the Bottom of the Pyramid, Prahalad, C.K., Pearson –
Singapore.
2 Reference Books 1. We are like that only, Bijapurkar, R. (2007), New Delhi: Penguin Portfolio.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
262
3 Supplementary
Reading
Material
1. World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD). (2004),
Doing business with the poor – a field guide. (March). [Online] Available:
http://www.wbcsd.org/DocRoot/uCxCgEiOhrCEXcsN5sIo/sl-fieldguide-
reprint.pdf
2. United Nations Development Programme (UNDP). (2008), “Creating
Value For All: Strategies For Doing Business With Poor”, The Growing
Inclusive Markets Initiative,(July). [Online] Available:
http://www.undp.org/gimlaunch/download.shtml.
3. Preston, K, A. Libow, A. Bruno, C.Meade, and R. Wells. (2007),
Opportunities for the Majority Index: Analysis of Corporate Performance
in Latin America and the Caribbean, The Inter-American Development
Bank, 21st December. [Online]
Available:http://www.iadb.org/am/2008/docs/OM_Index_Final_Report
_v2.pdf.
4. Hammond, A., W. J. Kramer, R. S. Katz, J. T. Tran, and C. Walker. (2007),
The Next 4 Billion: Market size and Business strategy at the Base of the
Pyramid, World Resources Institute (WRI) and International Finance
Corporation (IFC) [Online] Available:
http://www.wri.org/publication/the-next-4-billion
5. Bang V.V. and Joshi S. L. (2008), “Conceptualization of Market Expansion
Strategies in Developing Economies”, Academy of Marketing Science
Review, 4, [Online] Available:
http://www.amsreview.org/articles/bang04-2008.pdf
6. Simanis, E. and S. Hart With J. DeKoszmovszky, P. Donohue,D. Duke, G.
Enk, M. Gordon, and T. Thieme. (2008), The Base of the Pyramid Protocol:
Toward Next Generation BoP Strategy, Center for Sustainable Global
Enterprise, Johnson School of Management, Cornell University, Second
edi. [Online] Available:
http://www.wdi.umich.edu/files/BoPProtocol2ndEdition2008.pdf.
7. Karamchandani, A., M. Kubzansky, and P. Frandano. (2009), Emerging
Markets, Emerging Models: Market-Based Solutions To The Challenges Of
Global Poverty, Monitor group, (March).
8. Wilson, D. and R. Purushothaman. (2003) “Dreaming With BRICS: Path to
2050.” Goldman Sachs, Global Economics Paper No.99, 1st October.
9. Prahalad, C.K., and A. Hammond. (2002), “Serving the World’s Poor,
Profitably”, Harvard Business Review, 80(September), pp. 48-57.
10. Prahalad, C. K. and S. L. Hart. (2002), “The Fortune at the Bottom of the
Pyramid”, Strategy + Business, 26, pp.54-67.
11. Dawar, N. and A. Chattopadhyay (2000), “Rethinking Marketing
Programs for Emerging Markets”, William Davidson Institute, Working
Paper Number 320.
12. Beshouri, C.P. (2006), “A Grassroots Approach to Emerging-Market
Consumers.” The McKinsey Quarterly, (March), pp.61-71
13. Karnani, A. (2007), “The Mirage of Marketing to the Bottom of the
Pyramid: How the Private Sector Can Help Alleviate Poverty”, California
Management Review, 49(4), (Summer), pp.90-111.
14. London, T. and S. L. Hart (2006), “Reinventing strategies for emerging
markets: beyond the transnational model”, Journal of International
Business Studies, (August), pp.1–21. [Online] Available:
http://e4sw.org/papers/JIBS.pdf.
15. Vachani, S. and N. Craig Smith. (2008), “Socially Responsible Distribution:
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
263
Distribution Strategies For Reaching The Bottom Of The Pyramid”,
California Management Review, 50(2), (Winter), pp.52-84
16. Sheth, J. N. (2011), “Impact of Emerging Markets on Marketing: Rethinking
Existing Perspectives and Practices”, Journal of Marketing, Vol. 75 (July),
166 –182.
4 Websites 1. http://www.wri.org/
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Emerging Markets
2. Harvard Business Review
3. California Management Review
4. Journal of Macro Marketing
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
264
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 415MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Marketing of Financial Services – II
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To equip young managers with the knowledge of retail banking, corporate banking and investment
banking practices in India.
2 To familiarize the students to the requisite regulatory compliances in Wealth Management
industry.
3 To make the student understand the Risk-Return principle and its practical use in marketing of
financial services.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Financial Framework: An Overview of the Financial Framework, Bank,
Categories of Banks, NBFIs, Regulators, Regulations, Key Concepts
1.2 Banking Business: Banking Business Overview, Structure of a Bank,
Banking Channels.
1.3 Retail Banking: Overview, Liability Products, Liability Products-Process &
Roles, Asset Products, Asset Process and Roles, Typical Loan Products, Other
Services.
1.4 Corporate Banking: Overview, Classification of Products - Fund Based &
Non Fund Based, Funded Facilities, Non Funded Facilities, Credit Evaluation,
SME Banking.
5 + 1
2 2.1 Specialized Divisions & Support Function: Investment Banking -
Advisory Services & Funding; Financial Markets and Treasury, Private
Banking and Wealth Management, Rural and Agricultural Banking (India
specific), Other Functions.
2.2 Risk Management in Banks and NDFIs: Risk Management Overview,
Typical Causes of Financial Crises, The Risk Management Process, Asset
Liability Mismatch, Fraud, Identifying/Measuring Risk, Implementing Risk
Measures.
2.3 Technology in Banking: An Overview of Technology in Banking, Core
Banking Solutions (CBS), Application for Various Channels, Modules for
Various Divisions, Cheque Truncation - India & U.S.A
5 + 1
3 3.1 Wealth Management Business: Concept of 'Wealth' and 'Net worth',
Concept of HNI, Segmentation of HNIs into various categories - overall
profile of each category, Investments needs of HNIs, the 'management' part of
'Wealth Management' for the HNIs.
3.2 Wealth Management Industry: Insight into the Wealth Management
Industry, Growth potential of Indian HNI segment, Regulatory aspect of
Wealth Management at various levels, Money laundering, Terrorism
Financing and compliances across the financial services world to block it.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
265
4 4.1 Wealth Management Services: Service providers (both corporate and
individuals) in the area of Wealth Management, Range of products and
services offered to each segment of HNIs, Services provided under Holistic
Wealth Management such as, Private Banking, Preferred Banking etc., Service
mandates a wealth manager needs to know and follow. Various segment -
mandate mixes.
4.2 Wealth Management Process: Client Engagement, Client Profiling and
Targeting, Building Relationships etc. Investment Advisory, Product Manager
and Credit Operations etc. available in the Front, Middle and Back offices.
Various steps in a KYC process, Wealth Management process and their
distribution among front end, middle end and back end offices to ensure
better services and products.
5 + 1
5 Risk and Return:
5.1 Segmenting Clients Based on The Risk- Return Principle: Risk-Return
principle, Risk taking behavior of the client during various stages of human
life, clients' comfort zone for investment, Risk Tolerance, determining
investment objectives.
5.2 Asset Classes and Portfolio: Various asset classes, Portfolio classification
based upon the proportion of various asset classes.Asset Allocation, Risk
profile of the portfolio, Performance indices of the portfolio - Money
Weighted Returns, Risk Adjusted Return, Sharpe Ratio, Treynor Ration, etc.,
Analyzing performance of portfolio according to the asset class and the
markets.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Security Analysis and Portfolio Management by Sudhindra Bhat, Excel
Books, 2011 Edition
2. Wealth Management by S. K. Bagchi, Jaico Publishing House, 1st
Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Marketing Financial Products by IBS Centre for Management Research
2. Marketing Financial Services by Hooman Estelami
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Principles and Practices of Banking by Indian Institute of Banking &
Finance, Macmillan Publication, 2nd Edition
2. Marketing of Financial Services by V.A. Avadhani, Himalaya
Publishing House
4 Websites 1. http://www.financeindia.org
2. http://www.rbi.org.in
5 Journals 1. Building Relationships to Last by Hartmann, Ann W. Journal of
Financial Service Professionals. Jan2010, Vol. 64 Issue 1, p42-46.
2. Dimensions of Relationship Marketing in business-to-business financial
services by Theron, Edwin; Terblanche, Nic S. International Journal of
Market Research. 2010, Vol. 52 Issue 3, p383-402
3. The Management of Customer Relationships as Assets in the Retail
Banking Sector by Persson, Andreas. Journal of Strategic Marketing.
Feb2011, Vol. 19 Issue 1, p105-119.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
266
Semester IV Specialization Marketing
Course Code 416MKT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Cross-Cultural Relationship Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To help students understand the cultural aspects of relationships.
2 To emphasize the need for cultural adaptation in relationship development and negotiations.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Mapping Players and Process: Identifying players, deciders, Informal
influences that make or break a deal. Cross cultural etiquette and behavior-the
basics.
5 + 1
2 Buyer and Seller Feedback Loop: Relational embeddedness - dependency and
influence of network members over buyer and seller.
5 + 1
3 Communication in Cross Cultural Relationships: Cross communication
between network members.
5 + 1
4 Andersen’s model (2003) on cross cultural relationship Initiation and
development. Cross cultural sales negotiations.
5 + 1
5 Approaches to Negotiations: Top down, Protocol& Deportment, Deeper
cultural characteristics, Consensus, Coalition Building-Negotiation specific
expectations to shape process of negotiation.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Relationship Marketing in Cross-cultural contexts by Rugimbana and
Nwankwos, Thomson Learning-S. Melbourne
2. The World’s Business Cultures and How to Unlock Them by Barry
Tomalin and Mike Nicks, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd.
3. Relationship Marketing-the IMP Perspective in Handbook of
Relationship Marketing by Jagdish Seth and Atul Parvatiyar2ndEdition.
Thousand Oaks California, Sage Publications
4. Hofstede G - Cultural Consequences International differences in Work
Related Values, Beverly Hills, CA Sage Publications
5. Relationship Marketing -The UK Perspective in Hand book of
Relationship Marketing by Jagdish Seth and Atul Parvatiyar 2nd Edition
California, Sage Publications
2 Reference Books 1. Cross-Cultural Business Behavior: Marketing, Negotiating, Sourcing an
Managing across Cultures by Richard Gesteland, 3rd Edition,
Copenhagen Business School Press
2. Cross-Cultural Business Behavior - A guide for Global Management by
Richard Gesteland 5thEdition
3. Marketing by Agreement: A Cross-cultural Approach to business
negotiations by McCall, J.B. & M.B. Warrington 2nd Edition, John Wiley
& Sons
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
267
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Global Marketing: A Decision Oriented Approach by Svend Hollensen,
5th Edition.
2. Advances in International Marketing: Establishing Marketing
Relationships in Cross Cultural Business, Emerald Insight Books
3. Bargaining Across Borders - How to Negotiate Successfully Anywhere
in the world by Foster D.A., MGH, NewYork
4 Websites -
5 Journals 1. Cross-Cultural Examination of Relationship Quality, by Barry, James
M.; Doney, Patricia M. Journal of Global Marketing, Sep/Oct2011, Vol.
24 Issue 4
2. An investigation of relationship learning in cross-border buyer–
supplier relationships: The role of trust, by Liu, C.-L.E. International
Business Review, Jun2012, Vol. 21 Issue 3
3. The Complexities of Perceived Risk in Cross-Cultural Services
Marketing by Keh, Hean Tat; Sun, Jin. Journal of International
Marketing. 2008, Vol. 16 Issue 1, p120-146.
4. The Effects of Adaptation, Commitment and Trust In Cross-Cultural
Marketing Relationships by Walton, James R.; Salazar, Ronald J.; Jifu
Wang. Journal of Applied Business Research. 2008 3rd Quarter, Vol. 24
Issue 3, p29-38.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
268
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER IV
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
269
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
270
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 403 Type :
Specialization
Core
Course Title
Money and Capital Markets
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the role and importance of money and capital markets in resources mobilization
2 To make the students aware of the various instruments used in money and capital markets
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM
Financial Markets – Overview and Operators under each, of Money Market, Capital
Market, Foreign Exchange Market, Government Securities Market and Credit Market -
Related Statistics,
6
6+1
2 MONEY MARKET
Money Market Instruments - Inter Bank Call Money – Market Repo - Collateralized
Borrowing and Lending Obligation (CBLO) – Commercial Paper- Certificates of Deposit –
Inter Corporate Deposits - – Trading Platforms- Money Market Mutual Funds Debt
Market Structure and Instruments – Government Securities Market – Treasury Bills- Bond
Market - Control Mechanism
7+1
3 FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKETS
Foreign Exchange Market – Instruments- Trading Platforms-
7+1
4 CAPITAL MARKETS
Capital markets in India - Primary and Secondary Market - Initial Public Offers (I.P.O.’s) -
Pricing and Marketing Issues – Stock Trading on BSE and NSE (Familiarity with
Quotations, conventions, operating procedures desired) – Insider Trading and Scams -
Analysis, Prevention, Regulatory Mechanism , National, Regional and other Stock
Exchanges in India – Features and Functioning of BSE and NSE’s On Line Trading
Platforms (Practical sessions recommended) - BSE and NSE Index Computation
8+1
5 INTERNATIONAL MARKETS
Prominent International Stock Exchanges (New York, London and Tokyo) - Sectoral
Stock indices in India and abroad – Commodity Exchanges , Overview of Derivatives in
financial markets – basic derivatives – operations and trading.
7+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
271
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Merchant Banking and Financial Services, Guruswamy, Third Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill
Money and Capital Markets, Peter Rose, McGraw Hill Education 2 Reference
Books
Monetary theory and practice: Suraj Gupta
Monetary theory and practice: K.P.M.Sundharam.
Stock Exchanges, Investments and Derivatives, V Raghunathan, PrabinaRajib,
Tata McGraw Hill 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
Insider Trading: Perspectives and Cases, Jayshree Bose, ICFAI Press
4 Websites Bombay Stock Exchange
National Stock Exchange
New York, Tokyo, London stock exchange 5 Journals Indian Journal of Financial services managements
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
272
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 404 Type : Specialisation core
Course Title
FINANCIAL REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To acquaint the students with the need and structure of regulatory framework in India
2 To provide detailed information about the various regulatory authorities in financial sector
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 NEED AND IMPORTANCE
Need and importance of regulatory framework in finance field – structure
of regulatory framework in India –
2
6+2
2 REGULATORY BODIES
Role of regulatory bodies
A] Reserve Bank of India.
B] SEBI
C] Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority
D] Pension Funds Regulatory and Development Authority
E] Board for payment and settlement systems
F] Board for financial supervision
G] Competition Commission.
7+2
3 COMPANIES ACT 1956
Companies Act 1956 –prospectus – share capital- borrowing powers – accounts and audit
– directors – restructuring – winding up
7+2
4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK FOR INTERANTIONAL FUNDS
Regulatory framework for raising funds through GDRs and ADRs – external
commercial borrowings –
8+2
5 FDI, FII, FEMA ETC.
Foreign direct investments, Foreign Institutional Investments , provisions of FEMA
regarding acquiring property outside India
7+2
Learning Resources:
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
273
1 Text Books Merchant Banking and Financial Services, Guruswamy, Third Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill
Money and Capital Markets, Peter Rose, McGraw Hill Education
Company Law: N.D.Kapoor 2 Reference
Books
Monetary theory and practice: Suraj Gupta
Monetary theory and practice: K.P.M.Sundharam.
Stock Exchanges, Investments and Derivatives, V Raghunathan, PrabinaRajib,
Tata McGraw Hill 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
Insider Trading: Perspectives and Cases, Jayshree Bose, ICFAI Press
4 Websites RBI
IRDA
SEBI 5 Journals The Chartered Secretary - Journal of Institute of Company Secretaries of India - New
Delhi
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
274
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 406 Type : Elective
Course Title
Equity Research with Excels
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the importance of equity research
2 To understand how excel can be leveraged for better analysis of a company
3 To analyse the economy, industry and company
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 EQUITY RESEARCH - CONCEPT, DEFINITION
Meaning of Equity Research - Fundamental Analysis, Technical Analysis. 1
Fundamental analysis - Economy analysis, Industry Analysis, Company Analysis 1
Economic Analysis - GDP, National Income, Inflation, Repo rate, CRR and its effect on
economy, Understanding of economic parameters with various various database soft
wares like CMIE 1
Industry Analysis :- Growth of industry, major players in Industry, competitors,
comparison of company with competitors on the parameters of Profitability, Turnover,
market share, market capitalisation, P/E ratio and EPS 2
5+1
2 CREATING A DATA BASE FOR COMPANY ANALYSIS
Feeding of data from Balance sheet and operating statement from annual reports of a
company 2
Concepts of standardization and regrouping of data as per the need of the analyst,
development of a model 1
Getting the market values of the shares of the company from NSE / BSE site 1
5+1
3 DATA ANALYSIS OF A COMPANY FROM ANNUAL REPORTS
Creating a common size statement from the data fo 5 years and analysis of
the same 2
Creating the model for calculation of ratios - Profitability, Turnover,
Liquidity, Solvency 3
Valuation fo shares, Relationship of P/ E ratio and valuation, EPS 2
6+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
275
4 DATA ANALYSIS OF A COMPANY FROM SHARE MARKET
Concept of oscillators and calculation of oscillators from the data of 5 years
prices, High, low, average price 1
moving averages - simple, exponential, rate of change indicators (ROC) ,
relative strength index, (RSI) 2
Moving average convergence and divergence (MACD) 2
5+1
5 TECHNICAL ANALYSIS
Understanding various charts - bullish trend, bearish trend, price chart,
line chart, bar chart, Japanese candle stick chart 1
Chart Patterns - support and resistance, reversal pattern, head and
shoulder formation, Inverse head and shoulder formation 1
Continuation Patterns - Triangles, Flags and Pennants 1
Overall decision making for purchase / sale of share of a company 1
4+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Portfolio Management : S Kevin,
2 Reference
Books
Monetary theory and practice: Suraj Gupta
Monetary theory and practice: K.P.M.Sundharam.
Stock Exchanges, Investments and Derivatives, V Raghunathan, PrabinaRajib,
Tata McGraw Hill 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
Financial Statement Analysis
4 Websites BSE
NSE 5 Journals Capital Markets
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
276
Semester I Specialization Finance
Course Code 407 Type : Elective
Course Title
ONLINE TRADING WITH NSE AND BSE
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand how to do the trading of financial securities online
2 To know practically the prerequisites of trading
3 To Analyse the securities using the MIS reports available online
Syllabus:
Unit
Numbe
r
Contents Numbe
r of
Session
s
1 OVERVIEW OF CAPITAL MARKETS
Overview of Indian Capital Market and Global Capital Market
Stock exchanges in India : Vision, Mission and Functions
4+1
2 PRODUCTS IN CAPITAL MARKETS
Capital Market( Equity, Indices, MFs, ETFs, IPOs, Offer for sale, IPP, SLBs)
Derivatives (Equity derivatives, Currency Derivative, Interest rate derivatives,
Global indices)
Debt ( Retail debt market, Wholesale debt market, Corporate bonds)
Investors' rights and obligations
6+1
3 TRADING ONLINE
Pre requirements and documentation
Online trading and mobile applications
Verifying trades, contract notes, bills, demands
Verifying margin requirements and balance in trading account
6+1
4 ANALYSIS USING ONLINE INFORMATION
Using online reports and charts for analysis and decision making (daily,
monthly)…creating data base for your portfolio
Understanding Trading, Clearing & settlement and Risk Management related to
each product in Capital Market
4+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
277
5 PROFIT MANAGEMENT
Managing online 3 portfolios and related customized market watch (e.g. My NSE)
along with related detailed MIS in excel
Calculation of gains with respect to trades
Calculation of brokerage, securities and other taxes
Calculation of gross and net gains
Calculation of capital gains and taxes
Calculating overall performance of your portfolio
5+1
Note:
The subject is purely practical based. It is expected that the session would be conducted in the
computer lab during the market hours
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Portfolio Management : S Kevin,
2 Reference
Books
Monetary theory and practice: Suraj Gupta
Monetary theory and practice: K.P.M.Sundharam.
Stock Exchanges, Investments and Derivatives, V Raghunathan, PrabinaRajib,
Tata McGraw Hill 3 Supplementa
ry Reading
Material
Financial Statement Analysis
4 Websites BSE
NSE
5 Journals Capital Markets
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
278
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 408 Type : Finance Elective
Course Title
Income Tax - Part II - Corporate Taxation
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic concepts of income tax
2 To be able to calculate income from Business and Profession, Capital Gains and other income
3 To be able to calculate Gross Total income and tax liability of an individual as well as a company
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 MEANING SCOPE, PARTICIPANTS AND INSTRUMENTS
Income Tax Act 1961, Definitions - Assessee, Assessement Year, Previous year, person,
income, gross total income, Total income and tax liability, Company 3
Difference between exemption and deduction, capital and revenue, rebate and deduction 1
Residential status concept, Residential status of a company, implications of residential
status for a company 1
2 INCOME FROM BUSINESS AND PROFESSION
Basic principles governing Business income, Basic principles governing
deducatbilty of expenses under section 30 to 44DB 1
Deductions expressly allowed 1
Deductions expresslly disallowed 1
problems of calculation of income from business and profession 3
3 INCOME FROM CAPITAL GAINS AND OTHER SOURCES
Meaning, Capital assets, transfer, short term capital gain, long term capital
gain, calculation of capital gain, indexation, FMV, cost of acquisition, cost
of imrovement, 1
exemptions, Sec 54D, section 54EC, section 54G and section 54GA 1
Calculation of Capital gains 2
Income from other sources - applicable to company - theory 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
279
4 SET OFF, CARRY FORWARD, DEDUCTIONS, TAX RATE AND LIABILITY,
MAT, DEFERRED TAX
Set off and carry forward 1
Deductions applicable to companies - 80G, 80GGA, 80GGB, 80-IA, 80-IAB,
80-IB, 80IC, 80JJA, 80-ID, 80-IE, 80JJAA, 80LA 1
minimum alternate tax (MAT), Deferred tax 1
Calculation of gross total income and tax liability 2
5 CORPORATE TAX PLANNING
Tax planning for setting up of a new unit 1
Tax planning for financial management decisions 1
Tax planning for managerial decisions 1
Tax planning for mergers and acquisitions 1
Note:
1 Note : The problems will be asked on calculation of Gross Total Income, Tax Liability for individual
as well as corporate, and on corporate tax planning
2 Assessment year will be current assessment year. For e.g if exams are in May 2015, a.y. 2015-16
would be applicable.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Students guide to Income Tax - Dr. Vinod and Kapil Singhania
2 Reference Books Direct Taxes - Law and Practice - Dr. Vinod and Kapil Singhania
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
Income Tax Ready Reckner
4 Websites Income Tax Department
5 Journals The Chartered Accountant
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
280
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 409 Type : Finance Elective
Course Title
Wealth and Portfolio Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the concept of Wealth
2 To understand the concept of Portfolio Management
3 To understand various tools and methods of evaluating the portfolio
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 INTRODUCTION TO WEALTH AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT
Meaning of wealth and Portfolio 1
Phases of portfolio management 1
evolution of portfolio management 1
role of portfolio management 1
5+1
2 MODELS AND THEORIES
Efficient Market Theory 2
Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) 2
4+1
3 PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS & SELECTION
Expected return of portfolio, risk of a portfolio 2
Diversification - a tool for reducing risk 2
portfolio having more than two securities 2
6+1
4 PORTFOLIO REVISION
Need for revision 1
Meaning of portfolio revision 2
Constraints, strategies, plans for revision 2
5+1
5 PORTFOLIO EVLUATION
Need, meaning 3
Differential return, Decomposition of performance 3
6+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Portfolio Management : S Kevin,
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
281
2 Reference
Books
Monetary theory and practice: Suraj Gupta
Monetary theory and practice: K.P.M.Sundharam.
Stock Exchanges, Investments and Derivatives, V Raghunathan, PrabinaRajib,
Tata McGraw Hill
Portfolio Management - Mr. Avadhani 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
Financial Statement Analysis
4 Websites BSE
NSE
5 Journals Capital Markets
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
282
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 410 Type : Finance Elective
Course Title
Enterprise Risk Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic concepts of Risk Management
2 To Study in detail the various types of risks
3 To understand the various tools which can be used for monitoring the risk
Syllabus:
Unit
Numb
er
Contents Numb
er of
Sessio
ns
1 Fundamentals of Risk Management
Framework for Risk Management – Types of Risk 4
4+1
2 Financial and Accounting Risks
Financial Risks – Measuring Market Risks – Measuring Credit Risks –
Measuring Operational Risks 3
Accounting Risks - COSO ERM Cube- categories- activities-event
identification-risk quantification 3
6+1
3 Supply Chain Risks
Supply Chain Risks – identification-assessment-avoidance-mitigation-
Supply Management -Demand Management-Product Management-
Information Management -Supply Chain Disruption 5
5+1
4 Information Systems Risk
Information Systems Risks - Risk Identification and Analysis 3
Disaster Management - Risk Management of Human Systems- Database Support 2
5+1
5 Tools of ERM – ERM Balanced Score Card – Multiple Criteria Analysis- Simulation
and Data Envelopment Analysis Models – Credit Risk Analysis
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Enterprise Risk Management, Olson and Wu, World Scientific
2. Enterprise Risk Management, Vedpuriswar, ICFAI Books 2 Reference
Books
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
4 Websites
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
283
5 Journals
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
284
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 411 Type : Finance Elective
Course Title Project Finance
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the concept of Project Finance
2 To know various sources of finance
3 To understand the risks associated with mega projects
Syllabus:
Unit
Numbe
r
Contents Numbe
r of
Session
s
1 Basics of Project Finance
Characteristic and major elements of Projects, Project Planning and Control
Financial Modeling and Evaluation – Macroeconomic assumptions – project costs and
funding – operating revenues and costs – accounting and taxation issues
5+1
2 Sources of finance
Sources of finance for projects - Financial Instruments - Performance indicators for
projects - project cash flows - Appraisal and validity of financing projects - Financial
Engineering
6+1
3 Risk Management
Risk Management for Projects - Risk Identification – Commercial Risks –
Completion Risks – Environmental Risks – Operating Risks – Revenue Risks –
Input Supply Risks – Macro Economic Risks- Political Risks - Risk Analysis and
Transfer – Guarantees and Insurance
6+1
4 Contract Management
Contract Management - Tender preparation and initial evaluation - Preparation of
promoter's bids - project conditions - Incentives and Penalties – Default and
Termination - Legal Aspects and agreements
4+1
5 Cases
Case Study of a large project covering all aspects stated
4+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Principles of Project Finance, E.R. Yescombe, Academic Press
2 Reference
Books
Public Private Partnership in Infrastructure, R N Joshi, Visionbooks
Project Finance, Concepts and Applications, Padmalatha Suresh, ICFAI
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
285
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
4 Websites 6.
5 Journals 3.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
286
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 412 Type : Elective
Course Title Indirect Tax Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To make students familiar with various indirect tax laws in India
2 To create awareness about the tax planning in the field of indirect taxes
Syllabus:
Unit
Numbe
r
Contents Numbe
r of
Session
s
1 INTRODUCTION
1. Introduction to concept of indirect taxes and their importance in
resources mobilization – importance of management of indirect taxes
5+1
2 CENTRAL EXCISE
1. Central Excise – taxable event – definitions of goods, manufacture,
manufacturer – basis of charging excise duty – concept of CENVAT on inputs and on
capital goods – routine procedures in Central Excise – scope for tax planning in Central
Excise
5+1
3 CUSTOMS
1. Customs Act – taxable event – types of customs duties - rules of
valuation of goods – import and export procedures – tax planning
5+1
4 SERVICE TAX
1. Service Tax – definition of services – taxable event – basis for
charging service tax – CENVAT provisions in service tax- tax planning.
5+1
5 VAT, GST, CST
1. Other Indirect Taxes – VAT – CST and GST
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Indirect Taxes: V.S.Datey
2 Reference
Books
Various Bare Acts
3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
287
4 Websites Customs Department
Excise Department
Sales Tax Department 5 Journals The Chartered Accountant
The Management Accountant
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
288
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 413 Type : Elective
Course Title Auditing Systems
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To introduce the concept of auditing and its importance in a business organization
2 To make students acquainted with the types of audits and role of audit in performance
Evaluation
Syllabus:
Unit
Numbe
r
Contents Numbe
r of
Session
s
1 FUNDAMENTALS
Auditing – meaning and importance – types of audits – planning for audit – audit
program – audit notebook – working papers – internal checks – use of sampling in
auditing- auditing standards
5+1
2 FINANCIAL AUDIT
Financial audit – relevant provisions of Companies Act regarding applicability,
appointment, removal, powers and liabilities of auditors – format of audit report
6+1
3 COST AUIDT
Cost Audit – applicability – appointment, removal, powers and responsibilities of
cost auditor – format of Cost Audit Report
5+1
4 OTHER AUDITS
Introduction to other types of audits – Management Audit – Secretarial Audit –
Internal Audit – green audit – energy audit
6+1
5 AUDIT REPORT
Studying and analyzing audit reports – role of audit in performance evaluation.
3+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books Principles of Auditing: B.N.Tandon
2 Reference
Books
Companies Act 1956: N.D.Kapoor
Audit Reports of various business organizations 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
NA
4 Websites ICAI
5 Journals The Chartered Accountants
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
289
Semester IV Specialization Finance
Course Code 414 Type Elective
Course Title Insurance Operations Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the various operations involved in managing insurance
2 To understand the pricing, financing and risk diversification strategies of insurance companies
Syllabus:
Unit
Numbe
r
Contents Numbe
r of
Session
s
1 FUNDAMENTALS
Functions and Organisation of Insurance -Types of Organisation - Organisation Structure-
Function of Insurers
4+1
2 UNDERWRITING, CLAIMS, INTERMEDIARIES
Underwriting - Objectives and Principles - Underwriting in Life Insurance - Underwriting
in Non Life Insurance
Claims Management – Principles - Claim Settlement in Life Insurance - Claim Settlement
in General Insurance - Repudiation of Claims
Insurance Intermediaries - Distribution of Insurance products - Role of Intermediaries -
Surveyors and Loss Assessors - Third Party Administrators – Agents – Brokers -
Corporate Agents- Bancassurance — Ombudsman - Lok Adalats
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
290
3 PRICING AND FINANCE
Insurance Pricing - Pricing Objectives - Types of Rating - Rating Considerations - Rating
in Life Insurance - Rate Making Entities - Rate Making in General Insurance – De tariffing
and its impact in India
Financial Aspects of Insurance Companies - Balance S heet, Profit and Loss Account of
Insurance Companies - Ratio Analysis in Insurance Companies - Risk Return Trade off -
Measuring Financial Performance
6+1
4 MARKETING OF PRODUCTS
Marketing of Insurance Products - Marketing Practices - Critical success Factors for
Insurance Marketers - Distribution
Channels - e-Commerce in Insurance Industry - Case studies
of Indian Companies
5+1
5 RISK MANAGEMENT
Reinsurance - Principles, Role, Nature and Techniques of Reinsurance - Reinsurance in
Indian Perspective - Global Reinsurance Market - Reinsurance Trading
Risk Management in Insurance Companies - Evaluation of Risk in Insurance Services -
Risk Management Systems - Management of Systematic Risk - IRDA Framework for Risk
Management - Catastrophe (CAT)Bonds
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books
1.Insurance and Risk Management,2nd Edition,P.K.Gupta,Himalaya Publishing
House
2.Insurance,principles and Practice,S.N.Mishra,S.B.Mishra, S Chand 2 Reference
Books 1.Principles of Insurance Management,Neelam Gulati,Excel Books
2.Indian Insurance Industry, Transition and Prospects ,D C Srivastava, Shashank
Srivastava, New Century Publications 3 Supplementar
y Reading
Material
1.Principles of Risk Management and Insurance,9th Edition,George Rejda,Pearson
Education
4 Websites National Insurance Academy
5 Journals Journal by NIA
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
291
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
292
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER IV
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
293
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 403IT Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Software Project Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand different aspects of Software Project Management as an important field of practice
under IT Management
2 To learn tools and techniques of Software Project Management
3 To understand importance of, and learning techniques to ensure, software quality
4 To learn to use a Software Package for Software Project Management
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Software Project Management – Software Projects Vs Other
Projects – Contract Management and Technical Project Management –
Activities under technical project management – Plans, Methods and
Methodology – Stakeholders – Business Case
7 + 1
2 Project Planning, Evaluation and Program Management – Steps in Project
Planning and Project Evaluation – Strategic Assessment – Technical
Assessment – Cost Benefit Analysis –Cash Flow Forecasting – Process Models –
Prototyping – Dynamic Systems Development – Extreme Programming –
Managing Iterative Processes
7 + 2
3 Software Effort Estimation – Estimation Techniques – Expert Judgment –
Analogy – Function Point Analysis – Object Points – Procedural Codes –
COCOMO Model
Activity Planning – Project Schedules – Sequencing and Scheduling – Network
Planning – Using PERT and CPM for activity planning – Forward Pass –
Backward Pass – Activity-on-arrow networks
Managing Contracts – Types of contracts – Stages in contract placement –
Contract Management and Acceptance
Software Quality Management – Defining Software Quality – Requisite ISO
Standards – Product Vs Process Quality – Enhancing Software Quality –
Quality Planning
9+2
4 Risk Management in Software Projects – Nature and Types of risk – Managing
risks – Risk Analysis, Planning and Control – Strategies for risk reduction –
PERT as a tool of Risk Management
Resource Monitoring and Control–Creating Control Framework – Reporting for
Control – Visualizing Progress – Cost Monitoring – Change Control
7+2
5 Using Project Management Software – Introduction to either of Microsoft
Project 2010, Prince2 and Primavera and learning to use any one of these
products
5+3
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Software Project Management, 5th Edition, Hughes, Cotterel, Rajib Mall,
Tata McGraw Hill
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
294
2 Reference Books 1. Software Project management in practice by Pankaj Jalote
2. Software project management by Rajendra Mishra
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. www.projectbubble.com
2. www.sei.cmu.edu
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Software Project management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
295
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 404IT Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Enterprise Resources Planning
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To acquire in-depth knowledge of ERP as a prime Application Software product
2 To learn operational aspects of ERP implementation and support
3 To know features of important ERP modules
4 To learn, through case studies, practical aspects of ERP in various industries
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Enterprise Resource Planning
What is ERP? - Features of ERP (Basic and Advanced) – ERP Architecture –
ERP Need Analysis – Return on Investment for ERP
7+2
2 ERP Implementation and Support
ERP Life Cycle, Methodologies and Strategy – Vendor and Software Selection –
Business Process Re-engineering related to ERP - Implementation Process –
Change Management – Post Implementation Support, Maintenance, Security
5+2
3 ERP Functional Modules
Human Resource Management
Accounting and Finance
Procurement, Inventory Control
Production Planning, Operations
Sales, Customer Relationship Management
e-Commerce
9+2
4 ERP Technology Areas, Enterprise Applications
Portal and Content Management, Data Warehousing and Data Mining,
Business Intelligence and Analytics - Emerging Trends in ERP Applications
7+2
5 ERP Case Studies
Case Studies of ERP Implementation in Manufacturing and Service Sectors
7+2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Enterprise Resource Planning, Ray, Tata McGraw Hill
2 Reference Books 1. ERP Demystified, Alexis Leon, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Enterprise Resource Planning, A Managerial Perspective, Goyal, Tata
McGraw Hill
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP): A review of the literature by
Young B. Moon, International Journal of Management and Enterprise
Development, Vol. 4, No. 3
4 Websites 1. www.sap.com
2. erp.iitkgp.ernet.in
5 Journals 1. Journal of Enterprise Resource Planning Studies
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
296
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 405IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Web Designing & Multimedia
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To acquire technical competence in Web Designing and Multimedia Applications
2 To learn to use HTML, VB Script and Java script
3 To integrate Web and Multimedia with business objectives of the organization
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Multimedia and hypermedia, world wide web, overview of multimedia software
tools. Graphics and image data representation graphics/image data types, file
formats, Color in image and video: color science, color models in images, color
models in video.
5+1
2 Fundamental concepts in video and digital audio
Types of video signals, analog video, digital video, digitization of sound, MIDI,
quantization and transmission of audio.
5+1
3 HTML - tags, lists, tables, Frames, layers , using images in web pages and DHTML 5+1
4 Introduction in VB Script - Data types, operators, control structures, functions and
strings.
5+1
5 Introduction to java script - Operators, identifiers, control structures, functions
arrays and error handling.
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Mastering HTML- CYBEX Publication
2 Reference Books 1. Complete Reference VB Script and Java Script – Tata McGraw Hill
2. Dynamic HTML- O'Reilly Media
3. Internet & Web Technologies- Tata McGraw-Hill Education
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. www.3school.com
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Web & Semantic Technology
2. Web Technology Journal
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
297
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 406IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Network Technology & Security
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To acquire an overview of (but not technical proficiency in) various computer networks,
technologies behind networks and application protocols, e-mail and communication protocols
2 To develop awareness of managing networks well so as to offer high quality service to the users
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Networking: Hardware Architecture, Topologies, Media,
Devices. Transmission Technique , Twisted Pair, Coaxial Cable, Fiber optics,
Wireless Transmission Switching, Circuit Switching, Message Switching, Packet
Switching
Common Network Architecture: Connection oriented Networks, Connectionless
Networks Example of Networks -P2P, X.25, ATM, Ethernet Wireless LANs -
802.11, 802.11x, Gigabit
5+1
2 The OSI Reference Model: Protocol Layering, TCP/IP Model, OSI vs. TCP/IP
Local Area Networks: Components & Technology, Access Technique,
Transmission Protocol & Media
Broad Band Networks: Integrated Service Digital Networks (ISDN), Broad Band
ISDN, ATM, ATM Traffic Management. Introduction to Very Small Aperture
Terminal(VSAT)
5+1
3 IP Addressing & Routing: IP addresses – Network Part and Host Part, Network
Masks, Network addresses and Broadcast addresses, Address Classes, Loop Back
Address, IP routing Concepts, Routing
Tables, Stream & Packets. What IP does? What TCP does? Sliding Windows, TCP
– a reliable pipe, TCP connection – Multiple conversations, Port Numbers,
Multiple Connection from many hosts and one host. IPV6: The next generation
Protocol
Domain Network Services (DNS): Domain Names, Authoritative Hosts,
Delegating Authority, Resource Records, SOA records, DNS protocol, DHCP &
Scope Resolution
SNMP: An IP Management Protocol Network Management protocols SNMP the
Simple Network Management Protocol, Agents & Managers, SNMP
Organization, Object Identifiers, Problem with SNMP
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
298
4 Network Applications: (HTTP, Email, etc.) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
HTTP communications - HTTP request, Request Headers, Responses, Status Code,
Error Status.
Code Email- Sending & Receiving Emails, Email Addressing, Message Structure
MIME–Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions SMTP–Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol with examples Mail Exchangers – Delivering a message, Mail Boxes. POP
– Post Office Protocol. IMAP – Internet Message Access Protocol. FTP – File
Transfer Protocol. Telnet – Remote Communication Protocol. Proxy Server, Proxy
Web Servers.
5+1
5 Network Security: Threats, Packet-filtering firewalls, Firewall policies and rules,
Common Problem with Packet Filtering, SSL – Secure Socket Layer, Internet
Protocol Security (IPSEC) , Virtual Private Networks, Symmetric Key Signatures,
Public key Signatures, The Birthday Attack
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Computer Networks Andrew S. Tanenbaum 4e
2 Reference Books 1. Network Essential Notes GSW MCSE Study Notes
2. Internetworking Technology Handbook CISCO System
3. Introduction to Networking and Data Communications Eugene
Blanchard
4. Computer Networks and Internets with Internet Applications Douglas
E. Comer
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. www.cert.org
5 Journals 1. International Journals of Internet Security & Its Applications
2. International Journal of Wireless Networks and Broadband
Technologies
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
299
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 407IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Database Administration
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To know duties and responsibilities of a Data Base Administrator
2 To learn DBA skills through select tasks
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Job Specifications of Data Base Administration. Overview of Memory structure,
process structure and storage structure of Oracle , Installation of Oracle using
Oracle Universal Installer
6
2 Create database using DBCA, startup and shutdown of oracle using log and trace
files and data dictionary
6
3 Configure and manage oracle network, create and manage tablespaces 6
4 Create and manage database user accounts, privileges, role and profiles 6
5 Monitor and resolve locking conflicts, manage undo 6
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Oracle 9i, 10g or 11g Manuals
2 Reference Books 1. Database Administration: The Complete Guide to Practices and
Procedures by Craig Mullins
2. DBA Survivor
3. Expert Oracle Database Administration by Sam Alapati, Dreamtech
Press
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. wwwdatabasejournals.com
2. www.dbametrics.com
5 Journals 1. Database Journals: The knowledge center for database professionals
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
300
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 408IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Software Testing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand scope of Software Testing Activity
2 To learn tools and techniques of Software Testing
3 To develop skill to design suitable test procedure in a given software development environment
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Software Testing Principles:
Basic concepts - Need of testing , errors, faults, defects
Defects – Process defects, design defects, data defects
Reducing the frequency of defects in software development
Factors affecting software testing
Testing constraints
Life cycle testing
Tester’s workbench
5+1
2 Levels of Testing:
Verification and Validation
Functional and Structural Testing
Static and Dynamic Testing
V Concept of Testing with Testing Stages
Types of Testing:
Unit Testing, Integration Testing, System Testing- Performance, Load, Stress,
Volume Testing, Regression Testing, Alpha, Beta and Acceptance Testing ,
Functional Testing, Performance Testing, Recovery Testing, White Box Testing,
Black Box Testing, Gray Box Testing
Security testing- Types of Security Testing:
Network Scanning, Vulnerability Scanning, Password Cracking, Log Reviews,
File Integrity Checkers, Virus Detectors, Penetration Testing
Usability Testing
Manual versus Automated Testing
Static versus Dynamic Testing
Compliance Testing
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
301
3 Test Management:
Testing Life Cycle – Roles and activities,
Test Planning – forming a test team, develop test plan reviews, structured
walkthroughs
Test Cases design strategies
Test Execution: build test data, life cycle of defect, defect tracking, defect
detection stages, defect detection stages, defect types, defect severity, defect
analysis and prevention.
5+1
4 Functional Testing(black box): random testing, equivalence class partitioning
and boundary value analysis, Cause effect graphing, Syntax testing
Structural Testing(white box ): test adequacy criteria, coverage
( Branch and decision coverage, path coverage) and control flow graphs, paths,
loop testing, mutation testing.
Black Box testing versus White Box Testing
5+1
5 Overview of testing tools including open source tools for software testing 5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Effective Methods for Software Testing, William E Perry, 2nd Edition,
Wiley Publication
2 Reference Books 1. Practical Software Testing, Iien Burnstein, Springer Publication, 2003
2. Software Testing and continuous Quality improvement, William E
Lewis, CRC Press, 2009
3. Software Engineering , Pressman, Fifth Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. www.onestoptesting.com
5 Journals 1. Software Testing, Verification and Reliability, Wiley
2. Automated Software Engineering, MetaPress
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
302
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 409IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Information Security & Audit
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand perspectives of Information Security risks
2 To appreciate security audit as a preventive system
3 To know other techniques / approaches of risk prevention
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Information Security Risk Analysis Fundamentals. Importance of Physical
Security and Biometric Controls for Protecting Information Systems Assets.
5+1
2 Overview of Network Security Perspectives, Networking and Digital
Communications, Security of Wireless Networks.
5+1
3 Cryptographic Techniques and Encryption. Intrusion Detection Systems and
Firewalls. Security of Virtual Private Networks.
5+1
4 Auditing concepts - Information Security Audit - Need, Concept, Standards,
Performance, Steps , Techniques , Methodologies , around and through computer
5+1
5 Controls – Concept, Objectives, Types, Risk, Exposure 5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Information Security and Auditing in the Digital Age by: Amjad Umar
2 Reference Books
1. Computer Security, Art and Science by Matt Bishop, Pearson
2. Management Information Systems by Laudon, Laudon, Dass, Pearson
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites
5 Journals
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
303
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 410IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Data Warehousing & Data Mining
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To learn operational aspects of Data Warehousing and Data Mining
2 To know applications of Data Warehousing / Data Mining in business
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to data mining (DM)
Kind of data, DM Functionalities, Classification of DM Systems, Issues in DM.
What is Data warehousing (DW)?
Multidimensional data model: Data cubes, Stars, snowflakes and fact
constellations
Defining schemas, concept hierarchies, OLAP
5+1
2 Data Warehouse Architecture
Steps for design and construction, Three-tier Data
Warehouse architecture,
Types of OLAP servers: ROLAP versus MOLAP versus HOLAP
5+1
3 Data Warehouse Implementation:
Efficient computation of Data cubes
Indexing OLAP Data and efficient processing of OLAP queries
Back-end tools and utilities
5+1
4 Data Preprocessing
Why to preprocess data?, Data cleaning: Missing Values, Noisy Data, Data
Integration and transformation,
Data Reduction: Data cube aggregation, Dimensionality reduction.
Data Compression, Numerosity Reduction Discretization and Concept Hierarchy
Generation
5+1
5 Data Mining Primitives, Languages and System Architectures:
Task relevant data, Kind of Knowledge to be mined, DM Query languages:
Syntax, Designing GUI, Architectures of DM Systems
Concept of Cluster Analysis.
Application and trends in Data mining
Data Mining for Financial data analysis, Data Mining for retail industry, Data
mining for telecommunication industry
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Data Mining Concepts and Techniques, J. Han, M. Kamber, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers, 2001.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
304
2 Reference Books 1. Data mining: Concepts, Models, Methods and Algorithms, M.
Kantardzic, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2003.
2. Data Mining: Introductory and Advanced Topics, M. Dunham, Pearson
3. Data mining: Practical machine learning tools and techniques, H.
Witten, E. Frank, 2nd ed., Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2005.
4. Data mining: A tutorial-based primer, R. J. Roiger, M. W. Geatz,
Pearson Education, 2003.
5. UCI Repository of Machine Learning, C. L. Blake, C. J. Merz. 19 July
2002.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. http://www.cs.waikato.ac.nz/ml/weka
2. http://www.infoacumen.com
3. ftp://axon.cs.byu.edu/pub/randy/ml/drop/
4. http://www.crisp-dm.org.
5. http://www.dmg.org
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Data Warehousing and Mining (IJDWM)
2. International Journal of Data Mining, Modeling and Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
305
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 411IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Geographical Information System
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To explore and understand concept of Geographical Information Systems
2 To know tools and techniques of G. I. S.
3 To develop skills to implement G. I. S. in appropriate situations
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Conceptual Framework of GIS , GIS Structure & Function
Coordinate Systems, GIS Data, Database Design & Development
5+1
2 Function and Structure of Maps, Overview of Public Data Sources 5+1
3 Basic GIS Operations, Fundamentals of Data Visualization, Advanced Querying 5+1
4 Linear Operations on Spatial Data, Spatial Modeling and Analysis
Data Visualization and Presentation for GIS, GIS Modeling , Spatial Interpolation
Error Evaluation and Management
5+1
5 GIS for Decision Making, GIS Organization and Management
GIS Applications
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems , Lo, C.P.
and Yeung, A.K.W. (2002).. Prentice Hall.
2 Reference Books 1. Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems. DeMers, M.N.
(1999) 2nd Ed., Wiley Press.
2. Principles of Geographical Information Systems Burrough, P.A. and
R.A. McDonald (1998), Oxford University Press.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. www.esri.com
5 Journals
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
306
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 412IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title e-Governance
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To learn operational aspects of e-Governance
2 To know tools and techniques of e-Governance
3 To acquire / develop skills of implementing e-Governance in appropriate situations
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction:
Definition, Why e- governance?, G to G , G to C, C to G , G to B and B to G , issues
in e-governance applications and digital divide, Evolution of e-governance
Stages in E- Governance Evolution
5+1
2 E-Governance Models
Broadcasting/ Wider Dissemination model
Critical Flow model
Comparative Analysis model
Interactive service model/Government –to-Citizen to Government Model
(G2C2G)
Evolution in E- Governance and Maturity Models
E-Governance : strategies for success
5+1
3 E- Governance infrastructure
Data Systems Infrastructure, Legal infrastructural preparedness
Institutional infrastructural preparedness, Human infrastructural preparedness,
Technological infrastructural preparedness
5+1
4 Applications of Data Warehousing and Data Mining in Government 5+1
5 Case studies, especially, on E- Governance in India 5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. E- Governance Concepts and case Studies- C.S.R Prabhu , Prentice Hall
of India
2 Reference Books
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. E-Governance: Transforming the national bone marrow, Journal of
Management Research Year : 2002, Volume : 2, Issue : 3
4 Websites 1. www.egovamc.com/
2. egovstandards.gov.in/
5 Journals 1. Indian Journal of e-Governance
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
307
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 413IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Internet Marketing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand, various approaches to Internet Marketing
2 To learn advantages and disadvantages of approaches to Internet Marketing
3 To develop skills to implement Internet Marketing under appropriate situations
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction:
What is internet marketing? Significance of internet marketing, benefits of internet
to the marketer, how internet marketing differs from traditional marketing
Marketplace, customers, online buyer behavior, competitors, suppliers,
intermediaries
Websites:
People behind websites- owners, venture capitalists, creative directors, account
and project managers, programmers, graphic designers, copy writers, marketers
Types of websites- web portals, B2B, B2C, C2C, B2E( Business to employee), social
networking, informational, entertainment
5+1
2 Social Media and social networking sites:
An overview of social media and networking sites,
The rise and dominance of social networking- Social media optimization, social
media marketing
Who is using social media and how?
Social networking sites- types of audiences, generalist social networking, Niche
market social networking, social bookmarking
Blogging as a marketing strategy:
Blogging basics- What is blogging? Types of blogs, who blogs, who reads them,
how and why.
Blogging as a marketing strategy- Benefits of blogging, pitfalls of blogging, the
requirements for a successful marketing blog
5+1
3 Web based video:
Who is watching what, video as a social media tool, web based video as a
marketing tool
Wikis , RSS, Mashups , virtual worlds and marketing
Web and brand building - Brand – brand promise, brand personality, unique
selling proposition,
The web’s place in brand building
5+1
4 E- commerce sites:
sources of revenue - direct sales, indirect sales, paid memberships and
Subscriptions, advertising
Shopping on the social web- store layout, the shopping cart and check out process,
intuitive and personal content provision, Feedback and reviews
5+1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
308
5 Online promotion techniques:
Search engine marketing, online PR, Online partnerships, interactive advertising,
e-mail marketing, viral marketing
5+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Principles of Internet Marketing- new tools and methods for web
developers by Jason I. Miletsky, Course Technology, Cengage Learning,
2009
2 Reference Books 1. Internet marketing- strategy, implementation and Practice- David
Chaffey, Fiona Ellis- Chadwick, Richard Meyer, Kevin Johnston,
Pearson Education Limited, 2006
2. The ultimate Web- Marketing Guide- Michael Miller, Pearson
Education(QUE) , 2011
3. Search Engine optimization your visual blueprint for effective internet
marketing- Kristopher B. Jones, Wiley Publishing
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. www.interdigitalmarketing.com/
5 Journals 1. Internet Marketing Research & Theory
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
309
Semester III Specialization Information Technology
Course Code 414IT Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Microsoft Office 2010Lab
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To enable students working in Microsoft office 2010 organize work more efficiently & develop a
fully unified office with Microsoft suite.
2 To provide an opportunity to learn advanced and uncommon features of office – 2010 as on aid to
career growth
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Microsoft Word :
Tabs Tablets & sorting, Working with Graphics, Templates, wizards & sample
documents, writers tools, Macros, custom toolbars , key board shortcuts & menus,
Introduction to mail merge
5
2 Microsoft Excel :
Excel Formatting Tips, & techniques, organizing large projects, introduction to
functions, excel chart features, working with graphics in excel, vlookup,
conditional formatting, command macros, IF function, Pivot Table, Excel 2010
keyboard shortcuts
8
3 Presenting With PowerPoint: Creating Presentations, use photos in PowerPoint,
Working with Graphics & Multimedia in PowerPoint, Presenters Mode
5
4 Microsoft Access:
Introduction to access, Creating database & tables, Forms, Entering & Editing
Data, Relational Database, Expressions, Macros & other automation, graphics in
Database , Troubleshooting, Maintaining & protecting database
6
5 Microsoft Outlook: Managing address book& distribution lists, organizing,
filtering& using automatic response, Managing your contacts, scheduling
appointments, meetings, Using Templates, Use e-mail signature in outlook, use ebusiness
cards in outlook, manage the mails with conditional formatting
6
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Excel 2010 Bible [With CDROM] by John Walkenbach John Wiley &
Sons
2. Word 2010 Bible by Herb Tyson John Wiley & Sons
3. MOS 2010 Study Guide for Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
Outlook by Joan Lambert III and Joyce Cox (Apr 8, 2011)
4. Microsoft Word 2010 Step by Step by Joyce Cox and Joan Lambert III
5. PowerPoint 2010 Bible [Paperback] by Faithe Wempen
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
310
2 Reference Books 1. Microsoft Word 2010 in Depth by Faithe Wempen
2. Microsoft Word 2010 Plain & Simple by Katherine Murray
3. Beyond Bullet Points: Using Microsoft PowerPoint to Create
Presentations That Inform, Motivate, and Inspire [Paperback] BPG
4. Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 Plain & Simple by Nancy Muir
5. Office 2010 Bible by John Walkenbach, Herb Tyson, Michael R. Groh,
Faithe Wempen, Lisa A. Bucki
6. Business Analysis with MS Excel by Conard Carlberg, Pearson
Education
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
4 Websites 1. www.microsoft .com
2. www.office.microsoft.com
5 Journals
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
311
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER IV
OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
312
Semester IV Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 403OPE Type Specialization –Core
Course Title Operations Strategy
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To emphasize the key role of operations in bringing about the growth and profitability of
organizations.
2 To impart ideas, concepts and principles in operations strategy.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of
Sessions
1 Introduction: Importance and Linkage with Corporate strategy, Strategies and
values, Competing through operations. Operation strategy in global economy-
Strategic alliances and production sharing, fluctuations of international financial
conditions and international companies. Changing nature of world business.
Quality, Customer service and cost challenges and social responsibility, Current
perspective-Strategic fit
7 + 2
2 Methodology for Developing Operations Strategy: Value as business concept –
strategic issues in manufacturing – Value Chain concept Focus, core competence
and distinctive capabilities – stake holders & strategy, Checking markets,
Outcome of Market debate – Linking manufacturing to Markets – strategic
integration – why products sell in the markets – Order Winners, Order Qualifiers.
Lean systems-Eliminating waste.
7 + 2
3 Operation Strategy Implementation: Technology strategy Issues in New Product
development Time to market – strategic nature of process– Business implication
of Process choice – Hybrid Process. Change management and Sustainability
Procedure – company or plant based profiles – decisions for product reallocation
– downsizing – Capacity decisions Progression & Regression. Evaluating various
tradeoffs alternatives – Focused manufacturing – Product or process focus – Make
or Buy – merits /demerits – value chain approach – just in time – lean
manufacturing.
7 + 2
4 Strategic Resource Management: Importance, issues involved – organizational
issues operational approaches to improving, delivery system, controlling
operations – key performance Indicators, PQCDSM (Productivity, Quality, Cost,
Delivery Time, Safety, Morale)
7 + 2
5 Role of Technology in Operations Strategy: Automated production system with
Robotic systems. Use of IT and ITES enabling the effective strategy and resource
implementation. ERP/SAP for decision making.
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Operations Management by Terry Hill, Palgrave, 2nd Edition.
2. Operations Now by Byron Finch, TMGH, 3rd Edition.
3. Operations Management by Norman Gaither, Greg Frazier, Cengage
Learning, India Ed.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
313
2 Reference Books 1. Operations Management – An Integrated Approach by Samson and
Singh, Cambridge.
2. Operations Management for Competitive Advantage by Chase, Jacobs,
Aquilano and Agarwal, TMGH, 11th Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Strategic Operations Management by Brown, Lamming, Bessant and
Jones, Butterworth Heinemann, 2nd Edition.
4 Websites 1. http://www.enotes.com/operations-strategy-reference/operationsstrategy
5 Journals 1. Setting manufacturing strategy for a company's international
manufacturing network by Miltenburg, John. International Journal of
Production Research, Nov2009, Vol. 47 Issue 22
2. Breaking The Trade-Off Between Efficiency and Service by Frei, Frances
X., Harvard Business Review, Nov2006, Vol. 84 Issue 11
3. Agile MPC system linking manufacturing and market strategies by
Deif, Ahmed M.; ElMaraghy, Waguih H. Journal of Manufacturing
Systems. Apr2007, Vol. 26 Issue 2, p99-107.
4. Linking of manufacturing strategy, market requirements and
manufacturing attributes in technology choice: An expert system
approach by Cil, Ibrahim; Evren, Ramazan., Engineering Economist.
Spring98, Vol. 43 Issue 3, p183.
5. Differentiating manufacturing focus by Hallgren, Mattias; Olhager, Jan.
International Journal of Production Research. 9/15/2006, Vol. 44 Issue
18/19, p3863-3878.
6. One more time: How do you win orders?: A critical reappraisal of the
Hill manufacturing strategy framework by Spring, Martin; Boaden,
Ruth., International Journal of Operations & Production Management.
1997, Vol. 17 Issue 7/8, p757-779.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
314
Semester IV Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 404OPE Type Specialization –Core
Course Title Total Quality Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To give various perspectives on Quality and various contributors to Quality.
2 To provide an in-depth understanding of the various QC tools.
3 To introduce the frameworks of Global Quality Awards.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of
Sessions
1 Quality Concepts :Defined, Quality Cost perspective ,Cost of Quality
Quality Function, Spiral of Progress in quality, Little q and Big Q, Juran Trilogy,
Internal and external quality perspective. Goods and service quality. Cost of poor
quality, internal failure cost and external failure cost, appraisal cost, Prevention
cost, Analysis of quality cost, hidden quality cost, Discovering the optimum,
economic models of quality of conformance-Zone of improvement, zone of high
appraisal, zone of indifference.
Strategic Quality management: Companywide quality culture, Organizational
vision, Mission and quality policy, formulation of quality goals, competitive
benchmarking, Steps in implementing Total quality-Decide, Prepare, Start,
Expand and Integrate. Quality Circle
7 + 2
2 Quality Gurus: Demings 14 point philosophy, Juran, Crosby philosophy,
Ishikawa, Taguchi, Feigenbaum. Comparison of quality philosophy.
7 + 2
3 QC Tools: Problem Solving Methodology - Check list, Flow Chart, Tally charts
and Histograms, Graphs, Pareto Analysis ,Cause and Effect Diagram,
Brainstorming, Scatter diagram and regression analysis. Quality Function
Deployment - Introduction, Customer needs, Customer priorities and competitive
comparisons and planned improvements, Design features or requirements,
Central relationship matrix-What’s versus the How’s , relative weights of
importance. Design features interactions, target values, Technical comparison
,service information and special requirements-Difficulties associated with QFD,
Implementation of QFD
7 + 2
4 Statistical Quality Control: Necessity and Importance of SQC, Process capability,
Six Sigma quality, Process control, Process control for attributes, p charts and c
charts, Process control for variables, X bar R chart, acceptance sampling, OC
curves, Average Outgoing Quality Limit (AOQL),Sampling plans
7 + 2
5 Quality Management Awards and frameworks: Malcolm Baldrige National
quality award, Deming prize, ISO 9000-2000,CII, Ramkrishna Bajaj Awards, Tata
Business Excellence Model (TBEM)
7 + 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
315
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Operations Management: Theory and Practice by B Mahadevan,
Pearson, 2nd Edition
2. Production and Operations Mangement by RB Khanna, PHI
3. Managing Quality by Dale, Blackwell Publication.
4. Quality Management by Howard Gitlow, Alan Oppenheim, Rosa
Oppenheim and David Levine, TMGH, 3rd Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Operations Management: An Integrated Approach by Danny Samson
and Prakash Singh, Cambridge University Press.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Managing Quality Edited by Barrie G Dale, Ton van der Wiele and Jos
van Iwaarden, Blackwell Publishing, 5th Edition.
4 Websites 1. http://managementhelp.org/quality/total-quality-management.htm
2. www.isixsigma.com
3. www.asq.org
5 Journals 1. Journal of Operations Management
2. Total Quality Management & Business Excellence
3. Quality Assurance
4. International Journal of Reliability, Quality & Safety Engineering
5. Journal of Quality Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
316
Semester IV Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 405OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Quality Management Standards
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To introduce various management system standards.
2 To explain the implementation and role of MR for IMS.
3 To help the students understand the implementation of IMS through cases in services and
manufacturing .
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Over view of IMS – QMS, EMS, OHSAS, TS: Introduction to core tools and
TS 16949, Introduction to CMMI, Introduction to EFQM, Implementation
requirements for certification
5 + 1
2 QMS Standards: Key clauses - 4.1 Process & documentation, 5.0 Top
management , Organization and Role of MR, 6.0 Resource management, 7.0
Process control from Contract review to Calibration, 8 Monitoring
measurement and improvement
5 + 1
3 EMS Standards: Key clauses - 4.1 General requirement, 4.2 Policy, 4.3 Planning
– registers , objectives & programs, 4.4 Implementation and operation, 4.5
Checking
5 + 1
4 OHSAS 18001:2007 Standards: Key clauses - 4.1 General requirement, 4.2
Policy, 4.3 Planning – registers , objectives & programs, 4.4 Implementation
and operation, 4.5 Checking
5 + 1
5 Study of Apex manual & Procedural manual for QMS: Service and
Manufacturing set up, Study of Apex manual and procedural manual for
EOHS, Study of core tools implementation requirement, Study of ERP, Legal
register, Risk register and Impact registers and various programs & monitoring
programs and SOPs & their inter relation
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. ISO 9001:2008
2. ISO 19011: 2002
3. ISO 9004 :2002
4. ISO 14001 :2004
5. OHSAS 18001: 2007
6. TS 16949:2002
7. EFQM model
2 Reference Books 1. Operations Management: An Integrated Approach by Danny Samson
and Prakash Singh, Cambridge University Press.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Managing Quality Edited by Barrie G Dale, Ton van der Wiele and Jos
van Iwaarden, Blackwell Publishing, 5th Edition.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
317
4 Websites 1. http://www.ohsas-18001-occupational-health-and-safety.com/
2. http://www.iso14000-iso14001-environmental-management.com/
3. http://www.efqm.org/en/
5 Journals 1. The Integration of the Standards Systems of Quality Management,
Environmental Management and Occupational Health and Safety
Management by Matias, Joao Carlos De Oliveira; Coelho, Denis A.,
International Journal of Production Research, 10/15/2002, Vol. 40 Issue
15
2. Usefulness of the EFQM Excellence Model: Theoretical explanation of
some conceptual and methodological issues by Rusjan, Borut., Total
Quality Management & Business Excellence, May2005, Vol. 16 Issue 3
3. A Framework for TQM to Achieve Business Excellence by Hafeez, K.;
Malak, N.; Abdelmeguid, H., Total Quality Management & Business
Excellence, Nov2006, Vol. 17 Issue 9
4. Journal of Operations Management
5. Total Quality Management & Business Excellence
6. Quality Assurance
7. International Journal of Reliability, Quality & Safety Engineering
8. Journal of Quality Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
318
Semester IV Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 406OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title World Class Manufacturing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To bring out the relevance and basics of World Class Manufacturing.
2 To highlight the current state of Indian Manufacturing
3 To provide a road map for World Class Manufacturing
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 World Class Manufacturing and the Information Age: The emergence of the
Information Age, Competing in the Information Age, Business challenges of the
Information Age, Operating Environment of the Information Age, India’s
global Competitiveness and Manufacturing Excellence, World Class
Manufacturing and the Information Age Competition, Manufacturing
Challenges of the Information Age – Time based competition, Managing
knowledge, Problems in the Manufacturing Industry – Coordination, Need for
Control, Fragmented Information Infrastructure, Insufficient processability of
available information.
5 + 1
2 Gaining Competitive Advantage through World Class Manufacturing:
Manufacturing Excellence and Competitiveness, What is World Class
Manufacturing? Hall’s Framework of Value-added Engineering, Schonberger’s
framework of World Class Manufacturing, Gunn’s model of World Class
Manufacturing, Maskell’s model of World Class Manufacturing, America’s best
plants model of World Class Manufacturing, Malcolm Baldrige National
Quality Award, The Philosophy of World Class Manufacturing, The Evolution
of World Class Manufacturing, The first principles of World Class
Manufacturing, The Practices of World Class Manufacturing, Quality in World
Class Manufacturing.
5 + 1
3 Systems and Tools for World Class Manufacturing: The integration
imperative, Overview of systems and tools, Making sense of the manufacturing
alphabet soup, Information management tools, Material processing and
handling tools. Information management tools – Product and Process Design
Tools, Bar Code Systems, Kanban, SQC, Business Integration and Decision
Support Tools. Material processing and handling tools – Flexible
Manufacturing Systems, Rapid Prototyping, Lean production tools, Poka Yoke,
SMED. An assessment of Manufacturing systems and tools.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
319
4 World Class Manufacturing – The Indian Scenario: Competitiveness of
Indian Manufacturing, Manufacturing Performance and planned strategies of
Indian Manufacturing firms, Manufacturing readiness of Indian Firms,
Manufacturing Objectives and strategy, Usage of management tools and
technologies, Manufacturing Management Practices, The Manufacturing
Strategic Intent Framework, Strategic use of IT in Indian Manufacturing,
Classification by breadth of IT infrastructure and depth of manufacturing
applications, Classification by breadth and integration of ITinfrastructure,
Manufacturing Strategy – World class Status and IT Use: Is India Ready for
World Class Manufacturing?
5 + 1
5 Leading India towards World Class Manufacturing: Business Strategy and
Global Competitiveness, Generic Manufacturing Strategies for the Information
Age, Developing strategic thinking in manufacturing, Issues in Strategic
planning for World Class Manufacturing, Barriers to using IT strategically,
Strategic Planning Methodology for World Class Manufacturing,
Implementing the World Class Manufacturing Plan, Need for performance
measurement – The PO-P System, The TOPP System, The AMBITE System,
Quality Performance, Cycle Time, Delivery Performance and Customer Service,
Financial Performance Measures, The Balanced Score Card, Human Resource
Dimensions in World Class Manufacturing – Morale and Teamwork.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. World Class Manufacturing – A Strategic Perspective by B S Sahay, K B
C Saxena, Ashish Kumar, Macmillan Publishers India Ltd., 1st Ed.
2. World Class Manufacturing by K. Sridhara Bhat, Himalaya Publishing,
1st Ed.
2 Reference Books 1. Making Common Sense Common Practice – Models for Manufacturing
Excellence by Ron Moore, Elsevier Pub., 3rd Ed.
2. Competitive Manufacturing Management by John Nicholas, TMGH, 2nd
Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Japanese Manufacturing Techniques by Richard Schonberger, The
Free Press
2. Just in Time Manufacturing by M. G. Korgaonker, Macmillan
Publishers India Ltd., 1st Ed.
4 Websites 1. http://www.enotes.com/world-class-manufacturer-reference/worldclass-
manufacturer
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Operations & Production Management-
2. Journal of Manufacturing Systems
3. International Journal of Manufacturing Technology & Management
4. Journal of Operations Management
5. Manufacturing & Service Operations Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
320
Semester IV Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 407OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Business Process Reengineering
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To explain how organizational performance in terms of efficiency and effectiveness can be
improved through BPR.
2 To introduce BPR as a change management tool.
3 To explore and master the fundamental principles of BPR.
4 To provide a practical framework and management techniques needed for implementation of BPR.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to business processes: Definition of business process, Dimension
of business process, Common business processes in an organization, Definition
of business process redesign, Definitions of various management - related
terms, Overview of business process reengineering, Business processes
improvement.
Introduction to Business Process Reengineering (BPR): History of BPR, Basics
of BPR, Definition of BPR, Emergence of BPR, The need for reengineering,
Benefits of BPR, Role of leader & manager, Breakthrough reengineering model,
BPR guiding principles, Business process reengineering & performance
improvement, Key targets of BPR, Myths about BPR , What reengineering Isn’t
, Difference between BPR and TQM, BPR and Process Simplification, BPR and
Continuous Improvement.
6 + 1
2 BPR in Manufacturing Industry: Introduction, Enablers of BPR in
manufacturing – Agile Manufacturing, Lean Manufacturing, JIT, Collaborative
Manufacturing, Intelligent Manufacturing, Production Planning, Product
design & development.
4 + 1
3 BPR & Information Technology: Introduction, Relationship between BPR &
Information Technology, Role of Information Technology in reengineering,
Role of IT in BPR (with practical examples), Criticality of IT in business process,
BPR tools & techniques, Enablers of process reengineering, Tools to support
BPR, Future role of IT in reengineering.
4 + 1
4 BPR implementation methodology: Reasons of implementation of BPR,
Necessary attributes, BPR team characteristics, Key concepts of BPR, BPR
methodology, Different phases of BPR, BPR model, BPR methodology selection
guidelines, Common steps to be taken for BPR implementation, Different
business process reengineering methodologies, Comparison of various business
process reengineering methodologies, Consolidated BPR implementation
methodologies, Steps of process reengineering, Organizational redesign using
BPR, Impact of BPR on organizational performance, Performance measures of
BPR, Business process reengineering project management, Reengineering
recommendations, Threads of BPR in various phases
6 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
321
5 Success factors of BPR: Reengineering success factors, Critical success factors
of BPR, Reasons for BPR project failure & success, Reengineering drives cause
many changes
Managing barriers to business process reengineering success: Potential
project implementation success, Risks associated with business process
reengineering projects, Business process reengineering implementation
barriers, Areas generating barriers to business process reengineering, Root
cause to Information Technology barriers, Some root causes of internal
individual resistance, A framework for barrier management
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Business Process Reengineering by Radhakrishnan, Balasubramanian,
PHI, Eastern Economy Edition, 2008.
2. Business Process Reengineering by Jayaraman, Ganesh Natrajan and
Rangaramanujan, TMGH.
2 Reference Books 1. Business Process Reengineering and Change Management by Dey,
Biztantra.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Practical Business re-engineering by Obolensky, Kogan Page.
4 Websites 1. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2j2lcDWQk7A
5 Journals 1. Productivity and Performance Effects of Business Process
Reengineering: A Firm-Level Analysis, Altinkemer, Kemal; Ozcelik,
Yasin; Ozdemir, Zafer D. Journal of Management Information Systems,
Spring2011, Vol. 27 Issue 4
2. Business Process Reengineering in the Public Sector: The Case of the
Housing Development Board in Singapore, Thong, James Y. L.; Yap,
Chee-Sing; Seah, Kin-Lee. Journal of Management Information Systems,
Summer2000, Vol. 17 Issue 1
3. Business Process Reengineering Management Services, Spring 2010,
Vol. 54 Issue 1
4. A Wider View of Business Process Reengineering, Grant, Delvin.
Communications of the ACM, Feb2002, Vol. 45 Issue 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
322
Semester IV Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 408OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand how a business works and how information systems fit into business operations.
2 To understand the cross functional integration aspects of a business.
3 To understand better managerial decision making through real time data integration and sharing.
4 To understand the host of underlying technological tools of ERP.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Understanding Enterprise Resource Planning: Concept of Enterprise ,
Overview of Business Functions and Business Processes, Integrated
Management Information, Business Modeling, Evolution of ERP; ERP and
related technologies; Myths about ERP; Importance of ERP; Value creation in
organizations through ERP; Benefits of ERP; Risk of ERP - People Issues,
Process Risks, Technological Risks, Implementation Issues, Operation &
Maintenance Issues; Managing risk in ERP projects.
5 + 1
2 ERP & Related Technologies: Business Process Reengineering, Data
Warehousing, Data Mining, OLAP, PLM, SCM, CRM, GIS, ERP Functional
Modules , Integration of ERP, Supply Chain, CRM.
5 + 1
3 ERP Implementation: Technological, Operational, Business Reasons for ERP
implementation , ERP implementation Life Cycle – Objectives - Phases -
Reasons for failure; Implementation challenges; ERP transition strategies - Big
Bang Strategy, Phased Implementation, Parallel Implementation, Process Line
Transition Strategy, Hybrid Transition Strategy, Strategy Choice; Success and
failure factors of an ERP implementation; ERP implementation costs;
Organization and working of ERP implementation team.
5 + 1
4 ERP Operations and Future Trends: Operation and maintenance of the ERP
system; Maximizing the ERP system; ERP and e-business; Integration of ERP,
internet and www; Future of ERP.
5 + 1
5 ERP Systems Processes and Management Control: Sales and Marketing;
Accounting and Finance; Production and Material Management; Human
Resource Management, Overview of an ERP product.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Enterprise Resource Planning by Leon, Alexis , TMH Publication, 2nd
Edition
2. Enterprise Resource Planning by Koul, Saroj, Galgotia Publishing, 2001.
3. ERP Concepts and Practice by Garg, V. K. and Venket Krishna N. K., PHI
Publication, 1997.
4. ERP In Practice by Vaman Jagan, TMGH
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
323
2 Reference Books 1. Enterprise Resource Planning by Sumner, Mary, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Enterprise Resource Planning by Jaiswal and Vanapalli, Macmillan
Books.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. ERP Demystified by Leon, Alexis, TMH Publication, 2nd Edition, 2004.
4 Websites 1. https://www.sap.com
5 Journals 1. Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Systems and the Manufacturing-
Marketing Interface: An Information-processing Theory View by Gattiker,
T. F., International Journal of Production Research, 7/1/2007, Vol. 45
Issue 13
2. Critical Elements for a Successful Enterprise Resource Planning
Implementation in Small-and Medium-sized Enterprises by Loh, T. C.;
Koh, S. C. L., International Journal of Production Research, 9/1/2004, Vol.
42 Issue 17
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
324
Semester IV Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 409OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Financial Perspectives in Operations Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To highlight the importance of cost management as a key to profitability and the key to successful
Operations Management
2 To underline the role of cost management from a strategic perspective.
3 To teach the identification of key cost drivers and defined process of managing operational costs.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Cost Management: Cost management tools-life cycle costing, target costing,
kaizen costing, JIT & theory of constraints, BPR and bench marking. Working
Capital Management –Concept, Components, Scope, Practical applicability.
4 + 1
2 Activity Based Costing: Concept and basic knowledge, applicability,
Limitations, Simple Numericals. Cost Concepts, behavior, type, allocation,
apportionment and absorption along with nature, applicability and limitations
of Job & Process Costing
4 + 1
3 Budgeting: Budgeting – nature, administration and effectiveness; budgeting
cycle; activity-based budgeting; kaizen approach; ZBB; performance budgeting;
human aspects of budgeting.
5 + 1
4 Capital Budgeting : The Capital Budgeting Concept & Process - An Overview,
Generating Investment Project Proposals, Estimating Project, After Tax
Incremental Operating Cash Flows, Capital Budgeting Techniques, Project
Evaluation and Selection - Alternative Methods, Potential Difficulties ,Project
Monitoring – Progress Reviews and Post - Completion Audits, Problem of
Project Risk, Total Project Risk, Capital Rationing , Decision Tree.
7 + 1
5 Project Cost Estimate and Risk Analysis: Cost of project, Components of
capital cost of a project, Project Risk Analysis, Project Organization.
Project Evaluation and Audit: Sources of financing, Role of Financial
Institutions in project financing, Data required for calculation of NPV, PI, IRR,
BCR, NBCR, Project cost overruns and cost control, Phases of post audit, Type
of post audit, Project closure.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Financial Management by I.M. Pandey, Vikas Publications, 10th Edition
2. Financial Management by M.Y.Khan & P.K.Jain, TMGH., 5th Edition
3. Project Management by K. Nagarajan, New Age Publications, 2nd Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Financial Management by Rajiv Shrivastava & Anil Mishra, Oxford
Publication,2nd Edition
2. Corporate Financial Management by Arnold Glen, Pearson Publication
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The Chartered Accountant
2. Management Accountant
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
325
4 Websites 1. www.icai.org
2. www.icwai.org
3. www.moneycontrol.com
5 Journals 1. Production & Inventory Management
2. Journal of Operations Management
3. International Journal of Operation and Quantitative Management
4. Indian Journal of Advanced Operations Management
5. International Journal of Operations & Production Management
6. Manufacturing & Service Operations Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
326
Semester IV Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 410OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Service Operations Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide students with the concepts and tools necessary to effectively manage a service
operation.
2 To discuss best practices of World-Class Service.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Services: Characteristics of Services, Importance of Service Sector,
Classification framework, Service Delivery System – Process Flow Diagrams,
Process Simulation,
4 + 1
2 Site Selection for Services: Types of Service Firms – Demand Sensitive
Services, Delivered Services, Quasi-manufacturing Services, Site Selection for
Demand Sensitive Services – Factor Rating, Regression, GIS, Gravity Model of
Demand, Site Selection for Delivered Services – Expected Results, Mathematical
Solution Methods for delivered services, Site Selection for Quasi-
Manufacturing Services – Mixed Linear / Integer Programming for Location
Selection
5 + 1
3 Yield Management: Capacity Strategies, Yield Management, Overbooking,
Allocating Capacity – Static Methods, Nested Static Methods, Dynamic
Methods. Pricing, Implementation issues – Alienating Customers, Customer
Class Cheating, Employee Empowerment, Cost and Implementation Time.
5 + 1
4 Inventory Management in Services: Services versus Manufacturing Inventory,
Set Up and Ordering Costs, Number of Products, Limited Shelf Space, Lost
Sales versus Back Orders, Product Substitution, Demand Variance, Information
Accuracy, The Newsvendor Model, Multiple Products and Shelf Space
Limitations, Inventory Inaccuracy – Revenue Sharing, Markdown Money,
Phantom Stockouts, Inventory Inaccuracy, Shrinkage.
6 + 1
5 Offshoring and Outsourcing: Outsourcing – Contract risk, Outsource Firm
Risk and Pricing Risk, Competitive Advantage and Information Privacy Risk,
Firm Specific Risks, Offshoring, Quantifying Offshoring, Offshoring and
Competitive Capabilities – Cost, Non-cost Issues.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Successful Service Operations Management by Metters, King-Metters,
Pulliman and Walton, Thomson India Edition, 2nd Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Service Operations Management - Improving Service delivery by
Robert Johnston Graham Clark, Prentice Hall
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Service Operation –Itil, Version 3 ,David Cannon, David Wheeldon
4 Websites 1. http://www.referenceforbusiness.com/management/Sc-Str/Service-
Operations.html
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
327
5 Journals 1. A perspective on service delivery by McManus, John; Howitt, Michael.
Management Services, Winter2009, Vol. 53 Issue 4
2. Journal of Software Project Management and & Quality Assurance
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
328
Semester IV Specialization
Course Code 411OPE Type Specialization – Elective
Course Title Modeling Techniques in Operations Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 5
Course Objectives:
1 To learn how to model typical Operations Domain Problems
2 To understand use of quantitative tools in solving typical Operations Domain Problems
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Business Modeling: Meaning & process of modeling, Certainty
& uncertainty in models, Importance of understanding data before modeling,
Application of modeling to find Break-even point
2
2 Linear Programming: Formulation of LPP, Simplex method, Duality,
Sensitivity Analysis, Goal Programming, Problems on Machine scheduling,
Formulating & solving Product mix problem, Formulating & solving Labour
planning problem.
Integer Linear Programming: Concept, Job-sequencing model, Branch &
Bound method, Problems based on Branch & Bound method.
8+2
3 Decision trees: Concept of decision making & decision trees; Application of
decision trees in making manufacturing decisions like expansion of present
plant, build new plant or sub-contract.
5+1
4 Replacement Models: Introduction; Failure of items; Application of
Replacement models to Items that deteriorate, items with increasing running
cost, items that fail completely, Group replacement policy, Recruitment and
promotional problems, Equipment renewal problems.
6+1
5 Sequencing problems: Introduction, Problems involving n jobs- 2 machines, n
jobs- 3 machines & n jobs-m machines; Comparison of priority sequencing
rules.
4+1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Operations Research- by Nita Shah, Ravi Gor, Hardik Soni- Prentice
Hall India
2 Reference Books 1. Managerial Decision Modeling with Spreadsheets by Nagraj
Balakrishnan, Barry Render, Ralph M. Stair Jr.- Pearson
2. Introduction to Operations Research-by Billey E. Gilett- Tata Mc Graw
Hill
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Operations Research- Hamdy A. Taha- Pearson Publication
4 Websites 1. www.orsi.in
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Operations and Quantitative Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
329
Semester III Specialization Operations Management
Course Code 413OPE Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Challenges and Opportunities in Operations Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To make the student understand the ways of managing risk in Operations Management
2 To introduce various Environmental , Ethical and Technological issues in Operations Management
3 To introduce Global Reporting Initiatives, SA 8001, CSR, CDM, CT concept
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Managing Risk in Operations: Concepts and framework of Risk Management,
COSO enterprise risk management, Risk standard AS/NZ 4360, M-o-R:
Management of Risk Framework, Risk in the key decision areas of operations:
Inventory management, Information technology, Process Technology,
Operating planning and capacity management, Maintenance and servicing,
Risk in service operations, Occupational Health and Safety, Environmental risk,
Operations and corporate risk
5 + 1
2 Overview of Technological, Ethical and Environmental issues: Global
challenges , Defining Technological options for the achieving Goals to combat
the risks based on SWOT, Concept of Business ethics & CSR , Environmental –
Introduction to GHG trading , Defining control against budgeting for identified
impacts & risks for Quality, environment, safety, & global trading
5 + 1
3 Global Reporting: Business advantage with global reporting , Guidelines G 3
for sustainability, Study of any published report like Siemens, Social
accountability aspect in Business across the borders , Case study in Indian
industry for CSR
Kyoto Protocol: Basic Features, Why Kyoto Protocol Failed , Limitations and
aspect of Kyoto Protocol, Introduction to Clean Technology, Clean
development mechanism, Government & statutory authorities and their role in
promoting Sustainability
5 + 1
4 Sustainability in Operations: What is sustainability? Development of the
concept of sustainability, Accepted definitions, What make sustainable
practices successful, What is a sustainable practice, Quality and Excellence,
Strategic connection , Business Case for sustainability, Building sustainability –
the role of operations function, New capabilities of operations management to
support sustainability,
5 + 1
5 Social Accountability: SA 8001, Considerations in identifying & mitigating
child labour, Considerations in investigating un fair wages complaint,
Considerations in investigating Discrimination related complaints ,
Consideration for recording and monitoring home workers and/ time logging
for piece rate.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
330
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Operations Management: An Integrated Approach by Danny Samson and
Prakash Singh, Cambridge University Press.
2. Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility: Why Giants Fall by Ronald R. Sims
2 Reference
Books
1. The Kyoto Protocol: International Climate Policy for the 21st Century by
Sebastian Oberthür and Hermann E. Ott
2. The Clean Tech Revolution: Discover the Top Trends, Technologies, and
Companies to Watch by Ron Pernick and Clint Wilder
3 Supplement
ary Reading
Material
1. Standard SA 8001:2002 & Interpretation Guidelines SA 8002
2. Power to the People: How the Coming Energy Revolution Will Transform an
Industry, Change Our Lives, and Maybe Even Save the Planet by Vijay V.
Vaitheeswaran
4 Websites 1. https://www.globalreporting.org/resourcelibrary/G3-Guidelines-Incl-
Technical-Protocol.pdf
2. http://www.siemens.com/sustainability/report/09/en/indices/global_repor
ting_initiative.htm
5 Journals 1. Should Sustainability Reporting Be Integrated? By Verschoor, Curtis C.,
Strategic Finance, Dec2011, Vol. 93 Issue 6
2. Go Green, Save Green by Mc Collum, T., Internal Auditor, Aug2009, Vol. 66
Issue 4
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
331
Semester IV Specialization Operations
Course Code 414OPE Type Elective
Course Title Lean Manufacturing
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 5
Course Objectives:
1 To provide the concepts of Lean Manufacturing.
2 To give a hands on – How To – series of steps in Lean Manufacturing Implementation.
3 To highlight the role of company culture in transformation to Lean.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 History and Modern Applications of Lean Manufacturing: Popularity of MRP
systems and their impact on organizations, Pre-computer Inventory
Management tools, Rethinking the MRP Model, The search for Holy Grail of
Manufacturing, Lean Manufacturing Model, Kanban Methodology, Sequencing
production one piece at a time on the Lean Line, The benefits of embracing lean
methodologies for manufacturing, Lean Manufacturing Challenges to the MRP
paradigm, The continuous evolution to Lean Manufacturing, The Internet and
E-commerce technologies.
5 + 1
2 Understanding Products, Processes and Demand: Determining the scope of
initial Lean Manufacturing Implementation Area, Selecting parent parts for the
lean line, Establishing the capacity to meet the demand volume of lean
implementation area, Sources for determining demand, Documenting the
Process flow and establishing mixed product families, Factors impacting
throughput volume, Identifying process Demand Levels and Establishing Takt,
Numerators and Denominators of Takt time, Documenting process Work
elements and quality criteria, Nonvalue added activity and quality
considerations, summing the total time of the process.
5 + 1
3 Line Layout and Work Station Identification with Process Linking and
Balancing: The consequences of imbalance, The Lean approach to Achieving
Balance, Calculating resource requirements, Defining Resources, The physical
layout of resources, Assigning tasks for each workstation, the in-process
Kanban Signalling methodology, Discipline for maintaining workstation
balance, Designing 5S into the line design.
5 + 1
4 Kanban Strategies: The in-process Kanban, The Single Card Kanban System,
The Multiple Card Kanban System, Managing inventory with the Kanban
System: The advantages & disadvantages of Kanban System, Kanban manager
job responsibilities.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
332
5 Lean Implementation Mile Stones: Software requirements for Lean
manufacturing methodologies, Commitment to change, Transformation
process to Lean manufacturing, Initialization and Project Start-up,
Understanding Products, Processes and Materials, Final Check, Line Start-up,
Internalize. Organizational impact of Lean Manufacturing,
Managing the Lean Manufacturing Line: Managing Line Output to Match
Customer Demand, Establishing Customer Response policy, Suboptimizing the
Lean line to meet daily rate of demand, flexible operators, Rewarding for
Flexibility, Rewarding for Linear Performance, Resistance to change.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Lean Manufacturing Implementation by Dennis P Hobbs, Cengage
Learning Co-published with APICS.
2. Simplified Lean Manufacture – Elements, Rules & Implementation by N
Gopalkrishnan, PHI.
2 Reference Books 1. Lean Manufacturing That Works by Bill Carreira, PHI, Eastern
Economy Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Global Management Solutions Demystified by Dinesh Sheth and
Subhash Rastogi, Thomson Learning Asia
2. Lean Management – Concepts and Industry Perspectives by Mrudulla,
ICFAI Books.
4 Websites 1. http://www.lean.org/
5 Journals 1. Evaluation of Value Stream Mapping in manufacturing system redesign
by Serrano, Ibon; Ochoa, Carlos; Castro, Rodolfo De., International
Journal of Production Research, Aug2008, Vol. 46 Issue 16
2. ERP Enabled Lean Six Sigma: A Holistic Approach for Competitive
Manufacturing by Nauhria, Yugal; Wadhwa, S.; Pandey, Sunil., Global
Journal of Flexible Systems Management, Jul-Sep2009, Vol. 10 Issue 3
3. Effect of buffer capacity and sequencing rules on single-card kanban
system performance by Berkley, B.J., International Journal of
Production Research, Dec1993, Vol. 31 Issue 12
4. Empowering Kanban through TPS - principles - An empirical analysis
of the Toyota Production System by Thun, Jorn-Henrik; Druke, Martin;
Grubner, Andre., International Journal of Production Research,
Dec2010, Vol. 48 Issue 23
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
333
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER IV
HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
334
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 403HR Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Industrial Relations
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 Give students insight into the IR scenario in India
2 Make students understand important laws governing IR
3 Create understanding about role of Govt., society and trade union in IR
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Understanding IR: Concept, Philosophy of IR, Evolution of IR, Indian
perspective, Parties to IR, Employers’ organizations, Trade unions, Role of
Government, Role of society
Approaches to IR: The Dunlop’s Approach , The Social Action Approach, The
Human Relations Approach, The Gandhian Approach, Theoretical foundation
and legal framework of IR in India
6 + 2
2 The Industrial Disputes Act 1947: Sections # 2to 19 Provisions under Chapter
V,VA,VC and chapter VI,VII.
6 + 2
3 Trade Union Act 1926 : Section # 2,Chapter II,III and chapter V, The
Maharashtra Recognition of Trade Unions and prevention of unfair labour
practices Act 71, Section# 3 and the provisions under chapter II, III, IV, V, VI,
VII, VIII, X
8 + 2
4 Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946: Section # 2,3,5,6,7,9,10,11,
12,13,14
The Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970 Section# 2 and all
provisions under Chapter III,IV,V,VI,and VII
6 + 2
5 IR Initiative: Worker’s Participation in Management, Concept, evolution,
implementation, Challenges. Collective Bargaining, Concept, evolution and
implementation. Study of best practices in IR : The students and faculty to
identify organizations in the area and study their IR practices.
9 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Employee Relations Management by P.N. Singh, Neeraj Kumar,
Pearson Publication
2 Reference Books 1. Industrial Relations, Trade Unions & Labour Legislation by
P.R.N.Sinha, Indu Bala Sinha, Pearson Publication
2. IR- Emerging Paradigms by B.D.Singh, Excel Books
3. IR in India Shifting Paradigms by Ratna Sen, Macmillan India
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Industrial Relations by Arun Monappa Tata McGrow Hill Edition
2. Personnel Management and Industrial Relations by R.S.Davar Vikas
Publishing
3. Industrial Relations by A.M.Sarma Himalaya Publishing House
4. APS Labour Digest
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
335
4 Websites 1. www.india-laws.com
2. www.Citehr.com
3. www.ilo.org
4. www.hrmguide.net
5. www.nipm.in 5 Journals 1. Personnel Today
2. Industrial Journal of Industrial Relations
3. Indian Journal of Industrial Relations
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
336
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 404HR Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Strategic Human Resource Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To make students understand HR implications of organizational strategies
2 Understand the various terms used to define strategy & its process
3 Understand HR strategies in Indian & global perspective
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Strategic Human Resource Management: Introduction, HRM Defined/SHRM
Defined, Strategic HRM- Definition , Meaning of SHRM, Aims, approaches,
challenges
3 +1
2 HR Strategies:
 Definition, Types of HR strategies, criteria for an effective HR strategy
 Formulation of HR Strategies, conducting a strategic review,
implementing HR strategies
 Impact on Organizational Performance, strategic role of top
management, strategic role of line management
7 + 2
3 Talent Management
 Career Planning and Succession Planning: Evolution of careers, career
planning perspectives organization-centered career planning,
Individual-centered career planning
 Succession Planning: Definition, Elements of Succession planning,
Relation between career planning and succession planning, challenges
of succession planning
 Competency and Potential Development: What are competencies, How
do competencies differ from skills and knowledge, Integrated HR
practices through competency development, benefits from
competency-based on HR practices, Desired outcomes for
organizations, competency based HR practices : outcomes for
employees, developing a skill matrix
 Retention strategies
7 + 2
4 Strategies for Improving organizational effectiveness
 Strategies for improving organizational effectiveness
 Strategies of organizational transformations-Cross border Mergers &
Acquisitions
 Strategies for culture management, quality in strategies
 Strategies for learning organization
 Employee engagement strategy
10 + 3
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
337
5 Global Dimensions
 HR strategy in International Context, converting global presence into
global competitive advantage
 Developing cross cultural sensitivity
 Training & development of International staff
 Compensation issues
Performance management issues
8 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Strategic Human Resource Management by Jeffrey Mello, Thomson
South Western
2 Reference Books 1. International HRM by Peter Dowling, Denice Welch, Thomson
Learning, 4th Edition.
2. HRM in Global Scenario by S.K. Bhatia, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt.
Ltd, 2010
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Creating Wealth through Strategic HR & Entrepreneurship
Gopalkrishnan by Upinder Dhar, Excel Books
4 Websites 1. www.shrmindia.org
2. www.shrm.org
3. www.peoplematters.com
5 Journals 1. Journal of Strategic Human Resource Management
2. International Journal of Human Resource Management
3. Human Resource Management Journal
4. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
338
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 405HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Organizational Design & Development
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To develop an understanding of the nature, functioning and design of organization
2 Be able to understand the theory and practice relating to the processes of organization
development and change
3 Develop insight and competence in diagnostic and intervention processes and skills for initiating
and facilitating organizational processes and change in organizations
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Organizations and Organizational Theory: Definition, Prospective
Dimensions, Strategy, Organization design & effectiveness
3 + 1
2 Organizational Purpose & Structural Design: Basic challenges of
organizational Design - Fundamentals of Organizational structure, Internal
Design Elements. Organization size & life cycle
7 + 1
3 Organizational Culture & Ethics : Innovation & change, Decision making
processes & organizational learning
5 + 1
4 Managing Innovation & Change: Process of OD, Individual and Interpersonal
Interventions, Team / Group Interventions, Intergroup Interventions, Techno
structural Interventions, Strategic Change
7 + 1
5 Organizational Transformation - Desk Research: Students need to study
organizational culture & design of 2 organizations each & present a report on
the same.
3 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Organizational Development & Transformation by French, Bell,
Zawacki- TMGH
2. Organization theory & Design by Richard L. Daft, Thomson Press.
2 Reference Books 1. Organization Development & Change by Cummings & Worely
Cengage Learning’s India Ltd, 8th Edition.
2. Managing Organizational Change by Nilkant & Ramnarayan, Response
Books
3. Organization Change & Development by Kavita Singh, Excel Books
3. The Oxford Handbook of Organizational Theory by Tsoukas &
Knudsen, Oxford University Press
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Creating Performing Organization by Pattanayak & Gupta, Response
Books
2. Organizational Effectiveness & Change Management by Kondalkar,
PHI learning
3. Organizational Theory Text & Cases by Garetn Jones, Pearson
Publishing
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
339
4 Websites 1. www.codhyd.org/
2. www.humancapitalonline.com
3. www.shrmindia.org
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
340
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 406HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Global HR
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To give exposure to the students to international HR
2 To make students understand various initiatives in global HR
3 To make students understand various issues in global HR
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction: Defining international HR, difference between domestic and
international HR, Variables determining difference between domestic and
international HR, The path to global status, Talent management, International
business ethics and HRM
4 + 1
2 Managing and supporting international assignments: Linking international
assignments with organizational strategy, Staffing for international
assignments, Issues in staff selection, selection criterion, The role of expatriate,
the role of non expatriate, dual career couples, are female expatriate different?
role of the corporate HR function.
6 + 1
3 International HR: Importance of pre departure training, programs, the
effectiveness of pre departure training, developing staff through international
assignments. Objectives of international compensation, key components of
international compensation program, approaches to international
compensation. Performance management in multinational, PM of international
employees, Appraisal of international employees.
6 + 1
4 Key issues in international HR : Trade unions and international HR , the
response of trade unions to multi nationals, the issue of social dumping, the
impact of digital economy
4 + 1
5 Virtual Organization study: Field Study/ Desk Research
Students to be divided in a group of 5 each. Each group to identify two
organizations having presence in other country/countries and study their HR
practices in the light of the above topics. This may be desk research or field
visit. The groups will give hard copy of the work and also presentation.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. International Human Resource Management by Peter j Dowling,
Device E Welch, 4th Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. International Human Resource Management by Hilary Harris, Chris
Brewster and Paul Sparrow, VMP Publishers and Distributors
2. International Human Resource Management by K Aswathappa and
Sadhna Dash , TMGH
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. International HRM- A cross cultural approach, Terence Jackson, SAGE
publication.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
341
4 Websites 1. http://www.cipd.co.uk/global/
2. www.shrm.org
3. www.hrmguide.net
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
342
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 407HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Employee Reward Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To appraise students with reward management system practiced in organizations
2 To make students understand the process of setting reward management system
3 To give students exposure to the reward management practices followed various organizations
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Reward Management: Definition, Aims of reward management, achieving the
aims, reward system, elements of reward system, factors affecting reward
system, policy and practice, impact of environment, internal & external
4 + 1
2 Grade and pay structures: Types of grades and pay structures, Developing
grade and pay structures, individual pay, team pay, paying for organizational
performance
6 + 1
3 Reward management for special groups: Rewarding directors and senior
executives, international reward, rewarding sales and customer service staff,
rewarding knowledge workers, shop floor pay
4 + 1
4 Union role in Reward Management: Impact of Trade Union on reward
determination, unions and alternative reward system, Govt. and legal issues in
reward system, reward system in India, National wage policy
5 + 1
5 Desk Research/Field Work: Faculty to invite minimum 4 experts from
manufacturing/service/NGO/Govt. Organizations to expose the students to
reward management system practiced by those organizations
6 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Dynamics of Personnel Management by Prof M N Rudrabasavraj
Himalaya publishing
2 Reference Books 1. A Handbook of Employee Reward Management and Practice by
Michel Armstrong
2. Personnel and Human Resource Management by George T Milkovish
and John w Boudream, Published by All India Traveller Bookseller
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Personnel Management Text and Cases by C B Mamoria and S V
Gankar, Himalaya publishing
4 Websites 1. www.cipd.co.uk
2. www.payscale.com
3. www.livesalary.com.au/
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
343
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 408HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Change Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To make students understand meaning of change and need for organizational Change.
2 To appraise students with the change management process
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction: Definition of change, how people experience change?, Seven
phases of change, shock and surprise, denial and refusal, rational
Understanding, emotional acceptance, exercising and learning, Rationalization,
integration.
5 + 1
2 Organizational Change: Definition, Change: a managerial necessity, Areas of
change, management of environment and technology, change and the manager,
managing change from gender perspective.
5 + 1
3 Model of Change Management: The organizational development model,
people management, Organizational politics and change, the learning
organization.
5 + 1
4 Leading Change: Leaders, heroes and Chief Executive officers. Student to
study minimum two case studies
5 + 1
5 Executing Change: Challenges of execution, Why does change Succeed / Fail?
Minimum two case studies one each of successful execution and one of failure
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Change Management by Andrew Pettigrew and Richard Whipp
Infinity Books
2 Reference Books 1. Change and Knowledge Management by B Janakiram, P V
Ravendra,Shubha Murlidhar Published by biztantra
2. Change Management by Robert a Paton and James McCalman , Sage
Publication, 3rd Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Change Management by V Nilkant, S Ramnarayan , Sage publication
2. Change: How to adapt and transform the business : Editors N Anand
and Nigel Nicholson Published by Biztantra.
4 Websites 1. www.changedynamix.com
2. http://www.oursouthwest.com/SusBus/mggchange.html
5 Journals 1. Journal of Organizational Change Management
2. International Journal of Human Resource Management
3. Human Resource Management Journal
4. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
344
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 409HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Conflict & Negotiation Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To develop an understanding of the nature and strategies of negotiation.
2 To understand conflict and strategies to resolve the conflict.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Fundamentals of Negotiation: Nature of negotiation, Dimensions of
Negotiation, Structure , norms & values, Strategy & planning
5 + 1
2 Negotiation Processes: Perception & Preparation, Communication & Influence,
Ethics in negotiation, Agreement, Role Play (activity)
6 +1
3 Conflict Management: Definition, Models of conflict (Process & Structural),
Sources of conflict, Relationship between conflict & performance in team,
Advantages & Disadvantages of Conflict
4 + 1
4 Managing Conflict: Individual difference, Personalities & abilities,
Interpersonal conflict, Group conflict, Organizational conflict, Dealing with
difficult subordinates & boss, Technique to resolve team conflict, Strategies to
resolve organizational conflict, Role Play (activity)
7 + 1
5 Desk research: Students to study 4 case studies related to negotiation , third
party conflict resolution(ADR) & prepare presentation on the same
3 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Negotiation by Lewicki, Saunders, Barry, TMGH
2. Corporate Conflict Management - concepts & skills by Eirene Rout,
Nelson Omika, PHI.
3. Negotiation- Communication for diverse settings- Michael Spangle,
Sage Publication.
2 Reference Books 1. Negotiation, Harvard Business Essentials, Harvard Business School
Press
2. How to negotiate effectively, David Oliver, The Sunday Times.
3. Conflict Resolution Techniques by Subbulakshmi, ICFAI University
press
4. Conflict Management, Barbara Corvette, Pearson Education
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. How to be a problem solver, M Stevens, The Industrial society, Kogan
Page India.
2. A Handbook of Human Relations, M.H.shookla, Mcmillan India Ltd.
4 Websites 1. http://www.religioustolerance.org/int_rel24.htm
2. http://changingminds.org/links/links_negotiation.htm
3. http://www.negotiatingedge.com/links.shtml
4. http://www.mindtools.com/pages/article/newLDR_81.htm
5. http://www.helpguide.org/mental/eq8_conflict_resolution.htm
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
345
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
346
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 410HR Type Specialization - Core
Course Title LAB in CSR
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To help students understand & design CSR initiatives
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction of CSR: Aims & Objectives, Importance of CSR 10
2 CSR initiatives: Adopted by organization in Indian Context as well as Global
context
10
3 Desk Research/ Field Study: Faculty to divide students in a group of 6 each.
Groups will visit various industries in nearby area, understand various CSR
activities initiated by them & present as well as submit the report on same.
10
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. CSR Strategies: Corporate Social Responsibility for a Competitive Edge
in Emerging Markets by Sri Urip, John Wiley & Sons, 2010
2 Reference Books 1. Corporate Social Responsibility And International Development: Is
Business the Solution? By Michael Hopkins, Earthscan, 2007
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Corporate Social Responsibility: Doing the Most Good for Your
Company and Your Cause by Philip Kotler, Wiley
4 Websites 1. Making Sense of Corporate Social Responsibility. Sathish, Ramya.
"Corporate Social Responsibility in India - Putting Social-Economic
Development on a Fast Track"
2. Corporate Social and Environmental Responsibility in India - Assessing
the UN Global Compac's Role by Chahoud, Dr. Tatjana; Johannes
Emmerling, Dorothea Kolb, Iris Kubina, Gordon Repinski, Catarina
Schläger, 2007.
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
347
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 411HR Type Specialization - Core
Course Title LAB in Industrial Relations
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To expose students to drafting of various notice/ memos/ show cause etc.
2 To expose students to the working of Labour courts
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Study & Preparation of notice of strike & lockout (2 minimum each). 5 + 1
2 Study & drafting show cause notice ( minimum 2) 5 + 1
3 Handling & drafting misconduct procedure 5 + 1
4 Inviting Trade Union leader to understand issues & functioning of Trade
unions
5 + 1
5 Visit to Labour court & Industrial Tribunal 5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Employee Relations Management by P.N. Singh, Neeraj Kumar,
Pearson Publication
2 Reference Books 1. Industrial Relations, Trade Unions & Labour Legislation by P.R.N.
Sinha, Indu Bala Sinha, Pearson Publication
2. IR- Emerging Paradigms by B.D.Singh, Excel Books
3. IR in India Shifting Paradigms by Ratna Sen, Macmillan India
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Industrial Relations by Arun Monappa, TMGH
2. Personnel Management and Industrial Relations by R.S.Davar, Vikas
Publishing
3. Industrial Relations by A.M.Sarma, Himalaya Publishing House
4. APS Labour Digest
4 Websites 1. www.india-laws.com
2. www.ilo.org
3. www.hrmguide.net
4. www.nipm.in 5 Journals 1. Personnel Today
2. Industrial Journal of Industrial Relations
3. Indian Journal of Industrial Relations
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
348
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 412HR Type Specialization - Core
Course Title LAB in Legal compliance
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To equip students with various compliances the HR head has to give under different Acts
2 To learn drafting skills of these compliances
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 The students are expected to study and draft the following compliances
1) Monthly return under The Factories Act
2) Annual return under the Factories Act
3) MPCB Act compliance and return
4) Payment of wages return
5) Minimum Wages return
6) Accident details form no 16 and 14
7) Factory License renewal
8) PF payment and return
9) Payment of Bonus return
10)ESIC Payment and return
25
2 Presentation on the learning by students 05
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Bare Acts
2. Labour Law by S.P.Jain
3. Labour Law by Malik
2 Reference Books 1. Introduction to Labour & Industrial Laws by Avatar Singh, LexisNexis
2. Labour &Industrial Laws by S.N.Mishra, Central law publication
3. Labour Laws by S.D. Geet, Nirali Prakashan
4. Elements of Mercantile Law by N.D.Kapoor, Sultan Chand
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
2. APS Labor Digest
4 Websites 1. www.india-laws.com
2. www.lawinfo.com
3. www.lawsinindia.com
4. www.lawforyou.com
5. http://www.vakilno1com
5 Journals 1. Personnel Today
2. International Labour Review
3. Industrial Journal of Industrial Relations
4. Indian Journal of Industrial Relations
Semester IV Specialization HRM
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
349
Course Code 413HR Type Specialization - Core
Course Title LAB in Mentoring & Coaching
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To apprise students with role of Mentor, Coach & Counselor
2 To demonstrate elements of Mentoring, Coaching & Counseling vis-à-vis industry
3 To get clarity on how to consciously influence themselves and others so as to create productive
behaviors that lead to optimal personal impact.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 The Manager as a Coach and Mentor: What is coaching & Mentoring? Why &
how it is so important? Making the transition from Manager to Coach/ Mentor
4 + 1
2 Putting Coaching &Mentoring to Work: Dos and don’ts of Coaching &
Mentoring, Putting it to work vis-à-vis Organizational Context, Selecting &
Allotting Coaches and Mentors, Records, Feedback & Follow-up
4 + 1
3 What is Counseling? What is Counseling? Why & how it is so important,
attending to? Performance Counseling, Personal and Family Wellbeing, Worklife
balance to health problems
5 + 1
4 Dos and Don’ts of Counseling : Understanding Psychometrics, Helping the
individual to understand and help himself , Understand the situations and look
at them with a new perspective and positive outlook, Helping in better decision
making, Alternate solutions to problems, Coping with the situation and the
stress.
5 + 1
5 Field Study/ Desk Research: Student along with faculty are expected to study
Mentoring, Coaching & Counseling practiced by the organizations in the area
& prepare a report.
7 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Coaching & Mentoring by Jane Renton, Profile Books Ltd.
2 Reference Books 1. Making Mentoring Happen by Kathy Lace, Business & Professional
Publishing Pvt. Ltd.
2. Coaching and Mentoring, Harvard Business School Press
3. Coaching, Counseling & Mentoring by Florence M. Stone, AMACOM,
1601 Broadway, New York.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Improve Your Coaching & Training Skills by Patrick Forsyth, Kogan
Page India Pvt. Ltd.
4 Websites 1. www.coachingnetwork.org.uk
2. http://www.tobincls.com/mentoring.htm
3. http://www.coachingandmentoring.com/Articles/mentoring.html
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
Semester IV Specialization HRM
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
350
Course Code 414HR Type Specialization - Core
Course Title LAB in Best Practices in HR
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To expose students to organizations to know best HR Practices
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Faculty & students to develop desk research on Best HR practices like
 CSR
 Recruitment
 Retention
 Training
 Transfers
 Appraisals
 Employee engagement
 Compensation
 Employee participation
By organizations like
 Infosys
 Wipro
 TCS
 TATA Motors
 IBM
 TVS
 Reliance
10
2 Invite HR professionals to share best HR practices & experience 6
3 Visit minimum 2 organizations in the area to know their HR Practices 14
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. HRM Practices by K B S Kumar, ICFAI university press, I edition
2 Reference Books 1. HRM practices in Industry by Kaila, Ravishankar, Himalaya Publishing
House, I edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Case Studies on HRD Practices by M.K. Patel, Anmol Publications
2. Websites of the organizations mentioned above
3. Annual Reports of the organizations mentioned above
4. Newsletter of the organizations mentioned above
4 Websites 1. www.business-standard.com
2. www.thehrpractice.in
3. www.hrmguide.in
4. www.shrm.org
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
351
Semester IV Specialization HRM
Course Code 415HR Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Designing HR policies
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To equip students with pros and cons of HR Policies
2 To study statutory & non statutory requirements
3 To acquaint students with role & responsibilities of HR professionals
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction on the Content and Use of the Manual
 Corporate Profile (History, Ownership, Products/Services/Clientele)
Corporate Vision and Mission Statement
 Corporate Values
 Corporate Philosophy and Beliefs on Human Resource
 Corporate Table of Organization
 Manpower Planning: Procedure and Considerations
 HR Requirements Assessment Worksheet
 Position Analysis/Job Descriptions
5
2 Recruitment and Selection : Policies, Procedures (Internal placement, Direct
Hire, Outsource)
 Forms (Application, Request for Recruitment, Request for Staffing)
 Test (IQ, Technical/Functional, Personality/Behavioral, Managerial)
 Interview Guides/Interview Sheets
 Background/Reference Check (Letters, Checklist)
 Verifying Credentials
 Employee Orientation and Induction: Procedure, Accountability and
Content Guidelines
 Orientation Slides, Orientation Letter
 Employment Contracts / Bonds
 Types of Employment: Definition and Considerations
 Contract Forms, Procedures in Administering Contracts
 Personnel Movements
 Promotion, Transfer, Demotion
 Wage, Salary and Benefits Administration
 Policy on Compensation
 Compensation Package
 Job Classification, Salary Structure
 Rules on Adjustments
 Rules on Merit Increases
6
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
352
3 Employee Benefits
 Leave Credits: Types, Procedures of Availing Leaves, Forms and
Recording & Conversion of Unused Leaves
 Monetary and Tangible Benefits
 Compliance to Government Regulated Benefits
 Employee Attendance and Absences Policy
 Time Management
 Personal Leave of Absences
 Travel and Accommodation
 Modes of Transportation
 Accommodation Issues
 Travelling Formats(Requisition and Reimbursement)
 Code of Discipline
 Dress Code
 Personal Communications
 Gifts and Gratuity
 Policy on Discipline
 Rules Pertaining to :
 Attendance
 Adherence to Norms and Procedures
 Customer/Public Conduct
 Use of Company Resources/Properties
 Safety and Security
 Behaviors Defining the Corporate Policies
 Table of Offenses
 Procedures on Disciplinary Action
 Disciplinary Written Warning Format
 Disciplinary Action Report
6
4 Employee Relations and Grievance Handling
 Corporate Responsibility and Supervisory Responsibility
 Definition of ER Programs and Activities
 Grievance Handling Procedures
 Employee Records Management
 Employee Profile and History
 Employee Data Change
 Transfer/Accountability of Employee Records and Information
 Training and Development
 Corporate Policy on Training
 Training Accountability
 Procedures in Availing Training (Related Forms)
 Training Contract: Formal and Informal
 Outsourced Training: Procedures and Considerations
 Training Evaluation: Requirements and Forms
 Employee Training Record
5
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
353
5 Field study/ Desk Research
Student along with faculty are expected to study HR policies available from
various sources and work on designing HR policies (Manual) for an
Organization (Wherever Possible real time or for model organization)* .
8
*The list of topics provided in the modules is not exhaustive as such students and faculty members
can add as and when they feel the appropriateness of the dimension they get from the study.
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. How to Develop Essential HR Policies and Procedures, by John H.
McConnell Amacom, Div American Mgmt. Association, Volume 1
2 Reference Books 2. Guide on Labour & Human Resources, Management Forms &
Precedents (Law Practice & Procedure), Snow white
3. Human Resource Policies and Procedures for Nonprofit Organizations
by Carol L. Barbeito, John Wiley & Sons, 2004
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. The HR Toolkit, Denise A Romano, TMGH
2. HR Manuals, Handbooks available through Contacts and web sources
4 Websites 1. www.chillibreeze.com/articles_various/HR-policies-in-India.asp
2. http://toostep.com/debate/are-hr-policies-of-indian-companiesemployee-
friendly
5 Journals 1. International Journal of Human Resource Management
2. Human Resource Management Journal
3. Human Resource Management
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
354
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER IV
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
355
SYLLABUS: SEMESTER IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - SPECIALIZATION
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
356
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 403SCM Type Specialization – Core
Course Title Strategic Supply Chain Management
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 50 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To understand the role and objectives of Strategic Supply Chain Management
2 To recognize the role and importance of strategic partnerships and alliances in Supply Chain
Management
3 To appreciate the increasing scope of Supply Chain Management and its future challenges
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Supply Chain Strategy: Strategic objectives of SCM - customer focus, product
development, market development, diversification, learning & organizational
capability, sustainable competitive advantage through SC
7 + 2
2 Managing SC for Strategic Fit: concept of strategic fit, steps in achieving
strategic fit, impact of customer needs, impact of uncertainty, multiple products
& customer segments, PLC, globalization & competitive changes over time
7 + 2
3 Expanding Strategic Scope: Minimize local cost perspective, Minimize
functional Cost perspective, Maximize Company Profit perspective, Maximize
SC Surplus perspective, Agile intercompany inter functional scope
7 + 2
4 Strategic Partnerships & Alliances: Collaborative Advantages, Framework for
Strategic Alliances, Core Competence – 3PL, 4PL & Outsourcing: Advantages
& Disadvantages, Prerequisites, Implementation Issues
7 + 2
5 Supply Chain Challenges – Strategies for the future: Mass customization,
Globalization, Greening, Ethical SC, Intelligent System, Implications for
managers, organizations & policy makers
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Supply Chain Management: Strategy Planning & Operation by Sunil
Chopra, Peter Meindl, Kalra, Pearson, 3rd Edition.
2. Supply Chain Strategies – Customer Driven & Customer Focused by
Tony Hines, Elsevier, 1st Edition
2 Reference Books 1. Managing the SC- A Strategic Perspective by Gattorna Walters,
Palgrave Macmillan, 1st Edition
2. New Directions in Supply Chain Management: Technology & Strategy
Implementation by Tonya Boone and Ram Ganeshan, Jaico Publishing,
2007
3. Extending the Supply Chain by Boyer, Forhlich and Hult, PHI, 3rd
Indian Reprint, 2009
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Designing & Managing the SC – Concepts, Strategies & Case studies –
by Levi, Kaminskyet. al., TMGH, 3rd Edition
2. Manufacturing Operations and Supply Chain Management: The Lean
Approach by Taylor and Brunt, Thomson Learning.
3. Supply Chain Management by Mentzer, Response Books, 2007
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
357
4 Websites 1. http://csmp.org/
2. www.supplychain.org
5 Journals 1. An adaptive framework for aligning (re)planning decisions on supply
chain strategy, design, tactics, and operations by Ivanov, Dmitry.,
International Journal of Production Research, Jul2010, Vol. 48 Issue 13
2. The Impact of Competitive Strategy and Supply Chain Strategy on
Business Performance: The Role of Environmental Uncertainty by
Yinan Qi; Xiande Zhao; Chwen Sheu., Decision Sciences, May2011, Vol.
42 Issue 2
3. An Exploration of Fisher's Framework for the Alignment of Supply
Chain Strategy With Product Characteristics by Harris, Gregory A.;
Componation, Paul J.; Farrington, Phillip A., Engineering Management
Journal, Dec2010, Vol. 22 Issue 4
4. Alignment of Supply Chain Strategy with Business Strategy by Mitra,
Amarnath; Bhardwaj, Sunil., IUP Journal of Supply Chain
Management, Sep2010, Vol. 7 Issue 3
5. What's the buzz about moving from 'lean' to 'agile' integrated
supplychains? A fuzzy intelligent agent-based approach by Jain, Vipul;
Benyoucef, Lyes; Deshmukh, S. G., International Journal of Production
Research, Dec2008, Vol. 46 Issue 23
6. Improving supply-chain collaboration by linking intelligent agents to
CPFR by Caridi, M.; Cigolini, R.; De Marco, D., International Journal of
Production Research, 2005, Vol. 43 Issue 20
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
358
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 404SCM Type Specialization - Core
Course Title Knowledge Management in Supply Chains
Total Marks 100 Total Sessions (60 min each) 45
Concurrent Evaluation 100 Learning Sessions 35
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 10
Course Objectives:
1 To know Supply Chain Systems Classification
2 To understand the role of IT as an enabler of Supply Chain Management for today’s businesses
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Supply Chain IT Framework: Supplier Relationship Management, Internal
Supply Chain Management, Customer Relationship Management, Transaction
Management Foundation
7 + 2
2 Supply Chain Information Systems: SC Information System classification,
Requirement Analysis for Information Systems in SC, Information for Strategic
SC decisions, Risks & Challenges in implementing SC Information Systems,
Benefits of SC Information Systems
7 + 2
3 Digital Markets & Efficient Supply Chains: Web enabled Supply Chains,
Technological impact of SC disintermediation, Reconfiguration of SC, Pure
technology applications in SC, Process Improvements - technology adoption
7 + 2
4 E-Supply Chain Opportunities: E business & SCM – Upstream Perspective, B-
2-B Perspective, E supply chain opportunities - e procurement, e fulfillment,
auctions & reverse auctions, collaborative demand planning, intranets,
extranets & VPN, Benefits to SMEs & MSMEs
7 + 2
5 Technology Standards: Overview of Information Technology infrastructure –
interface devices, system architecture, e-commerce. Service oriented
architecture – Introduction to ERP. Applications of Bar coding & scanning,
RFID, EPOS, Global data synchronization, Image Processing, GPRS
7 + 2
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Supply Chain & Logistics Management by Bowersox, Closs & Cooper,
TMGH, 2nd Edition.
2. Supply Chain Management – Strategy, Planning and Execution by Sunil
Chopra, Peter Meindl, D V Kalra, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition
3. Supply Chain Management Process, System & Practice by
N.Chadrasekaran, Oxford, 1st Edition
4. Supply Chain Strategies: Customer Driven and Customer Focused by
Tony Hines, Elsevier, 2008
2 Reference Books 1. Designing & Managing the SC – Concepts, Strategies & Case studies by
Levi, Kaminsky et. al., TMGH, 3rd Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. New Directions in Supply Chain Management: Technology & Strategy
Implementation by Tonya Boone and Ram Ganeshan, Jaico Publishing,
2007
4 Websites 1. www.supplychainmanagement.in
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
359
5 Journals 1. Explicating the Mediating Role of Integrative Supply Management
Practices in Strategic Outsourcing: A case study analysis by
Narasimhan, Ram; Narayanan, Sriram; Srinivasan, Ravi., International
Journal of Production Research, Jan2010, Vol. 48 Issue 2
2. Intra-Organizational Perspectives On IT-Enabled Supply Chains by
Singh, Nitin; Kee-hung Lai; Chen, T. C. E.. Communications of the
ACM, Jan2007, Vol. 50 Issue 1
3. E-Enabled Closed-Loop Supply Chains by van Nunen, Jo A. E. E.;
Zuidwijk, Rob A. California Management Review, Winter2004, Vol. 46
Issue 2
4. The Role of Trust and Collaboration in the Internet-enabled Supply
Chain by Grossman, Martin., Journal of American Academy of
Business, Cambridge, Sep 2004, Vol. 5 Issue 1/2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
360
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 405SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Green Logistics and Supply Chains
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To sensitize the students to external costs of logistics and supply chains (climate change costs).
2 To analyze the environmental costs of logistics and how to deal with them effectively.
3 To highlight how different types of environmentally sustainable practices should be adopted at
different stages of supply chains.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Environmental Sustainability & Green Logistics: Concept of Green Logistics,
Green Logistics – Rhetoric & reality, Key drivers for greening of Logistics &
Supply Chains, Benefits of Green Supply Chains
4 + 1
2 Environmental Costs of Logistics: Arguments for and against internalizing
environmental costs of logistics, Monetary calculation of environmental costs ,
Concept of Carbon Credits, Guidelines for carbon foot printing, Carbon foot
printing process, success factors in carbon foot printing, Carbon Auditing of
Supply Chains
5 + 2
3 Reverse Logistics for Waste Management: Waste Management in the context
of reverse logistics, Waste Treatment Legislation, Reuse & refurbishment
markets and take back business models, Managing waste as a part of
sustainable reverse process.
5 + 1
4 Public Policy and Green Supply Chains: Role of Government, Policy
Measures, Energy Efficiency, Cutting Emissions.
5 + 1
5 Green Supply Chains: Case Studies on Green Initiatives by Manufacturers,
Green Initiatives by Government & Non-Profit Organizations, Green Initiatives
by Retailers, Green Initiatives by Consumers.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Green Logistics – Improving the Sustainability of Logistics, Edited by
McKinnon, Cullinane, Brown &Whiteing, Published by Chartered
Institute of Logistics & Transports, UK.
2 Reference Books 1. Total Supply Chain Management by Basu& Wright, Elsevier, 1st Ed.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Greening the Supply Chain- A guide for Asian Managers by Purba
Halady Rao, Response Books, 1st Edition.
4 Websites 1. www.greenlogistics.org
2. www.greenlogisticsforum.com
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
361
5 Journals 1. Why business needs to green the supply chain by Hoskin, Paul.,
University of Auckland Business Review, Autumn2011, Vol. 13 Issue 1
2. How Green Are Your Supply Chains? By Crandall, Richard E.,
Industrial Management, May/Jun2006, Vol. 48 Issue 3.
3. Greening The Supply Chain: A New Initiative In India With Special
Reference To Chhattisgarh by Ashraf, Gazala Yasmin; Raichoudhary,
Arpita; Mukherjee, P. N.; Srivastava, R. K. Pranjana., The Journal of
Management Awareness, Jan-Jun2009, Vol. 12 Issue 1
4. The Economic Value of a Sustainable Supply Chain by Mefford, Robert
N., Business & Society Review (00453609), Spring2011, Vol. 116 Issue 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
362
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 406SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Enterprise Resource Planning
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To help the student understand how a business works and how information systems fit into
business operations.
2 To emphasize the cross functional integration aspects of a business.
3 To enable better managerial decision making through real time data integration and sharing.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Understanding Enterprise Resource Planning: Concept of Enterprise ,
Overview of Business Functions and Business Processes, Integrated
Management Information, Business Modeling, Evolution of ERP; ERP and
related technologies; Myths about ERP; Importance of ERP; Value creation in
organizations through ERP; Benefits of ERP; Risk of ERP - People Issues,
Process Risks, Technological Risks, Implementation Issues, Operation &
Maintenance Issues; Managing risk in ERP projects.
5 + 1
2 ERP & Related Technologies: Business Process Reengineering, Data
Warehousing, Data Mining, OLAP, PLM, SCM, CRM, GIS, ERP Functional
Modules , Integration of ERP, Supply Chain, CRM.
5 + 1
3 ERP Implementation: Technological, Operational, Business Reasons for ERP
implementation , ERP implementation Life Cycle – Objectives - Phases -
Reasons for failure; Implementation challenges; ERP transition strategies - Big
Bang Strategy, Phased Implementation, Parallel Implementation, Process Line
Transition Strategy, Hybrid Transition Strategy, Strategy Choice; Success and
failure factors of an ERP implementation; ERP implementation costs;
Organization and working of ERP implementation team.
5 + 1
4 ERP Operations and Future Trends: Operation and maintenance of the ERP
system; Maximizing the ERP system; ERP and e-business; Integration of ERP,
internet and www; Future of ERP.
5 + 1
5 ERP Systems Processes and Management Control: Sales and Marketing;
Accounting and Finance; Production and Material Management; Human
Resource Management, Overview of an ERP product.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Enterprise Resource Planning by Leon, Alexis, TMH Publication, 2nd
Edition, 2008.
2. Enterprise Resource Planning by Koul, Saroj, Galgotia Publishing,
2001.
3. ERP Concepts and Practice by Garg, V. K. and Venkat Krishna N. K.,
PHI Publication, 1997.
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
363
2 Reference Books 1. Enterprise Resource Planning by Sumner, Mary, Pearson Education,
2006.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. ERP In Practice by Vaman Jagan, TMGH
4 Websites 1. www.oracle.com/ERP
2. www.sap.com/
3. www.openerp.com/
5 Journals 1. Measuring System Performance of an ERP-based Supply Chain by Ho,
Chrwan-Jyh., International Journal of Production Research, 2007, Vol.
45 Issue 6
2. Supply Chain Transformation by ERP for Enhancing Performance: An
Empirical Investigation by Zong Dai., Advances in Competitiveness
Research, 2008, Vol. 16 Issue 1
3. Coordination Strategies in an SaaS Supply Chain by Demirkan, Haluk;
Cheng, Hsing Kenneth; Bandyopadhyay, Subhajyoti., Journal of
Management Information Systems, Spring2010, Vol. 26 Issue 4
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
364
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 407SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Purchasing & Supplier Relationship Management - II
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To provide an in-depth understanding of the fundamentals surrounding purchasing in different
contexts.
2 To make the students aware of the different demands placed on the purchasing and supply chain
managers by business stakeholders.
3 To help the students understand the impact of purchasing on competitive success and profitability
of modern day organizations.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Purchasing for Institutions & Government Organizations: Similarities and
dissimilarities with industrial purchasing. Purchasing procedure, roles of
purchasing. Products & services purchased, functions performed, Purchase
Cycle, Establishing sources of supply, Contracts Administration, Internal &
External Environmental factors
5 + 1
2 Purchasing of Services: Hidden Opportunities, Planning the statement of
work, Writing the statement of work, Selecting service contractors,
Compensating Service suppliers, Professional services, Technical services,
Operating services, Contract administration, Develop a sound Procedure for
Evaluation
5+ 1
3 Purchasing of Capital Equipment: Differences in the procurement of capital
equipment - Nonrecurring purchases, Nature and size of Expenditure.
Considerations in Source Selection –Operating Characteristics of equipment,
Engineering features of equipment, Total economic analysis, Various
qualitative considerations, Life cycle cost analysis, Role of Purchasing, Used /
Second hand equipment Purchasing, Leased equipment– factors favouring
leasing
5 + 1
4 Worldwide Sourcing - Creating a world class supply base: An overview of
Worldwide Sourcing, Why source worldwide? Barriers to worldwide sourcing,
Information about Worldwide sources, Supplier selection issues, Cultural
understanding, Language and communication differences, Legal issues,
Logistical issues, Organizational issues, Costs associated with Worldwide
Sourcing, Managing international currency risk, Hedging – Spot & Forward
Contracts, Progressing from International Purchasing to Global Sourcing,
Differentiating factors between successful and less successful Global Sourcing
Efforts, Benefits of global sourcing, Future Global Sourcing Trends
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
365
5 Performance Measurement & Evaluation: Why Measure Performance,
Problems with Purchasing Measurement and Evaluation, Purchasing
Measurement Categories – Price Performance Measures, Cost-Effectiveness
Measures, Quality, Time related Measures, Technology Innovation Measures,
Physical Environment and Safety, Asset Management and Integrated SC
Measures, Administration and Efficiency Measures, Developing a Performance
Measurement and Evaluation System - Determining which Performance
Categories to Measure, Developing Specific Performance Measures, Establish
Performance Objectives for each Measure, Finalize system Details, Implement
and Review
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Purchasing & Supply Chain Management by Monczka, Trent,
Handfield, Thomson South Western, 3rd Edition.
2. Purchasing & Supply Chain Management by Lysons and Farrington,
Pearson Education, 2010.
2 Reference Books 1. Purchasing & Supply Chain Management by Dobler, Burt, TMGH, 6th
Edition.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Organizational Buying Behaviour by Webster and Wind, Prentice Hall,
1972
4 Websites 1. www.cips.org
2. www.eipm.org
5 Journals 1. e Global Sourcing and Logistics Exercise: A Group Exercise to
Demonstrate Basic Global Supply Chain Principles by Ashenbaum,
Bryan., Decision Sciences Journal of Innovative Education, Sep2008,
Vol. 6 Issue 2
2. Strategic Alliance-Based Global Sourcing Strategy for Competitive
Advantage: A Conceptual Framework and Research Propositions by
Murray, Janet Y., Journal of International Marketing, 2001, Vol. 9 Issue 4
3. Global sourcing in the auto industry by Bergmann, Markus;
Mangaleswaran, Ramesh; Mercer, Glenn A., McKinsey Quarterly, 2004
Special Edition
4. Pursuing competitive advantage through integrated globalsourcing
byTrent, Robert J.; Monczka, Robert M., Academy of Management
Executive, May2002, Vol. 16 Issue 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
366
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 408SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Supply Chain Risk Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 24
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 06
Course Objectives:
1 To help the students understand the pressures on managing the supply chain and their impact on
supply chain’s vulnerability to disruptions.
2 To introduce the principles of supply chain risk management.
3 To provide an understanding of the basics of identifying, defining and analyzing risks.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Basics of Risk Management: Risk & Management, Growth of risk
Management, defining Risk, Features of Risk. Decisions & Risk, Decisions with
certainty, uncertainty, risk, ignorance, Managing Risk
4 + 1
2 Risk in Supply Chain: Risks arising out of Trends affecting SC – Integration,
Cost Reduction, Agile Logistics, E-Business, Globalization, Outsourcing, SC
Risk Management – Aims, Steps & Principles
5 + 1
3 Identifying & Analyzing Risks: Types of Risks, Identifying Risks, Tools for
analyzing past events, collecting opinions, analyzing operations, Measuring
Risk, Likelihood of a risky event, Consequences of risk, Responding to risks,
Alternative responses, defining the options & choosing the best response,
Network View of Risk - Shared risks
5 + 2
4 Creating resilient SC: Design of a resilient SC, Principles of designing resilient
SC, Physical features of a resilient SC, relationship within a resilient SC, Risk
compensation & Business Continuity
5 + 1
5 Business Continuity Management: Emergencies & Crisis, Views of BCM &
Steps in BCM
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Supply Chain Risk Management by Donald Walters, Kogan Page, 1st
Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. The New Supply Chain Challenge: Risk Management in a Global
Economy by Bosman R, FM Global, Johnston RI, 2006.
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Risk management for executives by Kendall R, FT Prentice Hall
London, 1998.
4 Websites 1. www.disasterplan.com
2. www.globalcontinuity.com
3. www.riskinfo.com
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
367
5 Journals 1. Reconciling Supply Chain Vulnerability, Risk And Supply Chain
Management by Peck, H., International Journal of Logistics: Research &
Applications, Jun2006, Vol. 9 Issue 2
2. Sources of Supply Chain Disruptions, Factors That Breed Vulnerability,
and Mitigating Strategies by Stecke, Kathryn E.; Kumar, Sanjay.,
Journal of Marketing Channels, Jul-Sep2009, Vol. 16 Issue 3
3. Drivers Of Supply Chain Vulnerability: An Integrated Framework by
Peck, Helen., International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics
Management, 2005, Vol. 35 Issue 4
4. A Conceptual Framework For The Analysis Of Vulnerability In Supply
Chains by Göran Svensson., International Journal of Physical
Distribution & Logistics Management, 2000, Vol. 30 Issue 9
5. Key Areas, Causes And Contingency Planning Of Corporate
Vulnerability In Supply Chains: A Qualitative Approach by Svensson,
Göran., International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics
Management, 2004, Vol. 34 Issue 9
6. Managing Uncertainty - An Empirical Analysis Of Supply Chain Risk
Management In Small And Medium-Sized Enterprises by Thun, Jorn-
Henrik; Druke, Martin; Hoenig, Daniel., International Journal of
Production Research, Sep2011, Vol. 49 Issue 18
7. Analyzing Risks In Supply Networks To Facilitate Outsourcing
Decisions by Lockamy, Archie; McCormack, Kevin., International
Journal of Production Research, Jan2010, Vol. 48 Issue 2
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
368
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 409SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Project Management
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To make the students understand the complex issues in Project Management
2 To increase the understanding of project management tools and techniques
3 To teach the students the concepts and skills that are used by managers to plan projects, secure
resources, budget, lead project teams to successful completion of projects.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Introduction to Project Management: Definition, functions, evolution of
Project Management, classification of projects, Project management in different
environments.
The Project Management Systems, Methodologies & Systems Development
Cycle: Systems approach, systems analysis, systems development, project
feasibility, Project life cycle, project appraisal, project contracting, the phases of
system development life cycle.
5 + 1
2 Project Feasibility Study: Developing a project plan, market and technical
analysis, financial analysis evaluation of project proposals, risk analysis,
sensitivity analysis, and social cost benefit analysis.
Project Planning: Planning fundamentals, project master plan, work
breakdown structure & other tools of project planning, work packages project
organization structures & responsibilities, responsibility matrix.
6 + 1
3 PERT, CPM, Resource allocation: Tools & techniques for scheduling
development, crashing of networks, time-cost relationship, and resource
leveling multiple project scheduling.
Cost Estimating Budgeting : Cost estimating process elements of budgeting,
project cost accounting &management information systems, cost schedules &
forecasts.
5 + 1
4 Managing Risks in Projects: Risk concept & identification, risk assessment,
risk priority, risk response planning, risk management methods.
Project Control: Information monitoring, internal & external project control,
cost accounting systems for project control, control process, performance
analysis, variance limits, and issues in project control.
5 + 1
5 Project Management Information System: Computer based tools, features of
PMIS, using project management software, (MS Projects)
Project Evaluation, Reporting & Termination: Project reviews & reporting,
closing the contract.
4 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
369
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Effective Project Management by Clements and Gido, Thomson India
Edition, 2007.
2. Project Management : The Managerial Process by Gray and Larson,
MGH, Special Indian Edition, 3rd Edition
3. Project Management for Business and Technology: Principles and
Practice by John Nicholas, PHI – Eastern Economy Edition, 2nd Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Project Management – Core Text by Mantel, Meredith, Shafer, Sutton
and Gopalan, 1st Indian Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Project Management: A Managerial Approach by Meredith, Mantel
Wiley India, 6th Edition.
2. The Practice of Project Management by Freigenti and Comninos, Kogan
Page
4 Websites 1. www.pmi.org.in/
5 Journals 1. Risk Analysis of Infrastructure Projects: A Case Study on Build-
Operate-Transfer Projects in India by Maniar, Hiren., IUP Journal of
Financial Risk Management, Dec2010, Vol. 7 Issue 4
2. Enercon India: Project Planning by Mukherjee, Saral; Raghuram, G.,
Vikalpa: The Journal for Decision Makers, Jan-Mar2007, Vol. 32 Issue 1
3. Critical Factors Affecting Schedule Performance: Evidence from Indian
Construction Projects by Iyer, K. C.; Jha, K. N., Journal of Construction
Engineering & Management, Aug2006, Vol. 132, Issue 8
4. What attributes should a project coordinator possess? by Jha, Kumar
Neeraj; Iyer, Chandrashekhar K., Construction Management &
Economics, Sep2006, Vol. 24 Issue 9
5. A Study of Critical Project Success Parameters in Different
Organizational Conditions by Piyush, Mishra; Dangayach, G. S.; Mittal,
M. L., Advances in Management, Aug2011, Vol. 4 Issue 8
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
370
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 410SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Supply Chain Performance Measurement
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To understand various types of traditional performance measures of supply chain , their use and
drawbacks
2 To introduce a select world class performance measures of Supply Chain
3 To understand the right metrics for a Supply Chain
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Performance Measurement along the Supply Chain: Relationship between
Company Strategy & Supply Chain Metrics, Functional classification of
Decision areas in SCM – Procurement, Manufacturing, Distribution, Logistics,
Global
5 + 1
2 Traditional Approaches to Performance Measurement: Productivity
Measures, Quality Measures, Customer Service Measures, Cost Measures,
Drawbacks of Traditional Measures
5 + 1
3 World Class Performance Measures for Supply Chains: Balanced Scorecard,
Activity Based Management & Costing, EVA (In depth discussion & analysis
expected)
5 + 1
4 Process Driven Metrics: SCOR framework, EFQM (In depth discussion &
analysis expected)
5 + 1
5 Building & Leveraging Metrics to drive Supply Chain Performance: All
metrics are not equal, Establishing the right Metrics, Linking Metrics to overall
strategic objectives, Insights through cause & effect guided analysis,
Quantifying financial impacts of SC Metrics, Identifying corrective actions
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Supply Chain Management Process, System & Practice by N.
Chadrasekaran, Oxford, 1st Edition
2. Supply Chain Performance Measurement & Improvement Edited by
Venkata Nimeesha Posa, ICFAI Press, 1st Edition
2 Reference Books 1. New Directions in Supply Chain Management: Technology & Strategy
Implementation by Tonya Boone and Ram Ganeshan, Jaico Publishing,
2007
2. Supply Chain Management by Mentzer, Response Books, 2007
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Principles of Supply Chain Management : A Balanced Approach by Joel
Wisner, Keong Leong, Keah-ChoonTan, Cengage Learning.
4 Websites 1. http://www.supplychainmetric.com/
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
371
5 Journals 1. Supply Chain Performance Measurement: A Literature Review by
ArzuAkyuz, Goknur; Erman Erkan, Turan., International Journal of
Production Research, Sep2010, Vol. 48 Issue 17
2. On Measuring Company Performance within A SupplyChain by
Martin, P. Richard; Patterson, J. Wayne., International Journal of
Production Research, May2009, Vol. 47 Issue 9
3. Aligning Business Process Reengineering in Implementing Global
Supply Chain Systems by the SCOR model by Wang, William Y. C.;
Chan, H. K.; Pauleen, David J., International Journal of Production
Research, Oct2010, Vol. 48 Issue 19
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
372
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 411SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Supply Chain Management - Financial Perspectives
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To highlight the importance of cost management as a key to profitability and the key to successful
supply chain networks.
2 To underline the role of cost management from a strategic perspective.
3 To teach the identification of key cost drivers and defined process of managing supply chain costs.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Pricing & Revenue Management in Supply Chain: Role of Pricing & Revenue
Management in SC, Pricing and Revenue Management for - Multiple Customer
Segments, Perishable Assets, Seasonal Demand, Bulk and Spot Contracts, Role
of IT in Pricing & Revenue Management, Using Pricing and Revenue
Management in Practice
5 + 1
2 Identifying Critical Costs in the SC: Concept of cost, Process Mapping, SC
Cost flow, Selecting critical costs to be managed, Obtaining cost data – supplier
provided data, internal data, Measuring Secondary & Tertiary Costs –
Overview of Allocation based costing system, Management Based costing
system
5 + 1
3 Defining Key cost Drivers & developing Strategic Options: Review of current
cost drivers, selection of key cost drivers, Weighted value of cost drivers,
Potential for improvement, Developing strategic options for selected cost
drivers
5 + 1
4 Reducing, Eliminating or Changing activities that cause cost: Risk return
model for choosing strategic options – Market driven, Standard, Critical &
Danger Quadrants, Identifying constraints, Evaluating risks & benefits in SC
cost management from stakeholders perspectives, prioritizing strategies for
implementation
5 + 1
5 Implementation & Control for Cost Management In SC: Creating a
Implementation Plan, Addressing Implementation Risks, Developing
Contingency Plans, Selling the Plan to Stakeholders, Monitoring Performance,
Documenting Savings, Qualitative Benefits, Sharing the learning process,
Eternally improving & leveraging the process
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Supply Chain Cost Management – Strategy, Planning & Operation by
Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindl, D V Kalra, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Supply Chain Cost Management by Jimmy Anklesaria , JAICO
Publishing, 1st Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Supply Chain Strategies – Customer Driven & Customer Focused by
Tony Hines, Elsevier, 1st Edition
2. Supply Chain Management by Mentzer, Response Books, 2007
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
373
4 Websites 1. http://www.supplychaintoday.com/index.htm
5 Journals 1. A Total Cost/Value Model For Supply Chain Competitiveness by
Cavinato, Joseph L., Journal of Business Logistics, 1992, Vol. 13 Issue 2
2. Pricing Management for a Closed-loop Supply Chain by Gu Qiaolun; Ji
Jianhua; Gao Tiegang., Journal of Revenue & Pricing Management,
Mar2008, Vol. 7 Issue 1
3. Strategic Cost Management in Supply Chains, Part 1: Structural Cost
Management by Anderson, Shannon W.; Dekker, Henri C., Accounting
Horizons, Jun2009, Vol. 23 Issue 2
4. Strategic Cost Management in Supply Chains, Part 2: Executional Cost
Management by Anderson, Shannon W.; Dekker, Henri C., Accounting
Horizons, Sep2009, Vol. 23 Issue 3
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
374
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 412SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Global Logistics
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
Course Objectives:
1 To get acquainted with global dimensions of logistics management
2 To introduce basic operational aspects i.e. procedure, documentations & related legal aspects of
global logistics
3 To sensitize students to basics of shipping line industry
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 1.1 Introduction to Global Logistics :International Logistics Development,
International Trade Logistics Chain, Shipper’s Logistics Requirements in trade,
7R’s of Logistics Management, 5 P’s of Logistics, International Commercial
Terms – Use of Incoterms in a Contract, Incoterms Laws.
1.2 Logistics and Documentation: Consular Invoice, Commercial Invoice,
Certificate of Origin, certificate of Value, Bill of Lading, Cargo Manifest or
Packing List, Health Certificate, Import license, Insurance Certificate, Export
Declaration Forms.
1.3 Transportation: Modes of transportation, Transport and Communication,
Transport activities and Land Use, Transport, Energy and the Environment.
1.4 Air Cargo: Transportation of goods through Air, Transportation
Infrastructure, World Air Cargo growth, Benefits of Airfreight, Airport
classification, International Airports of India, Types of Aircraft, Unit loading
devices, Airport Charges, International Country Codes.
5 + 1
2 2.1 Carriage of Goods by Land: Motor Vehicles Act, 1988, Central Motor
Vehicles Rules, 1989, Carriers Act, 1865 – Definition of common carrier,
Scheduled and Non Scheduled Goods, Railways Act, 1989 – Railway’s liability,
Merits and Demerits of Railway Transportation, Railway Freight rates.
2.2 Carriage of Goods by Sea &Ocean Freight& Freight Calculations: Ocean
Shipping Methods, Ocean Freight or Tariff rates, Freight rates terminology
used in international shipments, Freight surcharges, Freight Rebates,
Conference Discounts, Contract Shippers, Weight or Measure in the Freight
Cost Calculation, Freight Adjustments – Currency Adjustment Factor (CAF),
Bunker Adjustment Factor (BAF).
2.3 Types of Ships: Mail and Supply Ships, Expedition Ships, Coasters, Bulk
Carriers, Tankers, Refrigerated Vessels and Reefers, Livestock carriers, LNG
Carriers, Car Carriers, Container Ships, Heavy lift Vessels, Tugs, Ro-Ro Vessels.
5 + 1
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
375
3 3.1 Shipping Formalities: Booking Shipping Space, Conference Shipping, Nonconference
Shipping, Charter Shipping, Charter Party, Shipping Storage, Ocean
Shipping procedure.
3.2 Shipping Intermediaries: Function and Roles of Custom Brokers, Freight
Forwarders and Consolidators, Shipping Agents, Stevedores.
3.3 The Major Port Trusts Act, 1963.
3.4Shipping Corporation of India: Products and Services, STS Lighterage
Operations
5 + 1
4 4.1 Major Ports in India: Present Policy, Privatization Policy, Indian Port Policy
Reform, Major Ports in India – Chennai, Cochin, Ennore, JNPT, Kandla,
Mormugao, Mumbai, Paradip, NMPT, Pipavav, Tuticorin, Visakapatnam.
4.2 Important Sea Routes: Northern Sea route, North Atlantic Route,
Mediterranean Route, Panama Route, Baltic Sea Route, Indian Ocean route,
Cape Route, South Atlantic Route, North Pacific Route.
4.3International Chamber of Shipping
4.4 World’s Major Ports: Major Ports and Port codes, Seaports of the world.
5 + 1
5 5.1 Containerization: Origin of containerization, Origin of TEU, Container sizes
- dimensions and capacity, Container Flavours, Swap Bodies, Other
considerations, Registration, Container Classification numbers, Lift/Stacking
fittings, Movement of containers, Recent Developments – Coltainer,
Cargosprinter, Safety of container ships, Container Classification – General
Cargo service, Specific cargo service, Unit Load Device, Rating – Tare Mass and
Pay load of Containers, Marking and Identification of Containers. Benefits of
containerization.
5.2 Inland Container Depots & Container Freight Stations: Functions,
Benefits, Requirements for successful ICD/CFS, Designs and Layout,
Equipping the ICD/CFS, Procedures for approval and implementation. Concor
– The Multimodal Logistics Professionals.
5 + 1
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Logistics Management for International Business – Text and Cases, by
Sudalaimuthu and Anthony Raj, PHI, 2009 Edition.
2. Global Operations and Logistics: Text and Cases by Dornier, Ernst,
Fender and Kouvelis, Wiley India, 2006
2 Reference Books 1. Global Logistics – New Directions in Supply Chain Management,
Edited by Donald Waters, Kogan Page, 5th Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Logistics in International Business by Rajiv Aserkar, Shroff Publishers,
2nd Edition.
4 Websites 1. http://mhlnews.com/
5 Journals 1. Executive Insights: Global Logistics by Bowersox, Donald J.; Calantone,
Roger J., Journal of International Marketing. 1998, Vol. 6 Issue 4, p83-93.
2. Emerging Global Logistics Networks: Implications for Transport
Systems and Policies by Tavasszy, L.A.; Ruijgrok, C. J.; Thissen, M. J. P.
M., Growth & Change. Fall2003, Vol. 34 Issue 4, p456-472. 17p
3. Logistics Industry Profile: Global , Logistics Industry Profile: Global.
Dec2008, p1 - 30
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
376
Semester IV Specialization Supply Chain Management
Course Code 413SCM Type Specialization - Elective
Course Title Supply Chain Practices in Different Industries - II
Total Marks 50 Total Sessions (60 min each) 30
Concurrent Evaluation 50 Learning Sessions* 25
University Evaluation 00 Evaluation Sessions 05
* Field/Self Study under Faculty guidance.
Course Objectives:
1 To give a practical understanding of the practice of supply chain management in various sectors.
2 To give a practical understanding of the peculiarities of supply chain management practices in
various sectors.
Syllabus:
Unit
Number
Contents Number
of Sessions
1 Supply Chains for Projects – Construction (Housing, Infrastructure), Power
Plants, New Factories, etc.
NA
2 Supply Chains for Disaster Management. NA
3 Virtual Supply Chains for Books, Electronic Goods, Music, Apparel, Tourism,
etc.
NA
4 Supply Chains for SMEs and MSMEs. NA
5 Global Supply Chains - PCs, Desktops, Luxury Cars, Toys, etc. NA
Students should work in groups of two each on any two Companies from the Sectors listed above. The
Sectors should be from different groups.
Students shall study various aspects of the SCM principles and practices as followed in these sectors.
They should identify
e) the peculiarities of the sector,
f) map the supply chain in detail (identify the parties involved and their role in the supply chain),
g) compare the top two players in each of these sectors and identify best practices,
h) Prepare a summary evaluation of each sector studied.
Students shall submit a structured detailed report based on the above parameters.
The evaluation shall be made by a panel of two examiners. One of the examiners shall be the Internal
Faculty. The other examiner may be an external faculty or a person from the relevant industry. The
evaluation shall be based on the following criteria:
g) Report – 20 Marks
h) Presentation – 15 Marks
i) Question & Answer – 15 Marks
University of Pune - MBA Revised Syllabus 2013
377
Learning Resources:
1 Text Books 1. Logistics and Supply Chain Management- Cases and Concepts – G
Raghuram, N Rangaraj, Macmillan India, 1st Edition
2. International Supply Chain Management by David and Stewart,
Cengage Learning, 2007.
3. Global Operations and Logistics: Text and Cases by Dornier, Ernst,
Fender and Kouvelis, Wiley India, 2006
4. Supply Chain Management – A Managerial Approach by Amit Sinha &
Herbert Kotzab, TMGH, 1st Edition.
2 Reference Books 1. Global Logistics – New Directions in Supply Chain Management,
Edited by Donald Waters, Kogan Page, Fifth Edition
3 Supplementary
Reading Material
1. Supply Chain Management in the 21st Century Editor by B S Sahay,
Macmillan, 2006 reprint.
4 Websites 1. http://www.gsb.stanford.edu/scforum/
5 Journals 1. Relaxing channel separation: Integrating a Virtual Store into the Supply
Chain via Transshipments by Seifert, Ralf W.; Thonemann, Ulrich W.;
Sieke, Marcel A., IIE Transactions, Nov2006, Vol. 38 Issue 11
2. Interorganizational Governance Value Creation: Coordinating for
Information Visibility and Flexibility in Supply Chains byWang, Eric T.
G.; Wei, Hsiao-Lan., Decision Sciences, Nov2007, Vol. 38 Issue 4
3. Virtual Integration and Information Risks: A Supply Chain Perspective
by Faisal, Mohd Nishat; Banwet, D. K.; Shankar, Ravi., IIMB
Management Review
4. An Analysis on Application of Lean Supply Chain Concept for
Construction Projects by Baladhandayutham, T.; Venkatesh, Shanthi.,
Synergy, Jan2012, Vol. 10 Issue 1
5. Simulating the Impact of Supply Chain Management Practice on the
Performance of Medium-sized Building Projects by Hatmoko, Jati
Utomo Dwi; Scott, Stephen., Construction Management & Economics,
Jan2010, Vol. 28 Issue 1
6. Aligning Business Process Reengineering in Implementing Global
Supply Chain Systems by the SCOR model by Wang, William Y. C.;
Chan, H. K.; Pauleen, David J., International Journal of Production
Research, Oct2010, Vol. 48 Issue 19
7. Managing information flow in construction Supply Chains by Titus,
Silas; Bröchner, Jan., Construction Innovation, Sage Publications, Ltd. ,
Jun2005, Vol. 5 Issue 2